Easergy P5

Protection Relay
User Manual

07/2021

Version: P5/EN M/33C

www.se.com
Legal Information
The Schneider Electric brand and any trademarks of Schneider Electric SE and its
subsidiaries referred to in this guide are the property of Schneider Electric SE or its
subsidiaries. All other brands may be trademarks of their respective owners.
This guide and its content are protected under applicable copyright laws and
furnished for informational use only. No part of this guide may be reproduced or
transmitted in any form or by any means (electronic, mechanical, photocopying,
recording, or otherwise), for any purpose, without the prior written permission of
Schneider Electric.
Schneider Electric does not grant any right or license for commercial use of the guide
or its content, except for a non-exclusive and personal license to consult it on an "as
is" basis. Schneider Electric products and equipment should be installed, operated,
serviced, and maintained only by qualified personnel.
As standards, specifications, and designs change from time to time, information
contained in this guide may be subject to change without notice.
To the extent permitted by applicable law, no responsibility or liability is assumed by
Schneider Electric and its subsidiaries for any errors or omissions in the informational
content of this material or consequences arising out of or resulting from the use of the
information contained herein.
 Protection Relay

Table of Contents
General information ..................................................................................13
Legal notice .............................................................................................13
Purpose ...................................................................................................13
Safety information and password protection................................................14
Abbreviations ...........................................................................................15
Range description .....................................................................................17
Introduction ................................................................................................18
Selection guide by application ...................................................................18
Function table ..........................................................................................20
Technical characteristics ...........................................................................23
Environmental characteristics ....................................................................28
Installation ..................................................................................................32
Safety instructions ....................................................................................32
Transport, handling and storage ................................................................34
Transport ...........................................................................................34
Handling ............................................................................................34
Storage ..............................................................................................34
Unpacking................................................................................................35
Equipment receipt...............................................................................35
Package contents ...............................................................................35
Equipment identification ............................................................................36
Dimensions ..............................................................................................39
Operating environment .............................................................................41
Mounting..................................................................................................42
General mounting operations...............................................................42
Flush mounting with accessory ............................................................44
Flush mounting without accessory........................................................46
Rack mounting ...................................................................................48
Rear panel connectors and application diagrams ........................................50
Easergy P5 rear panel .......................................................................50
Typical application diagrams ................................................................57
Wiring on the real panel ............................................................................64
Slot A: analogue module......................................................................64
Digital input connections......................................................................74
Slot B: power supply + digital 4-input/4-output .......................................75
Slot C, D, E: additional digital input/output modules (6I4O/12I4O/
5I5O) .................................................................................................77
Slots D and E: Arc-flash module (for Easergy P5x30 only)......................78
Installing the digital I/O connectors .......................................................78
Wiring accessories for Slot B, C, D, E ...................................................79
Connecting earth/ground .....................................................................79
Optional rear communication ports and modules.........................................82
Location of the communication ports ....................................................82
Installing the modules..........................................................................83
Slot L: Ethernet communication module with RSTP redundancy
(reference REL51042).........................................................................84
Slot M: Ethernet communication module with RSTP redundancy ............85
Slot N: serial line communication modules ............................................87
P5/EN M/33C 3
Protection Relay

Slot P: extension module (reference REL51034) ...................................90

Slot M & N: Ethernet communication module with HSR and PRP
redundancy (reference REL51033) ......................................................91
Other accessories.....................................................................................93
CSH120 (reference 59635), CSH200 (reference 59636), CSH300
(reference 59637) and GO110 (reference 50134) ..................................93
LPVT hub connector (reference EMS59573) .........................................98
Voltage adapter (reference EMS59572) .............................................. 100
RJ45 LPCT/LPVT plug ...................................................................... 103
Arc-flash sensor (reference REL52801 to REL52810).......................... 104
MET148-2 - temperature sensor module (reference 59641) ................. 109
IRIG-B module (reference REL51045) ................................................ 112
Commissioning ........................................................................................ 114
Principles............................................................................................... 114
Testing tools and equipment .................................................................... 115
Check the digital outputs ......................................................................... 116
Easergy P5 protection relay check ........................................................... 116
Check with the Easergy P5 protection relay de-energised .................... 116
Testing with the Easergy P5 protection relay energised........................ 118
Communication ports ........................................................................ 120
Virtual injections ............................................................................... 120
Secondary injection test .......................................................................... 123
Apply application-specific settings ...................................................... 123
Current inputs................................................................................... 124
Typical voltage measurement modes in Easergy P5 ............................ 124
Voltage inputs................................................................................... 124
LPCT and LPVT inputs ...................................................................... 125
Check the protection functions ........................................................... 126
Primary injection test............................................................................... 128
Voltage connections.......................................................................... 128
Current connections .......................................................................... 129
LPCT connections............................................................................. 129
Demonstrate circuit breaker operation ................................................ 130
Arc-flash detection system setup and testing....................................... 131
Setting up the arc-flash system .......................................................... 131
Commissioning and testing................................................................ 131
Final check............................................................................................. 138
Use ............................................................................................................ 139
Introduction ............................................................................................ 139
Local panel ............................................................................................ 140
Presentation ..................................................................................... 140
Push buttons .................................................................................... 142
LED indicators .................................................................................. 142
Customising the local panel ............................................................... 143
Introduction to the LCD display ................................................................ 145
Easergy P5 protection relay service cycle ........................................... 145
Menu structure ................................................................................. 146
Login and logout..................................................................................... 150
Login ............................................................................................... 150
Logout ............................................................................................. 151
Adjusting the LCD contrast (for Easergy P5x20)........................................ 152
4 P5/EN M/33C
 Protection Relay

Changing language ................................................................................ 153

Changing the parameters ........................................................................ 154
Manage the alarm messages................................................................... 155
Matrix operations.................................................................................... 156
Controlling objects .................................................................................. 157
Specific language file change .................................................................. 158
Transferring data to USB memory stick .................................................... 158
eSetup Easergy Pro................................................................................ 160
Overview.......................................................................................... 160
Operation modes .............................................................................. 161
Setting up the connection .................................................................. 162
Web HMI................................................................................................ 164
Overview.......................................................................................... 164
Device reboot reminder ..................................................................... 164
Firefox ............................................................................................. 165
Internet Explorer in Windows 7........................................................... 166
Edge in Windows 10 ......................................................................... 169
The EcoStruxure Power Device application .............................................. 173
Connecting to protection relays via Ethernet ....................................... 173
Protection functions ................................................................................ 174
General features of protection stages....................................................... 174
Enable/disable protection functions .................................................... 174
Setting groups .................................................................................. 175
Protection stage status ...................................................................... 176
Mode of use for testing purposes........................................................ 176
Start and trip signals ......................................................................... 177
Start and trip counters ....................................................................... 177
Blocking ........................................................................................... 177
Overshoot time ................................................................................. 178
Disengaging time and reset time ........................................................ 178
Hysteresis and reset ratio .................................................................. 179
Time grading for logic selectivity......................................................... 180
Recorded values on the last eight faults.............................................. 180
Dependent time and definite time operation .............................................. 181
Description ....................................................................................... 181
Standard dependent operation delay .................................................. 183
Standard dependent reset delay ........................................................ 193
Programmable dependent time curves ............................................... 194
Cold load pick-up.................................................................................... 195
Description ....................................................................................... 195
Example........................................................................................... 195
Characteristics.................................................................................. 196
Selective Overcurrent Logic (SOL)........................................................... 197
Description ....................................................................................... 197
Operation ......................................................................................... 197
Characteristics.................................................................................. 199
Incomer fault locator ............................................................................... 200
Description ....................................................................................... 200
Example........................................................................................... 201
Characteristics.................................................................................. 203
Feeder fault locator (ANSI 21FL) ............................................................. 204

P5/EN M/33C 5
Protection Relay

Description ....................................................................................... 204

Example........................................................................................... 205
Characteristics.................................................................................. 207
Neutral admittance (ANSI 21YN) ............................................................. 208
Description ....................................................................................... 208
Operation ......................................................................................... 209
Block diagram................................................................................... 211
Characteristics.................................................................................. 212
Synchro-check (ANSI 25) ........................................................................ 214
Description ....................................................................................... 214
Block diagram................................................................................... 216
Characteristics.................................................................................. 216
Undervoltage (ANSI 27) .......................................................................... 218
Description ....................................................................................... 218
Block diagram................................................................................... 219
Characteristics.................................................................................. 220
Positive sequence undervoltage (ANSI 27P)............................................. 221
Description ....................................................................................... 221
Block diagram................................................................................... 222
Characteristic ................................................................................... 223
Directional power (ANSI 32) .................................................................... 224
Description ....................................................................................... 224
Block diagram................................................................................... 224
Characteristics.................................................................................. 225
Wattmetric earth/ground fault (32N) ......................................................... 226
Description ....................................................................................... 226
Four memory modes ......................................................................... 227
Operation ......................................................................................... 228
Tripping direction .............................................................................. 228
Block diagram................................................................................... 229
Characteristics.................................................................................. 229
Phase undercurrent (ANSI 37)................................................................. 231
Description ....................................................................................... 231
Low-current self blocking ................................................................... 231
Block diagram................................................................................... 231
Characteristics.................................................................................. 232
Temperature monitoring (ANSI 38)........................................................... 233
Description ....................................................................................... 233
Block diagram................................................................................... 233
Characteristics.................................................................................. 234
Negative sequence overcurrent (ANSI 46)................................................ 235
Description ....................................................................................... 235
Block diagram................................................................................... 235
Characteristics.................................................................................. 236
Unbalance overcurrent, broken conductor (ANSI 46BC) ............................ 237
Description ....................................................................................... 237
Block diagram................................................................................... 237
Characteristics.................................................................................. 238
Negative sequence overvoltage (ANSI 47) ............................................... 239
Description ....................................................................................... 239
Block diagram................................................................................... 239

6 P5/EN M/33C
 Protection Relay

Characteristics.................................................................................. 240
Thermal overload protection for feeder (ANSI 49F).................................... 241
Description ....................................................................................... 241
Additional features ............................................................................ 243
Time to trip calculation....................................................................... 243
Block diagram................................................................................... 244
Characteristics.................................................................................. 245
Motor status ........................................................................................... 246
Description ....................................................................................... 246
General settings ............................................................................... 247
Motor speed detection ............................................................................ 248
Description ....................................................................................... 248
Block diagram................................................................................... 249
Characteristics.................................................................................. 249
Motor start time supervision (ANSI 48) ..................................................... 250
Description ....................................................................................... 250
Block diagram................................................................................... 251
Characteristics.................................................................................. 251
Thermal overload protection for machine (ANSI 49M)................................ 252
Description ....................................................................................... 252
Additional features ............................................................................ 255
Time to trip calculation....................................................................... 256
Time left for motor start...................................................................... 256
Block diagram................................................................................... 257
Characteristics.................................................................................. 258
Locked rotor (ANSI 51LR) ....................................................................... 260
Description ....................................................................................... 260
Block diagram................................................................................... 260
Characteristics.................................................................................. 261
Motor restart inhibition (ANSI 66) ............................................................. 262
Description ....................................................................................... 262
Block diagram................................................................................... 264
Characteristics.................................................................................. 265
Motor overspeed (ANSI 12) ..................................................................... 266
Description ....................................................................................... 266
Block diagram................................................................................... 266
Characteristics.................................................................................. 267
Motor underspeed (ANSI 14) ................................................................... 268
Description ....................................................................................... 268
Block diagram................................................................................... 268
Characteristics.................................................................................. 269
Motor Anti-backspin (ABS) protection....................................................... 270
Description ....................................................................................... 270
Block diagram................................................................................... 270
Characteristics.................................................................................. 271
Inrush blocking ....................................................................................... 272
Description ....................................................................................... 272
Block diagram................................................................................... 272
Characteristics.................................................................................. 273
Switch On To Fault (ANSI 50HS).............................................................. 274
Description ....................................................................................... 274

P5/EN M/33C 7
Protection Relay

Operation ......................................................................................... 274

Block diagram................................................................................... 275
Characteristics.................................................................................. 276
Phase overcurrent (ANSI 50/51) .............................................................. 277
Description ....................................................................................... 277
Block diagram................................................................................... 277
Characteristics.................................................................................. 278
Arc-flash (ANSI 50ARC).......................................................................... 280
Description ....................................................................................... 280
Block diagram................................................................................... 282
Operation ......................................................................................... 282
Characteristics.................................................................................. 285
Circuit breaker failure (ANSI 50BF) .......................................................... 287
Description ....................................................................................... 287
Block diagram................................................................................... 289
Characteristics.................................................................................. 290
Capacitor bank unbalance (ANSI 51C) ..................................................... 291
Description ....................................................................................... 291
Compensation method ...................................................................... 292
Characteristics.................................................................................. 295
Earth/ground fault overcurrent (ANSI 50N/51N, 50G/51G) ......................... 296
Description ....................................................................................... 296
Operations ....................................................................................... 296
Block diagram................................................................................... 297
Characteristics.................................................................................. 299
Faulty phase detection during earth/ground fault ................................. 301
Overvoltage (ANSI 59) ............................................................................ 304
Description ....................................................................................... 304
Block diagram................................................................................... 304
Characteristics.................................................................................. 305
Neutral voltage displacement (ANSI 59N)................................................. 306
Description ....................................................................................... 306
Block diagram................................................................................... 307
Characteristics.................................................................................. 307
Capacitor overvoltage (ANSI 59C) ........................................................... 308
Description ....................................................................................... 308
Reactive power of the capacitor bank ................................................. 308
Three separate capacitors connected in wye (III Y).............................. 309
Three phase capacitor connected internally in wye (Y)......................... 309
Overvoltage and reactive power calculation example........................... 310
Block diagram................................................................................... 310
Characteristics.................................................................................. 311
Directional phase overcurrent (ANSI 67)................................................... 312
Description ....................................................................................... 312
Block diagram................................................................................... 313
Operation ......................................................................................... 314
Examples ......................................................................................... 314
Characteristics.................................................................................. 315
Directional earth/ground fault overcurrent (ANSI 67N) ............................... 318
Description ....................................................................................... 318
Polarisation ...................................................................................... 318

8 P5/EN M/33C
 Protection Relay

Block diagram................................................................................... 319

Modes for different network types....................................................... 320
Input signal selection......................................................................... 321
Intermittent earth/ground fault detection.............................................. 321
Three independent stages ................................................................. 322
Characteristics.................................................................................. 322
Transient intermittent earth/ground fault (ANSI 67NI)................................. 324
Description ....................................................................................... 324
Block diagram................................................................................... 324
Operation ......................................................................................... 325
Characteristics.................................................................................. 327
5th harmonic (H5) detection (ANSI 68H5)................................................. 328
Description ....................................................................................... 328
Block diagram................................................................................... 328
Characteristics.................................................................................. 329
Auto-recloser function (ANSI 79).............................................................. 330
Description ....................................................................................... 330
Operation ......................................................................................... 331
Characteristics.................................................................................. 334
Overfrequency and underfrequency (ANSI 81).......................................... 335
Description ....................................................................................... 335
Block diagram................................................................................... 336
Characteristics.................................................................................. 336
Underfrequency (ANSI 81U).................................................................... 337
Description ....................................................................................... 337
Block diagram................................................................................... 337
Characteristics.................................................................................. 338
Rate of change of frequency (ANSI 81R) .................................................. 339
Description ....................................................................................... 339
Block diagram................................................................................... 339
Characteristics.................................................................................. 340
Lockout relay (ANSI 86) .......................................................................... 341
Description ....................................................................................... 341
Latch function ................................................................................... 341
Programmable stages (ANSI 99) ............................................................. 342
Description ....................................................................................... 342
Available signals ............................................................................... 343
Eight independent stages .................................................................. 343
Measurement functions.......................................................................... 344
Primary, secondary and per unit scaling ................................................... 344
Scaling settings ................................................................................ 344
Current values .................................................................................. 346
Voltage values .................................................................................. 348
Reading of measurements ...................................................................... 352
Phase currents ....................................................................................... 352
Residual current ..................................................................................... 353
Frequency.............................................................................................. 353
Voltages ................................................................................................ 354
Residual voltage..................................................................................... 356
Power and power factor .......................................................................... 357
Active, reactive, apparent power ........................................................ 357

P5/EN M/33C 9
Protection Relay

Power calculation.............................................................................. 357

Cosφ and power factor ...................................................................... 358
Power and current direction ............................................................... 358
Characteristics.................................................................................. 360
Active and reactive energy ...................................................................... 361
Harmonics and total harmonic distortion (THD) ......................................... 362
Demand values ...................................................................................... 363
Minimum and maximum values................................................................ 364
Voltage sags and swells .......................................................................... 365
Temperature........................................................................................... 367
Control functions ..................................................................................... 368
Digital outputs ........................................................................................ 368
Digital inputs .......................................................................................... 371
Virtual inputs and virtual outputs .............................................................. 375
Matrix .................................................................................................... 376
General information .......................................................................... 376
Output matrix.................................................................................... 377
Blocking matrix ................................................................................. 378
LED matrix ....................................................................................... 379
Object block matrix ........................................................................... 380
Auto-recloser matrix .......................................................................... 380
Arc-flash matrix................................................................................. 380
Releasing latches ................................................................................... 381
Mimic display ......................................................................................... 382
Local panel configuration ........................................................................ 383
Controllable objects ................................................................................ 384
Local or remote control...................................................................... 385
Object control with digital inputs ......................................................... 386
Object control with function keys ........................................................ 386
Object control with I and O buttons ..................................................... 388
Timers ................................................................................................... 389
Logic functions ....................................................................................... 391
Switchgear control and monitoring ........................................................... 397
Switchgear control and fail-safe position ............................................. 397
Selecting the trip command and examples of use ................................ 398
Programmable switchgear interlocking ..................................................... 400
Local control on single-line diagram ......................................................... 401
Logging and recording functions .......................................................... 402
Time tagging .......................................................................................... 402
Event buffer ........................................................................................... 402
Disturbance recording............................................................................. 405
Fault data logging ................................................................................... 408
Running hour counter ............................................................................. 409
Voltage interruptions ............................................................................... 410
Maximum and minimum values of the last 31 days and 12 months ............. 412
System clock and synchronisation ........................................................... 414
Monitoring functions ............................................................................... 419
Trip circuit supervision (ANSI 74) ............................................................. 419
Description ....................................................................................... 419
Trip circuit supervision scheme .......................................................... 419

10 P5/EN M/33C
 Protection Relay

Circuit breaker monitoring ....................................................................... 422

Description ....................................................................................... 422
Parameters of the CB monitoring function ........................................... 426
Current transformer supervision (ANSI 60) ............................................... 428
Description ....................................................................................... 428
Block diagram................................................................................... 429
Characteristics.................................................................................. 429
Voltage transformer supervision (ANSI 60) ............................................... 431
Description ....................................................................................... 431
Block diagram................................................................................... 432
Characteristics.................................................................................. 433
Maintenance ............................................................................................ 434
Safety instructions .................................................................................. 434
Self-monitoring ....................................................................................... 435
Watchdog relay................................................................................. 435
Maintenance/Test LED ...................................................................... 435
Purpose of the self-tests .................................................................... 435
List of self-tests................................................................................. 436
Backup memory ..................................................................................... 437
Preventive maintenance.......................................................................... 441
Introduction ...................................................................................... 441
Intervention frequency....................................................................... 442
Preventive maintenance tasks ........................................................... 443
Arc-flash detection system maintenance............................................. 445
Troubleshooting ..................................................................................... 446
Troubleshooting assistance ............................................................... 446
Troubleshooting the Easergy P5 ........................................................ 446
Troubleshooting the communication modules...................................... 449
Troubleshooting arc-flash system....................................................... 449
Troubleshooting the MET148-2 module .............................................. 450
Firmware upgrade .................................................................................. 451
Replacing the Easergy P5 protection relay ............................................... 453
Change a communication module ............................................................ 456
Return for expert assessment.................................................................. 458
End of life............................................................................................... 458
Cybersecurity........................................................................................... 459
Cybersecurity overview ........................................................................... 459
Security policy ........................................................................................ 460
Product defense-in-depth ........................................................................ 462
Device security capabilities................................................................ 462
Protected environment assumptions................................................... 463
Potential risks and compensating controls .......................................... 464
Cybersecurity configuration ..................................................................... 465
Advanced cybersecurity level............................................................. 465
Basic cybersecurity level ................................................................... 468
User accounts and rights......................................................................... 470
List of roles....................................................................................... 470
List of rights...................................................................................... 470
Login ............................................................................................... 473
Access lockout ................................................................................. 473
Logout ............................................................................................. 474
P5/EN M/33C 11
Protection Relay

Number of accounts .......................................................................... 474

Passwords ............................................................................................. 475
Changing password .......................................................................... 475
Password complexity ........................................................................ 476
Cybersecurity factory reset ................................................................ 476
Factory default configuration.............................................................. 479
Port hardening........................................................................................ 480
Security event logging............................................................................. 481
Upgrades management........................................................................... 482
Security functionality verification .............................................................. 483
Revision history ....................................................................................... 484
Order information .................................................................................... 486
Protection relay ...................................................................................... 486
Slot occupation rules............................................................................... 487
Accessories ........................................................................................... 488

12 P5/EN M/33C
General information Protection Relay

General information
Legal notice
Copyright
2021 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.
Disclaimer
No responsibility is assumed by Schneider Electric for any consequences arising
out of the use of this document. This document is not intended as an instruction
manual for untrained persons. This document gives instructions on device
installation, commissioning and operation. However, the manual cannot cover all
conceivable circumstances or include detailed information on all topics. In the
event of questions or specific issues, do not take any action without proper
authorisation. Contact Schneider Electric and request the necessary information.
Contact information
35 rue Joseph Monier
92500 Rueil-Malmaison
FRANCE
Phone: +33 (0) 1 41 29 70 00
Fax: +33 (0) 1 41 29 71 00
www.se.com

Purpose
This user manual is intended for people who are experts on electrical power
engineering, panel builder, commissioner, and experienced users, communication
specialists or general users of the Easergy P5 protection relays.
The complete manual is arranged as follows:
• Preliminary sections, with the details of the manual (how to use it, glossary)
and technical data.
• Functions of the protection relay.
Explanations, diagrams and settings of the protection, control, monitoring and
maintenance, measurement, recording and programmable logic functions are
detailed in these sections.
• Installation and commissioning.
• Local control panel use, troubleshooting and maintenance instructions.
The following documents complete this manual:
• Quick Start Guide, delivered in the relay package, summarises instructions
for installation.
• Communication Manual, for the understanding and the setup of the
communication protocols with Easergy P5 protection relays.
We welcome your comments about this document. You can reach us by
contacting Customer Care Centre Contact page:
http://www.se.com/CCC

P5/EN M/33C 13
Protection Relay General information

Safety information and password protection

Important information
Read these instructions carefully and look at the equipment to become familiar
with the device before trying to install, operate, service or maintain it. The
following special messages may appear throughout this manual or on the
equipment to warn of potential hazards or to call attention to information that
clarifies or simplifies a procedure.

The addition of this symbol to a "Danger" or "Warning" safety label indicates that an
electrical hazard exists which will result in death or serious injury if the instructions
are not followed.

This is the safety alert symbol. It is used to alert you to potential personal injury
hazards. Obey all safety messages that follow this symbol to avoid possible injury or
death.

DANGER
DANGER indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will
result in death or serious injury.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

WARNING
WARNING indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, can
result in death or serious injury.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or
equipment damage.

CAUTION
CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, can
result in minor or moderate injury, or equipment damage.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment
damage.

NOTICE
NOTICE is used to address practices not related to physical injury.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

14 P5/EN M/33C
General information Protection Relay

Abbreviations
Table 1 - Abbreviations used in the manual

Acronyms Indication

Ø Diameter

AC, DC Alternating Current, Direct Current

ACSI Abstract Communication Service Interface

AI, AO Analogue Input, Analogue Output: used in connection with the number of input and
output contacts within the relay and - when necessary - with the slot letter.

CAE Ecostruxure Cybersecurity Admin Expert

CB Circuit Breaker
CID Configured IED Description

CT Current Transformer
CTS Current Transformer Supervision

DCD Device Capabilities Description

DI, DO Digital Input, Digital Output: used in connection with the number of inputs and output
contacts within the relay and - when necessary - with the slot letter.

DIN rail Standard metal rail used to mount equipment inside ar rack (DIN for Deutsches
Institut für Normung)

DMS Distribution Management System

EMC Electromagnetic Compatibility

ETH Ethernet Module

FC Function Code
GOOSE Generic Object Oriented Substation Events: in IEC 61850, type of generic substation
event, for a peer-to-peer communication over Ethernet.

HMI Human Machine Interface

HSR High availability Seamless Redundancy

ICD IED Capability Description

IEC International Electrotechnical Commission prepares and publishes international

standards for electrical and electronics technology.

IED Intelligent Electronic Device

I/O Input/Output (e.g. 6I/4O: 6 inputs, 4 outputs): used in connection with the number of
inputs and output contacts within the relay.

IRIG-B Inter-Range Instrumentation Group time code B: standard for time transfer

LC "Lucent Connector": type of optical connector

LED Light Emitting Diode

LPCT Low Power Current Transformer

LPVT Low Power Voltage Transformer

LV, MV Low Voltage, Medium Voltage

max. Maximum
NERC North American Electric Reliability Corporation

NI Network Input

PCT Protective Conductor Terminal (earth/ground)

PLC Programmable Logic Controller

PRP Parallel Redundancy Protocol

QR code Quick Response code: two-dimensional barcode.

RBAC Role Based Access Control: provides a restricting access to authorised users only
(Cybersecurity).

P5/EN M/33C 15
Protection Relay General information

Table 1 - Abbreviations used in the manual (Continued)

Acronyms Indication

Ref Reference
RH Relative Humidity

RJ45 Standardised type of connector (eight-wire connector) used for Ethernet networking
(Registered Jack)

RMS Root Mean Square

RS485 (or Standard defining the electrical characteristics of a serial communication interface.
EIA-485)

RSTP Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol: communication protocol

RTC Real Time Clock

RTD Resistance Temperature Detector

RTU Remote Terminal Unit

SCADA Supervisory Control And Data Acquisition

SFTP/FTP Secured File Transfer Protocol/File Transfer Protocol

SOL Selective Overcurrent Logic

SRL Serial Module

ST (BFOC) Straight Tip (Bayonet Fibre Optic Connector): type of optical connector

THD Total Harmonic Distortion

TP Time Protocol: communication protocol

USB Universal Serial Bus

VI Virtual Input

VO Virtual Output

VT Voltage Transformer

VTS Voltage Transformer Supervision

Ω Motor rotation speed

Ωn Rated motor rotation speed

16 P5/EN M/33C
Range description Protection Relay

Range description
Easergy P5 is a family of digital protection relays for medium voltage
distribution networks dedicated to:
• Buildings and Industry:
◦ Retails
◦ Hotels
◦ Health care
◦ Education and research
◦ Transportation
◦ Industrial buildings
• Utilities: energy distribution
• Large sites:
◦ Oil and Gas
◦ Mining
◦ Mineral and Metals
◦ Water

Easergy P5 protection relays are based on proven technology concepts

developed in close cooperation with customers and available in two sizes.
• The Easergy P5x20 combines protection functions for feeder, motor,
transformer and voltage protection in a single application.
• The Easergy P5x30 has modular design that allows user-defined
conventional protection and arc-flash protection solutions both in new and
existing power distribution systems.

Easergy P5 protection relays have been designed around user-friendliness,

a feature which is proven in our customer reports day after day.
• A complete set of protection functions, related to the application
• Optional arc detection (for Easergy P5 x30) by point sensors
• Dedicated circuit breaker control with Mimic, push buttons, programmable
function keys, customisable LEDs and alarm
• Multilingual local panel display for customised messaging
• eSetup Easergy Pro software for setting parameters, configuring and network
fault simulation
• Both serial and Ethernet communication, including redundancy
• Compliant with IEC 61850 edition 1 and 2 standard
• Cybersecurity functionalities
• Back-up memory for fast and easy replacement
• Withdrawability for maintenance

P5/EN M/33C 17
Protection Relay Introduction

Introduction
Selection guide by application
Table 2 - Easergy P5 protection relay selection guide

Easergy P5x20 Easergy P5x30

Voltage - P5V20 -

Feeder P5F30
Transformer P5U20 - -

Motor P5M30
Characteristics
Phase current 1/5A CT (x3) LPCT (x3) - 1/5A CT (x3) LPCT (x3)

Analogue Residual current 1/5A CT & 1A CT or CSH - 1/5A CT & 1A CT CSH

inputs CSH or CSH
Voltage - LPVT (x4) 1 VT (x4) VT (x4) LPVT (x4) 1

Arc-flash sensor inputs - 0 to 6 point sensors

Inputs 4 to 16 4 to 40
Digital
Outputs 3 to 8 + watchdog 3 to 18 + watchdog

Temperature sensor inputs 0 to 16 (external modules) - 0 to 16 (external modules)

Front ports Mini-USB port for

configuration tool ■ ■

USB port for USB

key ■ ■

Communication
Extension port with
backup memory ■ ■ ■

Serial port ■ ■ ■
Rear ports
Ethernet port ■ ■ ■

2nd Ethernet port - - ■

IEC 61850 Ed.1

■ ■ ■
and Ed.2
IEC 60870-5-103 ■ ■ ■

IEC 60870-5-101 ■ ■ ■

DNP3 serial and

Protocols ■ ■ ■
Ethernet
Modbus slave
■ ■ ■
serial and Ethernet
Modbus master ■ ■ ■

EtherNet/IP ■ ■ ■

RSTP ■ ■ ■
Redundancy
protocols PRP ■ ■ ■

HSR ■ ■ ■

1. Resistive divider or capacitive divider LPVTs can be connected to the Easergy P5 protection relay.

18 P5/EN M/33C
Introduction Protection Relay

Table 2 - Easergy P5 protection relay selection guide (Continued)

Easergy P5x20 Easergy P5x30

Others
Control 6 controlled + 2 monitored objects Mimic

Matrix ■ ■ ■
Logic
Logic equations ■ ■ ■

Cybersecurity RBAC according to IEC 62351 standard

Withdrawability ■ ■ ■

P5/EN M/33C 19
Protection Relay Introduction

Function table
Table 3 - Easergy P5 protection relay function selection table

IEC 61850 Logical ANSI P5U20 P5U20 P5V20 P5F30 P5M30

node 2 code LPCT/
LPVT
Protection functions
Phase overcurrent P5OCPTOCx 50/51 3 3 - 3 3
Directional phase overcurrent P5DOCPTOCx 67 - 4 - 4 4

Earth/ground fault overcurrent 3 P5EFPTOCx 50N/51N 5/8 3 - 5/8 5/8

Directional earth/ground fault P5DEFPTOCx 67N - 3 - 3 3

overcurrent
Wattmetric earth/ground fault P5EFPDOPx 32N - - - 2 2

Transient intermittent earth/ground P5IOIOPTEF1 67NI - - - 1 -

fault
Capacitor bank unbalance P5EFPTOC3 51C 2 - - 2 -
P5EFPTOC4
Unbalance overcurrent P5UIBCPTOCx 46 1 1 - 1 1
P5NEGPTOCx
Broken conductor P5UIBCPTOC1 46BC 1 1 - 1 1

Cold load pick up (CLPU) 1 1 - 1 1

Selectivity overcurrent logic (SOL) 68 1 1 - 1 1

Switch On To fault (SOTF) 50HS 1 1 - 1 1

5th harmonic detection P5HAR5PTOC1 68H5 1 1 - 1 1

Circuit breaker failure P5CBFPPIOCx 50BF 1 1 1 1 1
Directional power P5REVPPDOP1 32 - 2 - 2 2
P5REVPPDOP2
Fault locator P5FLRFLO1 21FL - - - 1 -

Auto-Recloser P5ARRREC1 79 1 1 - 1 -

Arc-flash protection P5IARCPIOCx 50ARC - - - 8 8

Thermal overload protection for motor P5THMPTTR1 49M 1 1 - - 1

Thermal overload protection for feeder P5THFPTTR1 49F 1 1 - 1 -

Temperature monitoring P5RTDGAPCx 38 16 16 - 16 16

Phase undercurrent P5UCPTUCx 37 1 1 - - 1

Motor start-up supervision, locked P5STALPMSS1 48/51LR 1 1 - - 1
rotor
Motor restart inhibition P5STPMRI1 66 1 1 - - 1
Motor speed detection 4 P5MSPDPMSS1 1 1 - - 1

Motor overspeed 4 P5MOTPOVSx 12 2 2 - - 2

Motor underspeed 4 P5MOTPZSUx 14 2 2 - - 2

Motor Anti-backspin ABS P5MABSPMSS1 1 1 - - 1

Inrush P5IDPHAR1 1 1 - 1 1
Overvoltage P5OVPTOVx 59 - 3 3 3 3

Undervoltage P5UVPTUVx 27 - 3 3 3 3

Positive sequence undervoltage P5UVPSPTUVx 27P - - 2 - 2

2. The x at the end of the logical node name in this column corresponds to the number of the stages of protection functions and the number
of the objects for control and monitoring functions.
3. Number of stages depends on the number of residual current inputs.
4. This protection function is only available when 12I4O module is fitted in the Easergy P5 protection relay.

20 P5/EN M/33C
Introduction Protection Relay

Table 3 - Easergy P5 protection relay function selection table (Continued)

IEC 61850 Logical ANSI P5U20 P5U20 P5V20 P5F30 P5M30

node 5 code LPCT/
LPVT
Capacitor overvoltage 59C 1 - - 1 -

Neutral voltage displacement P5UOPTOVx 59N - 3 3 3 3

Overfrequency and underfrequency P5OFUFPTOFx 81 - 2 2 2 2

Underfrequency P5UFPTUFx 81U - 2 2 2 2

Rate of Change of Frequency P5DFDTPFRCx 81R - 2 2 2 -

(ROCOF)

Synchro-check P5SCUYMMXU1 25 - - 1 1 -

Lockout relay 86 1 1 1 1 1

Programmable stages P5PSGAPCx 99 8 8 8 8 8

Programmable curves 3 3 3 3 3

Negative sequence overvoltage 47 - 2 2 2 2

Neutral admittance 21YN - - - 2 2

Setting groups 4 4 4 4 4

Monitoring functions

CT supervision P5CTSGGIO1 60 1 1 - 1 1

VT supervision P5VTSGGIO1 60 - 1 1 1 1

Trip circuit supervision 74 1 1 1 1 1

Circuit breaker monitoring P5CBWAGGIO1 1 1 - 1 1

Relay monitoring ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Control functions
Switchgear control and monitoring P5OBJCSWIx 6 6 6 6 6

Switchgear monitoring only P5OBJCSWIx 2 2 2 2 2

Programmable switchgear interlocking ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Local control on single-line diagram ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Local control with O/I keys ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Local/remote function ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Function keys 1 1 1 7 7

Custom logic (logic equations) ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Control with EcoStruxure Power ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Device (smartphone, tablet
application)

Logs and Records

Sequence of event record ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Disturbance record P5DRRDRE1 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Tripping context record ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Relay maintenance data log ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Security data log ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

5. The x at the end of the logical node name in this column corresponds to the number of the stages of protection functions and the number
of the objects for control and monitoring functions.

P5/EN M/33C 21
Protection Relay Introduction

Table 3 - Easergy P5 protection relay function selection table (Continued)

IEC 61850 Logical ANSI P5U20 P5U20 P5V20 P5F30 P5M30

node 6 code LPCT/
LPVT
Measurement
RMS current values P5RMSAMMXU1 ■ ■ - ■ ■

RMS voltage values P5RMSVMMXU1 - ■ ■ ■ ■

RMS active, reactive and apparent P5RMSPMMXU1 - ■ - ■ ■

power

Frequency P5VECAMMXUx ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Fundamental frequency current values ■ ■ - ■ ■

Fundamental frequency voltage values P5VECVMMXU1 - ■ ■ ■ ■

Fundamental frequency active, - ■ - ■ ■

reactive and apparent power values

Power factor P5VECPMMXU1 - ■ - ■ ■

Active and reactive of energy values - ■ - ■ ■

Demand values: phase currents ■ ■ - ■ ■

Demand values: active, reactive, - ■ - ■ ■

apparent power and power factor

Maximum demand values: phase ■ ■ - ■ ■

currents
Minimum and maximum demand ■ ■ - ■ ■
values: RMS phase currents

Minimum and maximum demand P5SRDMMXUx - ■ - ■ ■

values: active, reactive, apparent
power and power factor

Minimum and maximum demand - ■ - ■ ■

values over the last 31 days and 12
months: active, reactive and apparent
power

Minimum and maximum values: ■ ■ - ■ ■

currents
Minimum and maximum values: - ■ ■ ■ ■
voltages

Minimum and maximum values: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

frequency

Minimum and maximum values: active, - ■ - ■ ■

reactive, apparent power and power
factor
Harmonic values of phase current and P5HIMHAI1 ■ ■ - ■ ■
THD P5THDIMHAI1
Harmonic values of voltage and THD P5HUMHAI1 - ■ ■ ■ ■
P5THDUMHAI1
Voltage sags and swells - ■ ■ ■ ■

6. The x at the end of the logical node name in this column corresponds to the number of the stages of protection functions and the number
of the objects for control and monitoring functions.

22 P5/EN M/33C
Introduction Protection Relay

Technical characteristics
Table 4 - Easergy P5 protection relay technical characteristics

Characteristic Value
Easergy P5x20 Easergy P5x30

Power system frequency

Rated frequency 50 Hz or 60 Hz

Power supply

Operating range DC: 24 to 250 V DC, ±20% DC: 48 to 250 V DC, ±20%
AC: 100 to 230 V AC, ±20% AC: 100 to 230 V AC, ±20%
Optional:
DC: 24 to 48 V DC, ±20%

AC frequency operating range 50 Hz, ±10%; 60 Hz, ±10%

Maximum continuous withstand 300 V DC max, 276 V AC max

Inrush current for start-up I< 20 A, t < 1.5 ms

I< 10 A, 1.5 ms < t < 150 ms
I< 1.2 A, t > 500 ms

Burden DC Typical: 4 W; Maximum: 6 W Typical: 8 W; Maximum: 11 W

Burden AC Typical: 10 VA, maximum: 15 VA at 230 V AC Typical: 20 VA, maximum: 22 VA at 230 V AC

Typical: 8 VA, maximum: 10 VA at 100 V AC Typical: 13 VA, maximum: 15 VA at 100 V AC

RTC retention time

RTC retention time 1 month typical 7

Phase CT inputs

CT rated primary current 10 A to 20 kA

CT secondary phase current 1 A or 5 A

Dynamic 60 x CT rated current

Thermal withstand Continuous: 20 A; 1 s: 500 A

Input impedance < 0.02 Ω (not connected)

Burden < 0.02 VA at 1 A; < 0.5 VA at 5 A

LPCT inputs

Nominal current 2.5 A to 20 kA

LPCT rated primary current 10 A to 5 kA

LPCT rated secondary current 22.5 mV

Current factor 0.25; 0.50; 1.00; 1.25; 1.33; 2.00; 2.50; 3.20; 4.00; 5.00; 6.30; 6.66; 10; 16; 20; 25; 31.5

Dynamic 45 x Nominal current

Standard earth/ground fault CT inputs

CT rated primary current 1 A to 20 kA

CT rated earth/ground fault current 1 A, 2 A or 5 A

Dynamic 30 x CT rated current

Thermal withstand Continuous: 20 A; 1 s: 500 A

Input impedance < 0.02 Ω (not connected)

Burden < 0.02 VA at 1 A; < 0.08 VA at 2 A; < 0.5 VA at 5 A

CSH core balance inputs

CSH rated primary current 2 A or 20 A

CT ratio 1/470

7. This value can be impacted by high temperature exposition during a long time.

P5/EN M/33C 23
Protection Relay Introduction

Table 4 - Easergy P5 protection relay technical characteristics (Continued)

Characteristic Value
Easergy P5x20 Easergy P5x30

Dynamic 42.5 x rated primary current

Thermal input withstand Continuous: 300 A (primary); 1 s: 18 kA (primary)

Input impedance < 0.02 Ω (not connected)

< 4 Ω between CSH120, CSH200, CSH300 or GO 110 and the Easergy P5 protection relay

Burden < 10 mVA at 0.1 A; < 50 mVA at 5 A

Very sensitive earth/ground fault CT

CT rated primary current 1 A to 20 kA

CT rated secondary current 1A

Dynamic 20 x CT rated current

Thermal withstand Continuous: 4 A

1 s: 100 A
Input impedance < 0.03 Ω

Burden < 30 mVA at 1 A

VT inputs

VT rated primary voltage 75 V to 500 kV

VT rated secondary rated range 75 V to 200 V

Voltage withstand Continuous: 276 V AC

Input impedance > 100 kΩ

Rated frequency 50 Hz and 60 Hz

Burden < 0.05 VA at 75 V;

< 0.5 VA at 200 V

LPVT inputs

Nominal voltage 18.75 V to 500 kV

LPVT rated primary voltage 75 V to 500 kV

LPVT rated secondary voltage 3.25 V / √3

Voltage factor 0.25 to 1.5

Digital inputs

Operating nominal voltage 24 V DC to 250 V DC

100 V AC to 230 V AC
Voltage threshold 40% to 80% of nominal voltage

Voltage withstand 300 V DC / 275 V AC

Common mode insulation Basic insulation 2500 V DC 1 mn

Reset threshold 20% to 60% of nominal voltage

Voltage threshold resolution 1%

Debounce filter 8 Settable: 0 ms to 100 ms (Default value: 10 ms)

Threshold accuracy ± 10% of nominal voltage or ± 2 V

Max. current < 2 mA

Input current Nominal voltage: 24 V to 110 V
Inrush: 9.0 mA last 10 ms
Continuous: 2.1 mA
Nominal voltage: 110.1 V to 220 V
Inrush: 4.5 mA last 10 ms
Continuous: 1.3 mA

8. A setting below 10 ms can be used for testing only. It is not recommended during operation.

24 P5/EN M/33C
Introduction Protection Relay

Table 4 - Easergy P5 protection relay technical characteristics (Continued)

Characteristic Value
Easergy P5x20 Easergy P5x30

Maximum activation time DC < 1 ms

AC < 20 ms
Reset time < 0.5 ms
Debounce time Adjustable (by software) from 1 ms up to 20 ms, with 1 ms steps

Burden < 0.5 W in DC

< 0.5 VA in AC
Control relay outputs
Easergy P5x20 power supply DO1 - DO2 - DO3 Slot B
Easergy P5x30 power supply DO2 - DO3 Slot B
Easergy P5x20 5I5O module DO1 - DO2 - DO3 Slot C
Easergy P5x30 5I5O module DO1 - DO2 - DO3 Slot C, D, E
Easergy P5x30 arc-flash module DO1 - DO2 Slot D, E

According to IEC 60255-1 and IEC 61810-1

Contact rated voltage 250 V DC or 230 V AC, 50/60 Hz

Continuous current 8A
Short duration carry current 30 A for 3 s

Making capacity 10000 operations

1000 W with L/R = 40 ms, 250 V DC
2000 VA 230 V AC
Duty cycle 1 s ON, 9 s OFF

Breaking capacity 10000 operations

50 W with L/R = 40 ms, 250 V DC
2000 VA 230 V AC
Duty cycle 1 s ON, 9 s OFF

Dielectric withstand across normally 1 kV rms AC for 1 minute

open contacts

According to IEEE C37.90 standard

Make and carry 2000 operations make and carry 30 A DC

Duty cycle 200 ms ON, 15 s OFF (current is interrupted by independent means at the end of each
ON cycle)

Dielectric withstand across normally 1.5 kV rms AC for 1 minute

open contacts

Other characteristics
Making capacity 2000 operations
5 A DC with L/R = 50 ms
Duty cycle 1 s ON, 9 s OFF

Breaking capacity 10000 operations

0.25 A DC with L/R = 50 ms
Duty cycle 1 s ON, 9 s OFF

Short duration making capacity 10 A for 1 s;

15 A for 0.3 s;
30 A for 0.2 s;
40 A for 0.03 s
Minimum making current 10 mA with 50 mW minimum

Closing/opening time 7 ms (typical value), 3.5 ms + 3.5 ms for contact bounce, resistive load

Contact material Ag alloy

Number of operations unloaded 100000

P5/EN M/33C 25
Protection Relay Introduction

Table 4 - Easergy P5 protection relay technical characteristics (Continued)

Characteristic Value
Easergy P5x20 Easergy P5x30

High speed, high break control relay output

Easergy P5x30 power supply DO1 Slot B
Easergy P5x20 5I5O module DO4 - DO5 Slot C
Easergy P5x30 5I5O module DO4 - DO5 Slot C, D, E

According to IEC 60255-1 and IEC 61810-1

Contact rated voltage 250 V DC or 230 V AC, 50/60 Hz

Continuous current 10 A
Short duration carry current 30 A for 3 s

Making and breaking capacity 10000 operations

2500 W with L/R = 40 ms 250 V DC
2300 VA 230 V AC
Duty cycle 1 s ON, 9 s OFF

Dielectric withstand across normally None – due to Solid State Devices across normally open contact
open contacts

According to IEEE C37.90 standard

Make and carry 2000 operations make and carry 30 A DC

Duty cycle 200 ms ON, 15 s OFF (current is interrupted by independent means at the end of each
ON cycle)

Dielectric withstand across normally None – due to Solid State Devices across normally open contact
open contacts

Other characteristics
Making capacity 2000 operations
5 A DC with L/R = 50 ms
Breaking capacity 10000 operations
0.25 A DC with L/R = 50 ms
Short duration making capacity 10 A for 1 s;
15 A for 0.3 s;
30 A for 0.2 s;
40 A for 0.03 s
Minimum making current 10 mA with 50 mW minimum

Closing time 1 ms (typical value) for the high-speed contact relay DO1 (Easergy P5x30)

Opening time 20 ms (typical value), resistive load

Contact material Ag alloy

Number of operations unloaded 100000

26 P5/EN M/33C
Introduction Protection Relay

Table 4 - Easergy P5 protection relay technical characteristics (Continued)

Characteristic Value
Easergy P5x20 Easergy P5x30

Signalling relay outputs

Watchdog power supply, Slot B
Easergy P5x20 6I4O/12I4O module all DOs Slot C
Easergy P5x30 6I4O/12I4O module all DOs Slot C, D, E
Easergy P5x30 arc-flash module DO3 Slot D, E

According to IEC 60255-1 and IEC 61810-1

Contact rated voltage 250 V DC or 230 V AC, 50/60 Hz

Continuous current 2A
Short duration carry current 30 A for 200 ms

Making capacity 10000 operations

1000 W with L/R = 40 ms 250 V DC
1150 VA 230 V AC
Duty cycle 1 s ON, 9 s OFF

Breaking capacity 10000 operations

30 W with L/R = 40 ms 250 V DC
1150 VA 230 V AC
Duty cycle 1 s ON, 9 s OFF

Dielectric withstand across normally 1 kV rms AC for 1 minute

open contacts

Other characteristics
Making and breaking capacity 10000 operations
1 A DC with L/R = 20 ms
Minimum making current 10 mA with 50 mW minimum

Closing/opening time 7 ms (typical value) 3.5 ms + 3.5 ms for contact bounce, resistive load

Contact material Ag alloy

Number of operations unloaded 10000

Size and weight

Size (Width x Height x Depth) 102/180/224 mm (4.01/7.08/ 8.82 in) 152.4/180/224 mm (6/7.08/8.82 in)

Weight ≤ 2.5 kg (5.51 lb) ≤ 3.3 kg (7.28 lb)

P5/EN M/33C 27
Protection Relay Introduction

Environmental characteristics

WARNING
HAZARD OF UNEXPECTED OPERATION
Install the Easergy P5 protection relay according to the environmental
characteristics described in the table below.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or
equipment damage.

According to the informative annex of IEC 60255-1 standard edition 1, all the
environmental tests are performed at the minimum settings which helps to ensure
the robustness of the Easergy P5 protection relay.
All the digital inputs have been tested with 10 ms of debounce filter.

Table 5 - Easergy P5 protection relay environmental characteristics

Characteristic Description/Value

Power Supply

Characteristics Standard Level/Class Value

Voltage dips (DC) IEC 61000-4-29 500 ms voltage dips 0%, 250 V DC and above, Criteria A;
150 ms voltage dips 0%, 110 V DC;
GOST 30804.4 100 ms voltage dips 0%, 48 V DC;
50 ms voltage dips 0%, 24 V DC

Ripple (DC) IEC 61000-4-17 15%; 100 Hz / 120 Hz, Criteria A

Voltage dips (AC) IEC 61000-4-11 Criteria A,

30 cycles, voltage dips 0%, 230 V AC;
GOST 30804.4 10 cycles, voltage dips 0%, 110 V AC

Product Safety

Characteristics Standard Value

Insulation characteristics IEC 60255-27 Insulation resistance > 100 MΩ at 500 V DC
Using only electronic/brushless insulation tester.

Creepage distances and IEC 60255-27 Pollution degree 2, Overvoltage category Ⅲ

clearances
High voltages withstand IEC 60255-27 2 kV rms AC, 1 min:
(dielectric) between all case terminals connected together, and the case
earth/ground;

2 kV rms AC, 1 min:

between all terminals of independent circuits;

1 kV rms AC for 1 min:

across normally open control and signalling contacts;

None for High Speed, High Break control relay output due to
solid state devices across normally open contact.

IEEE C37.90 1.5 kV rms, 1 min: across open tripping contacts

Impulse voltage IEC 60255-27 1.2 μs, 50 μs, 5 kV, 0.5 J between all terminals of independent
circuits, and all terminals and case earth/ground.

28 P5/EN M/33C
Introduction Protection Relay

Table 5 - Easergy P5 protection relay environmental characteristics (Continued)

Characteristic Description/Value

Electromagnetic Compatibility

Characteristics Standard Level/Class Value

Emission test
Radiated disturbances CISPR22 Class A

CISPR11

IEC 60255-26

GOST-30805.22
IACS-E10 For equipment installed in the general power distribution zone.

Conducted disturbances CISPR 22 Class A

IEC 60255-26

GOST-30805.22
IACS-E10 For equipment installed in the general power distribution zone.

Radiated disturbances immunity tests

Radiated radio frequency fields IEC 61000-4-3 Level 3 10 V/m, 80 MHz to 6 GHz, 80% AM (1 kHz)

ANSI C37.90.2 20 V/m, 80 MHz to 1GHz, 80% AM (1 kHz)

GOST R 50746 10 V/m, 80 MHz to 1 GHz

AM 80% (1 kHz and pulse 200 Hz)
30 V/m, 800 MHz to 960 MHz/1.4 GHz to 6 GHz

IACS E10 Level 3 10 V/m, 100 kHz and 1 MHz, 2 s

Electrostatic discharges IEC 61000-4-2 Level 4 15 kV air, 8 kV contact

ANSI C37.90.3 15 kV air, 8 kV contact

Magnetic field at power IEC 61000-4-8 Level 5 100 A/m continuous; 1000 A/m, 1 to 3 s
frequency

Pulse magnetic fields IEC 61000-4-9 Level 5 1000 A/m

Oscillatory magnetic fields IEC 61000-4-10 Level 5 100 A/m, 100 kHz and 1 MHz

Conducted Radio Frequency disturbances

Conducted Radio Frequency IEC 61000-4-6 Level 3 10 V rms common mode, 0.15 MHz to 80 MHz, 80% AM
disturbance (1 kHz)

Fast transient bursts IEC 61000-4-4 Level 4 4 kV common mode, 5 kHz, 100 kHz

ANSI C37.90.1 4 kV, 5 kHz, common mode and transversal mode

IACS E10 2 kV power supply, 1 kV digital I/O, 5 min, 5 kHz

Slow damped oscillatory waves IEC 61000-4-18 Level 3 2.5 kV common mode
1 kV differential mode, 100 kHz, 1 MHz

ANSI C37.90.1 2.5 kV, 1 MHz, common mode and transversal mode

IEC 61000-4-12 Level 3 2 kV common mode; 1 kV, differential mode, 100 kHz,
Source impedance: 12 Ω
GOST 30804.4.12
Fast damped oscillatory waves IEC 61000-4-18 Level 3 2 kV common mode, 3 MHz, 10 MHz, 30 MHz

Conducted disturbances 0 to IEC 60255-26 Zone A 150 V rms, differential mode; 300 V rms, common mode.
150 kHz
GOST 51317.4.6 Level 3 Continuous: 30 V rms
Short: 300 V rms
5 Hz – 150 kHz: 30 V rms
Surges 9 IEC 61000-4-5 Level 4 4 kV, common mode; 2 kV, differential mode

9. When protection functions 50N/51N is used and I0 is measured with CSH core balance CT, it is recommended to use operation time of
50 ms at the lowest pickup value setting.

P5/EN M/33C 29
Protection Relay Introduction

Table 5 - Easergy P5 protection relay environmental characteristics (Continued)

Characteristic Description/Value

Climatic
During operation

Characteristics Standard Test Method Value

Exposure to cold IEC 60068-2-1 Ad -40℃ (-40℉), 96 hours.

Exposure to dry heat IEC 60068-2-2 Bd +70℃ (+158℉), 96 hours;

+85℃ (+185℉), 16 hours

Exposure to damp heat IEC 60068-2-78 Cab 93% ± 3% RH; 40 ℃ (+104 ℉), 56 days,
without condensation
Temperature variation IEC 60068-2-14 Nc -40℃ to +70℃ (-40℉to +158℉), 10℃/min (18℉/min)
96 hours
Damp heat cyclic test IEC 60068-2-30 Db 55℃/93% ± 3% RH and 25℃/97% -2% +3% RH, with
condensation, 6 cycles (12 h + 12 h)
Variant 1
Storage

Exposure to cold IEC 60068-2-1 Ab -40℃ (-40℉), 96 hours

Exposure to dry heat IEC 60068-2-2 Bb +85℃ (+185℉), 96 hours

Exposure to damp heat IEC 60068-2-78 Cab 93% ± 3% RH; 40 ℃ (+104℉), 56 days, without condensation

Temperature variation IEC 60068-2-14 Nc -40℃ to +70℃ (-40℉to +158℉)

transfer time: 10℃/min (18℉/min)

Corrosive atmosphere

Salt mist IEC 60068-2-52 Kb/1 4 spraying periods of 2 hours with a storage of 7 days after
each
2 Gas IEC 60068-2-60 Ke +25℃ (+77℉), 75% RH, 21 days,
method 1: 0.5 ppm SO2; 0.1 ppm H2S.

4 Gas IEC 60068-2-60 Ke +25℃ (+77℉), 75% RH, 21 days,

method 4: 0.11 ppm SO2; 0.071 ppm H2S; 0.034 ppm CI2,
0.26 ppm NO2.

(according to IEC 60721-3-3 level 3C2 concentration)

Mechanical Robustness
Characteristics Standard Level Value
In operation (flush mounted case with REL51032: panel mounting kit with flush mounting accessory)

Vibrations IEC 60255-21-1 Class 2 1 Gn, 9 Hz to 200 Hz

GOST 17516.1 0.015 mm peak, 0.5 Hz to 57.6 Hz

1 Gn, 57.6 Hz to 150 Hz

IACS E10 2 Hz to 13.2 Hz - amplitude ±1mm

13.2 Hz to 100 Hz - acceleration ±0.75 Gn
Shocks IEC 60255-21-2 Class 2 10 Gn, 11 ms

Earthquakes IEC 60255-21-3 Class 2 2 Gn horizontal; 1 Gn vertical

Storage (flush mounted case with REL51032: panel mounting kit with flush mounting accessory)

Vibration IEC 60255-21-1 Class 2 2 Gn, 10 Hz to 150 Hz

GOST 17516.1 2 Gn, 0.5 Hz to 150 Hz

Shocks IEC 60255-21-2 Class 2 30 Gn, 11 ms

Bumps IEC 60255-21-2 Class 2 20 Gn, 16 ms

30 P5/EN M/33C
Introduction Protection Relay

Table 5 - Easergy P5 protection relay environmental characteristics (Continued)

Characteristic Description/Value

Enclosure
Local panel IEC 62262 IK07 Degree of protection against mechanical impacts

IEC 60529 IP54 Local panel

Mounted in panel with flush mounting accessory:

IP54 - For Easergy P5x20

IP54 - For Easergy P5x30

IP41 Without flush mounting accessory

NEMA Type 12 -

Rear panel IEC 60529 IP10 Area with ring terminal connection (analogue inputs)

Fire resistance
Fire resistance IEC 60695-2-11 650℃ (1202℉)

Packaging

Resistance to shocks by free fall IEC 68000-2-31 1 m (3.28 ft)

(with packaging)

Cybersecurity

Certification Achilles Level I Certification number: 453–071119

Level II 10 Certification number: 500–101420
Certification/declaration
EN 60255-26 EMC Directive 2014/30/EU

European Commission's EN 60255-27 LV Directive 2014/35/EU

directives
UL 508 File E354250, NRGU
ANSI/IEEE C37.90
CAN/CSA C22.2 No.14
UL Standards
ЕАЭС RU C-FR.АЖ40.В.00943/20 Hardware variants with P5xxx-xxxx-xxxx-xxxH

Eurasian Customs Union

10. EtherNet/IP protocol is not included in Level II certification.

P5/EN M/33C 31
Protection Relay Installation

Installation
Safety instructions
This page contains important safety instructions that must be followed precisely
before attempting to install, repair, service or maintain electrical equipment.
Carefully read and follow the safety instructions described below. Only qualified
personnel, equipped with appropriate individual protection equipment, may work
on or operate the equipment. Qualified personnel are individuals who:
• Are familiar with the installation, commissioning, and operation of the
equipment and of the system to which it is being connected.
• Are able to safely perform switching operations in accordance with accepted
safety engineering practices and are authorised to energise and de-energise
equipment and to isolate, earth/ground, and label it.
• Are trained in the care and use of safety apparatus in accordance with safety
engineering practices.
• Are trained in emergency procedures (first aid).

DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH
Before performing any work on or in this equipment:
• Turn off all power supplying the protection relay and the equipment in which
it is installed before working on it.
• Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device to confirm that power is
off.
• Replace all devices, doors, and covers before turning on power to this
equipment.
• Apply appropriate personal protective equipment and follow safe electrical
work practices. See local regulation.
• Do not install this product in ATEX class 0, 1 and 2 areas.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

DANGER
FIRE HAZARD
Apply proper tightening torque to all wire connections.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

WARNING
HAZARD OF UNEXPECTED OPERATION
Do not energise the primary circuit before this protection relay is properly
configured.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or
equipment damage.

32 P5/EN M/33C
Installation Protection Relay

DANGER
FIRE HAZARD
If you are authorised to withdraw the relay:
• Disconnect the power supply before removing or replacing a module or the
withdrawable part of the protection relay.
• Never touch electronic parts (electrostatic discharge).
• Before replacing the withdrawable part, clean all debris and contaminants
from the case, the withdrawable part, and the connectors.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

Protection Class I equipment

Before energising the equipment it must be earthed/grounded using the protective
conductor terminal, if provided, or the appropriate termination of the supply plug in
the case of plug connected equipment.
The protective conductor (earth/ground) connection must not be removed since
the protection against electric shock provided by the equipment would be lost.
When the protective (earth/ground) conductor terminal (PCT) is also used to
terminate cable screens, etc., it is essential that the integrity of the protective
(earth/ground) conductor is checked after the addition or removal of such
functional earth/ground connections. For M4 stud PCTs the integrity of the
protective (earth/ground) connections should be ensured by use of a locknut or
similar.
The recommended minimum protective conductor (earth/ground) wire size is 2.5
mm² (AWG 14) (3.3 mm² (AWG 12) for North America) unless otherwise stated in
the technical data section of the equipment documentation, or otherwise required
by local or country wiring regulations.
The protective conductor (earth/ground) connection must be low-inductance and
as short as possible.
All connections to the equipment must have a defined potential. Connections that
are pre-wired, but not used, should preferably be grounded when binary inputs
and output relays are isolated. When binary inputs and output relays are
connected to common potential, the pre-wired but unused connections should be
connected to the common potential of the grouped connections.

P5/EN M/33C 33
Protection Relay Installation

Transport, handling and storage

Transport
In its original packing, a protection relay can be shipped to any destination by all
usual means of transport.
If installed in a cubicle, the protection relay can be transported by all usual means
of transport in the customary conditions used for cubicles. Storage conditions
should be taken into consideration for a long period of transport.

Handling
Protective relays, although generally of robust construction, require careful
handling: handle the Easergy P5 protection relays in their original packing in order
to help protect it against shocks.
If installed in a cubicle: should the protection relay fall out of a cubicle, check its
condition by visual inspection and energising.

Storage

NOTICE
WATER DAMAGE
• Do not expose the products to sustained humidity during storage.
• Electrically energize the products within three months of unpacking.
• Where electrical equipment is being installed, allow sufficient time for
acclimatisation to the ambient temperature of the environment before
powering on.
• Supply power to the protection relay every two years for at least one hour.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

If Easergy P5 protection relays are not to be installed immediately upon receipt,

they should be stored in a place free from dust, humidity and moisture in their
original packaging. Easergy P5 can be stored in its original packaging, in an
appropriate location for several years:
• Temperature between -25℃ and +70℃ (between -13℉ and +158℉)
• Humidity < 90%
Care should be taken on subsequent unpacking so that any dust collected on the
carton does not fall inside. In locations of high humidity, the carton and packing
may become impregnated with moisture and the de-humidifier crystals will lose
their efficiency.
Periodic, yearly checking of the environment and the packaging condition is
recommended: the relay should be powered on for one hour every two years.
Once the protection relay has been unpacked, it should be energised as soon as
possible in an appropriate environment in term of temperature, humidity and
pollution.
If protection relay is installed in a cubicle, keep the cubicle protection packing as
long as possible. The protection relay, like all electronic units, should not be stored
in a damp environment for more than a month. The protection relay should be
energised as quickly as possible. If this is not possible, the cubicle reheating
system should be activated.

34 P5/EN M/33C
Installation Protection Relay

Unpacking
Equipment receipt

NOTICE
PRODUCT TAMPERING
Our products leave our factory in closed, sealed original packaging. At delivery,
if the packaging is opened or the seal is broken, Schneider Electric must be
informed.
Failure to follow this instruction can result in compromised confidentiality
and authenticity of the information contained in the products.

An Easergy P5 protection relay is shipped in a cardboard box which helps protect

it against any shocks received in transport.
Protection relays that are supplied unmounted and not intended for immediate
installation should be returned to their protective plastic bags and delivery carton.

Package contents
Each Easergy P5 protection relay is delivered in an independent package
containing:
• An Easergy P5 protection relay
◦ 1a: Easergy P5x20
◦ 1b: Easergy P5x30
• A certificate of conformity ②
• An installation sheet providing main information about installation and use ③
• One plastic bag including a set of labels and stickers, and the cabling kit for
connector A
◦ 4a-1: pack for Easergy P5x20 of CT/VT analogue input type
◦ 4a-2: pack for Easergy P5U20 of LPCT/LPVT analogue input type
◦ 4b-1: pack for Easergy P5x30 of CT/VT analogue input type
◦ 4b-2: pack for Easergy P5x30 of LPCT/LPVT analogue input type
• One plastic bag including one to four rear connectors
◦ 5a: pack for Easergy P5x20
◦ 5b: pack for Easergy P5x30

Figure 1 - Easergy P5 package contents

2
1b 3
4a-1
Power
Logic
Protectio P5F20
n relay

1a
en
Instruction
Retain
Go to for sheet
future
www.schneid
to download use
reference er-electric.co
the
documents.manual PowerLogic
The
and m QR
IMPORTANT other P5F20 gives code
This websitea direct (front panel
and device NOTE access of
servicedmust
electrical to your the relay)
be installed
by qualified relay’s
Schneider personnel.
responsibleElectric
the
instructions
instruction cannot
for failure
en be held
to follow
sheet.given on
this
Equipme
nt receipt
03/2014
Schneider 1
35 rue Electric
92500 Joseph Industries
en Equipment
Monier
France Rueil-Malmais 2 1
SAS Protection receipt
www.schneide 3 2
on Certificate relay
xxxxxxx
r-electric.com 4 of compliance
Instruction
5
Connector sheet
6
Connector(s) A cabling
© 2014
All rights Schneider kit
reserved. Electric.

4a-2
5

4b-1

4b-2

5a 5b

P533G0A

Accessories, such as the mounting accessory with panel mounting kit,

communication modules and cables can be delivered in a separate package.

P5/EN M/33C 35
Protection Relay Installation

Equipment identification
Different kinds of labels and stickers are used on the Easergy P5 protection relay
to identify its model type and its different components.

Figure 2 - Label examples on the Easergy P5 protection relay

1 1

2 2 P533G1A

① Rear panel connection instructions label

② Reference label

Reference label
The reference label contains the commercial reference, the serial number, the
power supply voltage of the relay and a QR code. The QR code can be used to
access the specific product website through mySchneider App (availabe in App
Store and Google Store) to get basic product documents and product life cycle
documents like Certificate of Conformity and Test.

Figure 3 - Reference label on Easergy P5x20

1
4
2

3 P5
P5U20W211647230001
P533G2A

Figure 4 - Reference label on Easergy P5x30

1 4
2

3 P5
P5F30W211647230001
P533G3A

① Power supply voltage (Optional 24–48 V DC for Easergy P5x30)

② Reference
③ Serial number
④ Access to product website

Rear panel connection instructions label

The rear panel connection label contains the designation of the rear panel
terminals together with instructions for installing and wiring the protection relay.

36 P5/EN M/33C
Installation Protection Relay

Figure 5 - Example rear panel connection instructions label

Easergy P5F30 Slot D Slot E Slot A Slot B Slot C

Protection relay / Relais de protection
DI1 1 DI1 1 1 1 DI1 1
Communication modules availability depends DI1
2 V1
on the model / La disponibilité des modules de 2 2 2 2
communication dépend du modèle. DI2 3 DI2 3 3 DI2 3
ETH : Ethernet / Ethernet 3
4 4 4 4
SRL : Serial / Série V2 DI2
5 4
EXT : Extension module (to be used only with DI3 DI3 5 5 DI3 5
IRIG-B and MET148-2 modules) / Module 6 6 5 6 6
d’extension (à utiliser uniquement avec les DI3
V3
modules IRIG-B et MET148-2). DI4 7 DI4 7 6 7 DI4 7
DI4
P2P : Peer-to-peer communication / 8 8 8 8
7
Communication point à point. 9 V4
DI5 DI5 9 9 DI5 9
Refer to user manual for rating values / Se 8 DO1 HS
10 10 10 10
reporter au manuel pour les valeurs nominales 9
HS: High speed / high break, Trip, 10A perm. DI6 11 DI6 11 IL1 11 DI6 11
10 DO2 C
C: Control / Trip, 8A perm. 12 12 12 12
S: Signaling, 2A perm. DO1 13 DO1 13 11 C
13 DO1 13
S S S
WD: Watchdog IL2
14 14 12 14 14
Std: Standard Earth/Ground fault DO3 C
DO2 15 DO2 15 15 DO2 15
VS: Very sensitive Earth/Ground fault S S 13 S
16 16 IL3 16 16
14 WD
DO3 17 DO3 17 17 DO3 17
S S S
15
18 18 18 18
Std
19 16
DO4 S DO4 19 19 DO4 19
S S
20 20 17 20 20
VS 48-250 V dc
18
IND.CONT.EQ 100-230 V ac
E354250 Made in France

DANGER
DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE, D'EXPLOSION OU D'ARC ELECTRIQUE
- This equipment must only be installed and serviced by qualified - Cet équipement doit être installé et entretenu par du personnel
electrical personnel. qualifié.
- Turn off all power supplying this equipment before working on or - Avant toute intervention, couper toutes les alimentations électriques
inside it. de l'équipement.
- Always use a properly rated voltage detection device to confirm that - Toujours utiliser un vérificateur d'absence de tension (VAT) pour
all power is off. confirmer l'absence de tension.
- Apply appropriate personal protection equipment (PPE) and follow - Utiliser les équipements de protection individuelle (EPI) et suivre
safe electrical work pratices. les pratiques de travail sécuritaires.
- Do not install this product in ATEX zone 0 or 1 areas. - Ne pas installer ce produit dans des zones ATEX 0 ou 1.
Le non-respect de ces instructions entraînera la mort ou des blessures
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury. graves.

P533G4A

Model number label

Two model number labels containing the first digits of the device model number
are available on both the withdrawable internal part ① and the static case ②.
They are placed on the device for the purpose of correctly coupling the two parts
during maintenance. If the withdrawable internal part of the protection relay is
removed from the case, check that their model numbers are identical before
assembling.

Figure 6 - Model number labels (Easergy P5x30 shown as an example)

2
P533G5A

① Model number label on the withdrawable internal part

② Model number on the static case

P5/EN M/33C 37
Protection Relay Installation

Rear panel identification stickers

Two kinds of identification stickers are available for the analogue input connector,
the digital I/O connectors and the communication ports on the rear panel:
• Stickers on analogue input and digital I/O connectors ①:
Each analogue or digital connector on the rear panel is identified using a
sticker. Stickers for additional, optional connectors are found in the product
package.
• Communication port stickers ②:
The rear ports of the communication modules are marked as follows:

ETH Dual port copper (RJ45) or fibre optic (multi-mode glass fibre) Ethernet ports

SRL RS485 or fibre optic serial communication ports

EXT Extension port for connection with external module and demodulated IRIG-B input
or back-up memory

Figure 7 - Rear panel identification stickers

ETH SRL EXT

ETH ETH SRL EXT

P533G6A

38 P5/EN M/33C
Installation Protection Relay

Dimensions
Product dimensions
Dimensions of the Easergy P5 protection relays are shown below:

Figure 8 - Easergy P5x20 dimensions

mm 224
in. 8.82
174
6.85 4
102 148 0.16
4.01 5.83

167.2 180 158

6.58 7.09 6.22

53.4
51.8 2.10
2.04

98.8
3.89

P533G7A

Figure 9 - Easergy P5x30 dimensions

mm 224
in. 8.82
174
6.85 4
152.4 148 0.16
6 5.83

167.2 180 158

6.58 7.09 6.22

53.4
103.6
2.10
4.08

150.3
5.92

P533G8A

P5/EN M/33C 39
Protection Relay Installation

Figure 10 - Easergy P5 flush mounting dimension

mm
in.
224
8.82

158
6.22

43
1.69 P533G9A

Rear clearances
For easy access to the rear panel, the rear clearances illustrated below are
recommended:

Figure 11 - Rear clearances illustrated

mm
in.
1

60
2.36

2
140
5.51

P533GAA

① This clearance must be available permanently for Easergy P5

protection relay wiring and assembly.

② This clearance should be transiently available during maintenance

operations when communication modules are replaced.

40 P5/EN M/33C
Installation Protection Relay

Operating environment
Operating temperature and humidity

NOTICE
POTENTIAL DAMAGE FROM ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
• The Easergy P5 protection relay must be installed in an environment within
the specified operation temperature and humidity.
• The protection relay may not operate correctly if condensation occurs on the
electronic boards inside the device.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

The Easergy P5 protection relay is intended for indoor installation and use only. If
it is required for use in an outdoor environment, it must be mounted in a specific
cabinet that will enable it to meet the requirements of IEC 60529 with the
classification of protection degree IP54 (dust and splashing water protected).
The temperature/relative humidity factors must be compatible with the
environmental withstand characteristics of the Easergy P5 protection relay:
• Recommended operating range of temperature: -10℃ to +55℃ (+14℉ to
+131℉).
• Maximum operating temperature: -40℃ to +70℃ (-40℉ to +158℉).
• Average humidity: <75% RH over the year.
• Temporary permissible humidity: <93% RH (less than 80 hours per year)
• No condensation.
If the operating conditions are outside the normal range, special arrangements
should be made before commissioning, such as air conditioning of the premises.

Operation in a polluted atmosphere

A contaminated industrial atmosphere (such as the presence of chlorine,
hydrofluoric acid, sulphur, solvents, etc.) can cause corrosion of the electronic
components and terminals, in which case environmental control arrangements
should be made (such as pressurised premises with filtered air, etc.) before
commissioning.
To improve robustness of Easergy P5 protection relays against such environment,
all the electronic boards of Easergy P5 protection relays have a conformal coating.

P5/EN M/33C 41
Protection Relay Installation

Mounting
General mounting operations

Mounting the protection relay in panels or on rack frame

The Easergy P5 protection relays are available for flush mounting or rack
mounting.
The Easergy P5 protection relay is fixed by four M4 x 20 mm (0.787 in.) stainless
steel self-tapping screws with stainless steel washers (with diameter 4 x 8 mm
(0.157 x 0.315 in.) maximum) at lower and upper parts.

Figure 12 - Mounting the Easergy P5x20 protection relay

P533GBB

Figure 13 - Mounting the Easergy P5x30 protection relay

P533GCB

Screw M4 x 20 mm (0.787 in.) stainless steel self-tapping screws with

stainless steel washers (with diameter 4 x 8 mm (0.157 x 0.315 in.)
maximum) x 4

Tightening torque 1N·m (8.85 lb-in)

Tool Digital torque screwdriver

42 P5/EN M/33C
Installation Protection Relay

Unlocking the withdrawable part from its outer case

In order to maintain the withdrawable part (internal part) with the fixed part (outer
part) of the relay during transportation, locking screws are used on the front face
to fix the two relay parts together.
The front face locking screws can be unscrewed as shown in the figure below.

Figure 14 - Unscrewing the front face locking screws

Easergy P5x20 Easergy P5x30

x3 x4

P533GDA

Screw 3 screws mounted on Easergy P5x20;

4 screws mounted on Easergy P5x30

Tightening torque for 1N·m (8.85 lb-in)

installing back the screws

Tool Digital torque screwdriver

Lock the shutter and handle

In order to prevent unauthorised access to the command keys and USB ports on
the local panel of the Easergy P5 protection relay, the shutter for covering the
lower section of the protection relay needs to be locked with a wired lead seal.

Figure 15 - Lock the shutter

2
P533GEA

① Wired lead seal

② Protective panel

P5/EN M/33C 43
Protection Relay Installation

The handle on the front face of the protection relay is used to separate the
withdrawable part from the fixed outer case. In order to prevent unauthorised
dismantling fix the lock tab on the handle with a wired lead seal to restrict the
rotation of the handle.

Figure 16 - Lock the handle

P533GFA

① Wired lead seal

② Lock tab on the handle

Flush mounting with accessory

CAUTION
HAZARD OF CUTS AND PHYSICAL IMPACT
• Wear gloves and safety shoes.
• Trim the edges of the cut-out plates to remove any jagged edges.
• Carry the assembled relay with withdrawable part locked.
• When cases are mounted on a rack (with withdrawable part not inserted),
stay far enough from the protruding part(s) of the case(s).
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment
damage.

The Easergy P5 protection relay can be mounted onto panels with the provided
accessory. It is recommended to use the flush mounting with accessory for
Easergy P5 protection relay.
Mounting Procedure
1. Prepare the cut out in the panel according to the following dimensions.

Figure 17 - Panel cut out for Easergy P5x20/Easergy P5x30

mm
130 ± 0.5
in 180 ± 0.5
5.12 ± 0.2
7.09 ± 0.2
8.07 ± 0.2
205 ± 0.5

8.07 ± 0.2
205 ± 0.5

P5x20 P5x30
P533GGA

44 P5/EN M/33C
Installation Protection Relay

2. Insert the flush mounting accessory ① in the panel ② and check that the rear
mounting supports ③ are accessible for panel mounting kits to be inserted.

Figure 18 - Flush mounting accessories

1 2 1 2
3

REL51032 REL51052
P533GHA

Accessory Ref. No. REL51032 (for use with Easergy P5x20)

Accessory Ref. No. REL51052 (for use with Easergy P5x30)

3. Insert the panel mounting kits in the mounting support holes ① and then push
down the front parts (flush panel side) ② to lock the flush mounting accessory
on the panel.

Figure 19 - Insert the mounting kits

P533GIA

4. Remove the top and bottom seal straps from the rear mounting surface of the
protection relay.

Figure 20 - Remove the seal straps from the relay

x2 x2

P533GJA

P5/EN M/33C 45
Protection Relay Installation

5. Insert the protection relay ② into the mounting accessory ① and hold it in the
mounting position.

Figure 21 - Insert the protection relay

1 2 1 2

P533GKA

6. Fix the protection relay on the accessory with the screws provided in the flush
mounting accessory.

Figure 22 - Fix the protection relay (Easergy P5x30 shown as an

example)

P533GLB

Screw 4 screws provided with the flush mounting accessory

Tightening torque 1 N·m (8.85 lb-in)

Tool Digital torque screwdriver

Flush mounting without accessory

CAUTION
HAZARD OF CUTS AND PHYSICAL IMPACT
• Wear gloves and safety shoes.
• Trim the edges of the cut-out plates to remove any jagged edges.
• Carry the assembled relay with withdrawable part locked.
• When cases are mounted on a rack (with withdrawable part not inserted),
stay far enough from the protruding part(s) of the case(s).
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment
damage.

The Easergy P5 protection relay can be directly mounted onto panels without any
accessory.

46 P5/EN M/33C
Installation Protection Relay

Mounting Procedure
1. Prepare the cut-out in the panel for flush mounting according to the following
dimensions.
The thickness of the panel plate should be a minimum of 3 mm (0.12 in.).

Figure 23 - Panel cut out for Easergy P5x20/Easergy P5x30

mm 51.8 103.6
in. 2.04 4.08

24.1 3.4 23.7 3.4

0.95 0.13 0.93 0.13
3.6 3.6
0.14 0.14

100 ± 0.5 151 ± 0.5

3.94 ± 0.02 5.94 ± 0.02

160 ± 0.5 160 ± 0.5

167.2 6.30 ± 0.02 167.2 6.30 ± 0.02
6.58 6.58

P5x20 P5x30 P533GMA

2. Fasten the Easergy P5 protection relay in its position with four M4 x 20 mm

(0.787 in.) stainless steel self-tapping screws with stainless steel washers
(diameter 4 x 8 mm (0.157 x 0.315 in.) maximum) at lower and upper parts.

Figure 24 - Fastening the Easergy P5 onto panel (Easergy P5x30 shown

as an example)

P533GNA

Screw M4 x 20 mm (0.787 in.) stainless steel self-tapping screws with

stainless steel washers (with diameter 4 x 8 mm (0.157 x 0.315
in.) maximum) x 4

Tightening torque 1 N·m (8.85 lb-in)

Tool Digital torque screwdriver

P5/EN M/33C 47
Protection Relay Installation

Rack mounting

CAUTION
HAZARD OF FALLING DEVICES
• Wear gloves and safety shoes.
• Carry the assembled relay with withdrawable part locked.
• When cases are mounted on a rack (with withdrawable part not inserted),
stay far enough from the protruding part(s) of the case(s).
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment
damage.

Easergy P5 protection relays may be rack mounted using single rack mounting
frames (ref: REL51021), as illustrated in the figure below.

Figure 25 - Rack mounted protection relays

F0187-1
P533GOA

The two horizontal rails of the rack frame have holes drilled at approximately 26
mm (10 in.) intervals. The Easergy P5 protection relays are attached via their
mounting flanges using M4 x 20 mm (0.787 in.) stainless steel self-tapping screws
with stainless steel washers (diameter 4 x 8 mm (0.157 x 0.315 in.) maximum).
Relays can be mechanically grouped into single tier or multi-tier arrangements by
means of the rack frame. This enables schemes using products from the Easergy
P5 product ranges to be pre-wired together prior to mounting (rack mounting with
M4 self-tapping screws, washers and nut).
Mounting Procedure
1. Insert the Easergy P5 protection relay ② into the rack frame ①.

Figure 26 - Insert the protection relay into the rack frame

1
2

P533GPA

Rack frame Ref. No. REL51021

48 P5/EN M/33C
Installation Protection Relay

2. Fasten the protection relay onto the rack frame using four M4 x 20 mm (0.787
in.) stainless steel self-tapping screws with stainless steel washers (diameter
4 x 8 mm (0.157 x 0.315 in.) maximum).

Figure 27 - Fasten the protection relay onto the rack frame (Easergy
P5x20 shown as an example)

P533GQB

Screw M4 x 20 mm (0.787 in.) stainless steel self-tapping screws with

stainless steel washers (with diameter 4 x 8 mm (0.157 x 0.315
in.) maximum) x 4

Tightening torque 1 N·m (8.85 lb-in)

Tool Digital torque screwdriver

3. Cover up the open section of the rack frame with blank plates if there is still
space left for future installation of protection relays or ancillary components.

Figure 28 - Install the blank plate

P533GRB

Blank plate REL51018: 30TE 206.8 mm x 177 mm (6 in. x 6.97 in.)

Ref. No. REL51019: 20TE 103.2 mm x 177 mm (4 in. x 6.97 in.);
REL51020: 10TE 50.2 mm x 177 mm (2 in. x 6.97 in.);

Screws M4 x 20 mm (0.787 in.) stainless steel self-tapping screws with

stainless steel washers (with diameter 4 x 8 mm (0.157 x 0.315
in.) maximum) x 4

Tightening torque 1.0 N·m (8.85 lb-in)

Tool Digital torque screwdriver

Subsequent operation Mount the rack frame on the rack using the mounting flanges on
both sides of the frame.

P5/EN M/33C 49
Protection Relay Installation

Rear panel connectors and application diagrams

Easergy P5 rear panel

Rear panel layout

The Easergy P5 protection relay rear panels contain the following modules
installed in slots and identified by letters:

Figure 29 - Easergy P5 protection relay rear panels

P533GSA

Easergy P5x20 Easergy P5x30 Slot: Module

✔ ✔ A: Analogue input module

✔ ✔ B: Power supply

✔ ✔ C: Empty or additional digital input/output module

✔ D: Empty or additional digital input/output module

✔ E: Empty or additional digital input/output module

✔ L: ETH, Ethernet module (TP)

✔ ✔ M: ETH, Ethernet module (TP or FO)

✔ ✔ N: SRL, Serial communication module (RS485 or FO)

✔ ✔ P: EXT, Extension module

✔ ✔ M and N: Ethernet HSR/PRP module

NOTE: For the slot occupation rules of Easergy P5x30 slot C, D and E, refer
to Slot occupation rules, page 487.

50 P5/EN M/33C
Installation Protection Relay

Easergy P5U20 rear panel (CT version)

Figure 30 - Easergy P5U20 rear panel (CT version)

A B C
1 1
1 2 2 2
3 3
3 4 4 4
5 5
5 6 6 6
7 7
7 8 8 8
9 9
10 10
9 10 11 11
12 12
11 12 13 13
14 14
13 14 15 15
16 16
15 16 17 17
18 18
17 18 19 19
20 20

M N P P533GTA

Figure 31 - Easergy P5U20 (CT version) rear terminal designations

A B C C C

1 DI1 1 DI1 1 DI1 1 DI1 1

2 2 DI2 2 DI2 2 2
3 DI3 3 3 DI2 3
3
DI2 4 DI4 4 DI3 4 4
Not used 4
5 DI5 5 DI4 5 DI3 5
5 DI3 6 DI6 6 6 6
6 DI4 7 7 DI5 7 DI4 7

7 8 DI7 8 8 8

8 DO1 9 DI8 9 DO1 9 DI5 9

C C
10 DI9 10 10 10
9 C
IL1 IL1 DO2 11 DI10 11 11 DI6 11
C
10 12 DI11 12 DO2 12 12
C
C
11 13 DI12 13 13 DO1 13
S
IL2 IL2 C
12 DO3 C
14 14 14 14
15 DO1 15 DO3 15 DO2 15
S C S
13
IL3 IL3 WD 16 DO2 S
16 16 16
14 17 17 DO4 17 DO3 17
HS S
15 18 DO3 18 18 18
20 A Std S
16 19 DO4 19 DO5 19 DO4 19
S HS S
20 20 20 20
17
2A VS
18

P533GUA

Optional

ILx Line current Std Standard earth/ground fault

DIx Digital input VS Very sensitive earth/ground fault

DOx Digital output WD Watchdog contact

- HS High Speed / high break,Trip, 10 A perm.

-C Control / Trip, 8 A perm.

-S Signalling, 2 A perm.

P5/EN M/33C 51
Protection Relay Installation

Easergy P5U20 rear panel (LPCT/LPVT version)

Figure 32 - Easergy P5U20 rear panel (LPCT/LPVT version)

A B C
1 1
2 2
L1 1 3 3
4 4
5 5
2 6 6
L2 7 7
8 8
3 9 9
10 10
L3 11 11
4 12 12
13 13
V1 14 14
V2 15 15
V3 16 16
17 17
V4 18 18
19 19
20 20

M N P P533GVA

Figure 33 - Easergy P5U20 (LPCT/LPVT version) rear terminal designations

A B C C C

1 DI1 1 DI1 1 DI1 1 DI1 1

20 A
2 2 DI2 2 DI2 2 2
3 DI3 3 3 DI2 3
3
DI2 4 DI4 4 DI3 4 4
2A 4
5 DI5 5 DI4 5 DI3 5
DI3 6 DI6 6 6 6
IL1 DI4 7 7 DI5 7 DI4 7
8 DI7 8 8 8
DO1 9 DI8 9 DO1 C 9 DI5 9
C
10 DI9 10 10 10
IL2 C
DO2 11 DI10 11 11 DI6 11
C
12 DI11 12 DO2 C 12 12
C
13 DI12 13 13 DO1 13
C S
IL3 DO3 14 14 14 14
C
15 DO1 15 DO3 15 DO2 15
S C S
WD 16 DO2 16 16 16
V1 S
V2 17 17 DO4 17 DO3 17
HS S
V3 18 DO3 18 18 18
S
19 DO4 S
19 DO5 HS
19 DO4 S
19
20 20 20 20
V4

P533GWB

Optional

ILx Line current Vx Line-to-neutral voltage

DIx Digital input WD Watchdog contact

DOx Digital output

- HS High Speed / high break,Trip, 10 A perm.

-C Control / Trip, 8 A perm.

-S Signalling, 2 A perm.

52 P5/EN M/33C
Installation Protection Relay

Easergy P5V20 rear panel

Figure 34 - Easergy P5V20 rear panel

A B C
1 1
1 2 2 2
3 3
3 4 4 4
5 5
5 6 6 6
7 7
7 8 8 8
9 9
10 10
9 10 11 11
12 12
11 12 13 13
14 14
13 14 15 15
16 16
15 16 17 17
18 18
17 18 19 19
20 20

M N P P533GXA

Figure 35 - Easergy P5V20 rear terminal designations

A B C C C

1 DI1 1 DI1 1 DI1 1 DI1 1

V1
2 2 DI2 2 DI2 2 2
3 DI3 3 3 DI2 3
3
V2 DI2 4 DI4 4 DI3 4 4
4
5 DI5 5 DI4 5 DI3 5
5 DI3 6 DI6 6 6 6
V3
6 DI4 7 7 DI5 7 DI4 7

7 8 DI7 8 8 8
V4 DO1 9 DI8 9 DO1 C 9 DI5 9
8 C
10 DI9 10 10 10
9 C
DO2 11 DI10 11 11 DI6 11
C
10 12 DI11 12 DO2 C 12 12
C
11 13 DI12 13 13 DO1 13
C S
12 DO3 C
14 14 14 14
15 DO1 15 DO3 15 DO2 15
S C S
13
Not used WD 16 DO2 S
16 16 16
14 17 17 DO4 17 DO3 17
HS S
15 18 DO3 18 18 18
S
16 19 DO4 19 DO5 19 DO4 19
S HS S
20 20 20 20
17
18

P533GYA

Optional

Vx Line-to-neutral voltage WD Watchdog contact

DOx Digital output DIx Digital input

- HS High Speed / high break,Trip, 10 A perm.

-C Control / Trip, 8 A perm.

-S Signalling, 2 A perm.

P5/EN M/33C 53
Protection Relay Installation

Easergy P5x30 rear panel (CT/VT version)

Figure 36 - Easergy P5x30 rear panel (CT/VT version)

D E A B C
1 1 1 1
2 2 1 2 2 2
3 3 3 3
4 4 3 4 4 4
5 5 5 5
6 6 5 6 6 6
7 7 7 7
8 8 7 8 8 8
9 9 9 9
10 10 10 10
11 11 9 10 11 11
12 12 12 12
13 13 11 12 13 13
14 14 14 14
15 15 13 14 15 15
16 16 16 16
17 17 15 16 17 17
18 18 18 18
19 19 17 18 19 19
20 20 20 20

L M N P P533GZA

Figure 37 - Easergy P5x30 (CT/VT version) rear terminal designations

A B C D E C D E C D E D E

1 DI1 1 DI1 1 DI1 1 DI1 1 DI1 1

V1
2 2 2 DI2 2 DI2 2 2
3 DI2 3 DI3 3 3 DI2 3
3
V2 DI2 4 4 DI4 4 DI3 4 4
4
5 DI3 5 DI5 5 DI4 5 DI3 5
5 DI3 6 6 DI6 6 6 6
V3
6 DI4 7 DI4 7 7 DI5 7 DO1 7
C
7 8 8 DI7 8 8 8
V4 DO1 9 DI5 9 DI8 9 DO1 C 9 DO2 9
8 HS C
10 10 DI9 10 10 10
9 C
C
IL1 IL1 DO2 11 DI6 11 DI10 11 11 11
C
10
12 12 DI11 12 DO2 C 12 DO3 S
12
C
11 13 DO1 13 DI12 13 13 13
S C
IL2 IL2
12 DO3 C
14 14 14 14 14
15 DO2 15 DO1 15 DO3 15 Arc1 15
13 S S C
WD 16 16 DO2 16 16 L> 16
IL3 IL3 S
14
17 DO3 17 17 DO4 17 Arc2 17
S HS
15 18 18 DO3 18 18 L> 18
S
20 A Std
16 19 DO4 19 DO4 19 DO5 19 Arc3 19
S S HS
20 20 20 20 L> 20
17 48-250 V dc
2A VS 100-230 V ac
18
24-48 V dc

P533H0A

Optional

ILx Line current VS Very sensitive earth/ground fault

Vx Line-to-neutral voltage Std Standard earth/ground fault

DIx Digital input Arc Arc sensor

DOx Digital output WD Watchdog contact

- HS High Speed / high break,Trip, 10 A perm.

-C Control / Trip, 8 A perm.

-S Signalling, 2 A perm.

54 P5/EN M/33C
Installation Protection Relay

Easergy P5x30 rear panel (LPCT/LPVT version)

Figure 38 - Easergy P5x30 rear panel (LPCT/LPVT version)

D E A B C
1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2
3 3 3 3
1
4 4 L1 4 4
5 5 5 5
6 6 2 6 6
7 7 7 7
8 8 L2 8 8
9 9 3 9 9
10 10 10 10
11 11 L3 11 11
12 12 4 12 12
13 13 13 13
14 14 V1 14 14
15 15 V2 15 15
16 16 V3 16 16
17 17 17 17
18 18 V4 18 18
19 19 19 19
20 20 20 20

L M N P
P533H1A

Figure 39 - Easergy P5x30 (LPCT/LPVT version) rear terminal designations

A B C D E C D E C D E D E

1 DI1 1 DI1 1 DI1 1 DI1 1 DI1 1

20 A
2 2 2 DI2 2 DI2 2 2
3 DI2 3 DI3 3 3 DI2 3
3
2A DI2 4 4 DI4 4 DI3 4 4
4
5 DI3 5 DI5 5 DI4 5 DI3 5
DI3 6 6 DI6 6 6 6
IL1 DI4 7 DI4 7 7 DI5 7 DO1 C
7
8 8 DI7 8 8 8
DO1 9 DI5 9 DI8 9 DO1 C 9 DO2 9
HS C
10 10 DI9 10 10 10
IL2 C
C
DO2 11 DI6 11 DI10 11 11 11
C
12 12 DI11 12 DO2 C 12 DO3 S
12
C
13 DO1 13 DI12 13 13 13
S C
IL3 DO3 14 14 14 14 14
C
15 DO2 15 DO1 15 DO3 15 Arc1 15
S S C
WD 16 16 DO2 16 16 L> 16
V1 S
V2 17 DO3 17 17 DO4 17 Arc2 17
S HS
V3 18 18 DO3 18 18 L> 18
S
19 DO4 S
19 DO4 S
19 DO5 HS
19 Arc3 19
20 20 20 20 L> 20
V4 48-250 V dc
100-230 V ac
24-48 V dc

P533H2B

Optional

ILx Line current Vx Line-to-neutral voltage

DIx Digital input Arc Arc sensor

DOx Digital output WD Watchdog contact

- HS High Speed / high break,Trip, 10 A perm.

-C Control / Trip, 8 A perm.

-S Signalling, 2 A perm.

P5/EN M/33C 55
Protection Relay Installation

Default DI/DO configuration of the slot B terminals

The following table lists the default configuration of the digital input and digital
output terminals in slot B of the Easergy P5 protection relay.

Table 6 - Default DI/DO configuration of the slot B terminals

DI1 CB open

DI2 CB close
DI3 Free
DI4 Free
DO1 CB trip

DO2 CB trip lockout

DO3 CB close
WD Watchdog (not configurable)

56 P5/EN M/33C
Installation Protection Relay

Typical application diagrams

The following sections describe typical application diagrams.

CT and LPCT typical application

Figure 40 - 3 x 1/5A CTs and residual current measured by 1 x 1/2/5A CT and
1 x 1A CT
L1 L1
L2 L2
L3 L3

S1 A9 S1 A9
1/5 A A10 IL1 1/5 A A10
IL1
S1 A11 S1 A11
A12 IL2 A12
IL2
S1 A13 S1 A13
A14 IL3 A14
IL3
A15 A15
1/2/5 A A16 I0 (Std) A16 I0 (Std)
S1 A17 A17
1A 1A A18 I0’ (VS)
A18 I0’ (VS)
S1 S1
P533CHA

Std: Standard earth/ground fault

VS: Very Sensitive earth/ground fault

NOTE: For an application with 2 CTs, only IL1 and IL3 are used by Easergy P5
protection relay (see figure below).

Figure 41 - 3 x 1/5A CTs (with IL2 not connected) and residual current
measured by 1 x 1/2/5A CT and 1 x 1A CT

L1
L2
L3

S1 A9
1/5 A A10 IL1
A11
A12
S1 A13
A14 IL3
A15
1/2/5 A A16 I0 (Std)
S1 A17
1A A18 I0’ (VS)
S1
P533CIA

Std: Standard earth/ground fault

VS: Very Sensitive earth/ground fault

P5/EN M/33C 57
Protection Relay Installation

Figure 42 - 3 x 1/5A CTs and 1 residual current measured by CSH

L1 L1
L2 L2
L3 L3

S1 A9 S1 A9
1/5 A A10 IL1 1/5 A A10 IL1
S1 A11 S1 A11
A12 IL2 A12 IL2
S1 A13 S1 A13
A14 IL3 A14 IL3
A15 A15
CSH
A16 I0 A16
20 A S1 A17 A17
CSH
A18 A18 I0
2A
S1
P533CJA

NOTE: For an application with 2 CTs, only IL1 and IL3 are used by Easergy P5
protection relay( see figure below).

Figure 43 - 3 x 1/5A CTs (with IL2 not connected) and 1 residual current
measured by CSH
L1 L1
L2 L2
L3 L3

S1 A9 S1 A9
1/5 A A10 IL1 1/5 A A10 IL1
A11 A11
A12 A12
S1 A13 S1 A13
A14 IL3 A14 IL3
A15 A15
CSH A16 I0 A16
20 A S1 A17 A17
CSH I0
A18 A18
2A
S1
P533CKA

Figure 44 - 3 LPCT and 1 residual current measured by CSH

L1
L2
L3

RJ45 IL1

RJ45 IL2

RJ45 IL3

S1 A1
CSH I0
A2
20 A / 2A
A3
A4 I0

P533CLC

NOTE: 3 LPCTs are always connected to the Easergy P5 protection relay.

58 P5/EN M/33C
Installation Protection Relay

VT typical application
Voltage input terminals A2 and A4 have been connected internally. For three line-
to-neutral applications, short terminals A4 and A6 together.

Figure 45 - 3 line-to-neutral voltages (3LN)

L1
L2
L3

A1
A2 V1
A3
A4 V2
A5
A6 V3

A7
A8
P533CMA

Figure 46 - 3 line-to-neutral voltages + 1 residual voltage (3LN + U0)

L1
L2
L3

A1
A2 V1
A3
A4 V2
A5
A6 V3
A7
A8 V4

P533CNA

P5/EN M/33C 59
Protection Relay Installation

Figure 47 - 3 line-to-neutral voltages + 1 line-to-neutral voltage (3LN + LNy)

L1
L2
L3

A1
A2 V1
A3
A4 V2
A5
A6 V3
A7
A8 V4

P533COA

Figure 48 - 3 line-to-neutral voltages + 1 line-to-line voltage (3LN + LLy)

L1
L2
L3

A1
A2 V1
A3
A4 V2
A5
A6 V3
A7
A8 V4

P533CPB

Figure 49 - 2 line-to-line voltages + 1 residual voltage + 1 line-to-line voltage

(2LN + LLy + U0)

L1
L2
L3

A1
A2 V1

A3
A4 V2
A5
A6 V3
A7
A8 V4

P533CQB

60 P5/EN M/33C
Installation Protection Relay

Figure 50 - 2 line-to-line voltages + 1 residual voltage (2LL + U0)

L1
L2
L3

A1
A2 V1

A3
A4 V2
A5
A6
A7
A8 V4

P533CRA

Figure 51 - 1 line-to-line voltage + 1 line-to-line voltage (LL/Ly)

L1
L2
L3

A1
A2 V1

A3
A4
A5
A6 V3

A7
A8
P533CSB

P5/EN M/33C 61
Protection Relay Installation

LPVT typical application

Figure 52 - 3 line-to-neutral LPVT (3LN)

L1
L2
L3

LPVT L1

LPVT hub
connector
LPVT L2

LPVT L3

cable < 10m

RJ45 V1, V2, V3

P533CTA

Figure 53 - 3 line-to-neutral LPVT + 1 line-to-neutral LPVT (3LN/LNy)

L1
L2
L3

LPVT L1
LPVT hub
connector

LPVT L2

LPVT L3

cable < 10m

Termination
accessory

RJ45 V1, V2, V3

LPVT hub
connector

cable < 10m

RJ45 V4
P533CUA

NOTE: If one or two LPVT are connected to the LPVT hub connector, the
termination accessory (REL51065) delivered with the protection relay needs
to be plugged on the 2nd and 3rd inputs.

62 P5/EN M/33C
Installation Protection Relay

LPVT adapter typical application

Figure 54 - 3 line-to-neutral voltages (3LN)

L1
L2
L3

Cable between
adapter and relay < 10m

LPVT adapter
RJ45
V1, V2, V3
P533CWA

Figure 55 - 3 line-to-neutral voltages + 1 residual voltage (3LN + U0)

L1
L2
L3

Cable between
adapter and relay < 10m

LPVT adapter
RJ45
V1, V2, V3

LPVT adapter
RJ45 V4

P533CYA

Figure 56 - 3 line-to-neutral voltages + 1 line-to-neutral voltage (3LN/LNy)

L1
L2
L3

Cable between
adapter and relay < 10m
LPVT adapter

RJ45
V1, V2, V3
LPVT adapter

RJ45 V4

P533D0A

Figure 57 - 3 line-to-neutral voltages + 1 line-to-line voltage (3LN/LLy)

L1
L2
L3

Cable between
adapter and relay < 10m
LPVT adapter

RJ45
V1, V2, V3
LPVT adapter

RJ45 V4

P533D2B

P5/EN M/33C 63
Protection Relay Installation

Wiring on the real panel

DANGER
FIRE HAZARD
Apply proper tightening torque to all wire connections.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

Slot A: analogue module

DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH
• Use the appropriate (3 or 4-terminal) copper jumper for common
connections.
• After cabling, protect the rear connector A with the two protective caps.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

Cabling kit for connector A

The Easergy P5 protection relays are delivered with a cabling kit for connector A.
Depending on the type of analogue inputs of the protection relay, one of the
following packages will be provided for your device:
• Cabling kit for CT/VT analogue inputs, including:

Figure 58 - Connector A cabling kit for CT/VT analogue inputs

3 5
×10

6
4 ×10
P533D4A

◦ One protective cap with even numbers marked ①

◦ One protective cap with odd numbers marked ②
◦ One three-terminal jumper ③
◦ One four-terminal jumper ④
◦ Ten mounting screws ⑤ and washers ⑥
• Cabling kit for LPCT/LPVT analogue inputs, including:

64 P5/EN M/33C
Installation Protection Relay

Figure 59 - Connector A cabling kit for LPCT/LPVT analogue inputs

(REL51065)

2
×4

3
×4

4
×2 P533D5A

◦ One four-terminal protective cap ①

◦ Four mounting screws ② and washers ③
◦ Two termination accessories ④

General cabling operation on connector A

The following procedure presents the general mounting and cabling operation on
the connector A (for Easergy P5 model with 2 residual CTs only):
1. Insert and connect the terminal jumper for common connections.

Figure 60 - Insert the terminal jumper (example with 4-pin comb-busbar)

P533CXA

Tools Application connection diagram

P5/EN M/33C 65
Protection Relay Installation

2. Fasten the terminal jumper with the provided mounting screws and washers.

Figure 61 - Fasten the terminal jumper (example with 4-pin comb-

busbar)

P533CZB

Fasteners Mounting screws and washers included in the package

Tightening torque 1.2 N·m (10.6 lb-in)

Tool Digital torque screwdriver with + PZ2 tip

3. Connect the bent ring lug end of the cables to the terminal using the provided
mounting screws and washers.

Figure 62 - Connect the cable with bent ring lug

P533D1B

Fasteners Mounting screws and washers included in the package

Tightening torque 1.2 N·m (10.6 lb-in)

Tool Digital torque screwdriver with + PZ2 tip

NOTE: Bent ring lugs are commercially available from Schneider-Electric

in three sizes (see table below). Order the accessories before cabling the
protection relays.

Commercial Wire Section Description

Reference
REL51059 0.5 ... 1.5 mm2 (AWG 20 ... 16) Ring lug terminal 3.68 mm (0.14 in)

REL51060 1.5 ... 2.5 mm2 (AWG 16 ... 14) Ring lug terminal 4.45 mm (0.18 in)

REL51061 2.5 ... 6 mm2 (AWG 14 ... 10) Ring lug terminal 6.35 mm (0.25 in)

4. After cabling, place and insert the protective caps on the terminal.

66 P5/EN M/33C
Installation Protection Relay

Figure 63 - Insert the protective cap

P533D3A

Phase voltage with VT inputs

The phase voltage inputs are situated in the upper part of the rear connector "A",
terminals A1 to A8. The voltage measuring inputs are the following:

Figure 64 - Phase voltage inputs on connector A

A
V1 1 2 V1 A1
V1
V2 3 4 V2 A2
V3 5 6 V3 A3
V2
V4 7 8 V4 A4
9 10 A5
V3 A6
11 12
A7
13 14 V4
A8
15 16
17 18 P533D6A

P5/EN M/33C 67
Protection Relay Installation

Phase currents with CT inputs and earth/ground fault current

inputs
The current inputs are situated in the lower part of the rear connector A, terminals
A9 to A18. The current measuring inputs are the following:

Figure 65 - Current inputs on connector A

A
IL1

IL2 1

IL3

IL1 IL1 20 A Std

IL2 IL2 2

IL3 IL3 2A VS
Std/20 A Std/20 A
VS/2 A VS/2 A 3

P533D8A

① Current inputs

② Residual current inputs

③ Option with CSH core balance CT 2A or 20A

Std: Standard earth/ground fault

VS: Very Sensitive earth/ground fault

NOTE: Communication modules may be replaced (e.g. when communication

network is modified). Take into account the access to these modules when you
install and clamp rear connector wires.

Sizing the CTs

NOTICE
IMPROPER EQUIPMENT OPERATION
Select the CT size according to the requirement from the electric network.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

The Easergy P5 phase current inputs can be connected to standard 1 A or 5 A

CTs.
Sizing rules of line CTs can be specific for each function and depend on which one
of the following functions is being considered: Phase and earth/ground fault
overcurrent.

68 P5/EN M/33C
Installation Protection Relay

CT requirement
The CT must be sized to avoid saturation during steady state short circuit currents
where accuracy is required, according to the rules described below for DT or IDMT
operation time.
The condition to be fulfilled by the CT saturation current (Isat) depends on the type
of overcurrent protection operation time:

Time Delay Condition to be Fulfilled Illustration

DT Isat > 1.5 x set point (Is)

t

I
Is Isat
P533DAA

IDMT Isat > 1.5 x the curve value, which

is the smallest of the following 2 t
values:
• Isc max, maximum
installation shortcircuit
current
• 20 x Is (IDMT curve dynamic
range)
I
Is Isat
1.5 Min (Isc max, 20 Is)
Min (Isc max, 20 Is) P533DBA

The method for calculating the saturation current depends on the CT accuracy
class as indicated below.

Practical information
In the absence of any information about the settings, the characteristics below are
suitable for most situations:

Rated Rated Burden Accuracy Class CT Secondary Wiring

Secondary (VAct) and Accuracy Resistance (Rct) Resistance (Rw)
Current (Ins) Limit Factor

1A 2.5 VA 5P20 <3Ω < 0.075 Ω

5A 7.5 VA 5P20 < 0.2 Ω < 0.075 Ω

Principle for calculating the saturation current in class P:

• A class P CT is characterised by:
• Inp: Rated primary current (in A)
• Ins: Rated secondary current (in A)
• Accuracy class, expressed by a percentage, 5P or 10P, followed by the
Accuracy-Limit Factor (ALF), whose usual values are 5, 10, 15, 20, 30
• VAct: Rated burden, whose usual values are 2.5/5/7.5/10/15/30 VA
• Rct: Resistance of the secondary winding (in Ω)
The installation is characterised by the load resistance Rw at the CT secondary
(wiring + protection relay). If the CT load complies with the rated burden,
i.e. Rw x Ins ≤ VAct, the saturation current is higher than ALF x Inp.
If the resistance Rct is known, it is possible to calculate the actual CT ALF , which
takes account of the actual CT load. The saturation current equals actual

P5/EN M/33C 69
Protection Relay Installation

ALF x Inp, where:

Rct ×Ins 2 + VAct

ActualALF= ALF×
(Rct + Rw)×Ins2 P533DCA

Examples of calculating the saturation current in class P

Calculation of the saturation current for a CT with the following characteristics:
• Transformation ratio: 100 A/5 A
• Rated burden: 2.5 VA
• Accuracy class and accuracy-limit factor: 5P20
• Resistance of the secondary winding: 0.1 Ω
To have an ALF of at least 20, i.e. a saturation current of 20 x Inp = 2 kA, the load
resistance Rw of the CT must be less than:
VAct 2.5
Rw, max = = = 0.1 Ω
Ins² 5² P533DDA

This represents 12 m (39 ft) of wire with cross-section 2.5 mm² (AWG 14) for a
resistance per unit length of 8 Ω/km (2.4 mΩ/ft) approximately.For an installation
with 50 m (164 ft) of wiring with section 2.5 mm² (AWG 14), Rw = 0.4 Ω.
As a result:
Rct ×Ins2 + VAct 0.1 ×25 + 2.5
ActualALF =ALF× = =8
(Rct + Rw)×Ins 2 (0.1 + 0.4)×25 P533DEA

Therefore, the saturation current Isat = 8 x Inp = 800 A.

Note that the impedance of a Easergy P5 protection relay's current inputs (0.004
Ω) is often negligible compared to the wiring resistance.
A class PX CT is characterised by:
• Inp: Rated primary current (in A).
• Ins: Rated secondary current (in A).
• Vk: Rated knee-point voltage (in V).
• Rct: Maximum resistance of the secondary winding (in Ω).
The saturation current is calculated by the load resistance Rw at the CT secondary
(wiring + protection relay):
Vk Inp
Isat = ×
Rct + Rw Ins P533DFA

Table 7 - Examples of calculating the saturation current in Class PX

CT Vk Rct Rw Saturation current

Transfor-
mation
Ratio
100 A/5 A 17.4 V 0.13 Ω 0.4 Ω
17.4 Inp
Isat = × = 6.56 × Inp = 656 A
0.13 + 0.4 5 P533DGA

100 A/1 A 87.7 V 3.5 Ω 0.4 Ω

87.7 Inp
Isat = × = 22.48 × Inp = 2248 A
3.5 + 0.4 1 P533DHA

Current Transformer Connections

The Easergy P5 protection relays use current transformers to measure phase or
residual currents. The current transformer connections are as follows:

70 P5/EN M/33C
Installation Protection Relay

Figure 66 - Connecting the current transformers with example of CSH earth/

ground fault connection (shielded)

1
P1 A 3
2
S1 A9
A10 IL1
S2
S1 A11
A12 IL2

S1 A13
A14 IL3
1
S1 A17
A18 2A
S2
2 P533D7A

where:
• ① Terminal P111 (primary current).
• ② Terminal S111 (secondary current).
• ③ Connector A + terminal number.
• Ⓐ Implementation of the cabling between the CTs and the connector:
◦ Conductors contained in the same strand, in a shealth
◦ Conductors run along the metal structures of the MV cubicle
Recommended cable for Schneider Electric's CSH120, CSH200, CSH300 and
GO110 core balance CTs:
• Sheathed cable (to be compliant with electromagnetic compatibility
requirements), shielded by tinned copper braid.
• Resistance per unit length < 100 mΩ/m (30.5 mΩ/ft).
• Minimum dielectric strength: 1000 V (700 Vrms).
• Connect the cable shielding in the shortest manner possible to Easergy P5.
• Flatten the connection cable against the metal frames of the cubicle.
The maximum resistance of the connection wiring must not exceed 4 Ω (i.e. 20 m
maximum for 100 mΩ/m or 66 ft maximum for 30.5 mΩ/ft).

Wiring details
Refer to the table below for the detailed information on wiring the screw-type input
connectors of the analogue module in slot A:

Applicable cable end Wire gauge Tightening Tool

torque

0.5 ... 1.5 1.2 N.m (-) 6.5 mm (+) PZ2

Ø1 mm2 (AWG (10.6 lb-in) (1/4 in.) screwdriver
Ø2 20 ... 16) screwdriver
P533MKA
1.5 ... 2.5
Ø 1 = 4 mm mm2 (AWG
(0.16 in.) 16 ... 14)
Ø2 < 8.5 mm (0.33 in.)
2.5 ... 6 mm2
(AWG 14 ...
10)

11. Markings of current transformer terminals S1, S2, P1 and P2 according to IEC 60044-1 Standard

P5/EN M/33C 71
Protection Relay Installation

LPCT inputs

NOTICE
IMPROPER EQUIPMENT OPERATION
Use RJ45 cable no longer than 10 m (32.8 ft) for EMC immunity.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in improper operation.

Figure 67 - LPCT inputs on slot A

A
1
20A
2
RJ45 IL1 3
2A 4

RJ45 IL2 IL1 RJ45-1

IL2 RJ45-2

RJ45 IL3
IL3
RJ45-3

V1, V2, V3 RJ45-4

V4 RJ45-5

P533D9A

An LPCT sensor is characterised among other parameters by:

• The rated primary current Ipr (value of the primary current for User secondary
voltage output)
• The rated extended primary current Iepr
• The rated secondary voltage is 22.5 mV
The LPCT input of the Easergy P5 protection relay is characterised by the rated
input voltage that depends on the rated extended primary current of the sensor. As
an LPCT sensor covers a wide range of primary current and therefore has a high
dynamic input it is necessary to adapt the input interface of the relay to the primary
current selected. More generally the LPCT inputs must be compliant with the
IEC61869-10 standard.

Parameter Value Comment

Rated secondary voltage 22.5 mV

Rated primary current factor 0.25 - 0.50 - 1.00 - 1.25 - 1.33 - This configuration parameter
2.00 - 2.50 - 3.20 - 4.00 - 5.00 - corresponds to the rated
6.30 - 6.66 - 10 - 16 - 20 - 31.5 extended primary current
factor of the LPCT

72 P5/EN M/33C
Installation Protection Relay

LPVT inputs

NOTICE
IMPROPER EQUIPMENT OPERATION
Use CAT6 cable no longer than 10 m (32.8 ft) for EMC immunity.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in improper operation.

Figure 68 - LPVT inputs on slot A

A
1
20A
2
3
2A 4

IL1 RJ45-1

IL2 RJ45-2

IL3
RJ45-3

RJ45 V1, V2, V3

V1, V2, V3 RJ45-4

RJ45 V4 V4 RJ45-5

P533DIA

More generally the LPVTs inputs must be compliant with the IEC61869-11
standard.
The table below lists the technical data concerning the ratings and limits of the
LPVT channels:

Parameter Value
Rated secondary voltage 3.25 V / √3
Extended rated voltage 0.25 to 1.5 rated voltage

P5/EN M/33C 73
Protection Relay Installation

Digital input connections

The Easergy P5 protection relays provide two types of digital inputs:
• Digital inputs isolated from earth/ground and independent.
• Digital inputs isolated from earth/ground, with a common connection point.

DI1 DI3

DI2 DI4

P533DJA
P533DKA

The isolated independent digital inputs are isolated from earth/ground, and each
other. They should be used to acquire data from the following digital sensors:
• Non-isolated sensors (earthed/grounded).
• Remote sensors.
• Sensors from several zones in the installation that do not have equipotential
bonding.
• Sensors from different devices.
To help to ensure that each digital input is isolated, each digital input must be
connected with an independent cable.
The isolated digital inputs with a common connection point are isolated from earth/
ground, but are not isolated in relation to one another (common point). They
should be used to acquire data from the following digital sensors:
• Isolated sensors.
• Sensors that are not isolated but come from the same zone of an installation
with equipotential bonding.
• Sensors that preferably come from the same equipment. The different digital
inputs are contained in the same cable.
The electrical conductors connected to the digital inputs of the Easergy P5
protection relays should run along the metal structures of the cubicle to reduce
earth/ground loops. The conductors are contained in the same strand and, if
possible twisted, to avoid the creation of cabling loops.

NOTICE
IMPROPER EQUIPMENT OPERATION
When connecting the digital inputs:
• Avoid large cabling loops in the various power supplies.
• Do not short-circuit any of the galvanic insulation.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in improper operation or
equipment damage.

When the environmental and installation conditions are highly unfavorable for the
Easergy P5 protection relay, a shielded twisted pair should be used. In such
cases, the cable shielding is connected to the local earth/ground at both ends
(provided that the installation has an equipotential bonding network).

74 P5/EN M/33C
Installation Protection Relay

Slot B: power supply + digital 4-input/4-output

Power supply

DANGER
FIRE HAZARD
• Protect the power supplying circuit of the Easergy P5 protection relay
against overcurrents.
• For breaking capacity higher than 40W with L/R = 40 ms, protect the digital
output contacts with an additional customer protection (RC or zener diode).
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

The power supply available for Easergy P5 protection relays is:

• Easergy P5x20: 24-250 V DC/100-230 V AC
• Easergy P5x30: 48-250 V DC/100-230 V AC
• Easergy P5x30: 24-48 V DC
The nominal voltage range of Easergy P5 protection relays is specified on the
reference label (local panel).

NOTICE
POWER SUPPLY DAMAGE
Before connecting the auxiliary voltage to the Easergy P5 protection relay:
Make sure the nominal value of the auxiliary device voltage corresponds with
the nominal value of the auxiliary system voltage.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

Figure 69 - Power supply terminals on connector B

B19

B20

P533DLA

Digital inputs/outputs
The digital 4-input/4-output module (4I4O) is always mounted in slot B of an
Easergy P5 protection relay. Digital outputs DO1, DO2 and DO3 are specifically
enhanced for circuit breaker (CB) control. Digital output WD is defined as a
Watchdog.
The operating nominal voltage for digital inputs is:
• 24 V DC to 250 V DC
• 100 V AC to 230 V AC
The configuration of the 20-terminal connector of the module is shown in the
following figure:

P5/EN M/33C 75
Protection Relay Installation

Figure 70 - Configuration of connector B

B DI1 1
2
3
1 DI1
2 DI2 4
3 5
4 DI2
5 DI3 6
6 DI3 DI4 7
7
8 DI4 8
9
DO1 DO1 9
10 HS
11 10
12 DO2
13 DO2 11
C
14 12
15 DO3 C
16 13
17 WD DO3 14
18 C
19 15
20 Power supply
WD 16
17
18
19
20 P533DMA

Watchdog
The watchdog (self-monitoring) is a changeover contact provided on slot B, digital
output WD, to indicate the health of the device (refer to Watchdog relay, page
435). Schneider Electric strongly recommends that these contacts are hardwired
into the substation's automation system for alarm purposes.

Figure 71 - Watchdog terminals on connector B

B16
16
17 B17
18
B18
P533DNA

NOTE: Refer to Wiring accessories for Slot B, C, D, E, page 79 for the

detailed information on wiring the terminals of this module.

76 P5/EN M/33C
Installation Protection Relay

Slot C, D, E: additional digital input/output modules (6I4O/12I4O/5I5O)

The Easergy P5 protection relay can be provided with additional digital input/
output modules (6I4O, 12I4O and 5I5O ) in slot C, D and E (only slot C in P5x20).
The configuration of the 20-terminal connector of the module is shown in the
following figures:

Figure 72 - Configuration of connector

C D E DI1 1 DI1 1 DI1 1

2 DI2 2 DI2 2
DI2 3 DI3 3 3
4 DI4 4 DI3 4
DI3 5 DI5 5 DI4 5
6 DI6 6 6
DI4 7 7 DI5 7
8 DI7 8 8
DI5 9 DI8 9 DO1 C 9
10 DI9 10 10
C
DI6 11 DI10 11 11
12 DI11 12 DO2 C 12
DO1 13 DI12 13 13
S C
14 14 14
DO2 15 DO1 15 DO3 15
S S C
16 DO2 S
16 16
DO3 17 17 DO4 17
S HS
18 DO3 18 18
S
DO4 S
19 DO4 S
19 DO5 HS
19
20 20 20

P533DOA

NOTE: Refer to Wiring accessories for Slot B, C, D, E, page 79 for the

detailed information on wiring the terminals of this module. And refer to Slot
occupation rules, page 487 for the information on the slot occupation rules.
The DI1 input on 12I4O can be use as a standard digital input (by default) or as a
counting input.

NOTICE
IMPROPER EQUIPMENT OPERATION
Specific wiring requirements for counting input 12I4O DI1:
• Unshielded twisted pair cable between pin 1 and pin 7
• Section 0.4 to 1.5 mm²
• Example of recommended cable : Belden 9409 or equivalent
• No earth/ground connection on the Easergy P5 side or on the other side to
keep the line symmetrical
• Maximum cable length: 10 m
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

NOTICE
IMPROPER EQUIPMENT OPERATION
If the counting input DI1 on 12I4O is selected, this input cannot be used by any
other protection functions.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

P5/EN M/33C 77
Protection Relay Installation

Slots D and E: Arc-flash module (for Easergy P5x30 only)

The Easergy P5x30 can be equipped with an Arc-flash module (with 3 digital
inputs, 3 digital outputs and 3 light sensor inputs) in its slot D and E.
The configuration of the 20-terminal connector of the Arc-flash module is shown in
the following figures:

Figure 73 - Configuration of terminals in Slot D and E

D E DI1 1
2
DI2 3
4
DI1 DI3 5
6
DI2
DO1 C
7
DI3
8
DO1 DO2 9
C
10
DO2 C
11
DO3 DO3 S
12
13
Arc1 14
Arc2 Arc1 15
L> 16
Arc3
Arc2 17
L> 18
Arc3 19
L> 20
P533DPA

NOTE: Refer to Wiring accessories for Slot B, C, D, E, page 79 for the

detailed information on wiring the terminals of this module.

Installing the digital I/O connectors

The digital I/O connectors provided with the protection relay are mounted on the
rear panel using the screws that come with the connectors.

Figure 74 - Installing digital I/O connectors on the rear panel

P533DQA

Tool 2.5 mm (3/32 in.) flat screwdriver

Tightening torque 0.4 N.m (3.5 lb-in)

Subsequent operation After installing the connectors, stick the connector identification labels
included in the package on the rear panel above the connectors.

78 P5/EN M/33C
Installation Protection Relay

Wiring accessories for Slot B, C, D, E

Wiring the screw-type terminals

The detailed information for wiring the screw-type DI/DO terminals in slot B, C, D,
and E is listed in the table below:

Cable end Wire gauge Tightening torque Tool

Single wire: 0.4 ... 0.5 N.m (—) 2.5 mm (3/32 in.)
0.2 ... 2.5 mm2 (3.5 ... 4.4 lb-in) flat blade screwdriver
(AWG 24 ... 14)
Double wires:
L P533DRA 0.2 ... 1.5 mm2
(AWG 24 ... 16)
Contact tip length
L = 12 mm (0.5 in.)

Comb-busbars for wiring at slot C, D, E

The comb-busbar can be used to optimise the installation, for example, by
creating rapidly a common point for digital inputs.
To facilitate wiring the terminals in Slot C, D, E of Easergy P5 protection relay, the
user can order the following comb-busbars that comes in the form of 50-piece or
100-piece packs.

Commercial Description Quantity/Pack Illustration

Reference
REL51054 2-pin comb-busbar 100 pieces

P533DSA

REL51055 3-pin comb-busbar 100 pieces

P533DTA

REL51056 4-pin comb-busbar 50 pieces

P533DUA

REL51057 5-pin comb-busbar 50 pieces

P533DVA

REL51058 6-pin comb-busbar 50 pieces

P533DWA

Connecting earth/ground

DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH
• Connect the Easergy P5 protection relay to earth/ground with a nut and
washer using any of the indicated stud terminals (see Fixing the earthing/
grounding cable to the Easergy P5 protection relay, page 80 below).
• Check equipotential earthing/grounding network and test earth/ground
during installation.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

The earth/ground connections are accessible on the rear panel of the protection
relays. For Easergy P5x20, there are two connectors located in the bottom left or
right corner of the protection relays; For Easergy P5x30, there are three, one in
the bottom right corner and the other two near Connector A.

P5/EN M/33C 79
Protection Relay Installation

Figure 75 - Earth/ground studs on Easergy P5x20

P533DXA

Figure 76 - Earth/ground stud on Easergy P5x30

P533DYA

Figure 77 - Fixing the earthing/grounding cable to the Easergy P5 protection

relay

3 P533DZA

① Washer ③ Earthing/grounding cable

② M4 hexagon nut ④ Earth/ground stud on the protection relay

Every Easergy P5 must be connected to the local earth/ground bar using one M4
earth/ground stud on the relay case to prevent dangerous voltages being present
in case of a wiring fault or damage to the product. Also, it helps to ensure that the
Easergy P5 protection relay meets EMC claims.

80 P5/EN M/33C
Installation Protection Relay

Figure 78 - Compartment earthing/grounding terminal

A Metal upright of the LV compartment D Earth/ground connection made to a surface

with no paint, varnish or any insulating
material. Spring washers must be used.

B LV compartment E Local earth/ground

C The Easergy P5 protection relay is F Electrical protection

installed in the LV compartment near
the earthing/grounding terminal or,
else, near one of the metal uprights

The minimum recommended wire size is 2.5 mm² (AWG 14) and should have a
ring terminal at the relay end. Due to the limitations of the ring terminal, the
maximum wire size that can be used is 6.0 mm² (AWG 10) per wire.

Terminal Applicable Wire Max. wire Tighten- Tool

type cable end gauge length ing
torque

earth/ 2.5 ... 6 50 cm (21 1.2 N.m socket

ground stud mm2 in.) (10.6 lb-in) wrench
Ø
P533M1A
(AWG 14 for M4
... 10) screw
Ø = 4 mm (0.16 in.)

NOTE: To avoid any possibility of electrolytic action between brass or copper

earth/ground conductors and the rear panel of the protection relay,
precautions should be taken to isolate them from one another. It is
recommended to place a nickel-plated or insulating washer between the
conductor and Easergy P5 case or to use tinned ring terminals.

P5/EN M/33C 81
Protection Relay Installation

Optional rear communication ports and modules

Location of the communication ports

NOTICE
IMPROPER EQUIPMENT OPERATION
Use RJ45 cable no longer than 10 m (32.8 ft).
Failure to follow these instructions can result in improper operation.

The Easergy P5 protection relay range includes optional rear communication ports
and modules with RJ45 or fibre optic connections. The ports and modules are
accessible in the lower part of the rear panel. The following figure shows the
location of these single or dual communication ports and modules:

Easergy P5x20 Easergy P5x30

Easergy P5x20 Easergy P5x30

Slot M Dual port Ethernet TP or fibre optic module, configurable to RSTP redundancy
mode or Dual IP mode without redundancy

Slot N Dual port RS485 or fibre optic serial communication module

Slot P Single extension port for connection with external module and demodulated IRIG-
B input and Back-up memory

Slot M + N Dual port Ethernet fibre optic module with HSR/PRP

Slot L - Dual port Ethernet TP module with

RSTP redundancy

82 P5/EN M/33C
Installation Protection Relay

Installing the modules

NOTICE
IMPROPER EQUIPMENT OPERATION
• Check and make sure the communication modules are locked on the
protection relay.
• Never plug in or draw out the communication modules while the Easergy P5
protection relay is in service, otherwise the Easergy P5 protection relay will
reboot and consequently lose the setting changes made within the last 30
minutes.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in setting change erasure
and consequently mis-operation of the protection relay.

The communication modules are designed with a self-locking structure. After

sliding all the way into position along the bottom slots, the module locks itself in
final place. The green flippable locker at one end locks the communication module
in place.

Figure 79 - Installing the communication module

P5/EN M/33C 83
Protection Relay Installation

Slot L: Ethernet communication module with RSTP redundancy (reference REL51042)

Used for Easergy P5x30 only
The Ethernet communication module is inserted in slot L of Easergy P5x30. It can
be selected as an option when ordering the device or purchased later and
installed on site.
It provides RSTP protocol, which allows fast reconfiguration of the communication
system.

P533M4A

Figure 80 - Example of Ethernet module connection

Table 8 - Characteristics of the Ethernet communication module (reference

REL51042)

Characteristics
Location Slot L
Connection 2 x RJ45 connectors with communication indicators

P533M6A

Ethernet connection 10/100 Mbps

Protocol TP or RSTP
Maximum cable length 10 m (32.8 ft)

84 P5/EN M/33C
Installation Protection Relay

Slot M: Ethernet communication module with RSTP redundancy

The Ethernet communication module is inserted in slot M of the device. It can be
selected as an option when ordering the device or purchased later and installed
on site.
It is available in two versions for copper wire ① or fibre optic ② connection.
It provides RSTP redundancy protocol, which allows fast reconfiguration of the
communication system.

1 2

P533M7A

Ethernet module with RJ45 connectors (reference REL51038)

Figure 81 - Example of Ethernet module connection

Table 9 - Characteristics of the Ethernet communication module (reference

REL51038)

Characteristics
Location Slot M
Connection 2 x RJ45 connectors with communication
indicators

P533M6A

Ethernet connection 10/100 Mbps

Protocol TP or RSTP
Maximum cable length 10 m (32.8 ft)

P5/EN M/33C 85
Protection Relay Installation

Ethernet module with fibre optic connectors (reference

REL51039)

CAUTION
EYE DAMAGE AND BLINDNESS
Never look into the end of the fibre optic.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in serious injury.

NOTICE
IMPROPER EQUIPMENT OPERATON
• Use only Schneider approved optical transceiver components.
• Never replace the optical transceiver components with unauthorised
manufactured parts.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

Use optical power meters to determine the operation or signal level of the device.
If electrical-to-optical converters are used, they must have management of
character idle state capability (when the fibre optic cable interface is "Light off").
Specific care should be taken with the bending radius of the fibres, and the use of
optical shunts is not recommended as these can decrease the communication
performance of the transmission path over time.

Figure 82 - Example of Ethernet module connection

Table 10 - Characteristics of the Ethernet communication module (reference

REL51039)

Characteristics
Location Slot M

Connection 2 LC connectors

P533M9A

Ethernet connection 100 Mbps

Protocol TP or RSTP

Optical wavelength 1300 nm

Fibre type Multi-mode glass fibre

Maximum attenuation (fibre optic + connectors) 14 dB (at fibre optic diameter: 62,5/125 μm or
50/125 μm)

Minimum range 2000 m (6561,7 ft)

86 P5/EN M/33C
Installation Protection Relay

Slot N: serial line communication modules

The Serial line communication module is inserted in slot N of the device. It can be
selected as an option when ordering the device or purchased later and installed
on site. It is available in 2 versions for RS485 ① or fibre optic ② connection.

1 2

P533MAA

RS485 serial line module (reference REL51036)

The Easergy P5 protection relay can be connected to any RS485 full duplex or
half duplex communication network and can exchange the data necessary for
centralised management of the electrical installation by a SCADA. The serial
RS485 ports are designed for RJ45 connections with the following characteristics
for each terminal.

Figure 83 - Examples of RS485 serial link module connection

VW3A8306RC 1 nF 120 Ω
4
1 nF 120 Ω 5
4 1
2
5 1 nF 120 Ω

P533MBA

The internal polarisation resistor 620 Ω can be enabled or disabled with eSetup
Easergy Pro (see parameter "pull line" in the communication manual).
In order to avoid signal reflections on the line, data transmission lines should
always be terminated with a RC terminating impedance (120 Ω/1 nF, reference
VW3A8306RC), or with a 4 line option that includes 2 pairs of 120 Ω/1 nF RC
terminating impedance, fitted at both ends across the signal wires.

Figure 84 - Terminating the transmission line with a RC terminating

accessory
VW3A8306RC

P533MCA

P5/EN M/33C 87
Protection Relay Installation

Table 11 - Characteristics of the RS485 serial line module (reference

REL51036)

Characteristics
Location Slot N

Standard EIA 2-wires RS485 differential or EIA 4-wires RS485 differential

Connection 2 x RJ45 connectors

P533M6A

Protocol TP or RSTP
Line polarisation 620 Ω

Communication network Half or full duplex

Maximum cable length 10 m (32.8 ft)

Figure 85 - RJ45 female connector wiring

EIA-485-2
1 1

RJ45 female connector 4 4

viewed from front 5 5

1 8 8 8

EIA-485-4
1 1
2 2
4 4
5 5

8 8

P533MDA

88 P5/EN M/33C
Installation Protection Relay

Fibre optic serial line module (reference REL51040)

CAUTION
EYE DAMAGE AND BLINDNESS
Never look into the end of the fibre optic.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in serious injury.

Use optical power meters to determine the operation or signal level of the device.
If electrical-to-optical converters are used, they must have management of
character idle state capability (for when the fibre optic cable interface is "Light
off").
Specific care should be taken with the bending radius of the fibres, and the use of
optical shunts is not recommended as these can decrease the performance of the
transmission path over time.
The relay uses 1300 nm multi-mode 100BaseFx ST(BFOC) 2.5 connectors (one
Tx/optical emitter, one Rx/optical receiver).

Figure 86 - Example of fibre optic serial line module connection

Table 12 - Characteristics of the fibre optic serial line module (reference

REL51040)

Characteristics
Location Slot N
Connection 2 x ST (BFOC) connectors

Optical wavelength 820 nm

Maximum attenuation (fibre • 5.6 dB at fibre diamenter 50/125 μm

optic + connectors)
• 9.4 dB at fibre diamenter 62.5/125 μm
• 14.9 dB at fibre diamenter 100/140 μm
• 19.2 dB at fibre diamenter 200 (HCS) μm

Minimum range 2000 m (6561,7 ft)

P5/EN M/33C 89
Protection Relay Installation

Slot P: extension module (reference REL51034)

The extension module is inserted in slot P of the device. It can be selected as an
option when ordering the device or purchased later and installed on site.

P533MGA

NOTICE
ETHERNET PORT DAMAGE
Connect only Easergy P5 accessories to the extension module.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

Connection of other equipment such as computer, switch, low power current

transducer (LPCT) type sensor or other protection relay can result in the damage
of its Ethernet port.
The extension module provides:
• Automatic back-up of data (refer to Backup memory, page 437):
◦ Active configuration file
◦ Disturbance records
◦ Sequence of events records
◦ Power system maintenance data log
• Connection to the external modules
The following Easergy P5 accessories can be connected to the extension module:
• IRIG-B module (see IRIG-B module (reference REL51045), page 112 for
more information)
• MET148-2 temperature sensor module (see MET148-2 - temperature sensor
module (reference 59641), page 109 for more information)

Table 13 - Characteristics of the extension module (reference REL51034)

Characteristics
Location Slot P
Connection RJ45 connector

P533M6A

Type of cable The following cables (Reference numbers) can

be selected for connection:
• Reference 59660, length: 0.6 m (1.97 ft);
• Reference 59661, length: 2 m (6.56 ft);
• Reference 59662, length: 4 m (13.1 ft);

90 P5/EN M/33C
Installation Protection Relay

Slot M & N: Ethernet communication module with HSR and PRP redundancy (reference
REL51033)
The Ethernet communication module is inserted in both slot M and N of the
device. It can be selected as an option when ordering the device or purchased
later and installed on site. It provides PRP (Parallel Redundancy Protocol) and
HSR (High-availability Seamless Redundancy) and is selectable by configuration.
The module allows instantaneous reconfiguration of the communication system
without communication packet loss.

P533MHA

CAUTION
EYE DAMAGE AND BLINDNESS
Never look into the end of the fibre optic.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in serious injury.

Use optical power meters to determine the operation or signal level of the device.
If electrical-to-optical converters are used, they must have management of
character idle state capability (when the fibre optic cable interface is "Light off").
Specific care should be taken with the bending radius of the fibres, and the use of
optical shunts is not recommended as these can decrease the communication
performance of the transmission path over time.

Figure 87 - Example of Ethernet module connection

P5/EN M/33C 91
Protection Relay Installation

Table 14 - Characteristics of the Ethernet communication module (reference

REL51033)

Characteristics
Location Both slot M and N
Connection 2 LC connectors

P533M9A

Ethernet connection 100 Mbps

Optical wavelength 1300 nm

Fibre type Multi-mode glass fibre

Maximum attenuation (fibre 14 dB (at fibre diameter 50/125 μm or 62.5/125 μm)

optic + connectors)

92 P5/EN M/33C
Installation Protection Relay

Other accessories
CSH120 (reference 59635), CSH200 (reference 59636), CSH300 (reference 59637) and
GO110 (reference 50134)

Description
The CSH120, CSH200, CSH300 and GO110 core balance current transformers
(CT) are designed for direct residual current measurement. Due to their low
voltage insulation, they can only be used around insulated cables.
CSH300 ①, CSH200 ② and CSH120 ③ are closed CTs, with different inner
diameters:
• CSH300 ① inner diameter: 291mm (11.46 in.)
• CSH200 ② inner diameter: 196 mm (7.72 in.)
• CSH120 ③ inner diameter: 120 mm (4.72 in.)
GO110 ④ is a split CT, with an inner diameter of 110 mm (4.33 in.).
NOTE: GO110 core balance transformer is not sold anymore. However, for
any refurbishing projects, the Easergy P5 protection relay is compliant with
this core balance transformer and therefore can be connected together as
shown in Typical application diagrams, page 57.

Figure 88 - Core balance current transformers (CT)

1 2 3 4

F0550

P533H3A

① CSH300 core balance CT ③ CSH120 core balance CT

② CSH200 core balance CT ④ GO110 core balance CT

P5/EN M/33C 93
Protection Relay Installation

Dimensions
Figure 89 - CSH120, CSH 200 and CSH300 dimensions
4 x ØM 4 x ØN

F ØA H K B

J L

E D
P533H4A

A B D E F H J K L M N
CSH120 120 mm 164 mm 44 mm 190 mm 80 mm 40 mm 166 mm 65 mm 35 mm 6 mm 5 mm
(4.72 in.) (6.46 in.) (1.73 in.) (7.48 in.) (3.15 in.) (1.57 in) (6.54 in.) (2.56 in.) (1.38 in.) (0.24 in.) (0.2 in.)

CSH200 196 mm 256 mm 46 mm 274 mm 120 mm 60 mm 254 mm 104 mm 37 mm

(7.72 in.) (10.1 in.) (1.81 in.) (10.8 in.) (4.72 in.) (2.36 in.) (10 in.) (4.09 in.) (1.46 in.)

CSH300 291 mm 360 mm 46 mm 390 mm 120 mm 60 mm 369 mm 104 mm 37 mm

(11.46 (14.17 (1.81 in.) (15.35 (4.72 in.) (2.36 in.) (14.53 (4.09 in.) (1.46 in.)
in.) in.) in.) in.)

Figure 90 - GO110 dimensions

D
T1 T1 M5

E
C
T2
ØB
T2

ØA
G F
P533H5B

A B D E F G

110 mm (4.33 in.) 224 mm (8.82 in.) 92 mm (3.62 in.) 16 mm (0.63 in.) 44 mm (1.73 in.) 8 mm (0.31 in.)

Opening and closing the GO110 CT

To open the GO110 CT:
• Undo both T1 nuts and remove the two pins.
• Undo both T2 nuts and remove the two bars.
To close the GO110 CT:
• Replace the two bars and tighten both T2 nuts (T2 tightening torque: 30 N.m
or 0.34 lb-in).
• Replace the two pins and tighten both T1 nuts (T1 tightening torque: 70 N.m
or 0.79 lb-in).

94 P5/EN M/33C
Installation Protection Relay

Assembly

DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH
• Only qualified personnel should install this equipment. Such work should be
performed only after reading this entire set of instructions.
• NEVER work alone.
• Turn off all power supplying this equipment before working on or inside it.
Consider all sources of power, including the possibility of backreading.
• Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device to confirm that all power
is off.
• Only CSH120, CSH200 and GO110 core balance CTs can be used for direct
residual current measurement.
• Install the core balance CTs on insulated cables.
• Cables with a rated voltage of more than 1000 V must also have an earthed/
grounded shielding.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

Table 15 - Instructions for assembling the core balance CTs

Select a CT with a diameter at least twice the size of the cable harness going through it

Group the cable(s) in the middle of the CT and use non-conducting binding to hold the CT
in place around the cable harness.

Do not bend the cable(s) close to the CT; install the CT on a straight section of the cable(s)
that is at least twice as long as the CT diameter.

Remember to pass the shielded earthing/grounding braid on the cables back through the
CT. Check that the braid goes the right way through the CT.

When assembling the core balance CTs, group the medium voltage cable (or
cables) in the middle of the core balance CT, use non-conductive binding to hold
the cables, and remember to insert the shielded earthing/grounding braid of the
medium voltage cable through the core balance.

P5/EN M/33C 95
Protection Relay Installation

Connection
Recommended cable:
• Sheathed cable (to be compliant with electromagnetic compatibility
requirements), shielded by tinned copper braid.
• Resistance per unit length < 100 mΩ/m (30.5 mΩ/ft).
• Minimum dielectric strength: 1000 V (700 Vrms).
• Connect the cable shielding in the shortest manner possible to the protection
relay.
• Flatten the connection cable against the metal frames of the cubicle.

Core Wiring Type of Tools Tightening torque

balance CT terminal
CSH120 1 to 2.5 mm2 (AWG 18 to 14) wire 12 M3.5 screw Flat blade screwdriver 0.8 to 1 N.m
CSH200 Stripped length: 8 mm (0.31 in.) 3.5 mm (0.14 in.) (7.1 to 8.8 lb-in.)
CSH300
GO110 1.5 to 6 mm2 (AWG 16 to 10) wire 12 M5 screw Flat spanner for M5 nut 30 N.m (0.34 lb-in.)
Lug with inner diameter: 5 mm (0.2 in.)

The maximum resistance of the connection wiring must not exceed 4 Ω (i.e. 20 m
maximum for 100 mΩ/m or 66 ft maximum for 30.5 mΩ/ft).

Figure 91 - Connecting the core balance CT

15/17

16/18
12 cm max

P5 ground stud
P533H6A

Note that for specific application, it is possible to connect 2 CSH200 core balance
CTs in parallel, for example, when the medium-voltage cables have a large
diameter and the installation uses 2 or 3 conductors per phase.

NOTICE
UNINTENDED AND NUISANCE TRIPPING
The shield of the CSH cable must be connected to the nearest Easergy P5
protection relay earth/ground stud with a cable of less than 12 cm (4.72 in.).
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment misoperation.

12. Depending on the earth/ground fault current input selected (2 A or 20 A).

96 P5/EN M/33C
Installation Protection Relay

Characteristics
Table 16 - Characteristics of the core balance CTs

Characteristics CSH120 CSH200 CSH300 GO110

Inner diameter 120 mm 196 mm 291 mm 110 mm
(4.72 in) (7.72 in) (11.46 in.) (4.33 in.)

Weight 0.6 kg 1.4 kg 2.5 kg 3.2 kg

(1.32 lb) (3.09 lb) (5.51 lb) (7.04 lb)

Accuracy (1CT) ±5% at -20°C (68°F) < 0.5%

±6% max. at -25°C to 70°C (-13°F to +158°F) (10 A to 50 A)

Accuracy (2 CTs - ±10% ±10% -

in parallel)

Transformation 470/1
ratio
Maximum 20 kA - 1s
permissible
current (1CT)

Maximum - 6 kA - 1s 6 kA - 1s -
permissible
current (2 CSHs
in parallel)

Operating -25°C to +70°C (-3°F to +158°F)

temperature

Storage -40°C to +85°C (-0°F to +185°F)

temperature

P5/EN M/33C 97
Protection Relay Installation

LPVT hub connector (reference EMS59573)

Description
The LPVT hub connector is a simple passive device that combines three LPVT
signals coming from 3 different connectors on one single RJ45 connection.
The output of the LPVT hub connector is directly connected to the LPVT input of
the Easergy P5 protection relay.
The LPVT Hub connector also manages the presence of each LPVT connection
thanks to a daisy chain across the three sensors. If at least one LPVT is missing or
one cable is damaged, an alarm event is logged and displayed on the local panel.

Figure 92 - LPVT hub connector

LPVT L3
LPVT L2
LPVT L1
OUT

P533H7A

Connection
The LPVT hub connector is connected to the protection relay through its RJ45
output connector and to the LPVT sensors through the RJ45 input connectors.

Figure 93 - LPVT hub connector connected to Easergy P5x30 protection

relay

LPVT L3 LPVT L3
LPVT L2 LPVT L2
LPVT L1 LPVT L1
OUT OUT

P533H8A

98 P5/EN M/33C
Installation Protection Relay

Characteristics
Table 17 - Characteristics of the LPVT hub connector

Characteristics Values
Electric
Input voltage < 10 V

Input voltage limits < 30 V

Network frequency 50/60 Hz

Electrical connection Output : RJ45 connector

Input : 3 RJ45 connector

Form factor
Dimension (L x W x H) 95 mm x 40 mm x 40 mm (3.74 x 1.57 x 1.57 in)

Weight 0.25 kg (0.55 lb)

Mounting support DIN rail

Environment
IP degree of protection IEC 60529 IP30

IK degree of protection IEC 62262 IK07

Ambient air temperature for - -40℃ to 85℃ (-40℉ to 185℉)

operation

Ambient air temperature for - -40℃ to 85℃ (-40℉ to 185℉)

storage

Fire resistance IEC 60695-2-11 850℃ (1562℉)

Environmental characteristic IEC 60068-2-11 Salt mist : 200 hours

Relative humidity IEC 60068-2-30 95%

Operating altitude - ≤ 3000 m (1.86 miles)

P5/EN M/33C 99
Protection Relay Installation

Voltage adapter (reference EMS59572)

Description
The voltage transformer adapter is made with 4 resistor bridges used to interface
conventional voltage transformers (VTs) with the Easergy P5 protection relay
equipped for LPCT/LPVT sensors (please order this accessory separately from
Schneider Electric).

Connection

NOTICE
INCORRECT VOLTAGE MEASUREMENT
• The earth/ground of the connection diagrams below must be the same of the
whole Easergy P5 protection relay. The 0 V of the Easergy P5 power supply
input must be connected to this earth/ground.
• Earth/ground connection point of AC voltage adapter must be connected to
the isolated ground of VT sensor (LV transformer). For other wiring cases,
please consult Schneider Electric.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in measurement error.

Figure 94 - 3 phase-to-neutral voltages connection

RJ45 cable
Brown
Black

Grey

Earth/ground connection
point of voltage adapter
P533H9A

Figure 95 - 2 line-to-line voltages connection

RJ45 cable
Brown
Black

Grey

Earth/ground connection
point of voltage adapter
P533HAA

100 P5/EN M/33C

Installation Protection Relay

Figure 96 - 1 additional line-to-line voltage connection

RJ45 cable

Black Earth/ground connection

point of voltage adapter
P533HBA

Figure 97 - Open-delta connection for P5x30

RJ45 cable
Black

Earth/ground connection
point of voltage adapter
P533HCA

Figure 98 - Open-delta connection for P5U20

RJ45 cable
Brown

Earth/ground connection
point of voltage adapter
P533HDA

The Ethernet RJ45 cable is connected to the Easergy P5 protection relay.

Length maximum: 4 m (13.12 ft)
• CCA770 - 0.6 m (1.97 ft) (reference: 59660)
• CCA772 - 2 m (6.56 ft) (reference: 59661)
• CCA774 - 4 m (13.12 ft) (reference 59662)
NOTE: The voltage adapter is delivered with black, brown, grey and light blue
cable. The light blue cable in the voltage transformer adapter input is not used.

P5/EN M/33C 101

Protection Relay Installation

Dimensions
Figure 99 - External dimensions of the AC voltage adapter

B C

P533HEA

A B C D E
120 mm (4.72 in.) 38 mm (1.49 in.) 52 mm (2.04 in.) 90 mm (3.54 in.) 25 mm (0.98 in.)

Mounting

DIN rail mounting Fastening with collar Mounting on telequick grid

Screw

Click!

Screw
P533HFA

P533HHA

Mounting the adapter by its Mounting the adapter using Mounting the adapter on
fixture structure on rail two fastening collars (width: 4 Telequick grid using two
mm/0.16 in) screws (4 mm/0.16 in)

RJ45 terminal locking

The RJ45 input of the voltage transformer adapter can be locked in the open or
closed position by placing a seal in the hole marked with a lock symbol (see figure
below). This allows to lock the RJ45 connector of the Ethernet cable in its slot or
helps to prevent its connection.

Figure 100 - RJ45 terminal lock

Locked in Locked in
close position open position
P533HGA

102 P5/EN M/33C

Installation Protection Relay

Characteristics
Table 18 - Characteristics of the voltage adapter

Characteristics Standard Value

Input voltage 50 V AC to 200 V AC (line-to-line)

Voltage max 600 V max permanent

Network frequency 50/60 Hz

Ambient air IEC 60068-2-1 -40℃ to 70℃ (-40℉ to 158℉)

temperature for IEC 60068-2-2
operation

Ambient air IEC 60068-2-1 -40℃ to 85℃ (-40℉ to 185℉)

temperature for IEC 60068-2-2
storage

Humidity IEC 60068-2-30 95% HR; 144 hours (6 cycles of 12 hours at 55°C
(131°F) and another 12 hours at 25°C (77°F))

Salt spray IEC 60068-2-11 168 hours

Vibration IEC 60068-2-6 10 Hz to 2000 Hz; 10 cycles at 2g (peak value)

Bump IEC 60068-2-29 20 g/16 ms/1000 bumps, module de-energised

Shock IEC 60068-2-27 10Gn; 11ms; 3 pulses, module in operation

Earthquake IEC 60255-21-3 Class 2 - module in operation:

3 to 35 Hz/15 mm/2g/1 cycle Horizontal axe
3 to 35 Hz/7 mm/1g/1 cycle Vertical axe

High voltage withstand IEC 60255-27 2 kV for 1 minute

(dielectric)

Impulse voltage IEC 60255-27 1.2 μs, 50 μs, 5 kV, 0.5J

distance
Robustness IEC 62262 IK7, 2J

Degree of protection IEC 60529 IP20, module body (without wires)

Weight 150 g (0.33 lb)

Mounting support Symmetrical DIN rail

RJ45 LPCT/LPVT plug

This RJ45 LPCT/LPVT plug is used when a sensor is not present to close the loop
of the sensors presence detection (see Connector A cabling kit for LPCT/LPVT
analogue inputs (REL51065), page 65). It could be used on LPVT HUB inputs or
on LPVT or LPCT P5x inputs.

Figure 101 - RJ45 LPCT/LPVT plug

P533ONA

Its action is to close the loop of the sensor presence detection on pins 3-6 of the
RJ45 and to zeroed the low voltage inputs shorting the 3 others pairs of the RJ45
connector. (1-2, 4-5, 7-8)

Figure 102 - Pairs of the RJ45 connector

8 PIN 5 PIN 1
7
6 PIN 4 PIN 2
5
4
3 PIN 3 PIN 7
2 1
1 1 PIN 6 PIN 8
P533HIA

P5/EN M/33C 103

Protection Relay Installation

Arc-flash sensor (reference REL52801 to REL52810)

DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH
Clean the arc sensor periodically as instructed in this user manual and after an
arc-flash fault.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

Description
The arc-flash sensors are used by Easergy P5x30 to detect light coming from an
arc-flash incident, they are installed in the protection zone and connected to the
connector terminal on the protection relay.
The arc-flash sensor is activated by strong light caused by an arcing fault. The
sensor transforms light information into a current signal, which is used by the
protection relay to detect an arc-flash and provide the corresponding protection
function.

Dimensions
Figure 103 - Dimensions of the standard arc-flash sensors
mm 22.2
in 0.83 20
14 0.79
0.55
0.39
10

25
1.83
46.4

0.98

8
0.31
4.2
0.17 P533HJA

Figure 104 - Dimensions of the pipe type arc-flash sensors

mm
in

11 62
0.43 2.44

P533HKA

104 P5/EN M/33C

Installation Protection Relay

Characteristics
Table 19 - Characteristics of the standard arc-flash sensors

Charac- REL52801 REL52802 REL52803 REL52804 REL52805 REL52806

teristics
Cable 6 20 20 6 6 6
length (m)
13

Shielded - - ■ - - ■
cable
Halogen - ■ - ■ - -
free
Material Plastic
Weight (g/ 1,000/2.2 1,300/2.87 1,300/2.87 300/0.66 400/0.88 400/0.88
lb)

Environ- Pollution Degree 2

ment
Operation -25°C to +70°C(-13°F to +158°F)
tempera-
ture
Light 400 – 1100 nm
spectrum
sensitive
area
Detection 100 to 300 μs depending on the flash light received
time
Light 8,000 – 10,000 lux
sensitivity

Loop Yes
supervi-
sion

Table 20 - Characteristics of the pipe type arc-flash sensors

Characteristics REL52807 REL52808 REL52809 REL52810

Cable length (m) 13 20 20 6 6

Shielded cable - ■ - ■

Halogen free - - - -

Material Plastic
Weight (g/lb) 1,000/2.2 1,300/2.87 300/0.66 400/0.88

Environment Pollution Degree 2

Operation temperature -25°C to +70°C(-13°F to +158°F)

Light spectrum 400 – 1100 nm

sensitive area
Detection time 100 to 300 μs depending on the flash light received

Light sensitivity 8,000 – 10,000 lux

Loop supervision Yes

DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH
Never attempt to extend the length of arc-flash sensor cables.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

13. To connect the interface in the Easergy P5 protection relay, use REL52883 cable.

P5/EN M/33C 105

Protection Relay Installation

Mounting the sensors to the switchgear

DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH
• Apply appropriate personal protective equipment (PPE) and follow safe
electrical work practices. See NFPA 70E, NOM-029-STPS-2011, or
CSAZ462.
• The arc fault detection system is not a substitute for proper PPE when
working on or near equipment being monitored by the system.
• Information on this product is offered as a tool for conducting arc-flash
hazard analysis. It is intended for use only by qualified persons who are
knowledgeable about power system studies, power distribution equipment,
and equipment installation practices. It is not intended as a substitute for the
engineering judgement and adequate review necessary for such activities.
• Only qualified personnel should install and service this equipment. Read this
entire set of instructions and check the technical characteristics of the device
before performing such work.
• Perform wiring according to national standards (NEC) and any requirements
specified by the customer.
• Observe any separately marked notes and warnings.
• NEVER work alone.
• Before performing visual inspections, tests, or maintenance on this
equipment, disconnect all sources of electric power. Assume all circuits are
live until they are completely de-energized, tested, and tagged. Pay
particular attention to the design of the power system. Consider all sources
of power, including the possibility of back feeding.
• Always use a properly rated voltage sensing relay to ensure that all power is
off.
• The equipment must be properly grounded.
• Connect the device's protective ground to functional earth according to the
connection diagrams presented in this document.
• Do not open the device. It contains no user-serviceable parts.
• Install all devices, doors and covers before turning on the power to this
device.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

Install arc-flash sensors inside the switchgear. There are two options for mounting
the sensors:
• in customer-drilled holes on the switchgear
• on VYX001 Z-shape or VYX002 L-shape mounting plates available from
Schneider Electric or locally fabricated from supplied drawings

106 P5/EN M/33C

Installation Protection Relay

Figure 105 - VYX 001 mounting plate for sensor

mm 50 51
in 1.97 25 2.0
15
0.59 0.98

59
2.32 2.5
42 0.1
1.65
10
0.39
15
50 0.59
7
1.97
0.28

P533HLA

Figure 106 - VYX 002 mounting plate for sensor

mm
in 10
0.39

15 59 15
0.59 2.32 0.59

3
0.12

30
1.18

30
1.18 P533HMA

Figure 107 - Mounting the sensor

P533HNA

Ⓐ Active part of the sensor

Ⓑ Cable clamp
Ⓒ Fastening screw 4 x 15 mm
Ⓓ Sensor cable
• Press the active part of the sensor through the 10 mm hole in the panel
surface.
• Fix it using a 4 mm screw.

P5/EN M/33C 107

Protection Relay Installation

Connecting the sensors to the device

The sensors are delivered with 6 or 20 m cables.

DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH
Never attempt to extend the length of arc-flash sensor cables.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

After mounting the sensors, connect them to the device.

1. Route the wire to the nearest device using the shortest route possible.
Cut the wire to a suitable length.
Take into account the wiring methods inside the equipment. This should be
compliant with local regulations.
2. Connect the arc sensors to the screw terminals.
The polarity of the arc sensor cables is not critical.

Figure 108 - Point sensor connections

D 15 +
Sensor 1
D 16 -
D 17 +
Sensor 2
D 18 -
D 19 +
Sensor 3
D 20 -
E 15 +
Sensor 4
E 16 -
E 17 +
Sensor 5
E 18 -
E 19 +
Sensor 6
E 20 -

P533HOA

Table 21 - Point sensor connections

Slot Pin no. Description

D 15 Arc sensor 1 positive terminal

16 Arc sensor 1 negative terminal

17 Arc sensor 2 positive terminal

18 Arc sensor 2 negative terminal

19 Arc sensor 3 positive terminal

20 Arc sensor 3 negative terminal

E 15 Arc sensor 4 positive terminal

16 Arc sensor 4 negative terminal

17 Arc sensor 5 positive terminal

18 Arc sensor 5 negative terminal

19 Arc sensor 6 positive terminal

20 Arc sensor 6 negative terminal

3. Connect the cable shield to the corresponding grounding stud connector on

slot D or E when using shielded cable on the sensors.

108 P5/EN M/33C

Installation Protection Relay

MET148-2 - temperature sensor module (reference 59641)

DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH
Check that the temperature sensors are isolated from dangerous voltages.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

Description
The temperature sensor module is an external module used for temperature
measurement with Resistance Temperature Detectors (RTDs). It is connected to
the extension module. It can be selected as an option when ordering the device or
purchased later and installed on site. It provides 8 RTD inputs.

Figure 109 - MET148-2 temperature sensor module

The MET148-2 module can be used to connect 8 temperature sensors (RTDs) of

the same type:
• Pt100, Ni100 or Ni120 type RTDs, according to parameter setting
• 3-wire temperature sensors
• A single module for each Easergy P5 protection relay to be connected by one
of the CCA770 (0.6 or 2 ft), CCA772 (2 m or 6.6 ft) or CCA774 (4 m or 13.1 ft)
cords
The temperature measurement (e.g. in a transformer or motor winding) is utilised
by the following protection functions:
• Thermal overload (to take ambient temperature using RTD number 8)
• Temperature monitoring.

P5/EN M/33C 109

Protection Relay Installation

Connection
Figure 110 - Connection of the MET148-2 temperature sensor module

Connectors and terminals on the module:

• A: Terminal block for RTDs 1 to 4
• B: Terminal block for RTDs 5 to 8
• Da: RJ45 connector to connect the module to the Easergy P5 protection relay
with a CCA77x cord
• Dd: RJ45 connector to link up the next remote module with a CCA77x cord
Jumper for impedance matching terminal with load resistor (Rc) to be set to:

• - if the module is not the last interlinked module (default position).

• - if the module is the last interlinked module.

Jumper used to select module number, to be set to:
• MET1: 1st MET148-2 module, to measure temperatures T1 to T8 (default
position)
• MET2: 2nd MET148-2 module, to measure temperatures T9 to T16.

110 P5/EN M/33C

Installation Protection Relay

Characteristics
Table 22 - Characteristics of the MET148-2 temperature sensor module

Characteristics Values
Dimensions (L × W × D) 144 mm × 88 mm × 30 mm
(5.67 in × 3.46 in × 1.81 in) 14

Weight 0.2 kg (0.441 lb)

Mounting support On symmetrical DIN rail

Operating temperature -40°C - +70°C (-40°F - +158°F)

Temperature sensors

Type of sensors Pt100 Ni100/Ni120

Isolation from earth/ground None None

Current to RTD 4 mA 4 mA
Maximum distance between sensor 1 km (0.62 mi)
and MET148-2

14. Depth is 70 mm (2.8 in) with cable connected

P5/EN M/33C 111

Protection Relay Installation

IRIG-B module (reference REL51045)

Description
The IRIG-B module is an external module used for accurate time synchronisation.
It is connected to the extension module. It can be selected as an option when
ordering the device or purchased later and installed on site.
The module provides both a modulated (MOD INPUT) and an unmodulated input
(UNMOD INPUT) and can automatically detect which input type is used by the
user. No configuration of input type is needed in the Easergy P5 protection relay.
It does not require any auxiliary supply connection.

Figure 111 - IRIG-B module

MOD
INP
UT
UNM
OD
INPUT
IRIG
0
GN
-B

EXT O
UT
EXT IN

P533HRA

Characteristics
Table 23 - Characteristics of the IRIG-B module

Characteristics Values
Standard
Standard IRIG 200-04
Form factor
Height 95 mm (3.7 in)

Width 36 mm (1.4 in)

Depth 87 mm (3.4 in)

Weight 100 gr (56.4 dr)

Mounting support Symmetrical DIN rail

Modulated IRIG-B input

Connection BNC socket

Type of cable 50 ohm coaxial

Length of cable < 150 m

Time code format B120 to B127

Input signal level 200 mV to 10 V

Unmodulated IRIG-B input

Connection Screw-type terminals

Type of cable Twisted pair

Length of cable < 50 m

Time code format B000 to B007

Input impedance 10 kΩ

Input signal level 2 V to 6 V peak

112 P5/EN M/33C

Installation Protection Relay

Connection
The IRIG-B module is connected to the Easergy P5 protection relay from its EXT
IN port. The cable used for connection must be shielded and of a length not
exceeding 10 m (32.8 ft).
The IRIG-B module provides an additional extension port (EXT OUT) for
connecting other accessories such as the MET148-2 module with CCA77x cords.
The time source is connected to the module through the modulated input, or
through the unmodulated input by connecting signal + to the IRIG-B terminal, and
signal - to the 0+ terminal.
NOTE: If one source is connected on the modulated input and another one on
the unmodulated input, the modulated signal has the priority.

Figure 112 - Connection of IRIG-B

5
8

2
EXT IN
T
EXT OU

3
MOD INPUT UNMOD INPUT 4
8
IRIG-B

0+

GND

P533HSA

① to extension port P of relay ⑤ IRIG-B module

② to EXT IN port of IRIG-B ⑥ Time source to unmodulated IRIG-B input

③ to EXT OUT port of IRIG-B ⑦ Time source to modulated IRIG-B input

④ MET148-2 module ⑧ CCA77x cord

DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH
• Install IRIG-B module between Easergy P5 protection relay and any other
accessories like MET148-2 temperature module.
• Do not interface any accessories between Easergy P5 protection relay and
IRIG-B module.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

P5/EN M/33C 113

Protection Relay Commissioning

Commissioning
Principles

DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH
• NEVER work alone.
• Only qualified personnel should commission this equipment. Such work
should be performed only after reading this entire set of instructions.
• Obey all existing safety instructions when commissioning and maintaining
high-voltage equipment.
• Beware of potential hazardous voltages from open circuited current
transformers, any voltage transformers and any capacitors which could be
charged to hazardous voltages.
• Before energising check that the protection relay and other devices are
connected to a protective earth/ground in accordance with the instructions
provided.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

DANGER
FIRE HAZARD
Apply proper tightening torque to all wire connections.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

WARNING
IMPROPER EQUIPMENT OPERATON
Do not energise the primary circuit before this protection relay is properly
configured.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or
equipment damage.

DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH
• Never open the secondary circuit of a live CT since the high voltage
produced may be lethal to personnel and could damage insulation.
• The secondary of the line CT must be shorted before opening any
connections to it.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH
• Apply appropriate personal protective equipment (PPE) and follow safe
elecrtrical work practices. See NFPA 70E, CSA Z462 or national equivalent.
• Do not choose lower personal protective equipment (PPE) while working on
energised equipment.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

114 P5/EN M/33C

Commissioning Protection Relay

Easergy P5 protection relays are tested prior to commissioning, with the dual aim
of maximizing availability and minimizing the risk of malfunctioning of the
assembly being commissioned.
Easergy P5 protection relays are fully numerical in their design, implementing all
protection and non-protection functions in the firmware. The protection relays use
a high degree of self-checking and give an alarm. Therefore, the commissioning
tests do not need to be as extensive as with non-numeric electronic or electro-
mechanical relays.
To commission Easergy P5 protection relays, it is necessary to verify that the
hardware is functioning correctly and the application function settings have been
applied as expected. To confirm that the protection relay is operating correctly
once the settings have been applied, it is necessary to perform basic functional
tests on each active protection element one by one.
The main tasks for the commissioning test are as follow:
• Easergy P5 protection relay check
• Secondary injection test
• Primary injection test
• Final check

Testing tools and equipment

The following tools and equipment are needed in the commissioning:
• AC current and voltage injection sources
◦ For secondary injection test, on conventional CTs and VTs, to check the
protection relay functions, the injection source should be at such a rating
that the current is adjustable up to at least 5 A and the voltage is
adjustable up to at least 110 V.
◦ For secondary injection test, on LPCT and LPVT, to check the protection
relay functions, the injection source should be at such a rating that the
voltage is adjustable up to at least 10 V for LPVT and at least 30 V for
LPCT to be able to test with the maximum setting ranges.
◦ If the primary injection test is necessary to check the CT/LPCT, VT/LPVT
primary connection and polarity, the injection source should be at such a
rating that the minimum current at the CT secondary is larger than 20 mA
(2% of the nominal current) and the minimum voltage at the secondary is
larger than 750 mV (1% of the nominal voltage).
• DC voltage source
Adjustable from 48 to 250 V DC, for adaptation to the voltage level of the logic
input being tested.
• Multimeters
◦ With suitable AC current range, and AC/DC voltage ranges
◦ Phase angle meter
• A portable PC with eSetup Easergy Pro installed
• USB cable with mini-USB type B interface or RJ45 Ethernet cable
• For CT/VT, test block and test plug for secondary injection testing
◦ Plug with cord to match the "current" test block installed
◦ Plug with cord to match the "voltage" test block installed
• For LPCT/LPVT, test plug for secondary injection testing
◦ Cable with RJ45 terminal compliant with IEC 61869-10/11
◦ LPVT hub connector (to be used if the LPVT hub connector installed in the
cubicle is not accessible)

P5/EN M/33C 115

Protection Relay Commissioning

Check the digital outputs

Before any functional testing, it is needed to check the contact relays of the
Easergy P5 protection relays:
• Set the IED mode to Test mode
The Easergy P5 protection relay has its dedicated test modes (See Mode of
use for testing purposes, page 176).
• Force output relay contacts
With eSetup Easergy Pro, setting the output relay fields to 1 or 0 in the Relays
view of the Device/Test menu forces the output relay to On or Off.
There are menu cells which allow the status of the opto-isolated inputs, output
relay contacts, and internal digital signals to be monitored.

Easergy P5 protection relay check

Check with the Easergy P5 protection relay de-energised
The following group of tests should be carried out without the auxiliary power
supply applied to Easergy P5 protection relay and with the trip circuit isolated. The
current and voltage transformer connections must be isolated from the protection
relay for these checks. It is suggested to apply the test block to isolate the primary
system, as shown in Test block connection diagram, page 116.

DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH
• Never open-circuit the secondary circuit of a current transformer because
the high voltage produced may be lethal. It could also damage the insulation.
• Before the test plug is inserted into the test block, make sure the sockets in
the test plug which correspond to the current transformer secondary
windings are linked.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

Figure 113 - Test block connection diagram

L1
L2
L3

- Vaux + Vaux

Test block Easergy P5

1 2
V1
3 4
V2
5 6
7 8 V3

9 10 Output
11 12
+ Vaux
13 14 - Vaux
15 16 Trip
- Trip 17 18
+ Trip 19 20
Input
21 22
IL1
23 24
IL2
25 26
IL3
27 28
I0

Shorting bar
P533I0A

116 P5/EN M/33C

Commissioning Protection Relay

Before inserting the test plug, refer to the scheme diagram. For example, the test
block may be associated with protection current transformer circuits. If an Easergy
P5 protection relay is installed in the switchgear, the test block is not always
provided. In the application case without a test block, it is mandatory to isolate the
voltage transformer supply to the Easergy P5 protection relay using the panel links
or connecting blocks, and to short-circuit and disconnect the line current
transformers from the protection relay terminals. Where means of isolating the
auxiliary power supply and trip circuit (such as isolation links, fuses and MCB) are
provided, these should be used. If this is impossible, the wiring to these circuits
must be disconnected and the exposed ends suitably terminated.

Visual inspection
The visual inspection should include the following aspects:
• Check the rating information on the Easergy P5 protection relay.
• Check that the Easergy P5 protection relay being tested is correct for the
protected objective.
• Check that the circuit reference and system details are entered onto the
setting record sheet (not provided).
• Carefully examine the Easergy P5 protection relay to see that no physical
damage has occurred since installation.
• Check that the case earthing/grounding connections, at the rear of the
protection relay case, are used to connect the protection relay to a local earth/
ground bar using an adequate conductor (see Connecting earth/ground, page
79).

External wiring
• Check that the external wiring is correct to the relevant protection relay
diagram and wiring scheme. Check that the phase rotation appears as
expected.
• Check the connections against the wiring diagram if a test block is provided.

Auxiliary power supply

Easergy P5 protection relay can be operated from either a DC or AC auxiliary
power supply. The acceptable voltage variation is ±20%.
• For Easergy P5x20 protection relay, the rated voltage is 24 to 250 V DC/100
to 230 V AC. So, the incoming voltage must be within the operating range
specified as 19.2 to 300 V DC/80 to 276 V AC.
• For Easergy P5x30 protection relay, the rated voltage is 48 to 250 V DC/100
to 230 V AC. So, the incoming voltage must be within the operating range
specified as 38.4 to 300 V DC/80 to 276 V AC.
• Another option for Easergy P5x30 protection relay, the rated voltage is 24 to
48 V DC. So, the incoming voltage must be within the operating range
specified as 38.4 to 57.6 V DC.
Without energising the protection relay, measure the auxiliary power supply to
help ensure it is within the operating range.

NOTICE
POWER SUPPLY DAMAGE
Before connecting the auxiliary voltage to the Easergy P5 protection relay:
Make sure the nominal value of the auxiliary device voltage corresponds with
the nominal value of the auxiliary system voltage.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

P5/EN M/33C 117

Protection Relay Commissioning

DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION, OR ARC FLASH
The power supply must be turned off for at least 5 s before power supply
module is removed. Otherwise there is the danger of an electric shock.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

Watchdog
Using a continuity tester, check that the watchdog contacts (DO4 of slot B) are in
the states shown in the Watchdog contact status table for a de-energised
protection relay.

Testing with the Easergy P5 protection relay energised

The following group of tests verify that the Easergy P5 protection relay hardware
and software is functioning correctly and should be carried out with the auxiliary
power supply applied to the protection relay.

DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH
• The current and voltage transformer connections must remain isolated from
the protection relay for these checks.
• The trip circuit must remain isolated to help prevent accidental operation of
the associated circuit breaker.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

Energising the protection relay

The Easergy P5 protection relay initialises in the following procedure after being
energised:
• Switch on the auxiliary power supply.
• Check that Easergy P5 protection relay performs the following initialisation
sequence:
1. LED is illuminated green and LED is illuminated red. The screen
will display the self-test progress.
2. The screen will display the progress of "Firmware Loading" and LED
is illuminated yellow.
3. When the initialisation of Easergy P5 protection relay is complete, LED
is off.
The default screen (Single Line Diagram of one bay) is displayed.
NOTE: If a backup memory (extension board) is present in the Easergy P5
protection relay, the device checks the consistency of the settings and
configuration stored in the protection relay and in the backup memory. If there
is any gap, the protection relay will invite the operator to select the options for
handling the backup memory content.
Only when this operation is successfully completed will the LED turn off
and the default screen (Single Line Diagram of one bay) is displayed.

Watchdog
Using a continuity tester, check that the watchdog contacts (DO4 of slot B) are in
the states shown in the Watchdog contact status diagram for an energised
protection relay.

118 P5/EN M/33C

Commissioning Protection Relay

Date and time

The data and time should be set.
With Easergy IRIG-B module
If the IRIG-B module is connected and time clock signal is received by the
Easergy P5 protection relay, the synchronisation source field in the Clock synchro
view of the General menu will show "IRIG-B" and the protection relay will adjust
the Date and Time automatically. If the IRIG-B signal is lost, the protection relay
will change the time synchronisation source from "IRIG-B" to "internal" after 400
seconds.
Without Easergy IRIG-B module or SNTP
If the time and date is not being maintained by an IRIG-B signal, set the date and
time to the correct date and local time using the Date setting field and the Time of
day setting field in the System clock view of the General settings menu.

LED and screen

On the local panel of Easergy P5 protection relay, press the and then the
key to test the local panel HMI, the protection relay automatically tests all the
LEDs and the screen. The triple color LEDs are lit from green, yellow to red. The
LCD is tested under different colors and contrast values.

Digital inputs
This test checks that all the Easergy P5 protection relay’s digital inputs (opto-
isolated) are functioning correctly. Check the terminal configuration schemes in
Easergy P5 rear panel, page 50 for terminal numbers. Check the polarity and
connect the external 48 V DC supply voltage to the appropriate terminals for the
input being tested. Energise the opto-isolated input one by one.
NOTE: The external power supply is used for this test, but only after
confirming that it is suitably rated, with the variation less than 20%.
The status of each opto-isolated input can be viewed in the Digital inputs view of
the Control menu; a "1" indicating an energised input and a "0" indicating a de-
energised input. When each opto-isolated input is energised, the related DI status
changes to indicate the new state of the inputs.

Digital outputs
This test checks that all the output contact relays are functioning correctly using
the Test mode.
Connect a continuity tester across the terminals corresponding to output relay as
shown in the relevant terminal configuration schemes in Easergy P5 rear panel,
page 50. To operate the output relay DO1 in Slot B, set the field DO1(B) to 1 in the
Digital output Slot X view of the Control menu. Operation is confirmed by the
continuity tester operating for a normally open contact and ceasing to operate for
a normally closed contact. Measure the resistance of the contacts in the closed
state. Reset the output relay by setting the DO1(B) field to 0. Repeat the test for
the rest of the output relays then return the Easergy P5 protection relay to service
by setting the IED mode back to "Normal".
NOTE: Ensure that the thermal ratings of anything connected to the output
relays during the contact test procedure are not exceeded by the over-
operated output contact relays. Keep the time between application and
removal of contact test to a minimum.

P5/EN M/33C 119

Protection Relay Commissioning

Communication ports
The Easergy P5 protection relay supports both serial communication ports and
Ethernet communication ports.
There are five protocols that can be selected and used to communicate through
the serial ports.
• DNP3
• IEC 60870-5-101
• IEC 60870-5-103
• Modbus slave
• Modbus master
If one of these protocols is configured, the Easergy P5 protection relay can
exchange data with protocol master. The serial port parameters, e.g. baud rate,
parity, wire number, can be selected and will take effect after reboot.
There are four protocols that can be selected and used to communicate through
the Ethernet ports.
• IEC 61850
• DNP3
• Modbus
• EtherNet/IP
Three Ethernet protocols can be selected at the same time, and for each protocol
IP address needs to be selected to communicate with clients.

Virtual injections

Enable virtual injection

The Easergy P5 protection relay has the capability to test all the functionalities
according to the relevant access rights by:
• Simulation of voltage and current signals
• Injection of a Comtrade file
The virtual injection is done using eSetup Easergy Pro connected to the local
panel.
NOTE: To use the virtual injections the first time, eSetup Easergy Pro
proposes to install WinPcap library delivered with the software. This
installation is mandatory to simulate injections.
To enable virtual injection in eSetup Easergy Pro:

1. Click on the green button on right-hand side to expand the injector view that
is by default hidden in eSetup Easergy Pro.

2. Check the “Enable virtual injections” option.

3. Select Test mode or Test Block mode for the virtual injection test.
Virtual injections are available only in Test mode or Test Block mode (see Mode
of use for testing purposes, page 176 for more information).

4. Set “Auto read” to On in the menu bar of eSetup Easergy Pro in order to read
the measurements.

120 P5/EN M/33C

Commissioning Protection Relay

Manual injection
In the “Manual” tab of the Virtual injection setting view, set the following
parameters:
• Cycles:
Set the value to the number of signal period to apply for the signal simulation.
• Frequency:
Set the frequency of the signal to inject.
• Scalings:
Set the maximum values and angles.
• Measurements:
Set the injection values for the testing.

Figure 114 - The Virtual injection setting view in eSetup Easergy Pro

The injection time can be set in cycles or in real time. For example, for 50 Hz
nominal frequency, one cycle is 20 ms, so 100 cycles equal to 2 s of injection time.
All the signals are simulated with their fundamental value (no harmonics) and
instantaneously displayed in the Graph section of the view.

P5/EN M/33C 121

Protection Relay Commissioning

Comtrade file play-back

In the “File” tab of the Virtual injection view, it is possible to replay the analogue
signals recorded in a Comtrade file (ASCII format):
1. Select the Comtrade file using the “Open” button in the bottom right corner of
the setting view.
2. Select the mode of injection:
• Single injection: play the comtrade file once.
• Loop mode: repeated the injection until a manual stop.
• Followed by zero: single injection of the comtrade file followed by 0.

3. Select the assigned injection for each analogue channel.

Injection
Press on the Start button in the upper section of the view for the injection.
Any protection function that is enabled and of which the threshold setting is below
the injection will activate, with the magnitudes displayed in the measurements
section of the view.

Figure 115 - Protection function simulated in the Virtual Injection view

The Easergy P5 protection relay will trip and activate digital outputs physically in
the Test mode and will stay frozen in the Test-block mode.
NOTE: Do not try to manually change the mode while using the injector.

122 P5/EN M/33C

Commissioning Protection Relay

Secondary injection test

The secondary injection test is to check the protection relay analogue input
modules and check the basic protection functions with the application-specific
settings.
The connection diagram for the secondary injection test with test block and test
plug mounted is illustrated in the Secondary injection test connection diagram with
test block, page 123.

Figure 116 - Secondary injection test connection diagram with test block
L1

L2

L3

Easergy P5
Connector A
Test block + Test plug

A1

A2

A3

A4
A5

A6

Test block + Test plug

A9

A10

A11

A12

A13

A14 V

A15
V
A16

V
A A A A

IL1 IL2 IL3 N I0 N V1 V2 V3 N

3-phase
generator A V

P533I1A

In the application case without test block, it is mandatory to remove the voltage
transformer cable. The trip circuit shall be disconnected to avoid the spurious
circuit breaker trip during the secondary injection test. The secondary injection test
can be performed by injecting the current and voltage into the related analogue
connection terminals on the rear panel of the Easergy P5 protection relay via the
test block.

Apply application-specific settings

There are different methods of applying the settings:
• Local panel
If the application is simple without specific logic and only limited specific
settings are applied, the setting configuration can be easily performed via the
Easergy P5 protection relay’s local panel by entering the settings manually.
• eSetup Easergy Pro
If specific logic (not the default logic) is applied, or many specific settings are
applied, setting configuration via eSetup Easergy Pro is the recommended
method for configuring as it is much faster and there is less margin for error.
NOTE: If the application-specific settings are not available, the secondary
injection test can be performed based on the default settings.
After the setting configuration, it is suggested to disable all the protection functions
applied before the current and voltage injection, to help ensure that spurious CB
trips will not happen. During the protection function test, only the protection

P5/EN M/33C 123

Protection Relay Commissioning

function under test can be enabled. After the completion of the injection tests, all
the protection functions applied must be enabled during the final check stage.

Current inputs
This test verifies that the accuracy of current measurement is within acceptable
tolerances.
• Double check the connection and then start the injection test.
• Apply current equal to the related CT secondary rated current.
• Check its magnitude using a multimeter or reading from the test equipment.
• Check the current magnitude displayed on the local panel of the Easergy P5
protection relay.
• Calculate the current measurement accuracy, it shall be within ±1%.

Typical voltage measurement modes in Easergy P5

According to the ordered analogue module in slot A of a Easergy P5 protection
relay, the application of voltage measurement modes can be various.
Following table indicates the selection of the voltage measurement modes based
on the voltage inputs type of Easergy P5 protection relays.

Voltage inputs type Voltage measurement mode

3LN 3LN + Uₒ 3LN/LLy 3LN/LNy 2LL + Uₒ 2LL + Uₒ + LLy LL/LLy

P5F30 VT ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

LPVT ■ ■

LPVT + VT Adapter ■ ■ ■ ■

P5M30 VT ■ ■ ■

LPVT ■

LPVT + VT Adapter ■ ■

P5V20 VT ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

P5U20 LPVT ■ ■

LPVT + VT Adapter ■ ■ ■ ■

Voltage inputs
This test verifies that the accuracy of voltage measurement is within the
acceptable tolerances.
Seven modes of connection are available on the Easergy P5 protection relay:

Mode U1 U2 U3 U4
3LN VL1 VL2 VL3 -

3LN + Uₒ VL1 VL2 VL3 Uₒ

3LN/LLy VL1 VL2 VL3 LLy

3LN/LNy VL1 VL2 VL3 LNy

2LL + Uₒ U12 U23 - Uₒ

2LL + Uₒ + LLy U12 U23 LLy Uₒ

LL/LLy U12 - LLy -

The following tests will be realised with the VT Connecting Mode set to 3 VT which
is the most used configuration.
• Double check the connection and then start the injection test.

124 P5/EN M/33C

Commissioning Protection Relay

• Apply voltage equal to the related VT secondary rated voltage.

• Check its magnitude using a multimeter or reading from the test equipment.
• Check the voltage magnitude on the local panel of the Easergy P5 protection
relay.
• Calculate the voltage measurement accuracy, it shall be within ±1%.

LPCT and LPVT inputs

These tests verify that the accuracy of the LPCT/LPVT measurements are within
acceptable tolerances.
Connection diagram for testing the LPCT and LPVT measurement accuracy, page
125 shows the connection diagram that includes the Easergy P5 protection relay
and a low frequency generator as described in Testing tools and equipment, page
115.
NOTE: To avoid any slow fluctuation of current measurements during testing,
it is recommended to disconnect the signal generator earth/ground link or use
an isolator transformer.

Figure 117 - Connection diagram for testing the LPCT and LPVT
measurement accuracy
L1
L2
L3
Easergy P5
Connector A

S1 A1 1
CSH
A2 2
A3 3
A4 4

Voltage
Generator
IL1 RJ45 1
2
IL2 RJ45 1
LPCTs
2
IL3 RJ45 1
2
LPVT Hub
4
5 VL1, VL2, VL3 RJ45
4
LPVTs
5
4 RJ45
5

P533I2C

LPCT measurement
This test verifies that the accuracy of LPCT measurement is within acceptable
tolerances.
• Disconnect the secondary of LPCTs from the Easergy P5 protection relay.
• Use a generator with low voltage output (30 V max) and connect it directly to
the Easergy P5 protection relay as described inTesting tools and equipment,
page 115.
• Apply current equal to the related LPCT secondary rated current.
• Check its magnitude using a multimeter or reading from the test equipment.
• Check the current magnitude displayed on the local panel of the Easergy P5
protection relay.
• Calculate the LPCT measurement accuracy, it shall be within ±1%.
NOTE: To be sure everything is well reconnected after test, it is recommended
to perform a primary injection, at low level.

P5/EN M/33C 125

Protection Relay Commissioning

LPVT measurement
This test verifies that the accuracy of LPVT measurement is within acceptable
tolerances.
• Disconnect the secondary of LPVTs from the LPVT hub.
If the LPVT hub is not accessible inside the cubicle, disconnect the secondary
of the LPVT hub from the Easergy P5 protection relay, and connect another
one to replace it during the tests.
• Use a generator with low voltage output (10 V max) and connect it directly to
the LPVT hub as described in Testing tools and equipment, page 115.
• Apply voltage equal to the related LPVT secondary rated voltage.
• Check its magnitude using a multimeter or reading from the test equipment.
• Check the voltage magnitude on the local panel of the Easergy P5 protection
relay.
• Calculate the LPVT measurement accuracy, it shall be within ±1%.
NOTE: To be sure everything is well reconnected after test, it is recommended
to perform a primary injection, at low level.

Check the protection functions

The tests described in Easergy P5 protection relay check, page 116, Current
inputs, page 124, LPCT and LPVT inputs, page 125, and Voltage inputs, page 124
have already demonstrated that the protection relay inputs and outputs work
correctly and the analogue inputs are within calibration, thus the purpose of the
tests for protection functions is as follows:
• To determine that each active protection function of the protection relay can
trip according to the correct application settings.
• To verify correct assignment of the trip and alarm contacts by monitoring the
response to the related fault injection.
The following sections only present the test procedures for current protection and
voltage protection. The basic test procedures are similar for the other protection
functions.

Current protection
This test, performed on stage 1 of the overcurrent protection function in setting
group 1, is to check that the protection relay is operating correctly at the
application-specific settings.
1. Determine which output relay has been selected to operate when an I> trip
occurs.
2. Connect the output relay so that its operation will trip the test set and stop the
timer of the injection box.
3. Connect the current outputs of test set (current injection source) to the
protection relay current input terminals.
4. Apply a current of 120% of the current setting to the protection relay and the
relay shall trip according to the operation time setting.
5. Check the tripping time from the test set and compare with the operation time
setting.
6. Check the related fault recorder, events, and the related LEDs for trip
indications.
A similar test procedure can be applied for the secondary injection test to check
the other protection functions with the application-specific settings.

126 P5/EN M/33C

Commissioning Protection Relay

Voltage protection
This test, performed on stage 1 of the under-voltage protection function in setting
group 1, is to check that the protection relay is operating correctly at the
application-specific settings.
1. Determine which output relay has been selected to operate when a U< trip
occurs.
2. Connect the output relay so that its operation will trip the test set and stop the
timer.
3. Connect the voltage outputs of the test set (voltage injection source) to the
protection relay voltage input terminals.
4. Apply normal voltage first and then a voltage of 80% of the voltage setting to
the protection relay. The relay shall trip according to the operation time
setting.
5. Check the tripping time from the test set and compare with the operation time
setting.
6. Check the related fault recorder, events, and the related LEDs for trip
indications.
A similar test procedure can be applied for the secondary injection test to check
the other protection functions with the application-specific settings. P5/

P5/EN M/33C 127

Protection Relay Commissioning

Primary injection test

DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH
The primary injection test shall be performed by the qualified electrical
engineers and strictly follow the related primary injection testing instructions
from the utility.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

Primary injection testing is recommended to:

• Confirm the external wiring to the current and voltage inputs is correct
• Check the polarity of the current transformers at each end is consistent
• Check the directionality of the directional elements
For the application where the directional overcurrent or earth/ground fault
protection, distant protection or current differential protection is installed, it is
mandatory to check the correct polarity of the current transformers. If the current
or voltage positive or negative sequence components are applied in the protection
functions, it is mandatory to ensure the correct phase sequence of current or
voltage inputs.

DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH
If any of the external wiring was disconnected from the protection relay to run
any tests, make sure that all connections are restored according to the external
connection or scheme diagram.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

For primary injection testing on conventional CT’s, it is necessary to calculate the

current and voltage magnitudes to be injected in the primary side according to the
actual application scenario, check that the current magnitude is more than 20 mA
and the voltage magnitude is more than 100 mV on the secondary side. Normally
the auxiliary 380 V power supply in the substation or power plant can be applied
for primary injection tests.

Voltage connections

NOTICE
CIRCUIT OVERLOAD
• Using a multi-meter, measure the voltage transformer secondary voltages to
ensure they are compliant with the Easergy P5 protection relay’s input
ratings.
• Check that the system phase rotation is correct using a phase rotation meter.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

Primary Voltage Injection:

• Inject the voltage into the voltage transformer primary connection terminals.
• Check that the voltage magnitudes and angles are displayed on the
protection relay’s HMI in primary values.
• The voltage magnitudes should be equal to the applied voltage.
• The voltage angles should be correct according to the phase sequence.

128 P5/EN M/33C

Commissioning Protection Relay

Thus, the VT ratio, polarity, phase sequence and the external wiring from the
primary system to the protection relay can be verified by the primary voltage
injection.

Current connections

NOTICE
CIRCUIT OVERLOAD
Measure the current transformer secondary values for each input using a
multimeter connected in series with corresponding protection relay current
input.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

Primary Current Injection:

• Inject current into the primary system through the phase under test.
• Check that the current magnitudes and angles are displayed on the protection
relay’s HMI in primary values.
• The current magnitudes should be equal to the applied current.
• The current angles should be correct according to the phase sequence.
• Check that the current transformer polarities are correct against a phase
meter already installed on site and known to be correct by measuring the
phase angle between the current and voltage, or by contacting the system
control center for the direction of power flow.
When using a residual current transformer (core balance) or a sensitive current
transformer, inject a single phase to validate the functionality.
Therefore, the CT ratio, polarity, phase sequence and the external wiring from the
primary system to the protection relay can be verified by primary current injection.

LPCT connections

NOTICE
MEASUREMENT LOSS
Make sure that LPCTs are connected to all 3 phases with low power sensors or
with RJ45 plug.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in no current measured.

Primary Current Injection:

• Inject current into the primary system through the phase under test.
• Check that the current magnitudes and angles are displayed on the protection
relay’s HMI in primary values.
• The current magnitudes should be equal to the applied current.
• The current angles should be correct according to the phase sequence.
• Check that the current transformer polarities are correct against a phase
meter already installed on site and known to be correct by measuring the
phase angle between the current and voltage, or by contacting the system
control center for the direction of power flow.
Therefore, the CT ratio, polarity, phase sequence and the external wiring from the
primary system to the protection relay can be verified by primary current injection.

P5/EN M/33C 129

Protection Relay Commissioning

Demonstrate circuit breaker operation

The correct operation of the circuit breaker shall be verified sufficiently during the
commissioning test. CB operation can be controlled by the local or remote-control
commands.
CB Operation Test:
• Check the actual CB position and read the CB position status from the
protection relay HMI if the related CB position (52a, 52b) has been connected
to the protection relay opto-isolated inputs.
• Perform a local CB control command to trip and close the CB, the CB shall
operate correctly per the control command.
• Read the CB position status from protection relay HMI after one control
command, the CB position information shall be the same as the actual CB
status.

130 P5/EN M/33C

Commissioning Protection Relay

Arc-flash detection system setup and testing

Setting up the arc-flash system

DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION, OR ARC FLASH
• Apply appropriate personal protective equipment (PPE) and follow safe
electrical work practices. See NFPA 70E, NOM-029-STPS-2011, or
CSAZ462.
• The arc fault detection system is not a substitute for proper PPE when
working on or near equipment being monitored by the system.
• Information on this product is offered as a tool for conducting arc-flash
hazard analysis. It is intended for use only by qualified persons who are
knowledgeable about power system studies, power distribution equipment,
and equipment installation practices. It is not intended as a substitute for the
engineering judgement and adequate review necessary for such activities.
• Only qualified personnel should install and service this equipment. Read this
entire set of instructions and check the technical characteristics of the device
before performing such work.
• Perform wiring according to national standards (NEC) and any requirements
specified by the customer.
• Observe any separately marked notes and warnings.
• NEVER work alone.
• Before performing visual inspections, tests, or maintenance on this
equipment, disconnect all sources of electric power. Assume all circuits are
live until they are completely de-energized, tested, and tagged. Pay
particular attention to the design of the power system. Consider all sources
of power, including the possibility of back feeding.
• Always use a properly rated voltage sensing relay to ensure that all power is
off.
• The equipment must be properly grounded.
• Connect the device's protective ground to functional earth according to the
connection diagrams presented in this document.
• Do not open the device. It contains no user-serviceable parts.
• Install all devices, doors and covers before turning on the power to this
device.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

Before setting up the arc flash system:

• Mount and connect all components and sensors.
• Make sure that you understand the customer application.
• Identify the wiring connection of sensors to the device’s connectors.
• Identify the wiring connection to breaking devices.
• Power up the device.
• Verify LED indication as described with consideration of the customer
application.

Commissioning and testing

This section contains the commissioning testing instructions. The figure below
shows the testing sequence.

P5/EN M/33C 131

Protection Relay Commissioning

Figure 118 - Testing sequence

Arc system commissioning

Verifying the installation against

drawings and customer specifications

Checking zones

Testing arc-flash sensors

Testing alarm contacts

Cross-checking between zones

Testing the circuit breaker failure

protection

Trip circuits Filling in test results

Restoring the current measuring and

trip circuits

Gathering of test equipment

Finalizing the test report

End
P533I3A

Checking zones
• Check the protected zones where sensors have been installed and compare
them against the drawings.
• Consult the customer if the configuration does not match with the drawings.

Disconnecting trip circuits

DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION, OR ARC FLASH
Removing trip wires may cause loss of protection. Review system drawings and
diagrams before disconnecting trip circuits.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

• Disconnect the trip signals to the circuit breakers that may disturb other parts
of the system during the test.
• Also disconnect trip signals routed to other parts of the system, such as the
breaker failure (ANSI 50BF) backup trip to upstream breakers and the
transfer trip signals.
• Test the disconnected trip signals with a multimeter.

132 P5/EN M/33C

Commissioning Protection Relay

Test the arc-flash sensors

DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION, OR ARC FLASH
• Apply appropriate personal protective equipment (PPE) and follow safe
electrical work practices. See NFPA 70E, NOM-029-STPS-2011, or
CSAZ462.
• The arc fault detection system is not a substitute for proper PPE when
working on or near equipment being monitored by the system.
• Information on this product is offered as a tool for conducting arc-flash
hazard analysis. It is intended for use only by qualified persons who are
knowledgeable about power system studies, power distribution equipment,
and equipment installation practices. It is not intended as a substitute for the
engineering judgement and adequate review necessary for such activities.
• Only qualified personnel should install and service this equipment. Read this
entire set of instructions and check the technical characteristics of the device
before performing such work.
• Perform wiring according to national standards (NEC) and any requirements
specified by the customer.
• Observe any separately marked notes and warnings.
• NEVER work alone.
• Before performing visual inspections, tests, or maintenance on this
equipment, disconnect all sources of electric power. Assume all circuits are
live until they are completely de-energized, tested, and tagged. Pay
particular attention to the design of the power system. Consider all sources
of power, including the possibility of back feeding.
• Always use a properly rated voltage sensing relay to ensure that all power is
off.
• The equipment must be properly grounded.
• Connect the device's protective ground to functional earth according to the
connection diagrams presented in this document.
• Do not open the device. It contains no user-serviceable parts.
• Install all devices, doors and covers before turning on the power to this
device.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

Testing the arc flash sensors with the light-only criteria operates the trip outputs of
the device.
Testing the arc flash sensors with the light and current criteria, without an injected
current, only generates an indication on Easergy P5 that protects the zone.
NOTE:
Testing the arc-flash sensors using a light source can trip the neighboring
zones.
Because of their placement, some sensors cannot be tested without
dismantling parts of the system. After completing the testing, reassemble the
parts and validate the compliance with original mounting. Consult the
equipment manufacturer before dismantling any parts.

Testing the standard or pipe type sensors

Test the sensors with the Easergy P5 protection relay. Reset the Easergy P5
protection relay before the test.

P5/EN M/33C 133

Protection Relay Commissioning

NOTE:
Because of their placement, some sensors cannot be tested without
dismantling parts of the system. After completing the testing, reassemble the
parts and validate the compliance with original mounting. Consult the
equipment manufacturer before dismantling any parts.

Figure 119 - Testing point sensors

P533I4A

1. Point a powerful light source such as a flashlight or camera flash unit to each
arc-flash sensors until the sensor is activated.
2. Check the arc-flash sensor indication from the Easergy P5 protection relay.
3. Check the address of the activated arc-flash sensor from the Easergy P5
protection relay.
4. Compare the arc-flash sensor address information from the protection relay
with that on the sensor location map.
5. Fill in the test result in the test report.
6. Reset the protection relay.
7. Repeat the procedure with the next arc-flash sensor.

Testing the supervision of arc-flash sensors

Test the sensors with Easergy P5 protection relay.
1. Disconnect one wire from the standard arc-flash sensor (or one end of the
pipe type arc-flash sensor) to see that the sensor status supervision
recognises the fault in the arc-flash sensor.
2. Wait until the fault indication appears.
3. Check that the internal fault relay operates and that the event information is
communicated to any external systems.
4. Fill in the test result in the test report.
5. Reconnect the arc-flash sensor and reset the system.
6. Repeat the procedure with the other arc-flash sensors.

Connecting a current injection device with/without time

measurement

CAUTION
CIRCUIT OVERLOAD
Do not open a loaded current measuring circuit before the secondary circuit of
the current transformer is reliably short-circuited.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment
damage.

1. Short circuit the secondary circuit of the current transformer and disconnect
the Easergy P5 protection relay from the measuring circuit.
2. Connect a current injection device, one phase at a time, to the Easergy P5
protection relay of the current measuring circuit.

134 P5/EN M/33C

Commissioning Protection Relay

3. For a current injection device with time measurement, connect the injection
device either to inject the current continuously or when triggered by the time
measuring circuit:
a. Use the digital input of the current injection device for the stop trigger in
the time measurement circuit.
b. Connect the trip output of the tested unit to the digital input of the current
injection device for the stop trigger. For measuring the total operating
time, use the circuit breaker’s NO contact, which indicates that status of
circuit breaker is open, for the stop trigger.
c. Connect the time measuring start signal output to the flashlight.
Configure the time measuring start signal to either trigger only the
flashlight or both the flashlight and the current injection.
Preferably, the current injection should be triggered before the flashlight.
d. Measure the operate time between the start trigger and stop trigger.

Testing the alarm contacts

Alarm signals generated by the arc-flash protection system (trip and self-
supervision alarms) can be forwarded to higher-level switchgear supervision and
control systems through the output contacts.
1. Activate an alarm by generating an arc fault trip or sensor status supervision
alarm.
2. Check the alarm contact operation from the higher-lever system. The alarm
signals can also be sent via communication.
3. Reset the protection relay.
4. Repeat the procedure with the next alarm contact.

Testing the pick-up setting of the arc-flash protection function

1. Check the pick-up setting of the current criteria by injecting a current to the
Easergy P5 protection relay.
2. Increase the current until the overcurrent criterion picks up.
3. Reset the protection relay.
4. Compare the current settings with the results.

Testing the arc-flash protection function without the time

measurement
1. Inject a current, two times greater than the pick-up current level, to the
Easergy P5 protection relay. Inject a current in each phase, one phase at a
time.
Verify that the technical characteristics of the channels are not exceeded.
2. While injecting the current, apply light with a flashlight to at least one of the
arc-flash sensors, one at a time.
3. Check that the arc-flash protection function activates.
4. Generate at least one trip with current for the Easergy P5 protection relay.
5. Reset the protection relay.

Testing the arc-flash protection function with the time

measurement
1. Inject a current, two times greater than the pick-up current level, to the
Easergy P5 protection relay. Inject current to all three phases.
The current can be injected in two ways:
• Continuous injection
• Injection triggered by the time measurement start signal.

P5/EN M/33C 135

Protection Relay Commissioning

Verify that the technical characteristics of the channels are not exceeded
2. Position a flashlight to each of the light sensors in sequence. Start the time
measurement to trigger the flash.
3. Check that the arc-flash protection function operates.
4. Check the operation time from the time measuring device.
5. Generate at least one trip with current.
6. Reset the protection relay and repeat for other light sensors.

Testing the circuit-breaker failure protection

1. Inject a current above the overcurrent setting value to the Easergy P5
protection relay.
2. Point light to one of the light sensors in the protected zone with flash light.
The light pulse has to be longer than the CBFP time setting. Thus, the light
pulse from a camera flash is too short.
3. Check that the circuit breaker failure protection function operates.
4. Reset the protection relay.
NOTE:
Use a torch to test the CBFP because the light pulse from a flashlight is too
short.
Ensure that the light pulse is not too long. If the light pulse is longer than 3
seconds, the daylight blocking function generates an alarm.

Testing the selectivity of the arc-flash protection

1. Test the selectivity of the protection zones, one at a time, by pointing light to
an arc-flash sensor in a protection zone.
2. Compare the operation against the protection plans.
3. Inject current and at the same time point light to one arc-flash sensor in the
tested zone.
4. Compare the operation against the protection plans.
5. Repeat the procedure for the other zones.

136 P5/EN M/33C

Commissioning Protection Relay

Test report
• Check the protected zones where sensors have been installed and compare
them against the drawings.
• Consult the customer if the configuration does not match with the drawings.

Filling in the test report

Fill in all the required information about the system, the tested arc flash units and
the test results.

Test report example

Figure 120 - Test report example

Easergy P5x3x Arc stage commissioning and testing report

Customer Customer name Substation
Information
Customer address Bay

Unit Device name: Device location:

Serial number: Order code:
FW version: IP Address:
NetMask: Gateway:
MAC address: NTP Server:
Scaling CT primary current input: A Pick-up setting: xln
CT secondary current input: A Pick-up value: A
CT residual current primary input: A Pick-up setting: xln
CT residual current secondary input: A Pick-up value: A
Arc sensors Sensor Arc sensor status Tested Remarks
1 OK NA
2 OK NA
3 OK NA
4 OK NA
5 OK NA
6 OK NA

Arc stages Stage number Activation criteria Tested Remarks

1 Light I>int IN>int
2 Light I>int IN>int
3 Light I>int IN>int
4 Light I>int IN>int
5 Light I>int IN>int
6 Light I>int IN>int
7 Light I>int IN>int
8 Light I>int IN>int

CBFP Stage number Delay setting / ms Tested Remarks

1
Trip relays Trip relay Tested CBFP Remarks
D01(B) OK NA
D02(B) OK NA
D03(B) OK NA
D01(D) OK NA
D02(D) OK NA
D01(E) OK NA
D02(E) OK NA
Led indications Led name Tested Led name Tested
A Yes NA F Yes NA
B Yes NA G Yes NA
C Yes NA H Yes NA
D Yes NA I Yes NA
E Yes NA J Yes NA

Testing device Device Calibration date

Signatures Commissioner(s)

Supervisor

Date
P533I5A

P5/EN M/33C 137

Protection Relay Commissioning

Final check

NOTICE
CIRCUIT OVERLOAD
• Remove all test or temporary shorting leads.
• If it has been necessary to disconnect any of the external wiring from the
protection relay to perform the wiring verification tests, make sure that all
connections are replaced according to the relevant external connection or
scheme diagram.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

The commissioning is now complete, but before putting the protection relay into
normal operation, check the following items:
• Ensure that the protection relay is restored to service.
• CB maintenance and current counters should be zero. These counters can be
reset.
• Double check the application-specific settings, to help ensure that all the
desired protection and control functions are enabled with the correct settings.
Extract the final setting file from the protection relay.
• Check the Date and Time of the protection relay, to ensure the date and time
are exactly synchronised.
• Reset all event records, fault records, and disturbance records. Make sure
that alarms and LEDs have been reset before leaving the protection relay.
The device is now ready for operation.

138 P5/EN M/33C

Use Protection Relay

Use
Introduction
The local panel can be used for both entering all the data required for operation of
the Easergy P5 protection relay and accessing the data for equipment
management.
The following tasks can be handled from the local panel:
• Controlling switchgear units:
◦ View equipment status on an animated mimic diagram
◦ Local opening and closing of up to 6 devices controlled by Easergy P5
• Read out the list of enabled protections
• Readout and modification of settings
• Readout of live operating data including waveforms
• Read out logic status signals
• Readout of operating data logs and of monitoring signal logs
• Readout of event logs after overload situations, ground faults, or short circuits
in the power system
• Read out the Easergy P5 protection relay's module versions
• Device resetting and triggering of additional control functions used in testing
and commissioning
• Test the protection relay with dedicated IED modes (contact outputs forced or
not)
• Entering a password according to different access rights for settings and
operations (see Cybersecurity, page 459)
Control is also possible through the PC interface. This requires a suitable PC
installed with a specific operating program called eSetup Easergy Pro (see eSetup
Easergy Pro, page 160).

P5/EN M/33C 139

Protection Relay Use

Local panel
Presentation
The Easergy P5 protection relay is equipped with a user friendly local panel.

Figure 121 - Local panel of Easergy P5x20

1 2 3 4

5
ON !

Bay
6

Easergy
0 A
0 A
0 A
0.00 A 7
22

9
21

20 10

19 11
18 12
Open
is perfect is a Queen
Jean-Marc Linda

Close
is perfect is a Queen
Jean-Marc Linda
13

14
17
16 15 P533MSA

① Power ON/OFF LED ⑫ Handle

② Alarm LED ⑬ Label for protection relay name (inserted in the
shutter)

③ Trip LED ⑭ LED identification label (inserted in the shutter)

④ Maintenance/Test LED ⑮ Shutter

⑤ Graphic 192 x 96 monochrome LCD ⑯ Label for programmable function key (stuck on
screen the back of the shutter)

⑥ Handle lock ⑰ Label for CB open and CB close keys (stuck on

(movable up and down) the back of the shutter)

⑦ Information key ⑱ F1 function key

⑧ Reset key ⑲ Remote Control/Local Control key

⑨ 6 LEDs, user programmable ⑳ CB Open (upper) and CB Close (lower) keys

⑩ Mini-USB connector for connecting Navigation keypad and confirmation key

laptop (behind a plastic cover) 21

⑪ USB connector for data transfer Home key

(behind a plastic cover) 22

140 P5/EN M/33C

Use Protection Relay

Figure 122 - Local panel of Easergy P5x30

1 2 3 4

5
ON !

Bay

Easergy
6
0 A
0 V
0 VA
0 kW
0 kVAr 7
0 Hz
22

9
21

20 F1 F2 F3 10

19 F4 F5 F6 F7
11
18
Open

is perfect is a Queen
12
Jean-Marc Linda
Close
is perfect is a Queen
Jean-Marc Linda

13

14
17
16 15 P533MTA

① Power ON/OFF LED ⑫ Handle

② Alarm LED ⑬ Label for protection relay name (inserted in the
shutter)

③ Trip LED ⑭ LED identification label (inserted in the shutter)

④ Maintenance/Test LED ⑮ Shutter

⑤ Graphic 480 x 272 color LCD ⑯ Label for programmable function key (stuck on
screen the back of the shutter)

⑥ Handle lock ⑰ Label for CB open and CB close keys (stuck on

(movable up and down) the back of the shutter)

⑦ Information key ⑱ F1 - F7 function keys

⑧ Reset key ⑲ Remote Control/Local Control key

⑨ 10 LEDs, user programmable ⑳ CB Open (upper) and CB Close (lower) keys

⑩ Mini-USB connector for connecting Navigation keypad and confirmation key

laptop (behind a plastic cover) 21

⑪ USB connector for data transfer Home key

(behind a plastic cover) 22

P5/EN M/33C 141

Protection Relay Use

Push buttons
Symbol Function

HOME/Cancel push-button for returning to the previous view. To return to the

default screen of the LCD display, keep the button pressed for 3 seconds.

INFO push-button for viewing additional information.

Reset key to release latches and reset LED status.

1 programmable function push-button for Easergy P5x20

(see Object control with function keys, page 386)

7 programmable function push-buttons for Easergy P5x30 to

(see Object control with function keys, page 386)

to

ENTER push-button for activating or confirming a function.

UP navigation push-button for moving up in the menu or increasing a numerical

value.

DOWN navigation push-button for moving down in the menu or decreasing a

numerical value.

LEFT navigation push-button for moving back across a menu or selecting a

digit in a numerical value.

RIGHT navigation push-button for moving forwards across a menu or selecting

a digit in a numerical value.

Circuit breaker ON push-button

(see Object control with I and O buttons, page 388)

Circuit breaker OFF push-button

(see Object control with I and O buttons, page 388)

This push button allows the user to set the Easergy P5 protection relay to
remote control mode or local control mode.

NOTE: The programmable function push buttons, the Local/Remote control

key and the control circuit breaker push buttons are protected by a shutter in
normal operation. This shutter can be sealed (see Lock the shutter and
handle, page 43).

LED indicators

Status indicators
This includes the 4 LEDs located on top of the LCD representing the different
status of the Easergy P5 protection relay regarding power, alarm, trip, and
operation mode (refer to item 1 to 4 in Local panel of Easergy P5x20, page 140
and Local panel of Easergy P5x30, page 141) and the LED associated with the
"Local/Remote" push button (refer to item 19 in Local panel of Easergy P5x20,
page 140 and Local panel of Easergy P5x30, page 141).

142 P5/EN M/33C

Use Protection Relay

Table 24 - The states of the status indicators

Indicators States

OFF ON Flash
Power OFF Power ON -

No alarm Old alarm New alarm

No trip Trip -

In service Maintenance Test/Test-block mode

In local control mode In remote control mode -

(steady green)

Configurable LEDs
These LEDs can be configured in three different colors: green, red and yellow, and
be individually latched or unlatched (see LED matrix, page 379).
These LEDs are configured by default according to LED1 to LED6 on Easergy P5
x20, page 143 and LED1 to LED10 on Easergy P5 x30, page 143.

Table 25 - LED1 to LED6 on Easergy P5 x20

Color LED 1 LED 2 LED 3 LED 4 LED 5 LED 6

Easergy P5U20

Green CB Open

Yellow TCS Alarm Therm Alarm

Red CB Closed I Trip I0 Trip

Easergy P5V20

Green CB Open

Yellow TCS Alarm

Red CB Closed U Trip V0 Trip F Trip

Table 26 - LED1 to LED10 on Easergy P5 x30

Color LED 1 LED 2 LED 3 LED 4 LED 5 LED 6 LED 7 LED 8 LED 9 LED 10
Green CB Open

Yellow TCS Alarm Therm Alarm

Red CB Closed I Trip I0 Trip U Trip V0 Trip F Trip

Customising the local panel

The local panel of the Easergy P5 protection relay can be customised with four
labels for:
• Configurable LEDs
• Configurable function keys
• Circuit breaker control push buttons
• Name of the protection relay or feeder

P5/EN M/33C 143

Protection Relay Use

NOTE: The Easergy P5 protection relay is delivered with:

• A label of configurable LEDs with default configuration (English version;
see LED1 to LED6 on Easergy P5 x20, page 143 and LED1 to LED10 on
Easergy P5 x30, page 143)
• A label in color for the circuit breaker control push buttons
The different labels can be defined with eSetup Easergy Pro (see LED
documentation view in the Documentation menu).
When the labels are printed and adjusted:
• Insert the label for the configurable LEDs in the shutter (see 14 in Local panel
of Easergy P5x20, page 140 and Local panel of Easergy P5x30, page 141)
• Stick the label for the programmable function push buttons on the back side
of the shutter (see 16 in Local panel of Easergy P5x20, page 140 and Local
panel of Easergy P5x30, page 141)
• Stick the label for the circuit breaker control push buttons on the back side of
the shutter (see 17 in Local panel of Easergy P5x20, page 140 and Local
panel of Easergy P5x30, page 141)
• Insert the label for the protection relay name in the shutter (see 13 in Local
panel of Easergy P5x20, page 140 and Local panel of Easergy P5x30, page
141)

144 P5/EN M/33C

Use Protection Relay

Introduction to the LCD display

Easergy P5 protection relay service cycle
During the start-up of the Easergy P5 protection relay, a series of boot messages
are displayed to guide the user through the whole process.
The start up process may be different dependent on whether the optional
extension module is installed.
If there is no extension module installed, the protection relay enters into the
operation mode and displays the default screen (e.g. the Mimic screen), which can
be set through eSetup Easergy Pro in the General Settings menu.

Figure 123 - The Mimic screen set as the default screen

BAY
IL1 100 A
IL3 100 A
P 944 kW
Q -1632 kVar

If the extension module is installed, the Easergy P5 protection relay checks

whether the content of the extension module is a backup of its existing
configuration and settings by comparing the version numbers.

Figure 124 - Message on handling the existing content in the extension

module

Backup in extension module

2018-12-19 22:00:18
VO1.001.023
P5U20-AABB-BABEA-AABA

Block new backup

Discard

If it is, the Easergy P5 protection relay proceeds to the default screen; If it isn't, a
message is displayed, prompting the user to either keep or discard the content of
the extension module. If the user selects the “Block new backup” option, the
content is kept, the Easergy P5 protection relay will block the backup operation; If
the user selects the “Discard” option, the protection relay directly reconfigures
from the extension module.
When the Easergy P5 protection relay is in operation mode, it is possible to switch
to the main menu screen by pressing key. Depending on the user role, the user
can also change the device settings at any time.
If an event or alarm occurs during operation, a popup message is permanently
displayed on the LCD screen until it is acknowledged using the key.
If there is an alarm message displayed and no action on the keypad for 5 minutes,
the Easergy P5 protection relay will jump to the default screen and then display
the alarm message again automatically.
If there is no alarm message displayed, the default screen is displayed
automatically.

P5/EN M/33C 145

Protection Relay Use

Menu structure
The Easergy P5 protection relay has two levels of menus: the main menu (home
menu) and sub-menus.
NOTE: The hierarchy and navigation of the menu structure are the same on
Easergy P5x20 and Easergy P5x30, but due to a larger resolution, the
Easergy P5x30 LCD color screens can display data and graphics in greater
detail.
The Easergy P5 device is delivered with auto-login feature. It will be disabled
when the passwords for all three levels are changed from the default ones. For the
default passwords for all the levels, refer to Factory default configuration, page
479.

Main menu (home menu)

Figure 125 - The main menu with menu item Measurement in focus

1 2 3 4

P533MUA

1 Home menu icon 4 Remove/Local control icon

2 Full name of the menu item in focus 5 Menu item not in focus
3 Padlock icon 6 Menu item in focus

The main menu screen has 2 widgets: the top title bar, and the main display area.
The top title bar shows the following items:
• Menu name: full name of the menu item that is being selected (the names
next to the menu icons use their short forms)
• Home icon: located on the left side of the top title bar, indicates that the
current screen is the home screen of the LCD display

• Padlock icon ( ): located on the right side of the top title bar, indicating that
no user has logged in to the device; the icon disappears when any user has
logged in.
• Remote/Local control icon: located on the right end of the top title bar,
indicates the protection relay's current control mode

Figure 126 - The remote/local control icons

P533MVA

Remote mode Local mode

146 P5/EN M/33C

Use Protection Relay

The main display area lists all the menu items (sub-menus) of the Easergy P5
protection relay.
In the main menu, pressing the navigation keys on the local panel moves the
focus onto a main menu item (sub-menu). The sub-menu title is displayed in the
top title bar of the main menu screen. Pressing allows the user to enter the
highlighted sub-menu.

Sub menus
Figure 127 - The Measurement sub-menu

P533MWA

1 Title of sub-menu 3 Menu item not in focus

2 Menu item in focus

In the sub-menu, pressing or key moves the focus onto a sub-menu item
and pressing selects the item and allows the user to enter the setting page of
the item.
NOTE: There could be more menu items than is able to be displayed in the
view. The user needs to scroll to these items using the key.

P5/EN M/33C 147

Protection Relay Use

Data/setting page
Some sub-menu items may have more than one data/setting pages, which is
indicated by an arrow on either the left or right end, or by arrows on both ends of
the title bar:
• Arrow on the right end
Pressing the key scrolls the screen to the next data/setting page.
• Arrow on the left end
Pressing the key scrolls the screen to the previous data/setting page.
• Arrows on both the left and right ends
Pressing the or key scrolls the screen to the previous or next data/
setting page, respectively.
Upon seeing the desired data/setting page, pressing allows the user to enter
the data/setting page, and after that, pressing the or key moves the focus
onto each parameter field.
NOTE: There could be more parameters than is able to be displayed in the
view. The user needs to scroll to these parameters using the key.
When an editable parameter is in focus, pressing opens the parameter
setting view and enables the user to change the value or option by pressing the
navigation arrow keys. When a non-editable parameter is in focus, pressing
key pops up a message, indicating that the parameter is not editable. When the
user is not fully authorised to edit the setting, pressing key pops up a
"Permission denied" message.
When changing the settings, use the navigation keys according to the following
instructions to get the result quickly:
• For selecting options, use the and keys;
• For changing the value of integer numbers, use either the and keys, or
the and keys;
• For changing the value of float numbers, first use the and keys to
quickly approach the integer part of the number in steps of 1 and then use the
and keys to adjust the decimal part in steps of 0.01.
In the protection menu, some protection stage items have a first setting page with
more than one view. These views belong to different setting groups of the
protection stage. In this case, upon selecting the menu item, an additional text line
"Press OK to edit groups" is displayed at the top of the main display area to
indicate that here the user can edit the settings of different setting groups.

Pressing the key to enter the group editing status. Pressing the and
keys to scroll to the setting view for the desired setting group.

Figure 128 - Example of a data/setting page with 4 setting views

OK

P533MXA

148 P5/EN M/33C

Use Protection Relay

Moving in the menu structure

The figure below provides an overview of how to navigate in the menu structure.

Figure 129 - Moving in the menu structure of the Easergy P5 protection relay

OK OK OK OK
1 2 3 4 5

OK P533MYA

1 Main menu 4 Data/setting page

(parameter selecting view)

2 Sub-menu 5 Parameter editing view

3 Data/setting page 66 object in focus

(page selecting view)

Pressing and keys, and/or and keys moves the focus to the desired
position or view.

Pressing key allows the user to enter the sub menu (2), the data/setting page
selecting view (3), the parameter selecting view (4), or the parameter editing view
(5), depending on where the user is situated in the structure at the time.

Pressing key is also required to confirm and finalise the editing in the
parameter editing view.

Pressing the key once returns the screen to the previous view;

Pressing the key longer for about 3 seconds returns the screen to the default
screen.

P5/EN M/33C 149

Protection Relay Use

Login and logout

NOTE: For more details about password management, see relevant sections
in Cybersecurity, page 459.

Login
The user may need to log in before changing settings or accessing the data
protected by password. The Easergy P5 device is delivered with auto-login
feature. It will be disabled when the passwords for all three levels are changed
from the default ones. For the default passwords for all there levels, refer to
Factory default configuration, page 479.

The Login screen can be accessed from the main menu or through the key on
the local panel. The following login procedure starts from the main menu.
1. Press the navigation keys and then the key to enter the User Login menu
from the main menu screen.
The screen displays the Login view with the focus on the "UserName" field.
Login
Name

Password

For Login: Press OK

2. Press to show the user list.

Login

EngineerLevel
OperatorLevel
InstallerLevel
Input user name

3. Press or key to select a user name from the user list and then press
to confirm your choice.
4. Enter the password by first pressing or key to select the code position,
and then pressing or key to select different letter or digits and pressing
to confirm.
Login
Name EngineerLevel

Password

NOTE: After a correct password is entered, the LCD display returns to the
home screen and the padlock icon disappears from the screen title bar,
indicating that the user is now able to view/edit the settings, depending on the
access right level of the user type.
NOTE: To access the User Login screen using the key on the local panel,
press and then press the key. This feature enables the user to directly
access the User Login screen from wherever in the menu structure rather than
has to go back to the home screen.

150 P5/EN M/33C

Use Protection Relay

Logout
By default, the user is automatically logged out if there is no action on the keypad
for 3 minutes.
The user can also logout manually by first going to the User Login screen from the
local panel and then pressing the key.
NOTE: To access the User Login screen using the key on the local panel,
press and then press the key. This feature enables the user to directly
access the User Login screen from wherever in the menu structure rather than
has to go back to the home screen.

P5/EN M/33C 151

Protection Relay Use

Adjusting the LCD contrast (for Easergy P5x20)

The LCD contrast of the Easergy P5x20 protection relay can be adjusted
according to the following steps:
1. On the local panel, select the Device/Test menu icon and then press the
key to enter the menu.
The screen displays the device model number.
2. Press the key to go to the menu screen.
3. Press the and key to move the focus onto the menu item "Contr" and
then press to enter the setting page.
4. Press again to start adjusting the value of LCD contrast.
5. Press the or key to increase, or the and keys to decrease, the
contrast, and then press the key to confirm. The contrast range is 1 to
15. The screen's contrast changes after the confirmation.

6. Press key once to go to previous view or press the key for 3 seconds to go
to the default screen.
NOTE: The LCD contrast can alternatively be adjusted by pressing the key
and then pressing the and key. The contrast changes incrementally
with every step but the screen does not display the values.

152 P5/EN M/33C

Use Protection Relay

Changing language
The interface language can be changed on the local panel according to the
following steps:
1. Press the navigation keys and then the key to enter the General settings
menu from the main menu screen. The screen displays the General settings
menu with the focus on the "Lang" option.
2. Press the key to enter the Language setting page.
3. Press the key to focus on the setting item.
4. Press the key again to bring up the language list.
5. Press the or key to select the desired language and then press the
key to confirm the selection.
NOTE: The interface language can alternatively be changed through eSetup
Easergy Pro in the System info view of the General menu.

Figure 130 - Changing interface language in eSetup Easergy Pro

P5/EN M/33C 153

Protection Relay Use

Changing the parameters

WARNING
INOPERABLE PROTECTION RELAY
Make sure that the reboot of the protection relay has no impact on people and
equipment.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or
equipment damage.

After changing some settings, the protection relay needs to reboot. During this
time, the device is not operational.
Parameters can be changed on the setting pages of certain sub-menus:
1. In the main menu, enter the menu item that relates to the function you need to
access.
Refer to Main menu (home menu), page 146 for how to access the menu
items.
2. In the sub-menu, select the sub-menu item that includes the parameter you
want to change.
Refer to Sub menus, page 147 for how to access the sub-menu items.
3. With the related sub-menu item selected, press or key to scroll to the
specific setting page on which you can find the parameter and then press
to enter the setting page.
4. Press the or key to move the focus onto the parameter field and then
press the key to start editing the parameter.
5. Use the navigation keys to change the value of the parameter and then press
the key to confirm your change.
Refer to Data/setting page, page 148 for how to use the navigation keys
tactically.

6. Press the key once to go back to the previous view in the menu, or press it
for 3 seconds to return to the default screen.

154 P5/EN M/33C

Use Protection Relay

Manage the alarm messages

Handling the pop-up alarm message
When an alarm message box pops up on the LCD screen, the user can
acknowledge the message and close the message box by pressing the key.
Alternatively, if there is more than one alarm, the user can press the key for
about 2 seconds to bring up a dialog box where the user can opt to delete all the
alarm messages.

Changing the alarm settings and viewing the alarm list

Alarm settings and list can be accessed from the Logs function group in the main
menu.
The following procedure describes how to change the alarm settings and view the
alarm list:
1. From the main menu, enter the Logs function group. Refer to Main menu
(home menu), page 146 for how to access the menu items.
2. In the Logs sub-menu, select the menu item "Alarm". The first page of the
option, the Alarms setting page, appears.
Refer to Sub menus, page 147 for how to access the sub-menu items.
3. Press or key to move the focus onto the parameter field and then
press to start editing the parameter.
The setting page includes the following parameters:
• Count: number of alarms (from 0 to 200)
• Order: scroll order (Old - New or New - Old)
• FVScal: fault value scaling (Pri or PU)
• Alarms: enable alarm pop-up messages (On or Off)
• Sync: displaying event time not in sync (On or Off)
4. Press or key to change the settings of the parameters and then press
to confirm your change.

5. Press the key once to go back to the previous view in the menu, or press it
for about 3 seconds to return the default screen.
NOTE: For viewing the alarm list, press key once to go to the Alarm list
page after Step 2.

P5/EN M/33C 155

Protection Relay Use

Matrix operations
The matrix mapping operation can be performed on the local panel of the Easergy
P5 protection relay, in the eSetup Easergy Pro software tool, or through the web
HMI.
The following procedure describes the mapping operation on the local panel of the
Easergy P5 protection relay. The operation is much easier in eSetup Easergy Pro
and the web HMI due to their intuitive interfaces.
1. Select the Control function from the main menu, press to enter the sub-
menu.
2. Press or key to scroll to the menu item (e.g. DI) that needs matrix
mapping operation.
3. Press or key to scroll to the matrix mapping page and start the
mapping operation.
NOTE: The local panel LCD screen only shows the first line of mapping
relations already existing in the configuration. If no mapping relation is
available for the first line of the matrix, the screen only shows the digital
input or internal signal on the left side of the screen.
4. Press or key to scroll to the digital input or internal signal type and
then press to confirm. The first crossing point on the matrix line starts to
blinck.
5. Press or key to scroll to the crossing point for which you want to set
the mapping status.
NOTE: Some crossing points may not be visible in the screen but the user
can view all the crosssing points by pressing key.
6. Press or key to select the mapping status (enabled or diabled;
connected or unconnected; latched or unlatched, depending on which matrix
mapping operation is being performed) and then press to confirm.
The screen shows the current line of mapping relations, leaving the empty
crossing points invisible on the screen.

7. Press key to leave the matrix setting page and then key to return to the
preview level in the menu structure.

156 P5/EN M/33C

Use Protection Relay

Controlling objects
The local panel provides buttons for directly controlling objects like circuit breaker
and earth/ground switch. The user do not need to go through the menu to find out
the options for closing/opening the objects.

Controlling an object with Selective Control enabled

The user needs to enter the correct password and enable the Selective control
feature in the Objects view of the Control menu (see Selecting the control button
mode, page 157 below) or in the Local panel conf view of the General menu (see
The Local panel conf view in eSetup Easergy Pro, page 383) in eSetup Easergy
Pro.

Figure 131 - Selecting the control button mode

When Selective Control is enabled, the control operation will include a

confirmation step (select before operate).

1. Press on the local panel to open a circuit breaker or stop a motor, or

press on the local panel to close a circuit breaker or start a motor.

2. Press the same key ( or ) again to confirm your operation, or

press on the local panel to cancel the previous operation.

Controlling an object with Direct Control enabled

The user needs to enter the correct password and enable the Direct control
feature in the Objects view of the Control menu or in the Local panel conf view of
the General menu in eSetup Easergy Pro (refer to Selecting the control button
mode, page 157 and The Local panel conf view in eSetup Easergy Pro, page 383
respectively).
When Direct Control is enabled, the control operation is done without
confirmation.

1. Press on the local panel to open a circuit breaker or stop a motor, or

press on the local panel to close a circuit breaker or start a motor.

2. The object in control acts according to your control operation.

P5/EN M/33C 157

Protection Relay Use

Specific language file change

The Easergy P5 protection relay can be ordered in English version only or in
English with another local language (see Order information, page 486).
The selection of the language can be done with eSetup Easergy Pro or directly on
the local panel of the Easergy P5 protection relay (see Changing language, page
153).
Other languages can be uploaded to the Easergy P5 protection relay through
eSetup Easergy Pro, using the Update language option from the (Tools) drop
down list in the tool bar.
NOTE: The language files use the .bin extension.

Figure 132 - The Update language option in eSetup Easergy Pro

For detailed list of languages, contact Schneider Electric.

Transferring data to USB memory stick

The Easergy P5 protection relay supports data transfer to/from a USB memory
stick plugged into the USB 3.0 type A port located under the flap of the local panel.
Files with the following formats in the protection relay can be transferred:

File format Description

manifest.mnfs IED information and integrated check data

/DR/*.dat, *.cfg Disturbance records

The USB data transfer function has the following features:

• Hot-plugging is supported and the USB key status is automatically detected
by the device.
• Files are copied to folder “P5bak” in the USB key.
The protection relay creates this folder automatically before transferring data.
If a “P5bak” folder already exists, all the files in it will be over-written.
• Each file transferred is accompanied by a CRC32 check to ensure the
integrity.
• Software and hardware information is stored in the manifest file.
• Data transfer process takes about 2 to 10 minutes.
• Setting file, event, alarm and language files in binary format can only be used
in the eSetup Easergy Pro tool.
• The USB key used must be of the FAT32 format and with write caching
disabled.
• USB 3.0 or above is recommended for use on the device.
The data is transferred to the USB key according to the following steps:
1. Insert the USB Key into the USB connector from the local panel.

158 P5/EN M/33C

Use Protection Relay

The USB key status changes from “Off” to “On” automatically in the USB file
copy view of the Device/Test sub menu.
Copy files to USB 1/1
USB key Off

Copy files to USB 1/1

Copy Easergy P5 to USB
USB key On
Copy to USB key -

2. Select “Copy to USB key” and then select “All” to copy all the files from the
protection relay to the USB key.
Copy files to USB 1/1
Copy Easergy P5 to USB
USB key On
Copy to USB key -

Copy files to USB 1/1

Edit:Copy Easergy P5 to USB
-
ALL

3. A progress bar is displayed on the screen and after a short while a “Success”
message appears on the screen when the transfer is completed.

Copy files to USB 1/1

Success

Press Home to cancel

P5/EN M/33C 159

Protection Relay Use

eSetup Easergy Pro

Overview

WARNING
INOPERABLE PROTECTION RELAY
Make sure that the reboot of the protection relay has no impact on people and
equipment.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or
equipment damage.

After changing some settings, the protection relay needs to reboot. During this
time, the device is not operational.
eSetup Easergy Pro is a setting and operating software tool for configuring
Easergy P5 devices, local operation and customisation functions.
The eSetup Easergy Pro software is supplied directly through the Schneider
Electric website www.se.com, along with the eSetup Easergy Pro program for
recovering disturbance recording files, and all the Easergy P5 documentation in
PDF format.

Figure 133 - eSetup Easergy Pro menu bar and tool bar

The eSetup Easergy Pro software has a graphical interface where the protection
relay settings and parameters are grouped under nine menu tabs:
• General
• Measurements
• Control
• Protection
• Matrix
• Logs
• Communication
• Device/Test
• Documentation
The contents of the tabs depend on the device type and the selected application
mode. Refer to the User Manual of eSetup Easergy Pro for detailed information on
the setting views of each menu.
The eSetup Easergy Pro stores the device configuration in a setting file. The
configuration of one physical device is saved in one setting file. The configurations
can be printed out and saved for later use.
When starting to work with eSetup Easergy Pro, there are three options:
• Create a new setting file without connecting to a protection relay
• Open an existing (previously saved) setting file without connecting to a
protection relay
• Connect to a relay and read the settings from the protection relay .
eSetup Easergy Pro can be connected to a single relay via the mini-USB port in
the protection relay's local panel or to a group of protection relays via Ethernet.

160 P5/EN M/33C

Use Protection Relay

Operation modes
The eSetup Easergy Pro software can be used in three operation modes:
• Disconnected mode
• Single unit connecting mode
• Network connecting mode

Using eSetup Easergy Pro in disconnected mode

The disconnected mode allows you to prepare parameters and settings files for
Easergy P5 prior to commissioning.
The parameter and protection setting files prepared in disconnected mode will be
downloaded later to the Easergy P5 protection relays in connected mode.
In this mode, the user can create a setting file from scratch, or open a previously
saved setting file as a basis for creating configuration for a protection relay of the
same type. Refer to the User Manual of eSetup Easergy Pro for more information.

Using eSetup Easergy Pro connected to a single Easergy P5

The single connection mode is used during commissioning of an Easergy P5
protection relay:
• To upload, download and modify Easergy P5 parameters and settings.
Refer to the User Manual of eSetup Easergy Pro for more information on
uploading (writing)/downloading (reading) setting files to/from the connected
protection relays.

NOTICE
UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION AND NUISANCE TRIPPING
After writing new settings, configurations or firmware to a protection relay,
perform a test to verify that the protection relay operates correctly with the new
settings.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in unwanted shutdown of
the electrical installation.

• To have all the measurements and supporting data available for

commissioning.
The PC fitted with the eSetup Easergy Pro software is connected to the mini-USB
port in the local panel of the Easergy P5 using a USB cord (reference 59700).

Figure 134 - Connecting a PC to the Easergy P5 using a USB cable

P533N5A

P5/EN M/33C 161

Protection Relay Use

Using eSetup Easergy Pro connected to an Easergy P5 network

The network connection mode is used during operation:
• To manage the protection system.
• To check the status of the power supply.
• To diagnose any incident occurring on the power supply.
The PC fitted with the eSetup Easergy Pro software is connected to a group of
Easergy P5 units via a communication network (connection via serial link or
Ethernet).
The connection window allows configuration of the Easergy P5 network, and
provides access to the parameter and protection setting files of the Easergy P5
units on the network.

Setting up the connection

Installing the USB driver

If it is the first time you connect the Easergy P5 protection relay to a PC running
eSetup Easergy Pro, you need to install the USB driver on the PC.
The steps for installing the driver are as follows:

1. Connect the USB cable (reference 59700) to the front port of the Easergy
P5 protection relay and the PC (see Connecting a PC to the Easergy P5 using
a USB cable, page 161), after that look for a new COM port under COM & LPT
in the Device Manager window of the PC.
If you are unsure which is the right port, detach the USB cable and insert it
again when you are in this menu.

2. Right-click on the port and select Update Driver Software from the
contextual menu.

3. Select the option Browse my computer for driver software and locate the
driver in the P5 driver_files folder under the eSetup Easergy Pro directory.

4. Click the Install button in the prompt window to start installing the driver.

5. If the driver has been installed successfully, the connection now appears
under Network adapters in the Device Manager window each time you
connect the PC to a Easergy P5 protection relay.

162 P5/EN M/33C

Use Protection Relay

Connecting to a single protection relay using USB cable

1. Install the USB driver from the eSetup Easergy Pro file package for the first
time connecting the Easergy P5 protection relay to a PC running eSetup
Easergy Pro (see Installing the USB driver, page 162).
2. Connect the USB cable (reference 59700) between the PC running eSetup
Easergy Pro and the local port of the Easergy P5 protection relay, with the
mini-USB type B connector of the cable plugged into the protection relay and
the type A connector to the PC (see Connecting a PC to the Easergy P5
using a USB cable, page 161).
3. On the eSetup Easergy Pro toolbar, click the ON connection button. The
Login pop-up window opens.

Figure 135 - The connection buttons on the tool bar

4. Select the right Easergy P5 USB serial port name.

5. Click Connect.
A new window showing the relay information opens.
6. Enter the user name and password to login.
eSetup Easergy Pro's main view opens.
NOTE: If you connect for the first time to a device on which the default users
and passwords are used, refer to Cybersecurity, page 459.

Connecting to protection relays via Ethernet

You can connect to a single protection relay or multiple protection relays via
Ethernet.
1. On the eSetup Easergy Pro toolbar, click the ON connection button. The
Login pop-up window opens.
2. Click ETHERNET.
3. Select the right IP address from the drop-down menu.
• For the protection relay's IP address, see the protection relay local panel
menu BUS/ETHERNET PORT.
• To save the defined connection settings, click the disk icon.
4. Click Connect. A new window showing the protection relay information
opens.
5. Enter the user name and password to login. eSetup Easergy Pro's main view
opens.

P5/EN M/33C 163

Protection Relay Use

Web HMI
Overview
The web HMI is used for operation and settings. It has the same functions as
eSetup Easergy Pro except the logic and mimic customisation.
The web HMI can be accessed using the following browsers 15, 16, 17:

Operation Certificate state Firefox® Internet Edge®

system Explorer®

Windows 7 without pre-installed certification ■ ■ -

pre-installed certification ■ ■ -

Windows 10 without pre-installed certification ■ - -

pre-installed certification ■ ■ ■

Device reboot reminder

NOTE: Attention to the reminder message of device reboot.
Some setting changes require a reboot of the Easergy P5 protection relay.
This is reminded by a message appearing on the HMI screen when you
change such settings through the HMI.

Figure 136 - Example of a device reboot reminder on the HMI screen

Reminder messsage
about device reboot

P533NBA

15. Chrome® is not supported.

16. Firefox is a registered trademark of the Mozilla Foundation.
17. Internet Explorer and Edge are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.

164 P5/EN M/33C

Use Protection Relay

Firefox

1. Enter "https://192.168.1.21" in the Firefox address bar, it will show

the left message.
Click "Advanced" to show more information.

2. If a message regarding an invalid security certificate is displayed,

click "Add Exception...".
The left window appears.

3. If needed, click the "View..." button to see the pop-up information of

the certificate with the name "192.168.1.21.p12".

P5/EN M/33C 165

Protection Relay Use

4. Close the certificate viewing window and then click the "Confirm
Security Exception" button.
The web HMI "Login" page opens.

5. Now the certificate file is already imported into the Firefox browser
and we can see it in the Certificate Manager of the Firefox browser.

Internet Explorer in Windows 7

1. Enter "https://192.168.1.21" in the IE browser of Windows 7.

The left warning messages appear in the window.

2. Click "Continue to this website (not recommended)".

The login page is loaded but with a "Certificate error" message shown
on the right end of the address bar.

166 P5/EN M/33C

Use Protection Relay

3. Click on the "Certificate error" message and then click "View

certificates".
A pop-up window appears, showing the certificate information.

4. Click the "Install Certificate" button to install the certificate.

The "Certificate Import Wizard" window appears.

5. Click "Next" and then, on the "Certificate store" page, select the
Certificate Store "Trusted Root Certification Authorities".

6. Click "Finish" to import the certificate and close the "Certificate

Import Wizard" window.

P5/EN M/33C 167

Protection Relay Use

7. Click "Yes" on the pop-up "Security Warning" window to install the

certificate.

8. The certificate is installed successfully and shown under the

Console Root/Certificates-Current User directory.

168 P5/EN M/33C

Use Protection Relay

Edge in Windows 10
The following procedure for accessing the Easergy P5 web HMI uses the IE
browser for illustration. The screen shots for the Edge browser are identical.

1. Enter "https://192.168.1.21" in the address bar of the Edge browser

of Windows 10.
The left messages appear on the window.

2. Click "Go on to the webpage (not recommended)".

The left message appears on the window, indicating that the right
certificate needs to be installed in the computer first.

3. On the computer screen, click the "Start" button and then type in
"mmc" in the "search bar".
The "Console" interface opens on the screen.

4. Click "File" > "Add/Remove Snap-in...".

The "Add or Remove Snap-ins" window pops up on the screen.

5. Click "Certificates" in the left box and then click the "Add" button.
The "Certificates Snap-in" window appears.

P5/EN M/33C 169

Protection Relay Use

6. Select "Computer account" and then click "Next".

The "Select Computer" window appears.

7. Select "Local computer" and then click "Finish" to close the "Select
computer" window.

8. Click "Ok" to close the "Add or Remove Snap-ins" window.

The "Console Root" folder in the "Console" interface is now populated
with the "Certificates (local computer)" directory.

9. Select "Certificates (Local Computer)" > "Trusted Root Certification

Authorities" > "Certificates" in the left box and then right click
"Certificates" and select "All tasks" > "Import" in the context menu.
The "Certificate Import Wizard" window opens.

10. Click "Next".

The "File to Import" window appears.

170 P5/EN M/33C

Use Protection Relay

11. Click "Browse" and then, in the pop-up dialog box, select the path
of the certificate followed by the certificate name "192.168.1.21.p12"
(the suffix of the certificate is "p12").
Note that the file type should be "All Files".

12. Click "Open" to finish locating the certificate file.

13. Click "Next" on the "File to Import" window.

The "Password" window appears.

14. Type in the password "secbrick", check the "Mark this key as
exportable..." option, and then click "Next".
The "Certificate Store" window appears.
.

P5/EN M/33C 171

Protection Relay Use

15. Check the "Place all certificates in the following store" option,
browse to the certificate store folder "Trusted Root Certification
Authorities", and then click "Next".
The certificate import settings page appears.

16. Click "Finish".

If the import was successful, a pop-up message with such content will
appear on the screen.

17. After the certificate has been imported successfully, set up the
Edge browser by checking the "Use TLS 1.0", "Use TLS 1.1", and
"Use TLS 1.2" options under the "Advanced" tab of the "Internet
options".

18. Enter "https://192.168.1.21" in the address bar of the Edge

browser again.
Now we can access the Login page directly.

172 P5/EN M/33C

Use Protection Relay

The EcoStruxure Power Device application

The EcoStruxure Power Device application is used to facilitate and simplify the
operations and maintenance of the Easergy P5 protection relay, directly with a
smart phone a few meters from the cubicle.
The EcoStruxure Power Device application can be connected to the Easergy P5
protection relay using a Wi-Fi router.
The EcoStruxure Power Device application provides easy access to device status,
control and monitoring of the circuit breaker, measurements, settings, events and
other functions through the mirror HMI or a simplified view.
• Mirror HMI:
Duplicates the device display in the EcoStruxure Power Device application to
perform actions more easily.
• Simplified view:
The EcoStruxure Power Device application gives you an organised view of all
the device’s functionalities for easier access to data.

Connecting to protection relays via Ethernet

You can connect to a single protection relay or multiple protection relays via
Ethernet.
Preparations before launching the EcoStruxure Power Device application
• Equip the Easergy P5 protection relay with Ethernet modules (slot M or L).
• Connect the Easergy P5 protection relay to a Wi-Fi router with RJ45 cable.
• Configure the Wi-Fi network of the smart phone (IP address of the smart
phone should be in the same network segment as the Easergy P5 protection
relay).
Connecting to protection relays
• Launch the EcoStruxure Power Device application.
• Sign in with the account and password created at the Schneider Electric
server.
• Connect the new product via scanning QR code or selecting the Easergy P5
protection relay in the product list.
• Enter the IP address of the Easergy P5 protection relay and click Connect.
• Enter the user name and password of the Easergy P5 protection relay.
• A new window showing the Easergy P5 protection relay information opens.

P5/EN M/33C 173

Protection Relay Protection functions

Protection functions
General features of protection stages
Enable/disable protection functions
The different stages of the protection function can be enabled/disabled
individually.
If a protection function stage is disabled, it is not shown in the protection menu in
the local panel.
To enable or disable a protection function stage:
• With eSetup Easergy Pro or Web HMI
Enter the Valid protection stages view in the Protection menu or directly go to
each protection stage view in the same menu.

Figure 137 - Enable/disable a protection stage in the Valid protection stages

view of the Protection menu

Figure 138 - Enable/disable a protection stage in the view of each protection

stage

• On the local panel, through the protection menu

The Enabled Stages view (Protection > Protection management) in the
Protection menu allows to enable or disable the protection stage(s) of a
protection function. If a protection stage is enabled here, it appears in the
Protection menu as a menu option.

174 P5/EN M/33C

Protection functions Protection Relay

Figure 139 - The Enabled Stages view in the Protection menu

Enabled stages 1/7

Enable for I>
Ist> off
Ilr> off
I> On
I>> off
I>>> off
Io> off

For the motor protection, there is a dedicated Motor status view in the protection
menu where it is possible to enable or disable the following protection functions:
• Thermal overload protection for machine (ANSI code 49M)
• Motor start-up supervision (ANSI code 48)
• Motor restart inhibition (ANSI code 66)
• Locked rotor (ANSI code 51LR)
• Motor Anti-backspin (ABS) protection
• Motor speed detection
NOTE: The Motor status view is comprised of settings (e.g. nominal motor
start current) common to these functions.

Setting groups
Setting groups are controlled by using controlling inputs like digital inputs, function
keys, virtual inputs, HMI or custom logic.
When none of the assigned inputs are active, the active setting group is defined by
parameter 'SetGrp no control state' (see Settings related to setting groups in the
Valid Protection Stages view, page 175).
When one controlling input activates, the corresponding setting group is activated
as well. If multiple inputs are active at the same time, the active setting group
follows the definition by 'SetGrp priority' (see Settings related to setting groups in
the Valid Protection Stages view, page 175).
By using virtual I/O the active setting group can be controlled using the local panel
display, any communication protocol, or in-built programmable logic functions.
When a controlling input is configured, the SetGrp common change parameter (in
the Valid protection stages view of the Protection menu in eSetup Easergy Pro) or
the Set. group parameter in the same menu on the local panel) is not operational.
Setting group changes are applied simultaneously to all protection functions.

Figure 140 - Settings related to setting groups in the Valid Protection Stages
view

P5/EN M/33C 175

Protection Relay Protection functions

Example of setting groups

Any digital input can be used to control setting groups but in this example DI1,
DI2, DI3 and DI4 are chosen to control setting groups 1 to 4. This setting is done
with the parameter 'Set group x DI control' (see Settings related to setting groups
in the Valid Protection Stages view, page 175) where x refers to the desired
setting group.
'SetGrp priority' is used to give a condition to a situation where two or more digital
inputs, controlling setting groups, are active at the same time. SetGrp priority
could have values: "1 to 4" or "4 to 1" (see Settings related to setting groups in the
Valid Protection Stages view, page 175).
Assuming that DI2 and DI3 are active at the same time and SetGrp priority is set
to "1 to 4" , setting group 2 becomes active. If SetGrp priority is reversed, that is,
"4 to 1", the setting group 3 becomes active.
When a setting is selected by a digital input and this one is not activated, the
'SetGrp common change' will not take effect.

Protection stage status

The status of a protection stage is one of the following:
• Ok = '-'
The stage is idle and is measuring the analogue quantity for the protection.
No power system fault detected.
• Blocked
The stage is blocked for some reason (eg. through block matrix).
• Start
The stage detected a fault (i.e. pick up value reached) and is counting the
operation delay.
• Trip
The stage has tripped and the fault is still on.

Mode of use for testing purposes

There is an "Mode of use" parameter which, when set to Test or Test Block mode,
allows forcing of the status of any protection stage to be "start" or "trip". By using
this forcing feature, current or voltage injection is not necessary to check the
output matrix configuration, the wiring from the digital outputs to the circuit breaker
and also to check that communication protocols are correctly transferring event
information to a SCADA system.
The mode of use can be configured in the System info view of the General menu.

176 P5/EN M/33C

Protection functions Protection Relay

Figure 141 - Set the Mode of use in System info view of the General menu

Start and trip signals

Every protection stage has two internal binary output signals: start and trip. The
start signal is issued when a fault has been detected. The trip signal is issued after
the configured operation delay unless the fault disappears before the end of the
delay time.
Global trip timer offers the possibility of assigning a dwell time delay (0 - 10.0 s) to
the protection trip output.
The hysteresis, as indicated in the protection stage's characteristics data, means
that the signal is regarded as a fault until the signal drops below the start setting
determined by the hysteresis value (see Hysteresis and reset ratio, page 179).
Using the output matrix, the user connects the internal start and trip signals to the
digital outputs and indicators. See Output matrix, page 377.

Start and trip counters

Each protection function stage has a counter associated to the start and trip
signals, they can be cleared individually.

Blocking
Any protection function, except arc-flash protection (see Arc-flash (ANSI 50ARC),
page 280), can be blocked with internal and external signals using the block
matrix. Internal signals are, for example, logic outputs, start and trip signals from
other stages and external signals are for example digital and virtual inputs.
Some protection stages have also inbuilt blocking functions. For examples, phase
overcurrent has an input for inrush detection.
When a protection stage is blocked, it won't start in case of a fault condition. If
blocking is activated during the operation delay, the delay counting is frozen until
the blocking condition is off or the start resets, that is, the fault condition
disappears. If the stage is already tripping, the blocking has no effect. See
Blocking matrix, page 378 for more information.

P5/EN M/33C 177

Protection Relay Protection functions

Overshoot time
Overshoot time is the time the protection relay needs to notice that a fault has
been cleared during the operate time. This characteristic is important when
grading the operate time settings between relays.

Figure 142 - Definition for overshoot time

t FAULT
t OVERSHOOT ≤ 50 ms

Delay Setting ≥ t FAULT + t OVERSHOOT

Trip Contacts P533A0A

For example, when there is a heavy fault in an outgoing feeder, it will start both the
incoming and outgoing feeder relay. However, the fault must be cleared by the
outgoing feeder protection relay and the incoming feeder relay must not trip.
Although the operating delay setting of the incoming feeder is more than that of
the outgoing feeder, the incoming feeder might still trip if the operate time
difference is not big enough. The difference must be more than the overshoot time
of the incoming feeder relay plus the operate time of the outgoing feeder circuit
breaker.
Definition for overshoot time, page 178 shows an overvoltage fault seen by the
incoming feeder when the outgoing feeder clears the fault. If the operation delay
setting would be slightly shorter or if the fault duration would be slightly longer than
in the figure, an unselective trip might happen (the dashed 40 ms pulse in the
figure). In devices, the overshoot time is less than 50 ms.

Disengaging time and reset time

The disengaging time is the time between the moment when the fault conditions
disappear and the moment the tripping contact relay opens. It is an instantaneous
time.
Disengaging time and adjustable reset time according to IEC 60255-151 standard,
page 179 shows an example of reset time, that is, release delay when the Easergy
P5 protection relay is clearing an overcurrent fault. When the Easergy P5
protection relay’s trip contacts are closed, the circuit breaker (CB) starts to open.
After the CB contacts are open, the fault current still flows through an arc between
the opened contacts. The current is finally cut off when the arc extinguishes at the
next zero crossing of the current. This is the start moment of the reset delay. After
the reset time delay the trip contacts and start contact are opened unless latching
is configured. The precise reset time depends on the fault size; after a significant
fault, the reset time is longer. The reset time also depends on the specific
protection stage. The maximum reset time for each stage is specified under the
characteristics of every protection function.

178 P5/EN M/33C

Protection functions Protection Relay

Figure 143 - Disengaging time and adjustable reset time according to IEC
60255-151 standard

Energising
quantity

Start (pick-up)
signal

Disengaging time
Operate
signal

Time delay setting Tripping

Value of
internal time
delay counter

Tr: Reset time

Tr
Reset time setting

Reset time Tr P533A1A

The adjustable reset time is a definite or inverse time hold used mainly to detect
restriking faults (DT) or allow coordination with electromechanical protection
relays (Inverse). It can be used also for coordination with electromechanical
relays.
It is implemented in the following protection functions:
• Phase overcurrent (ANSI 50/51)
• Directional phase overcurrent (ANSI 67)
• Earth/ground fault overcurrent (ANSI 50N/51N)
The adjustable reset time may be inhibited if necessary.

Hysteresis and reset ratio

When comparing a measured value against a start value, some amount of
hysteresis is needed to avoid oscillation near equilibrium situation. With zero
hysteresis, any noise in the measured signal or any noise in the measurement
itself would cause unwanted oscillation between fault-on and fault-off situations.

Figure 144 - Example of behaviour of an over-protection with hysteresis

Hysteresis

Start level
Reset level

> Start P533A2A

The reset ratio is the ratio between the reset level and the start level. To avoid any
chattering of the protection for low settings of thresholds, a reset ratio can be
claimed with a minimum value of hysteresis. For example: <93% with a minimum
of hysteresis of 0.005In.

P5/EN M/33C 179

Protection Relay Protection functions

Figure 145 - Example of behaviour of an under-protection with hysteresis

Hysteresis
Reset level
Start level

< Start P533A3A

Time grading for logic selectivity

When a fault occurs, the protection scheme only needs to trip circuit breakers
whose operation is required to isolate the fault.
This selective tripping is also called discrimination or protection coordination and
is typically achieved by time grading. Protection systems in successive zones are
arranged to operate in times that are graded through the sequence of equipment
so that upon the occurrence of a fault, although there are a number of protections
that devices respond to, only those relevant to the faulty zone complete the
tripping function.
The recommended discrimination time between two Easergy P5 protection relays
in an MV network is 300 ms considering a CB opening time of 60 ms.

Recorded values on the last eight faults

There are detailed information available on the last eight faults for each of the
protection stages. The recorded values are specific for protection stages and
could contain information like time stamp, fault value, elapsed delay, fault current,
fault voltage, phase angle and setting group.

180 P5/EN M/33C

Protection functions Protection Relay

Dependent time and definite time operation

Description

Definite time protection

The tripping time is constant. The operation time is started when the set point is
overrun.

Figure 146 - Definite time protection

t

Is I P533A4A

Dependent time operation

The dependent time operation is the inverse definite minimum time (IDMT) type of
operation in accordance with standards IEC 60255-151, BS 142 and
IEEE C-37.112. The dependent time operation is available for several protection
functions:
• Overcurrent protection (directional or not),
• Earth/ground fault protection (directional or not),
• Unbalance protection
The operate time in the dependent time mode (IDMT) is dependent on the
magnitude of the fault. The bigger the fault, the faster the stage issues a trip signal
and vice versa. The trip time calculation resets if the injected quantity drops below
the start level.
The operate time in definite time (DT) mode is defined regardless of the fault
signal. It is activated as soon as the pickup value is reached.

Figure 147 - Dependent time and definite time operation curves

IDMT DT

t (s)

It (A) P533A5A

The operate time in the definite time mode is fixed by the operation delay setting.
The timer starts when the protection stage starts and counts until the set time has
elapsed. After that, the stage issues a trip command. If the protection stage reset
before the definite time operation has elapsed, then the stage resets.
By default, the definite time delay cannot be set to zero because the value
contains processing time of the function and operate time of the output contact.
This means that the time indicated in the Definite time setting view is the actual
operate time of the function.

P5/EN M/33C 181

Protection Relay Protection functions

Use the Accept zero delay setting in the protection stage setting view to accept
the zero setting for definite time function. In this case, the minimum operate time
of the function must be tested separately.
NOTE: The start time and the operate time values include the fault detection
time and operation time of the contact.

Stage-specific dependent delay

Some protection functions have their own specific type of dependent delay.
Details of these dedicated dependent delays are described with the appropriate
protection function.

Operation modes
There are two operation modes to use the dependent time characteristics:
• Standard delays
Using standard delay characteristics by selecting a curve family (IEC, IEEE,
IEEE2, RI) and a delay type (Normal inverse, Very inverse, etc.). See
Standard dependent operation delay, page 183.
• Fully programmable dependent delay characteristics
Building the characteristics by setting 16 [current, time] points. The relay
interpolates the values between given points with second degree
polynomials. This mode is activated by the setting curve family to "PrgN",
where N = 1, 2, 3, corresponding to the three different programmable curves
available. Each programmed curve can be used independently by any
number of protection stages. See Programmable dependent time curves,
page 194.

Local panel graph

Easergy P5 protection relay shows a graph of the currently used dependent delay
on the local panel display. The up and down keys can be used for zooming. Also
the delays at 20 x Iset, 4 x Iset, 2 x Iset and 1.05 x Iset are shown.

Limitations
The minimum definite operation time starts at the latest when the measured value
is twenty times the setting. However, there are limitations at high setting values
due to the measurement range. The maximum measured secondary phase
current and the maximum directly measured earth/ground fault current depends
on the type of sensor used (see Maximum measured secondary currents and
settings for phase and earth/ground fault overcurrent inputs, page 183 below).
The full scope of dependent delay curves go up to 20 times the setting or the
maximum of the dynamic measurement, whichever is smaller. At a high setting,
the maximum measurement capability limits the scope of dependent curves
according to Maximum measured secondary currents and settings for phase and
earth/ground fault overcurrent inputs, page 183.
The protection function starts when the current reaches 1.05 times of the setting
(Iset).

182 P5/EN M/33C

Protection functions Protection Relay

Table 27 - Maximum measured secondary currents and settings for phase

and earth/ground fault overcurrent inputs

Current input Rated Maximum Maximum secondary Current

current measured scaled setting measured
secondary current enabling dependent
delay times up to full
20x setting

CT 1 A/5 A 60In 3In IL1, IL2, IL3 and

I0calc
LPCT k·Ipr 18 45In 2.25In

Standard earth/ 1 A/5 A 30In0 1.5In0 I0

ground fault

CSH 2A 2A 42.5In0 1.5In0 I0

CSH 20A 20 A 42.5In0 2.125In0 I0

Very sensitive 1A 20In0 In0 I0
earth/ground
fault

Standard dependent operation delay

The available standard dependent delays are divided in four categories called
dependent curve families: IEC, IEEE, IEEE2 and RI. Each category contains a set
of different delay types according to Available standard delay families and the
available delay types within each family, page 183.
The dependent time setting error signal activates if the delay category is changed
and the old delay type does not exist in the new category.

Table 28 - Available standard delay families and the available delay types
within each family

Delay type Curve family

DT IEC IEEE IEEE2 Others

DT Definite time ■

NI Normal inverse ■ ■

VI Very inverse ■ ■ ■

EI Extremely inverse ■ ■ ■

LTI Long time inverse ■ ■

LTVI Long time very ■

inverse
LTEI Long time extremely ■
inverse
MI Moderately inverse ■ ■

STI Short time inverse ■ ■

STEI Short time extremely ■

inverse
CO8 Long-time inverse ■
CO8
RI Specific inverse ■

RXIDG Specific inverse ■

18. k: Current factor; Ipr: LPCT rated primary current

P5/EN M/33C 183

Protection Relay Protection functions

Minimum definite operation time

The minimum definite operation time starts when the measured value is twenty
times the setting. However, there are limitations at high setting values due to the
measurement range.
The limited measured values for current inputs are listed in the table.

Table 29 - Limitation at measurement range

Current input Limited measured current

CT 60In
Standard earth/ground fault 20In0

CSH 20In0
Very sensitive earth/ground fault 20In0

IEC dependent operate time

The operate time depends on the measured value and other parameters
according to Equation 7.1. The Easergy P5 protection relay uses a real time
approximation in order to emulate this equation and produces a result in line with
the standard.

kA
t= B
 I 
  − 1
 I set  P533A6A Equation 7.1

t = Operation delay in seconds

k = Multiplier TMS
I = Measured value
Iset = Start setting
A, B = Constants parameters according to Constants for IEC dependent delay
equation, page 184.
There are three different dependent delay types according to IEC 60255-151
standard, Normal inverse (NI), Extremely inverse (EI), Very inverse (VI) and a VI
extension. In addition, there is a de facto standard Long time inverse (LTI).

Table 30 - Constants for IEC dependent delay equation

IEC type of Delay type Parameter

curve
A B
A NI Normal inverse 0.14 0.02
B EI Extremely inverse 80 2

C VI Very inverse 13.5 1

LTI Long time inverse 120 1

STI Short time inverse 0.05 0.04

Example of the delay type "Normal inverse (NI)":

k = 0.50
I = 4 pu (constant current)
Iset = 2 pu
A = 0.14
B = 0.02

184 P5/EN M/33C

Protection functions Protection Relay

0.50 ⋅ 0.14
t= 0.02
= 5.0
4
  −1
2 P533A7A

The operate time in this example is five seconds. The same result can be read
from IEC normal inverse delay, page 185.

IEC tripping characteristics (limit value*, please refer to Minimum definite operation time, page 184)

Figure 148 - IEC normal inverse delay Figure 149 - IEC extremely inverse delay

limit value*
limit value*

P5/EN M/33C 185

Protection Relay Protection functions

Figure 150 - IEC very inverse delay Figure 151 - IEC long time inverse delay

limit value* limit value*

Figure 152 - IEC short time inverse delay

10
IEC STI

1
Delay (s)

k = 1.25
k=1

k = 0.5

0.1
k = 0.2

0.01 k = 0.025

0.001
1 10 limit value* 100
I/Iset

186 P5/EN M/33C

Protection functions Protection Relay

IEEE/ANSI dependent operate time

There are three different delay types according to IEEE Standard C37.112 (MI, VI,
EI) and many versions according to Constants for IEEE/ANSI inverse delay
equation, page 187. The IEEE standard defines dependent delay for both trip and
release operations. However, in the Easergy P5 protection relay only the trip time
is dependent according to the standard but the reset time is constant.
The operate delay depends on the measured value and other parameters
according to Equation 7.2. The Easergy P5 protection relay uses a real time
approximation in order to emulate this equation and produces a result in line with
the standard.

 
 
 A 
t=k  C
+ B
  I  − 1 
  I set  
  P533A8A Equation 7.2

t = Operation delay in seconds

k = Multiplier TMS
I = Measured value
Iset = Start setting
A, B = Constants parameters according to Constants for IEEE/ANSI inverse delay
equation, page 187.

Table 31 - Constants for IEEE/ANSI inverse delay equation

IEEE/ANSI Delay type Parameter

type of curve
A B C
LTI Long time inverse 0.086 0.185 0.02

LTVI Long time very inverse 28.55 0.712 2

LTEI Long time extremely inverse 64.07 0.250 2

D MI Moderately inverse 0.0515 0.1140 0.02

E VI Very inverse 19.61 0.491 2

F EI Extremely inverse 28.2 0.1217 2

STI Short time inverse 0.02394 0.01694 0.02

STEI Short time extremely inverse 1.281 0.005 2

CO8 Long-time inverse CO8 5.95 0.18 2

Example of the delay type "Moderately inverse (MI)":

k = 0.50
I = 4 In
Iset = 2 In
A = 0.0515
B = 0.114
C = 0.02

 
 
0.0515
t = 0.50 ⋅  + 0.1140 = 1.9
  4  0.02 
  −1 
  2   P533A9A

P5/EN M/33C 187

Protection Relay Protection functions

The operate time in this example is 1.9 seconds. The same result can be read
from IEEE/ANSI moderately inverse delay, page 188.

IEEE/ANSI tripping characteristics (limit value*, please refer to Minimum definite operation time, page 184)

Figure 153 - IEEE/ANSI long time inverse delay Figure 154 - IEEE/ANSI long time very inverse
delay

limit value*

limit value*

Figure 155 - IEEE/ANSI long time extremely Figure 156 - IEEE/ANSI moderately inverse delay
inverse delay

limit value*

limit value*

188 P5/EN M/33C

Protection functions Protection Relay

Figure 157 - IEEE/ANSI short time inverse delay Figure 158 - IEEE/ANSI short time extremely
inverse delay

limit value*
limit value*

Figure 159 - IEEE/ANSI long time inverse (CO8)

delay
100
IEEE CO8

10 K = 1.25

K=1
K = 0.5

K = 0.2
1
Delay (s)

K = 1.25
K = 0.025 K=1
0.1 K = 0.5

K = 0.2

0.01

K = 0.025

0.001
0.01 0.1 1 10 limit value* 100
I/Iset

P5/EN M/33C 189

Protection Relay Protection functions

IEEE2 dependent operate time

The Easergy P5 protection relay has different IEEE2 delay types embedded:
Moderately Inverse (MI), Normally Inverse (NI), Very Inverse (VI), Extremely
Inverse (EI). The trip time is dependent and the reset time is constant.
The operate delay depends on the measured value and other parameters
according to Equation 7.3 to simulate the old electromechanical induction disc
relays. Actually, this equation can only be used to draw graphs or when the
measured value I is constant during the fault. A modified version is implemented in
the relay for real-time usage.

 
 
 B D E 
t = k A + + 2
+ 3
 I   I   I 
  − C   − C   − C  

  I set   I set   I set   P533AAA Equation 7.3

t = Operation delay in seconds

k = User's multiplier
I = Measured value
Iset = User's start setting
A, B = Constants parameters according to Constants for IEEE2 inverse delay
equation, page 190.

Table 32 - Constants for IEEE2 inverse delay equation

Delay type Parameter

A B C D E
MI Moderately 0.1735 0.6791 0.8 -0.08 0.1271
inverse
NI Normally 0.0274 2.2614 0.3 -4.1899 9.1272
inverse
VI Very inverse 0.0615 0.7989 0.34 -0.284 4.0505

EI Extremely 0.0399 0.2294 0.5 3.0094 0.7222

inverse

Example of the delay type "Moderately inverse (MI)":

k = 0.50
I = 4 In
Iset = 2 In
A = 0.1735
B = 0.6791
C = 0.8
D = -0.08
E = 0.127

 
 
0.6791 − 0.08 0.127 
t = 0.5 ⋅ 0.1735 + + + = 0.38
 4  4 
2
 4 
3

  − 0.8   − 0.8   − 0.8  
 2  2  2   P533ABA

The operate time in this example is 0.38 seconds. The same result can be read
from IEEE2 moderately inverse delay, page 191.

190 P5/EN M/33C

Protection functions Protection Relay

IEEE2 tripping characteristics (limit value*, please refer to Minimum definite operation time, page 184)

Figure 160 - IEEE2 moderately inverse delay Figure 161 - IEEE2 normal inverse delay

limit value* limit value*

Figure 162 - IEEE2 very inverse delay Figure 163 - IEEE2 extremely inverse delay

limit value* limit value*

P5/EN M/33C 191

Protection Relay Protection functions

RI and RXIDG type dependent operate time

The operate delay of types RI and RXIDG depends on the measured value and
other parameters according to Equation 7.4 and Equation 7.5. Actually, these
equations can only be used to draw graphs or when the measured value I is
constant during the fault. Modified versions are implemented in the relay for real-
time usage.

Equation 7.4 Equation 7.5

k I
t RI = t RXIDG = 5.8 − 1.35 ln
0.339 0.236 k I set P533ADA

 I 

 I set  P533ACA

t = Operate delay in seconds

k = User's multiplier
I = Measured value
Iset = Start setting

Example of the delay type RI

k = 0.50
I = 4 In
Iset = 2 In

0.5
t RI = = 2.3
0.236
0.339 −
4
 
2 P533AEA

The operate time in this example is 2.3 seconds. The same result can be read
from RI dependent delay, page 193.
Example of the delay type RXIDG
k = 0.50
I = 4 In
Iset = 2 In

4
t RXIDG = 5.8 − 1.35 ln = 3.9
0.5 ⋅ 2 P533AFA

The operate time in this example is 3.9 seconds. The same result can be read
from RXIDG dependent delay, page 193.

192 P5/EN M/33C

Protection functions Protection Relay

RI and RXIDG tripping characteristics (limit value*, please refer to Minimum definite operation time, page 184)

Figure 164 - RI dependent delay Figure 165 - RXIDG dependent delay

limit value* limit value*

Standard dependent reset delay

After the IDMT time elapses, the operation timer is reset when the start signal
goes low, according to the following equation:

 
 
 A 
treset =k×
  I  
B

1−  
  Iset   P533AGA

The reset time characteristic is defined by a setting in the protection stage. The
allowed settings are dependent on the operate curve as shown in the table.

Table 33 - IDMT reset time

Operate curve IDMT reset time

A B
IEC Standard Inverse (IEC/A) 8.2 6.45

IEC Very Inverse (IEC/B) 50.92 2.4

IEC Extremely Inverse (IEC/C) 44.1 3.03

IEEE Moderately Inverse (IEC/D) 4.85 2

IEEE Very Inverse (IEC/E) 21.6 2

IEEE Extremely Inverse (IEC/F) 29.1 2

US Inverse (CO8) 5.95 2

US ST Inverse (CO2) 2.261 2

P5/EN M/33C 193

Protection Relay Protection functions

The TMS (inverse time coefficient) of the IDMT reset timer is the one defined for
the operate curve.
For all operate curves not listed in the table above, the reset timer is of DT type.

Programmable dependent time curves

Programming dependent time curves requires eSetup Easergy Pro setting tool
and rebooting the unit.
The [current, time] curve points are programmed using eSetup Easergy Pro PC
program. There are some rules for defining the curve points:
• the configuration must begin from the top line
• the line order must be as follows: the smallest current (longest operate time)
on the top and the largest current (shortest operate time) on the bottom
• all unused lines (on the bottom) should be filled with I/Istart = 1 and operate
time = 0.00 s
Here is an example configuration of curve points:

Table 34 - Example configuration of curve points

Point Current I/ISTART Operate delay

1 1.00 10.00 s
2 2.00 6.50 s
3 5.00 4.00 s
4 10.00 3.00 s
5 20.00 2.00 s
6 40.00 1.00 s
7 1.00 0.00 s
8 1.00 0.00 s
9 1.00 0.00 s
10 1.00 0.00 s
11 1.00 0.00 s
12 1.00 0.00 s
13 1.00 0.00 s
14 1.00 0.00 s
15 1.00 0.00 s
16 1.00 0.00 s

The minimum definite operation time starts at the latest when the measured value
is twenty times the setting. However, there are limitations at high setting values
due to the measurement range.

194 P5/EN M/33C

Protection functions Protection Relay

Cold load pick-up

Description

Cold load pick-up

The cold load pickup function detects that a cold load condition exists and
provides an information to optionally change the selected current protection
settings for defined duration of time after energisation of the load.
A situation is regarded as cold load when all the three phase currents have been
below a given idle value for longer than the cold time setting and then at least one
of the currents exceeds a given pick-up level within 80 ms. In such a case, the
cold load detection signal is activated for a given time. This signal is available for
the output matrix and blocking matrix.

Application for cold load detection

Right after closing a circuit breaker, a given amount of overload can be allowed for
a given limited time to take care of situations where a load has been de-energised
for an extended period of time and is then re-energised. This applies particularly to
applications such as motor loads (e.g., compressor motor inside air conditioning
loads) or thermostatically controlled heating of water where the load current is
much greater for a cold load than when it is operating normally. So, the cold load
pickup function can improve the profiling of overcurrent protection settings to
dynamic load situations caused by load de-energisation.

Example
Figure 166 - Functionality of cold load current feature

1 3 4
Pick-up

Idle

Cold
load P533AHA

1. No activation because the current has not been under the set IDLE current.
2. Current dropped under the IDLE current level but now it stays between the IDLE
current and the start current for over 80 ms.
3. No activation because the phase two lasted longer than 80 ms.
4. Now we have a cold load activation which lasts as long as the operate time was
set or as long as the current stays above the start setting.

P5/EN M/33C 195

Protection Relay Protection functions

Characteristics
Table 35 - Settings and characteristics of cold load pick-up function

Settings/characteristics Value
(description/label)

Idle current/Idle
Range 0.01In – 0.50In

Resolution 0.01In
Pickup current/Pickup

Range 0.30In - 10.00In

Resolution 0.01In
CLPU dead time/DeadTime
Setting range 0.10 - 14400.00 s

Resolution 0.01 s
Maximum time/MaxTime
Setting range 0.01 - 300.00 s 19

Resolution 0.01 s
Accuracy 1% or ±20 ms

19. This is the instantaneous time, i.e. the minimum total operational time including the fault detection time and operate time of the trip
contacts.

196 P5/EN M/33C

Protection functions Protection Relay

Selective Overcurrent Logic (SOL)

Description
The Selective Overcurrent Logic (SOL) function, can considerably reduce the
tripping time of the circuit breakers closest to the source, compared to a pure time
discrimination, and may be used for logic discrimination in closed ring networks
also using directional protection.
SOL function is applied to the phase overcurrent (ANSI code 50/51), directional
phase overcurrent (ANSI code 67), earth/ground fault overcurrent (ANSI code
50N/51N) (except stage 5), very sensitive earth/ground fault overcurrent (ANSI
code 50G/51G) protections, definite time and IDMT.
With Easergy P5 protection relays, the discrimination can be done in two different
ways:
• Logic overcurrent stages protection functions that send SOL signals
(downstream protection) and that may be prevented from tripping by the
reception of SOL signals (upstream protection).
• Time-based overcurrent stages: protection stages that may delayed by SOL
signals (upstream protection). They are used as backup for the logic
overcurrent stages.
When a fault occurs:
Any downstream protection can activate the SOL function through the output
matrix, so that the SOL function can send a SOL signal to the upstream
protections.
At the reception of the SOL signal by the upstream protection, the latter changes
its operating delay from Operation delay to SOL Operation delay. When the
upstream protection is using IDMT delay, SOL will also have impact on the curve
settings.

Operation
To implement the SOL function:
• Set the upstream protection
• Set the upstream protection and activate the SOL. Set the SOL operation
delay with a value higher than the Operation delay value
• In the downstream relay output matrix, connect the start signals of the
different protections involved in the logic discrimination, on the SOLxStr then
connect the SOLx trip on a dedicated contact relay
• In the upstream relay output matrix, connect the dedicated logic input for SOL
to the SOL status signal.
Up to two signals can be provided by the SOL function.
A CB trip clearing time can be set to erase the SOL signal after trip. The SOL
operation time of the upstream protection usually takes into account of the
breaking device operating time and the protection reset time.

P5/EN M/33C 197

Protection Relay Protection functions

Downstream
Relay Prot. Start
CB Failure!
Matrix = Operation delay T
Prot. Trip

SOLx Start

SOLx Trip SOL CB Trip

Clearing Time Setting

Wire connection
or GOOSE message

Upstream
Relay
Digital Inputx
Matrix
“Prot.SOLt>” is selected
for Operation delay
SOL Status comparison

Prot. Start
= Operation delay T

< SOL Operation delay setting

Prot. Trip
Trip immediately when SOL Status
change from ON to OFF P533AIA

NOTE: Prot.Start/Prot.Trip means the start/trip signal of over current

protection or earth/ground fault protection (50/51/67/50N/51N/50G/51G). SOL
operation delay setting should be greater than “Operation delay T + SOL CB
Trip Clearing Time Setting”.
The CLP and SOL functions have dynamic impacts on the overcurrent settings of
timer and start value. The associated inputs could be activated at the same time.
In this case, SOL takes precedence over CLP.

Example 1
Figure 167 - Example 1: Radial distribution with use of time-based
discrimination

0.9

0.6

0.3

T: Protection setting time.

As an approximation for definite time curves, this is assumed to be equal to the
protection tripping time.

198 P5/EN M/33C

Protection functions Protection Relay

The upstream protection units are typically delayed by 0.3 s to give the
downstream protection units time to trip. When there are many levels of
discrimination, the fault clearing time at the source is long. In this example, if the
fault clearing time for the protection unit furthest downstream is Xs = 0.2 s, the
fault clearing time at the source is T = Xs + 0.9 s = 1.1 s.

Example 2
Figure 168 - Example 2: Radial distribution with use of logic discrimination

Bay

0
0
0
0
0
0
A
V
VA
kW
kVAr
Hz
0.10

Bay
A
0 V
0 VA
0 kW
0 kVAr
0 Hz
0

Bay
A
0 V
0 VA
0 kW
0 kVAr
0 Hz
0

SOL signal

Bay
A
0 V
0 VA
0 kW
0 kVAr
0 Hz
0

T: Protection setting time.

As an approximation for definite time curves, this is assumed to be equal to the
protection tripping time.
When a fault appears, the protection units that detect it inhibit the upstream
protection units. The protection unit furthest downstream trips since it is not
blocked by another protection unit. The delays are to be set in accordance with the
device to be protected.
In this example, if the fault clearing time for the protection unit furthest
downstream is Xs = 0.2 s, the fault clearing time at the source is T = Xs - 0.1 s =
0.1 s.

Characteristics
Settings and characteristics Values

Enable for SOL

Options Disabled; Enabled;

SOL1 status
Options -; Trip;

SOL2 status
Options -; Trip;

SOL OpNb

Range 1-2

CB trip clearing time

Setting range 0.00 - 1.00 s

P5/EN M/33C 199

Protection Relay Protection functions

Incomer fault locator

Description
The Easergy P5 protection relay can locate a short-circuit in a radial operated
network.
The fault location is given in reactance (ohms) and kilometers or miles. The fault
value can then be exported, for example, with an event to a Distribution
Management System (DMS). The system can then localise the fault. If a DMS is
not available, the distance to the fault is displayed as kilometers, and as a
reactance value. However, the distance value is valid only if the line reactance is
set correctly. Furthermore, the line should be homogenous, that is, the wire type of
the line should be the same for the whole length. If there are several wire types on
the same line, an average line reactance value can be used to get an approximate
distance value to the fault. Names and reactance values for widely used overhead
wires are:
• Sparrow: 0.408 ohms/km or 0.656 ohms/mile
• Raven: 0.378 ohms/km or 0.608 ohms/mile
NOTE: The fault locator is normally used in the incoming bay of the
substation. Therefore, the fault location is obtained for the whole network with
just one Easergy P5 protection relay, by compensating the effect of the
healthy feeders.
The incomer short circuit fault locator operates if:
• The Easergy P5 protection relay is located in the incoming feeder.
• The CT's and VT's are connected such that the fault is seen in the forwards
direction. Any fault seen in the reverse direction will not produce a fault
location result.

Figure 169 - Example of fault on feeder detected by the incomer fault

detector

Easergy P5

P533AJA

The algorithm functions in the following order:

1. The needed measurements (phase currents and line-to-line voltages) are
continuously available.
2. The fault distance calculation can be triggered in two ways:
• By opening a feeder circuit breaker due to a fault and sudden increase in
phase currents (Enable Xfault calc1 + Triggering digital input).
• Another option is to use only the sudden increase in the phase currents
(Enable Xfault calc1).
3. Phase currents and voltages are registered in three stages: before the fault,
during the fault and after the faulty feeder circuit breaker was opened.
4. The fault distance quantities are calculated.
5. Two phases with the biggest fault current are selected.

200 P5/EN M/33C

Protection functions Protection Relay

6. The load currents are compensated.

7. The faulty line length reactance is calculated.

Z12 = V L1 − V L2
I L1 − I L2 − I pre-fault P533AKA

VL1 Vector between the voltage and the ground

VL2 Vector between the voltage and the ground

IL1 Vector between the current and the ground

IL2 Vector between the current and the ground

Ipre-fault Vector of load current

The reference current setting is used to start the calculation of the fault locator
based on the pre-fault current magnitude. The calculation can be activated also
based on a digital or logic input.

Example
An application example where the fault location algorithm is used at the incomer
side is presented below.

Figure 170 - Illustration of the fault location algorithm used at the incomer
side
Voltage

Current

Pre-fault time Fault time with the breaker Post-fault

more than 2 operation time included has to only few
seconds be 0.08 - 1 second cycles
In case the digital input is used together with the current
change the input signal has to be activated at least 0.5 second
after the fault occurs P533AMA

P5/EN M/33C 201

Protection Relay Protection functions

Figure 171 - Settings view of the incomer fault locator function

202 P5/EN M/33C

Protection functions Protection Relay

Characteristics
Table 36 - Setting parameters of incomer short-circuit fault locator

Parameter Value Unit Default Description

Triggering digital Selection of one - - Trigger mode (= triggering

input digital input (DI), based on sudden increase
one virtual input of phase current, otherwise
(VI), one virtual sudden increase of phase
output (VO), or current + DIx/VIx)
one function key
(Fx)

Line reactance 0.010 – 10.000 Ohms/ 0.389 Line reactance of the line.
km This is used only to convert
the fault reactance to
kilometers.
dItrig 10 – 800 50 Trig current (sudden
increase of phase current)

Blocked before 10 – 600 s 70 Blocks function for this time

next trig after trigger. This is used for
blocking calculation in auto-
reclose.
Xmax limit 0.5 – 500.0 Ohm 500.0 Limit for maximum
reactance. If the reactance
value is above the set limit,
the calculation result is not
shown.
Event Disabled; - Enabled Event mask
Enabled
Accept zero Disabled; - Disabled -
prefault current Enabled

Table 37 - Measured and recorded values of incomer short circuit fault

locator

Parameter Value Unit Description

Measured Distance km Distance to the fault

values/recorded
values Xfault ohm Fault reactance
Date - Fault date
Time - Fault time
Time ms Fault time
Cntr - Number of faults
Pre A Pre-fault current (= load current)

Fault A Current during the fault

Post A Post-fault current

Udrop % Un Voltage dip during the fault

Durati s Fault duration

Type - Fault type (1-2, 2-3, 1-3, 1-2-3)

P5/EN M/33C 203

Protection Relay Protection functions

Feeder fault locator (ANSI 21FL)

Description
The Easergy P5 protection relay can locate a short-circuit fault and an earth/
ground fault on the feeder itself in a radially operated networks. The fault location
function (ANSI code 21FL) is given as a reactance (ohms) and converted to
kilometers or miles. The fault value can then be exported, for example, with an
event to a Distribution Management System (DMS). The system can then localise
the fault. If a distribution management system (DMS) is not available, the distance
to the fault is displayed as kilometers/miles and as a reactance value.
However, the distance value is valid only if the line reactance is set correctly.
Furthermore, the line should be homogenous, that is, the wire type of the line
should be the same for the whole length. If there are several wire types on the
same line, an average line reactance value can be used to get an approximate
distance value to the fault. Names and reactance values for widely used overhead
wires are:
• Sparrow: 0.408 ohms/km or 0.656 ohms/mile
• Raven: 0.378 ohms/km or 0.608 ohms/mile
When the feeder fault locator is calculating short-circuit impedance, the following
formula is used:

−
Z12 = V L1 V L2
I L1 − I L2 P533ANA

VL1 Vector between the voltage and the ground

VL2 Vector between the voltage and the ground

IL1 Vector between the current and the ground

IL2 Vector between the current and the ground

When the feeder fault locator is calculating ground fault impedance, the following
formula is used:

Z12 = V L1
I L1+ k x I0 P533APA

VL1 Vector between the voltage and the ground

IL1 Vector between the current and the ground

k Earth/ground factor k, needs to be set by user

I0 Earth/ground fault overcurrent, calculated from phase currents (I0Calc)

I0calc = IL1 + IL2+ I L3

P533ARA

The earth/ground factor K is calculated with the following formula:

K = (Z0L- Z1L) / (3 x Z1L)
where:
Z0L = Zero sequence line impedance
Z1L = Positive sequence line impedance

204 P5/EN M/33C

Protection functions Protection Relay

Triggering of the fault reactance calculation happens when the start value is
exceeded or both “Start setting” and “Triggering digital input” terms are fulfilled.
When used, “Triggering digital input” can be either digital or virtual input.

Example
An application example where the fault location algorithm is used at the feeder
side is presented below.

P5/EN M/33C 205

Protection Relay Protection functions

Figure 172 - Settings view of the feeder fault locator function

206 P5/EN M/33C

Protection functions Protection Relay

Figure 173 - Illustration of the fault location algorithm used at the feeder side

Voltage

Current

Pre-fault time Fault time with the breaker Post-fault

more than 2 operation time included has to only few
seconds be 0.08 - 1 second cycles
In case the digital input is used together with the current
change the input signal has to be activated at least 0.5 second
after the fault occurs P533ATA

Characteristics
Table 38 - Settings and characteristics of the fault locator function (ANSI
21FL)

Parameter Value Unit Default Description

Pick-up setting 0.10 – 5.00 xIn 1.2 Current limit for triggering.

Triggering digital Selection of one - - Trigger mode (= triggering based on

input digital input (DI), sudden increase of phase current,
one virtual input otherwise sudden increase of
(VI), one virtual phase current + DIx/VIx/VOx/Fx)
output (VO), or
one function key
(Fx)

Line reactance 0.010 – 10.000 Ohms/ 0.491 Line reactance of the line. This is
km used only to convert the fault
reactance to kilometer.
Earth/ground 0.010 – 10.000 - 0.678 Calculated earth/ground factor from
factor line specifications.

Earth/ground -60 – +60 ° 10 Angle of calculated earth/ground

factor angle factor from line specifications.

Unit km - km Unit of distance

Event enabling Off; On - On Event mask

Table 39 - Measured and recorded values of feeder fault locator

Parameter Value Unit Description

Measured Distance km Distance to the fault

values/recorded
values Xfault Ohm Fault reactance
Date - Fault date
Time - Fault time
Cntr - Number of faults
Fault A Current during the fault

Udrop % Un Voltage dip during the fault

Type - Fault type (1-2, 2-3, 1-3, 1-2-3, 1-N,

2- N, 3-N, 1-N-2-N, 2-N-3-N, 3-N-1-
N, 1- N-2-N-3-N)

P5/EN M/33C 207

Protection Relay Protection functions

Neutral admittance (ANSI 21YN)

Description
The neutral admittance protection function can be applied in high resistance
earthed/grounded, unearthed/ungrounded or compensated power system to
detect earth/ground fault with increased sensitivity. Two stages of the neutral
admittance protection are available in the Easergy P5 protection relay, each stage
has three elements: over-admittance (Yn> or Yn>>), over-conductance (Gn> or
Gn>>) and over- susceptance (Bn> or Bn>>).
The neutral admittance Yn is calculated based on the zero-sequence current I0
and the zero-sequence voltage U0:
Yn = Gn + jBn = I0 / -U0 = 3I0 / -3U0 = Ir / -Vr
where,
Vr (residual voltage) = 3U0 (zero-sequence voltage) = 3VNG (neutral voltage);
Ir (residual current) = 3I0 (zero-sequence current) = ING (neutral current);
The source of the zero-sequence current is settable from the sensitive E/F CT,
CSH core balance CT, standard E/F CT, or the sum of three phase currents.
The neutral admittance protection is blocked if the following conditions are met:
• The zero-sequence current is based on the sum of three phase currents
• The CTS supervision function detects a CT failure
• The CTS output signal is configured to block neutral admittance protection
through the blocking matrix
The source of the zero-sequence voltage is from the direct measurement when
the VT connection mode is “+U0”, otherwise the source of the zero-sequence
voltage is from the sum of three phase voltages. The neutral admittance protection
is only active when the zero-sequence voltage U0 is above the setting threshold.
The neutral admittance protection is also blocked if the following conditions are
met:
• The zero-sequence voltage is based on the sum of three phase voltages
• The VTS supervision function detects a VT failure
• The VTS output signal is configured to block neutral admittance protection
through the blocking matrix
The settings of the admittance protection are based on the percentage of the rated
neutral admittance. The formulae for calculating the rated neutral admittance are
listed in the table below.
Table 40 - Calculation of the rated neutral admittance

I0 source U0 source Rated neutral admittance (Yn)

Very sensitive E/F CT VT0 SEF CT primary / (√3*VT0 primary)

Very sensitive E/F CT (VL1 + VL2 + VL3) SEF CT primary / (√3*VT primary)

CSH core balance CT VT0 CSH CT primary / (√3*VT0 primary)

CSH core balance CT (VL1+ VL2 + VL3) CSH CT primary / (√3*VT primary)

Standard E/F CT VT0 EF CT primary / (√3*VT0 primary)

Standard E/F CT (VL1 + VL2 + VL3) EF CT primary / (√3*VT primary)

(IL1 + IL2 + IL3) VT0 Phase CT primary / (√3*VT0 primary)

(IL1 + IL2+ IL3) (VL1 + VL2 + VL3) Phase CT primary / (√3*VT primary)

208 P5/EN M/33C

Protection functions Protection Relay

Operation

Operation of admittance protection

The admittance protection is non-directional. Hence, provided the magnitude of
admittance exceeds the set value Yn>, the protection relay will operate.

Figure 174 - Admittance protection operation characteristic

Ys

operate
* Y = G + jB Y > Ys

Admittance:
Non-directional
P533AUA

Operation of conductance protection

The conductance protection may be set to non-directional, directional forward or
directional reverse. Hence, provided the magnitude and the directional criteria are
met for conductance, the Easergy P5 protection relay will operate. The correction
angle causes rotation of the directional boundary for conductance through the set
correction angle.

Figure 175 - Conductance protection operation characteristic

B B B
operate operate operate operate
G > Gs G < -Gs G < -Gs G > Gs

Gs G -Gs G -Gs Gs G

Conductance: Conductance: Conductance:

Directional forward Directional reverse Non-directional
P533AVA

NOTE:
Center of the characteristic area for forward direction occurs when I0 is in
phase with -U0.
Assuming that the direction of the G axis is 0°. If the correction angle is set to
+30°, this rotates the boundary from 90° - 270° to 60° - 240°.

P5/EN M/33C 209

Protection Relay Protection functions

Figure 176 - Conductance protection operation characteristic with +30°

correction angle

+30° operate
G > Gs

Gs G

P533AWA

Operation of susceptance protection

The susceptance protection may be set to non-directional, directional forward, or
directional reverse. Hence, provided the magnitude and the directional criteria are
met for susceptance, the Easergy P5 protection relay will operate. The correction
angle causes rotation of the directional boundary for susceptance through the set
correction angle.

Figure 177 - Susceptance protection operation characteristic

B B B

operate operate
B > Bs B > Bs

Bs Bs

G G G
-Bs -Bs

operate operate
B < -Bs B < -Bs

Susceptance: Susceptance: Susceptance:

Directional forward Directional reverse Non-directional
P533AXA

NOTE:
Center of characteristic area for forward direction occurs when I0 leads -U0 by
90°.
Assuming that the direction of the G axis indicates 0°. If the correction angle is
set to +30°, this rotates the boundary from 0° - 180° to 330° - 150°.

210 P5/EN M/33C

Protection functions Protection Relay

Figure 178 - Susceptance protection operation characteristic with +30°

correction angle

operate
B > Bs

+30°

P533AYA

Block diagram

Figure 179 - Block diagram of the neutral admittance protection

> Start

& Register
event

Yn > & Trip

& Register
event

Drop off

& Register
event
Admittance Calculation

Start

& Register
event
U0 >
& Gn > & Trip
I0 >
& Register
event

Drop off

& Register
event

Start

& Register
event

Bn > & Trip

& Register
event

Drop off
Direction Determination

Gn Mode = Non dir & Register

Gn or event
Gn Mode = Gn dir

Bn Mode = Non dir

Bn or
Bn Mode = Bn dir

Inhibit
Ctrl

Block

Enable events
Bn
Direction t> Reset time
Correction U0> Yn> Gn> Bn> Gn mode SOL Mode SOLt >
U0 Min I0 Min
(fixed) (fixed) Angle Direction
mode P533AZA

P5/EN M/33C 211

Protection Relay Protection functions

Characteristics
Table 41 - Settings and characteristics of the neutral admittance protection

Settings/ Values
characteristics
(description/label)

Enable for I0/U0 20

Options Off/On

U0 setting/U0>

Setting range 0.005Unp - 0.8Unp for measured values;

0.02Unp - 0.8Unp for derived values

Resolution 0.001
Accuracy ±5%

Reset ratio 95% ± 2%

U0 minimum
Value 0.004Unp (fixed) for measured values;
0.019Unp (fixed) for derived values

I0 minimum
Value 0.1 A primary (fixed), for current measured by CSH core balance CT
(2A);
1 A primary (fixed), for current measured by CSH core balance CT
(20A);
0.005In (fixed) for current measured by very sensitive EF CT;
0.02In (fixed) for current measured by standard EF CT;
0.05In (fixed) for derived EF current value.

Enable for Yn>/Gn>/Bn> 21

Options Off/On

Yn pick-up value/Yn>

Setting range (1% - 200%) In/Un for current measured by very sensitive earth/ground
fault CTs;
(5% - 1000%) In/Un for current measured by standard earth/ground fault
CTs;
(25% - 5000%) In/Un for current measured by 2A CSH, 20A CSH, and for
current value that is vector sum of 3CTs
Resolution 1% In/Un for current measured by very sensitive earth/ground fault CTs;
5% In/Un for current measured by standard earth/ground fault CTs;
25% In/Un for current measured by 2A CSH, 20A CSH, and for current
value that is vector sum of 3CTs
Accuracy ±5%

Reset ratio 90% ± 5%

Gn pick-up value/Gn>

Setting range (1% - 100%) In/Un for current measured by very sensitive earth/ground
fault CTs;
(5% - 500%) In/Un for current measured by standard earth/ground fault
CTs;
(25% - 2500%) In/Un for current measured by 2A CSH, 20A CSH, and for
current value that is vector sum of 3CTs
Resolution 1% In/Un for current measured by very sensitive earth/ground fault CTs;
5% In/Un for current measured by standard earth/ground fault CTs;
25% In/Un for current measured by 2A CSH, 20A CSH, and for current
value that is vector sum of 3CTs
Accuracy ±5%

Reset ratio 90% ± 5%

20. General protection stage on/off control

21. This setting does not take effect if the general protection stage control is set to Off. See the previous footnote.

212 P5/EN M/33C

Protection functions Protection Relay

Table 41 - Settings and characteristics of the neutral admittance protection

(Continued)

Settings/ Values
characteristics
(description/label)

Bn pick-up value/Bn>

Setting range (1% - 100%) In/Un for current measured by very sensitive earth/ground
fault CTs;
(5% - 500%) In/Un for current measured by standard earth/ground fault
CTs;
(25% - 2500%) In/Un for current measured by 2A CSH, 20A CSH, and for
current value that is vector sum of 3CTs
Resolution 1% In/Un for current measured by very sensitive earth/ground fault CTs;
5% In/Un for current measured by standard earth/ground fault CTs;
25% In/Un for current measured by 2A CSH, 20A CSH, and for current
value that is vector sum of 3CTs
Accuracy ±5%

Reset ratio 90% ± 5%

Direction mode/mode
Options Non dir; Forward; Backward

Operation time/t>

Setting range 0.1 - 300 s

Resolution 0.01 s
Accuracy ±5% or ±50 ms

SOL mode
Options Disable/Enable

SOL operation time/SOLt>

Setting range 0.1 - 300 s

Resolution 0.01 s
Accuracy ±5% or ±20 ms

Reset time
Setting range 0 - 100 s

Resolution 0.01 s
Accuracy ±5% or ±20 ms

Inhibit control/Inhibit ctrl

Options Digital inputs and virtual inputs for selection

Characteristic time
Start time ≤ 65 ms at 2Yn>;
100 ms at maximum
Overshoot time ≤ 40 ms at 2Yn>
Setting group

Number 4

P5/EN M/33C 213

Protection Relay Protection functions

Synchro-check (ANSI 25)

Description
The synchro-check function (ANSI code 25) checks the synchronisation of the
electrical networks upstream and downstream of a circuit breaker to avoid closing
a breaker when upstream and downstream phases are not aligned. This helps
ensure that circuit breaker contacts have the minimum wear when closing and
avoids excessive disturbance on the network.
The Easergy P5 protection relay includes a function that checks synchronism
when the circuit breaker is open. The function monitors voltage amplitude,
frequency and phase angle difference between two voltages.
The synchro-check function operates in different conditions according to three
synchronisation mode: Sync, Async and Off.
In case that the synchro-check function is set to Sync mode, the conditions to
operate are defined as below:
• The phase angle difference is less than 2°;
• The frequency difference is less than the frequency difference setting;
• The magnitude difference is less than the voltage difference setting.
In case that the synchro-check function is set to Async mode, the conditions to
operate are defined as when the phase angle difference, the frequency difference,
and the magnitude difference are respectively below their setting values.
• The phase angle difference is less than the phase angle difference setting;
• The frequency difference is less than the frequency difference setting;
• The magnitude difference is less than the voltage difference setting.
In case that the synchro-check function is set to Off, the circuit breaker cannot be
closed when the power is present on both sides. The synchro-check function is
available when one of the following analogue measurement modules and a
suitable measuring mode is in use:
• LL+LLy
• 3LN+LLy
• 3LN+LNy
• 2LL+Uₒ+LLy
NOTE: The voltage used for synchro-check is always line-to-line voltage U12.
The synchro-check function operates for a power system frequency between 46
Hz and 64 Hz.
The following signals of the stage are available in the output matrix and in the logic
editor:
• “Request” signal
This signal is active when a request has been received but the breaker is not
yet closed.
• “OK” signal
This signal is active when the synchronising conditions are met, or the voltage
check criterion is met. See section "Voltage checking" below.
• “Fail” signal
This signal is activated, if the function fails to close the breaker within the
request timeout setting. See The principle of the synchro-check function,
page 215.

214 P5/EN M/33C

Protection functions Protection Relay

Figure 180 - The principle of the synchro-check function

condition
to operate

synchro
request
request timeout
sync OK

OK pulse length
sync fail
P533ALA

NOTE: The CB close time setting can be used to anticipate the closing of the
CB and meet all the conditions to operate.

Voltage checking
When one of the two voltage is absent, coupling may be authorised according to
one of the seven checking modes.
• U12 and U12y absent (DD)
• U12 absent and U12y present (DL)
• U12 present and U12y absent (LD)
• U12 absent regardless of U12y state (present or absent) (DD/DL)
• U12y absent regardless of U12 state (present or absent) (DD/LD)
• One voltage is present while the other one is absent (DL/LD)
• At least one voltage is absent (DD/DL/LD)
The presence of each voltage is detected by comparing the voltage to the Ulive
limit setting. The absence of each voltage is detected by comparing the voltage to
Udead limit setting.

P5/EN M/33C 215

Protection Relay Protection functions

Block diagram
Figure 181 - Block diagram of the synchro-check protection function (ANSI
25)

F |ΔF| < df
Fy

U12
U12y |ΔU| < du
sync ok

|Δφ| < dφ

=0
sync ok

Async

Sync

U12 > ULive

U12y > ULive

< Udead
DD ≥1 close enable
< Udead
DD/DL/LD
≥1

>1 DD/DL
LD no voltage

≥1 DL/LD
DL

>1 DD/DL

no U12
no U12y

SyncMode SyncMode Voltage Mode P533AOA

Characteristics
Table 42 - Setting and characteristics of the synchro-check function Δf, ΔU,
Δφ (ANSI 25)

Settings/characteristics Values
(description/label)

Sync mode/SMode

Options Off; Async; Sync;

Voltage check mode/UMode

Options DD; DL; LD; DD/DL; DD/LD; DL/LD; DD/DL/LD

CB close time/CBtime
Setting range 0.04 - 0.6 s

Resolution 0.01 s
Udead limit setting/Udead

Setting range 1 - 120%Un

Resolution 1%Un

Accuracy ±3%Un

Ulive limit setting/Ulive

Setting range 10%Un - 130%Un

Resolution 1%Un
Accuracy 3%Un or 3% of the setting

216 P5/EN M/33C

Protection functions Protection Relay

Table 42 - Setting and characteristics of the synchro-check function Δf, ΔU,

Δφ (ANSI 25) (Continued)

Settings/characteristics Values
(description/label)

Frequency difference/df

Setting range 0.01 - 1.00 Hz

Resolution 0.01 Hz
Accuracy ±20 mHz

Hysteresis < 10 mHz

Voltage difference/dU

Setting range 1%Un - 60%Un

Resolution 1%Un
Accuracy ±3%Un

Reset ratio 97% ± 2%

Phase angle difference/dAngle

Setting range 2° - 90°

Resolution 1°
Accuracy ±2° when Δf < 0.2 Hz; else ±5°

Request timeout/ReqTime

Setting range 0.1 - 600.0 s

Resolution 0.1 s
Accuracy ±1% or ±20 ms

Stage operation range

Frequency range 46 - 64 Hz

Setting groups/SetGrp

Number 4

P5/EN M/33C 217

Protection Relay Protection functions

Undervoltage (ANSI 27)

Description
The Undervoltage protection function (ANSI code 27) is used to detect voltage
dips or sense abnormally low voltages to trip or trig load shedding or load transfer.
The function measures the three line-to-line voltages, and whenever the smallest
of them drops below the start setting of a particular stage, this stage starts and a
start signal is issued. If the fault situation remains on longer than the operate time
setting, a trip signal is issued.

Blocking during voltage transformer fuse failure

At all the protection stages, the undervoltage function can be blocked with any
internal or external signal using the block matrix, if, for example, the secondary
voltage of one of the measuring transformers disappears because of a fuse failure
(refer to Voltage transformer supervision (ANSI 60), page 431). The blocking
signal can also be a signal from the custom logic (refer to Logic functions, page
391).

Low-voltage self blocking

The stages can be blocked when the biggest of the three line-to-line voltages
drops below 10%Un to avoid unwanted tripping when the voltage is switched off.
The protection function is unblocked when the biggest of the three line-to-line
voltages is above 15%Un.

Figure 182 - Undervoltage state and block limit

U LLmax = max(U 12, U 23, U 31)

E I K
C
deadband
U< setting

H
D
B F

10%Un
J
A G
time

U<
undervoltage
P533AQA
state

A The maximum of the three line-to-line G The voltage ULLmax is under block limit
voltages ULLmax is below 10%Un. This is not and this is not regarded as an
regarded as an undervoltage situation. undervoltage situation.

B The voltage ULLmax is above 15%Un but H This is an undervoltage situation.

below the start level. This is an
undervoltage situation.

C The voltage is OK because it is above the I The voltage is OK.

start limit.
D This is an undervoltage situation. J Same as G: the voltage is not seen as an
undervoltage situation.

E The voltage is OK. K The voltage is OK.

F This is an undervoltage situation.

218 P5/EN M/33C

Protection functions Protection Relay

Three independent stages

There are three separately adjustable stages: U<, U<< and U<<<. All these stages
can be configured for the definite time (DT) operation characteristic.

Block diagram
Figure 183 - Block diagram of the undervoltage protection function (ANSI
27)

U12
U23 Min < & Start
U31

& Register
event
Max < 10%Un

Trip

Block
Register
&
event

U< t< Enable events P533ASA

P5/EN M/33C 219

Protection Relay Protection functions

Characteristics
Table 43 - Settings and characteristics of the undervoltage protection (ANSI
27)

Settings/ Value Value Value

characteristics (stage U<) (stage U<<) (stage U<<<)
(description/label)

Pick-up value/U<

Setting range 20%Un - 120%Un

Resolution 1%Un

Accuracy ±2%

Operation delay/t<

Setting range 0.04 to 300.00 s 0.03 to 300.00 s

Resolution 0.01 s
Accuracy ±1% or ±25 ms

Reset time/Reset time

Setting range 0.03 s to 300 s -

Resolution 0.01 s -

Accuracy ±1% or ±20 ms -

Hysteresis/Hyster

Setting range 0.1% - 20.0%

Resolution 0.1%

Accuracy ±2% or 0.5 V secondary

Low voltage self-blocking 22

Value 10%Un, fixed

Reset value 15%Un

Resolution 1V
Accuracy ±2%

Characteristic times
Start time < 50 ms/45 ms 23
Disengaging time < 60 ms/75 ms 23

Overshoot time < 50 ms

Setting group/SetGrp

Number 4

22. Common settings for setting group 1, 2, 3, 4.

23. The 2nd value is only for high speed high break digital outputs.

220 P5/EN M/33C

Protection functions Protection Relay

Positive sequence undervoltage (ANSI 27P)

Description
This is a protection function (ANSI code 27P) for motors against faulty operations
due to insufficient or unbalanced power system voltage. There are special self-
blocking features for starting up and shutting down a motor.
This undervoltage protection function calculates the positive sequence of the
fundamental frequency component U1.
By using the positive sequence, all three phases are supervised, with one value,
and if the motor looses the connection to the network (loss of mains), the
undervoltage situation is detected even if the frequency decreases significantly
from nominal frequency.
Whenever the positive sequence voltage U1 drops below the start setting of a
particular stage, this stage activates and a start signal is issued. If the fault
situation remains on longer than the time defined in the operate time setting, a trip
signal is issued.

Blocking during VT fuse failure

Like all the protection stages, the positive sequence undervoltage function can be
blocked with any internal or external signal using the block matrix, for example, if
the secondary voltage of one of the measuring transformers disappears because
of a fuse failure. The blocking signal can also be a signal from the user's logic.

Self-blocking at low voltage

The protection is blocked when the biggest of the three line-to-line voltages is
below the low voltage block limit setting (refer to Positive sequence undervoltage
state and block limit, page 222).

Block according to circuit breaker position

The positive sequence undervoltage protection is blocked when the circuit breaker
is open or in undefined position.

Two independent stages

There are two separately adjustable stages: U1< and U1<<. Both stages can be
configured for definite time (DT) operate characteristic.

P5/EN M/33C 221

Protection Relay Protection functions

Figure 184 - Positive sequence undervoltage state and block limit

positive sequence
voltage U1
E I K
C
dead band
U1< setting

H
D
B F

block limit
J
A G
time

U1< or U1<< state P533B0A

A The maximum of the three line-to-line voltage G The voltage ULLmax is below the block
ULLmax is below the block limit. This is not limit and this is not regarded as an
regarded as an undervoltage situation. undervoltage situation.

B The voltage ULLmax is above the block limit but H Same as B.

below the start level. However, this is not
regarded as an undervoltage situation because
the voltage has never been above the start level
since being below the block limit.

C The voltage is OK because it is above the start I The voltage is OK.

limit.
D This is an undervoltage situation. J Same as G.

E The voltage is OK. K The voltage is OK.

F This is an undervoltage situation.

Block diagram
Figure 185 - Block diagram for the positive sequence undervoltage
protection

Start

& Register
event

U12
U23 MAX > 0 t
& Trip
U31
&
CB
not closed
U1 <
& Register
event

LV block U1< t> Enable

events P533B1B

222 P5/EN M/33C

Protection functions Protection Relay

Characteristic
Table 44 - Settings and characteristics of the positive sequence
undervoltage protection stage U1< and U1<<

Settings/characteristics Value
(description/label)

Pick-up value/U1<

Setting range 20% - 120% xVn

Resolution 1%

Accuracy 1% of the set value

Reset ratio 105%

Operation delay/t>

Setting range 0.08 - 300.00 s

Resolution 0.01 s
Accuracy ±1% or ±30 ms

Low voltage blocking/LV block 24

Setting range 2%Un - 100%Un

Reset value 100%Un

Resolution 1%

Accuracy ±2%

Characteristic times
Start time < 70 ms/65 ms 25
Disengaging time < 85 ms/100 ms 25

Overshoot time < 50 ms

Setting group/SetGrp

Number 4

24. Common settings for setting group 1, 2, 3, 4.

25. The 2nd value is only for high speed high break digital outputs.

P5/EN M/33C 223

Protection Relay Protection functions

Directional power (ANSI 32)

Description
Directional power protection function (ANSI code 32) can be used, for example, to
disconnect a motor in case the supply voltage is lost and thus prevent power
generation by the motor. It can also be used to detect loss of load of a motor.
Directional power protection function is sensitive to active power. If the fault
situation stays on longer than the delay setting, a trip signal is issued.

Figure 186 - Example of loss of load Figure 187 - Example of a motor

working as a generator
Q
Q

P
P
Reverse zone Forward zone
P533B2A
Reverse zone Forward zone
P533B3A

The start setting range is from -200% to +200% of the nominal apparent power Sn.
The nominal apparent power is determined by the configured voltage and current
transformer values according to equation below.

Sn = 3 Un In P533B4A

There are two identical stages available with independent setting parameters.
Each stage is deactivated if the maximum voltage of all phases drops below 5% of
the rated voltage value.

Block diagram
Figure 188 - Block diagram of the directional power protection

Start

P >0

< 0 t
U12 Trip
U23 Max < 5%Un
U31
& Register
event

>
<0
& Register
event

P< / P<< t< / t<< Enable events P533B5A

224 P5/EN M/33C

Protection functions Protection Relay

Characteristics
Table 45 - Settings and characteristics of the directional power protection
stages P< and P<<

Settings/characteristics Value
(description/label)

Pick-up value/P<

Setting range -200% - +200.0% xSn

Resolution 0.5%

Accuracy ±3% or ±0.5%Sn

Reset ratio 105% ± 3% if P > 0;

95% ± 3% if P < 0
hysteresis minimum 2.5 W secondary

Operation delay/t<

Setting range 0.3 - 300.00 s

Resolution 0.1 s
Accuracy ±1% or ± 150 ms

Characteristic times
Start time < 250 ms
Disengaging time < 500 ms

Setting group

Number 4

P5/EN M/33C 225

Protection Relay Protection functions

Wattmetric earth/ground fault (32N)

Description
The wattmetric earth/ground fault protection function (ANSI code 32N) is an earth/
ground fault directional protection adapted for compensated neutral power
systems (i.e. Petersen-coil earthed/grounded) in which the resistive part of the
earth/ground fault current is large enough (typically more than 5 A).
The settings of the wattmetric earth/ground fault protection are based on the
fundamental component of the residual current and of the residual voltage. The
protection operates with a detection of restriking faults.
The protection calculates the active and reactive residual powers as follows:
P0 = I0.U0.cosφ0
Q0 = I0.U0.sinφ0
where

I0 = IL1 + IL2+ I L3
P533B6A

U0 = VL1 + VL2+ V L3
P533B7A

U0I0> is the threshold of residual power setting in percentage of Pn0.

NOTE: Connect the U0 signal according to the connection diagram to achieve
correct polarisation.
The wattmetric earth/ground fault protection provides 2 operating zones,
separated by a non-detection zone:
• Forward fault zone
The forward zone is intended to issue a signal or trip command during a fault
at the downstream side of the protection.
• Backward fault zone
The backward zone is intended to issue a signal during a fault at the
upstream side of the protection.
The two zone area are defined by a pickup sector setting.
If the direction mode is set to Reverse, the wattmetric earth/ground fault protection
operates in upstream fault zone.

226 P5/EN M/33C

Protection functions Protection Relay

Figure 189 - Operating zones of the wattmetric earth/ground fault protection

Q0

Forward Backward
Zone Zone

Pick-up Pick-up
sector size sector size

P0

Pick-up Pick-up
sector size sector size

-U0I0>
+U0I0>
P533B8A

The protection is deactivated if the residual voltage is lower than U0> setting.
The protection is a definite time protection function, where t> is the operation time
setting of the protection.

Four memory modes

The detection of current faults is controlled by a memory hold time that extends
the transient pick-up information enabling the operation of the definite time delay
even if the faults are rapidly extinguished (< 1.5 ms) and restrike rapidly and
periodically.
The wattmetric protection can be used in different modes:
• Fault memory based on voltage
The detection of current faults is controlled by the presence of residual
voltage that extends the transient pick-up information enabling the operation
of the definite time delay even if the faults are rapidly extinguished and
restrike rapidly and periodically. The level of the residual voltage is settable
(U0 memory).
• Fault memory based on the time memory
The detection of current faults is controlled by a memory hold time that
extends the transient pick-up information enabling the operation of the
definite time delay even if the faults are rapidly extinguished and restrike
rapidly and periodically. The memory time is settable (Time memory).
• Both criteria
The protection operates with both, memory time and and memory residual
voltage.
• Without memory criteria
When the fault is detected, the start signal is raised after confirmation. Neither
memory time nor residual voltage memory are taken into account.

P5/EN M/33C 227

Protection Relay Protection functions

Operation
With a Petersen coil system, the current in a faulty feeder is usually inductive and
in a healthy feeder, capacitive.
For the forward output, a confirmation is applied on the start signal, because the
wattmetric is based on active power and when a restriking fault occurs with a
Petersen coil system, the following phenomenon needs to be considered:
For the backward output, the wattmetric protection is able to detect the capacitive
current circulation in healthy feeders, to see that the fault is on upstream side:
• In steady state, this capacitive current has a phase-shift of 90° with the
residual voltage. So this capacitive current is not detected because it is
outside the backward characteristic, symmetrical to forward area.
• During the transient, the capacitive current goes first in the backward area,
before to go outside with at the end a phase-shift of 90°. This transient signal
is not used to detect a backward fault with capacitive current, but mainly to
block other protection functions of healthy feeders. This can be the case
when a HV/MV transformer supplies two incomers at the same time (see
Faulty feeder vs. healthy feeder, page 228).

Figure 190 - Faulty feeder vs. healthy feeder

U0

I0
I0r I0
I0 I0v

I0a U0 U0

Faulty feeder Healthy feeder P533B9A

Tripping direction
The normal operate area, in Easergy P5 protection relay could be set to forward or
reverse area, because sometimes it is not possible to modify CT or VT
connections when there is a mistake in the wirings. In that case, to avoid a
modification of wirings, you can set the operate area to forward (default setting) or
reverse. So if you change the operate area, the confirmation must be applied to
the operate area (which could be forward or backward).

228 P5/EN M/33C

Protection functions Protection Relay

Block diagram

Figure 191 - Block diagram of the wattmetric earth/ground fault protection function (ANSI 32N)

I0 > Alarm
P0 & & non-operate
U0
& Register event
> Alarm
operate
& Register event
-Sector < φ0 < +Sector
Start
Backward
& 0 t
180 - Sector < φ0 < 180 + Sector
Forward
Confirmation & Register event

t t
1 &
0 0
Trip
& Register event
Block

&
S

> &
R

Inh

Mem time
U0> I0U0> Sector Mode U0> Mem Mode: Mem mode: t> Reset Enable
voltage time time events P533BAA

Characteristics
Table 46 - Settings and characteristics of the wattmetric earth/ground fault
protection stages I0U0> and I0U0>>

Settings/characteristics Value
(description/label)

I0 input/Input

Options I0, I0Calc，I0' for model with EF CT (1/5A CT and

1A CT)
I0, I0Calc for model with CSH

Direction mode/Mode
Options Forward; Backward

Inhibit ctrl./InhCtrl
Options Selection of one digital input (DI) or one virtual
input (VI)

Timer instant delay ctrl./TmInstCtrl

Options Selection of one digital input (DI) or one virtual

input (VI)

Pick-up value/I0U0>

Setting range 0.001 - 0.2 Pn0 if I0 calculated or measured with

standard EF CT;
0.001 - 2 Pn0 if I0 measured with very sensitive
EF CT;
0.1 - 20 Pn0 if I0 measured with CSH 2A;
0.01 - 2 Pn0 if I0 measured with CSH 20A
Resolution 0.1%

Accuracy ±10%

Reset ratio 90% ± 3%

P5/EN M/33C 229

Protection Relay Protection functions

Table 46 - Settings and characteristics of the wattmetric earth/ground fault

protection stages I0U0> and I0U0>> (Continued)

Settings/characteristics Value
(description/label)

Uₒ> setting/Uₒ>

Setting range 0.02 - 0.8 Un0

Resolution 0.1%

Accuracy ±5%

Reset ratio 95% ± 3%

Pick up sector/Sector

Setting range 0 to 90°

Resolution 1°
Accuracy ±1° with I0 and U0 measured
±3° with I0 and U0 calculated
Hysteresis 1° with I0 measured
3° with I0 calculated
Operation delay/t> (DT)

Setting range 0.05 s to 300 s

Resolution 0.01 s
Accuracy ±1% or ±20 ms

SOL Mode/SOL Mode

Options Enable, Disable

SOL Operation delay/SOLt>

Setting range 0.05 s to 300 s

Resolution 0.01 s
Accuracy ±1% or ±20 ms

Memory Mode/Mem Mode

Options None; Voltage; Time; Both

Memory time/Mem. time

Setting range 0.05 to 10.00 s

Resolution 0.01 s
Accuracy ±1% or ±20 ms

Reset time/Reset time26

Setting range 0.00 s to 100.00 s

Resolution 0.01 s
Accuracy ±1% or ±20 ms

Characteristic times
Start time < 50 ms/45 ms at 2 I0U0> 27
< 55 ms/50 ms at 1.2 I0U0> 27
< 60 ms/55 ms at 1.05 I0U0> 27
Overshoot time < 40 ms at 2 I0U0>
Disengaging time < 60 ms/75 ms 27

Setting group

Number 4

26. Common settings for setting groups 1, 2, 3 and 4.

27. The 2nd value is only for high speed high break digital outputs.

230 P5/EN M/33C

Protection functions Protection Relay

Phase undercurrent (ANSI 37)

Description
The phase undercurrent protection function (ANSI code 37) is typically used to
protect pumps against the loss of prime by detection of motor no-load operation.
So, the undercurrent stage protects rather the device driven by the motor, for
example a submersible pump (where the flowing liquid inherently cools the pump)
or a conveyor belt, than the motor itself.
The phase undercurrent stage measures the fundamental component of the
phase currents.
The stage I< can be configured for definite time characteristic only.
To make the difference between a normal operation of the CB and an
undercurrent conditions, a fixed low setting is used to activate or disable the
function.

Low-current self blocking

The phase undercurrent protection can be blocked when the maximum of the
phase currents drops to below 15%In to avoid unwanted tripping.

Block diagram
Figure 192 - Block diagram of the phase undercurrent protection function
(ANSI 37)

IL1
IL2 Min < & Start
IL3

& Register event

Max < 15%In

Trip

Block
& Register event

I< t< Enable

events P533BBA

P5/EN M/33C 231

Protection Relay Protection functions

Characteristics
Table 47 - Settings and characteristics of the phase undercurrent protection
function (ANSI 37)

Settings/characteristics Value
(description/label)

Pick-up value/I<

Setting range 20In - 70%In

Resolution 1%

Accuracy ±2% or ±0.5%In

Reset ratio 105% ± 2%

I< block limit/Nocmp

Value 15%In (fixed)

Operation delay/t<

Setting range 0.3 - 300.0 s

Resolution 0.1 s
Accuracy ±1% or ±20 ms

Characteristic times
Start time < 60 ms/55 ms 28
Disengaging time < 65ms/80 ms 28

Setting group68

Number 4

28. The 2nd value is only for high speed high break digital outputs.

232 P5/EN M/33C

Protection functions Protection Relay

Temperature monitoring (ANSI 38)

Description
The temperature monitoring function (ANSI code 38) is used to detect abnormal
heat rise by measuring the temperature inside equipment fitted with sensors:
• transformer: protection of primary and secondary windings
• motor and generator: protection of stator windings and bearings. This
protection function is associated with an RTD of the Pt100 platinum (100 Ω at
0°C or 32°F) or nickel (Ni100 or Ni120) type, in accordance with the
IEC 60751 and DIN 43760 standards.
• it picks up when the monitored temperature is greater than the set point (Ts)
• it has two independent set points:
◦ alarm set point
◦ tripping set point
• when the protection function is activated, it detects whether the RTD is
shorted or disconnected:
◦ RTD shorting is detected if the measured temperature is less than -30°C
or -22°F (measurement displayed as "——")
◦ RTD disconnection is detected if the measured temperature is greater
than +200°C or +392°F (measurement displayed as "–//–").
If an RTD fault is detected, the associated threshold is inhibited and the start
and trip signals are forced to reset state.
The "RTD fault" item is also made available in the control matrix and an alarm
message is generated specifying the number of the MET148-2 module for the
faulty RTD.

Block diagram
Figure 193 - Block diagram of the temperature monitoring function (ANSI 38)

T < +200˚C
& > Alarm

RTD X > Trip

X = 1-16

& RTD fault

T > -30˚C

T˚1> T˚1>> Operation Alarm

delay delay P533BCA

P5/EN M/33C 233

Protection Relay Protection functions

Characteristics
Table 48 - Setting and characteristics of the temperature monitoring function
(ANSI 38)

Settings/characteristics Value
(description/label)

Alarm and trip set points/T°1>, T°1>>

Setting range 0°C - 180°C (32°F - 356°F)

Unit °C
Accuracy ±1°C (±1.8°F)

Resolution 1°C (1.8°F)

Pick up/drop out 3°C (37.4°F)

Alarm delay/AlmDly

Setting range 0.00 - 600.00 s

Accuracy 1% ± 20 ms

Operation delay/OperDly

Setting range 0.00 - 600.00 s

Accuracy 1% ± 20 ms

Characteristic times
Start time <3s
Setting group

Number 1

234 P5/EN M/33C

Protection functions Protection Relay

Negative sequence overcurrent (ANSI 46)

Description
The negative sequence overcurrent protection function (ANSI code 46) gives
greater sensitivity to detect phase to phase faults at the end of long lines, where
phase overcurrent elements may not operate.
For rotating machine the negative sequence overcurrent protection provides
protection against a temperature rise caused by an unbalance power supply,
phase inversion, loss of phase, and unbalanced phase current.
The negative sequence current is calculated depending on the measured phase
currents according to the following formula:

1
I2 = ( IL1 + a2 IL2 + a IL3 )
3 P533BDA

with
2π
j ------
a = e 3 P533BEA

The negative sequence overcurrent protection function operates with a combined

inverse and definite tripping time characteristic.
NOTE: If more than one definite operation time stage is needed for the
negative sequence overcurrent protection, the freely programmable stages
can be used (see Programmable stages (ANSI 99), page 342).

Block diagram
Figure 194 - Block diagram of the negative sequence overcurrent protection
function (ANSI 46)

IL1
IL2 I2 >
& Start
IL3

& Register
event
Block

≥1 Trip

& Register
event

k>
I2> t> DT/ IDMT Enable
IDMT characteristics events P533BFA

P5/EN M/33C 235

Protection Relay Protection functions

Characteristics
Table 49 - Settings and characteristics of the negative sequence overcurrent
protection stage I2>

Settings/characteristics Value
(description/label)

Pick-up value/I2>

Setting range 0.02In - 5In

Resolution 0.01In
Accuracy ±3% or ±0.005In

Reset ratio 95% ±2%

Operation delay/t> (DT)

Setting range 0.07 - 300 s

Resolution 0.01 s
Accuracy ±1% or ±20 ms

Operation delay/t> (IDMT)

Delay curve family/Curve IEC, IEEE, IEEE2, Others, programmable (Prg)

Delay type/Type IEC: NI, VI, EI, LTI, STI

IEEE: VI, EI, LTI, LTEI, LTVI, MI, STI, STEI, CO8
IEEE2: NI, VI, EI, MI
Others: RI, RXIDG

Inv. time coefficient k/k> 0.05 to 20.0 for IEC and RI

0.50 to 20.0 for RXIDG, IEEE and IEEE2

Resolution 0.01 s
Accuracy ±5% or ±30 ms

Reset type

Options DT; IDMT

Reset time
Setting range 0.03 - 100 s

Resolution 0.01 s
Accuracy ±1% or ±20 ms

Characteristic times
Start time < 50 ms/45 ms at 2xI2> 29
< 60 ms/55 ms at 1.2xI2> 29
< 65 ms/60 ms at 1.05xI2> 29
Disengaging time < 75 ms/90 ms 29

Setting group

Number 4

29. The 2nd value is only for high speed high break digital outputs.

236 P5/EN M/33C

Protection functions Protection Relay

Unbalance overcurrent, broken conductor (ANSI 46BC)

Description
The purpose of the unbalance overcurrent, broken conductor protection function
(ANSI code 46BC) is to detect unbalanced load conditions, for example a broken
conductor of a heavy-loaded overhead line in a medium voltage radial network.
This may be caused by:
• Broken conductor in contact with the earth/ground at the source side
• Broken conductor in contact with the earth/ground at the load side
• Open circuit (conductor not in contact with the earth/ground) caused by
broken conductor, blown fuse, circuit breaker pole failure, etc.
This function can also be used for motor protection in order to detect blown fuse or
phase reverse connection.
The function is inactive if only 2 phase current sensors are connected (2 CT
mode).
The operation of the unbalanced load function is based on the negative phase
sequence component I2 related to the positive phase sequence component I1.
This is calculated from the phase currents using the method of symmetrical
components. The function requires that the measuring inputs are connected
correctly. The unbalance protection has definite time operation characteristic.
The positive and negative sequence currents I1 and I2 are defined as follows:

1
I1 = ( IL1 + a IL2 + a2 IL3 )
3 P533BGA

1
I2 = ( I + a2 IL2 + a IL3 )
3 L1 P533BHA

with phasor rotating constant:

2π
j ------
a = e 3 P533BIA

NOTE: The broken conductor function is inhibited if the current value flowing
in each one of the three phases is less than 20% of the nominal current.

Block diagram
Figure 195 - Block diagram of the unbalance overcurrent broken conductor
protection function (ANSI 46BC)

I2 /I1 > & Start

Register
Block & event

Trip

& Register
event

I2 /I1 t> Enable events P533BJA

P5/EN M/33C 237

Protection Relay Protection functions

Characteristics
Table 50 - Settings and characteristics of the unbalance overcurrent broken
conductor protection stage I2/I1>

Settings/characteristics Value

Pick-up value/I2/I1>

Pick-up setting 2% - 70%

Resolution 1%

Accuracy ±3%

Hysteresis

Value 95%

Accuracy ±2% or ±2 mA secondary

Operation delay/t>

Setting range 0.07 s - 300.0 s

Resolution 0.01 s
Accuracy ±1% or ±20 ms

Characteristic times
Start time < 50 ms/45 ms at 2xI2/I1> 30
< 60 ms/55 ms at 1.2xI2/I1> 30
< 75 ms/70 ms at 1.05xI2/I1> 30
Disengaging time < 75 ms/90 ms 30

Setting group

Number 4

30. The 2nd value is only for high speed high break digital outputs.

238 P5/EN M/33C

Protection functions Protection Relay

Negative sequence overvoltage (ANSI 47)

Description
To protect a rotating machine from being energised with a reverse voltage
sequence or to prevent overheating of the motor due to a broken conductor
condition, negative sequence overvoltage protection (ANSI code 47) can be
applied. This protection monitors the voltage phase sequence detecting a reverse
rotation or voltage unbalance due to a missing (asymmetrical) phase. The
detection of these conditions can then be used to trip the machine and prevent
damage to both the motor and the mechanically coupled process.
The Easergy P5 protection relay provides two stages of negative sequence
overvoltage protection. Each stage can be enabled or disabled independently. The
negative sequence voltage is derived from the three phase voltages. If the VT
connection is configured as “LL/LLy”, the negative sequence voltage cannot be
derived, and the negative sequence overvoltage protection is disabled.
If the negative sequence voltage input exceeds the voltage setting, this function
starts instantaneously, and it operates with the definite time delay or inverse time
delay characteristic that has been selected. The inverse time delay characteristic
follows the equation below:

T
t=
U2
Us 1 P533BKA

where:
t is the theoretical operate time in seconds
T is the time setting (theoretical operate time for U2 = 2 × Us)
U2 is the calculated value of negative sequence voltage
Us is the pick-up setting value of the negative sequence overvoltage protection (
U2> or U2>>)
The U2> stage has a settable reset delay that enables the detection of intermittent
faults. This means that the time counter of the protection function does not reset
immediately after the fault is cleared, but resets after the release delay has
elapsed. If the fault appears again before the release delay time has elapsed, the
delay counter continues from the previous value. This means that the function
eventually trips if faults are occurring often enough. This function is blocked by
VTS operation if the setting “VTSOpMod” is set to “BLOCKING”.

Block diagram
Figure 196 - Block diagram of the negative sequence overvoltage protection
(ANSI 47)

U2 U2/Un >
& Start

Register
VTSInh Blk & event
No
blk
t
≥1
Block ≥1 Trip

& Register
event

DT/IDMT Reset Inv Enable

VTSOpMod U2>/U2>> time events
t> P533BLA

P5/EN M/33C 239

Protection Relay Protection functions

Characteristics
Table 51 - Settings and characteristics of the negative sequence overvoltage
protection function (ANSI 47)

Settings/characteristics Values Values

(description/label) (stage U2>) (stage U2>>)

VTS operating mode/VTSOpMod

Options NO ACTION; BLOCKING

Pick-up value/U2> or U2>>

Setting range 1%Un - 100%Un

Resolution 1%Un
Accuracy ±2%

Delay type/DelayType

Options DT;
INV (the characteristic follows the equation provided in
Description, page 239)

Operation delay/t> or t>>

Setting range 0.08 s - 300 s

Resolution 0.01 s
Accuracy DT: ±2% or ±20 ms;
IDMT: ±5% or ±20 ms

Reset time/Reset time

Setting range 0.03 - 300 s

Resolution 0.01 s
Accuracy ±2% or ±20 ms

Hysteresis/Hyster

Value 98% ± 1%

Minimum hysteresis 120 mv secondary

Characteristic times
Start time < 40 ms/35 ms for 0.9 - 1.1U2>31
Overshoot time < 40 ms for 0.9 - 1.1U2>
Setting group

Number 4

31. The 2nd value is only for high speed high break digital outputs.

240 P5/EN M/33C

Protection functions Protection Relay

Thermal overload protection for feeder (ANSI 49F)

Description
The Thermal Overload protection function for Feeder (ANSI code 49F) can be
applied to minimise damage to overhead lines and underground cables when
operating at temperatures in excess of the designed maximum withstand
(deterioration of the insulation, sagging conductors etc.).
The Easergy P5 protection relays that are designed for feeder protection
incorporate a current based thermal replica, using phase current to reproduce the
heating and cooling of the feeder conductors. In this case, the Easergy P5
protection relay automatically uses the highest phase current as input information
for the thermal model. The current measurement is based on 3 phase RMS
currents, that takes into account harmonic rank up to 15. The mathematical model
used to compute the thermal level of the feeder conductors is based on the
thermal model defined in the IEC 60255-149 standard.
The thermal replica can optionally take account of ambient temperature,
preferably when an ambient temperature sensor is available. However, where an
ambient temperature sensor is not available, the user may enter a default value
for ambient temperature which is different to the value defined in the feeder
conductors data sheet (e.g. to take account of summer and winter ambient
temperature values).
The Thermal Overload for Feeder protection can be used in two different setting
modes:
• Current based setting mode
• Temperature based setting mode
The following sections explain the two setting modes.

Current based setting mode

This setting mode is active when "Temperature based mode" is set to "Current". In
this setting mode, the thermal level H(t) is computed according to the thermal
model defined in the IEC 60255-151.
The thermal level H(t) is computed according to the following equation:

l eq (t)
( ) x Δtτ Δt
2
H(t) = H(t - Δt) + - H(t - Δt) x
k x lb τ P533BMA

where:
• H(t) is the thermal level computed at time t ("Thermal level").
• H(t - Δt) is the thermal level computed at time t - Δt.
• Ieq(t) is the equivalent heating phase current at time t computed from the
maximum of the 3 phase RMS currents.
• Ib is the continuous rated level ("Basic current setting" or "Ib").
• k is the "k" factor applied to the basic current to define the maximum
continuous current ("Factor k").
• is the heating/cooling thermal time constant of the feeder ("Heating time
constant" or "Time constant "), where is assumed to be much greater than
Δt.
"[Ieq(t) / (k x Ib)]2x Δt / " expresses the heat transfer due to the phase current Ieq(t)
and "H(t - Δt) x Δt / " expresses the natural cooling of the feeder conductors.
The thermal overload protection operates when the thermal level is greater than
100%. This thermal level of 100% can be reached with a permanent current above
the basic current value Ib multiplied by the k factor.
With a continuous load current "Ieq", the thermal level "H" is equal to:

P5/EN M/33C 241

Protection Relay Protection functions

l eq
(K lb )
2
H (l eq ) =
x P533BNA

The table below indicates the thermal level with different values of continuous load
current:

Ieq / (k x IB) ratio Thermal Level (%)

1 100% (operation)

0.9 81%

0.8 64%

0.7 49%

0.6 36%
0.5 25%

0.4 16%

0.3 9%

Generally, the basic current Ib is set to the continuous thermal withstand current of
the feeder conductors, and k factor could be set to take into account the accuracy
of the global current measuring chain (phase CTs and the protection relay). The k
factor is set to 1.0 by default.
An thermal alarm ("AlmThm" output) is provided which operates when the thermal
level is greater than or equal to the "Thermal Alarm Value" setting (expressed in
%) and is usually set to be lower than 100 %, the operate level. This threshold,
expressed in %, is available only in the current based setting mode.
The thermal level in % is accessible as an output measurement.
When thermal overload is managed in the several setting groups, the thermal level
is kept after the setting group change (no thermal level reset), and the thermal
level is computed according to the new settings.

Temperature based setting mode

This setting mode is active when "Temperature based mode" setting is enabled
and "Ambient" is disabled. In this setting mode, the protected object temperature
computation is based on the previous thermal level H(t) calculation (see previous
section "Current based setting mode") with an additional reference to the
maximum operating temperature of the feeder conductors, the maximum ambient
temperature and the working temperature, defined by setting.
In this mode, the thermal level H(t) is computed with the following formula, derived
from the equation of thermal level H(t) calculation:

l eq (t)
( ) x Δtτ Δt
2
H(t) = H(t - Δt) + Fa x - H(t - Δt) x
k x lb τ P533BQA

Where common values are identical to the thermal level H(t) calculation formula,
and the additional "Fa" ambient temperature factor is defined with the following
equation:
Tmax - T nom
Fa =
Tmax - T a P533BRA

where:
• Tmax is the maximum temperature of the equipment ("Max object
temperature").
• Tnom is the limit of the ambient temperature designed for the feeder
conductors to operate at rated loads without causing thermal degradation of
insulation ("Nominal ambient temp", typically equal to 40 ℃).

242 P5/EN M/33C

Protection functions Protection Relay

• Ta is the current ambient temperature of the feeder conductors measured with

the RTD number 8 ("Default ambient temperature"). When no temperature
sensor is available or the sensor is faulty, or the temperature measurement
exceed "Max object temperature" setting, the value of "Default ambient
temperature" will be used for this temperature. When temperature
measurement is lower than the "Min ambient temperature" setting, the value
of this setting will be used for this temperature.
The ambient temperature of the feeder conductors is computed with the following
formula:
Tobject = H(t) x (Tmax - Ta ) +Ta P533BSA

Where H(t), Tmax and Ta are defined according to the previous equations.
The thermal overload protection operates when the computed temperature
"Tobject" is above or equals the maximum temperature Tmax.
An thermal alarm is provided ("AlmThm" output). This output operates when the
temperature level is greater than or equal to the alarm temperature threshold
("Talm" setting, expressed in ℃).
The ambient temperature (Ta) and object temperature (Tobject) are accessible as
output measurements in ℃ (Ta = "Ambient temperature" output and Tobject =
"Object temperature" output). The value of the ambient temperature is equal to the
default value set as "TmpAmbDft".

Additional features
The thermal level computation expressed in % is always available with the feeder
thermal level output. The current thermal level is saved in a non volatile memory
when the Easergy P5 protection relay is powered off. If the current thermal level is
above 90%, a value of 90% is memorised to prevent possible nuisance tripping on
supply restoration.
A measurement output where the remaining time to trip is provided, based on the
hypothesis that the load current present remains constant until thermal overload
operation occurs ("Time" Output).
An time remaining alarm ("RsvAlm" output) is provided. It operates when the
calculated remaining time is less than or equal to the "Reserve value" time setting.
There is a digital input (“FThLevRst” signal) to reset the thermal level value, when
the digital input is asserted, the value of Thermal level is set to Zero.
It is possible to block the protection function using the block matrix.
Typical values of thermal time constant:

Applications Time constant (min)

Dry-type transformers 40 (rating < 400 kVA)

60 - 90 (rating 400 - 800 kVA)

Air-core reactors 40
Capacitor banks 10

Overhead lines 10 ( Cu: cross section greater than or equal to 100 mm2 (0.15 in2);
or AI: 150 mm2 (0.23 in2) )

Busbars 60

Time to trip calculation

For a continuous current higher than the current threshold (k x Ib), the operate time
of the thermal overload protection can be computed with the following equation:

Fa x H(leq ) - H 0
t = τ x Ln (
Fa x H(Ieq ) - 100% ) P533BOA

P5/EN M/33C 243

Protection Relay Protection functions

where:
• is the thermal time constant for the protected equipment.
• Ln( ) is natural logarithm function.
• Fa is the ongoing temperature compensation. In current based setting mode,
Fa = 1.
• H(Ieq) is the thermal level calculated with the continuous load current (Ieq) and
the basic current setting (Ib) (see Current based setting mode).
• H0 is the current thermal state corresponding to the last calculation.
In the same way, for a continuous current higher than the current threshold (k x Ib),
the time for the alarm to operate is:

Fa x H(leq ) - H 0
t = τ x Ln ( )
Fa x H(leq ) - H alarm P533BTA

where:
Halarm is "Alarm" (alarm threshold setting, in %). In temperature based setting
mode, the threshold alarm threshold is expressed in ℃ with "Talm" setting. The
corresponding thermal level in % (Halarm) is defined by the following equation:

Talm - T a
H alarm = x 100%
Tmax - T a P533BUA

Block diagram

Figure 197 - Block diagram of the thermal overload protection function (ANSI 49F)

Block Blocked

& Register
Current based mode event
calculation ≥1 &
>100% Trip

%
IL1 RMS
IL2 RMS MAX >
IL3 RMS

Heating H(t) & AlmThm

init
FThLevRst ≥1
> & Register
event
Temperature based
mode calculation
ºC

>

& RsvAlm
< & Register
RTD #8 event

< TmpAlm
& Register
event
> TmpAlm

& Register
event

T° mode Ib τ1 Factor T° nominal Alarm% T° max T° alm Resrve T° min Enable

k value events P533BVA

244 P5/EN M/33C

Protection functions Protection Relay

Characteristics
Table 52 - Settings and characteristics of the thermal overload protection
stage 49F>

Settings/characteristics Values
(description/label)

Basic current setting/Ib

Setting range 0.1In - 4.0In

Resolution 0.01In
Max permissive factor/Factor k

Setting range 0.1 - 1.5

Resolution 0.01
Heating time constant/Time constant τ 1

Setting range 1.0 min - 1000.0 min

Resolution 0.1 min

Thermal alarm value/Alarm
Setting range 50% – 100%

Resolution 1%

Reserve time thermal alarm/Reserve value

Setting range 1.0 min - 1000.0 min

Resolution 0.1 min

Temperature based mode/T°mode

Options Current; Ambient

Nominal ambient temp/T°nominal

Setting range -40 ℃ - +300 ℃ (-40 ℉ - +572 ℉)

Resolution 1 ℃ (1.8 ℉)

Max object temperature/T°max

Setting range -40 ℃ - +300 ℃ (-40 ℉ - +572 ℉)

Resolution 1 ℃ (1.8 ℉)

Alarm temperature/T°alm

Setting range 0 - +300 ℃ (32 ℉ - +572 ℉)

Resolution 1 ℃ (1.8 ℉)

Min ambient temperature/T°min

Setting range -40 ℃ - 300 ℃ (-40 ℉ - +572 ℉)

Resolution 1 ℃ (1.8 ℉)

Default ambient temperature/T°ambient by default

Setting range -40 ℃ - 300 ℃ (-40 ℉ - +572 ℉)

Resolution 1 ℃ (1.8 ℉)

Thermal Level init value/ Heating H(t) init

Setting range 0% - 90%

Resolution 0.1%

Characteristics
Tripping time accuracy ±5% or ±500 ms (with the applicable factor
according to IEC 60255-149)

Setting group

Number 4

P5/EN M/33C 245

Protection Relay Protection functions

Motor status
Description
There are three possible status for a motor: stopped, starting or running.
The Easergy P5 detects motor start by CB position, motor current, or both CB
position and motor current using “Motor start detection mode”.
• CB Position: The CB position changes from open to closed.
• Current: Three phase currents have been less than 5% In (phase CT primary
value). Then any of the three phase currents increases and exceeds the
motor start detection current.
• CB Position and Current: Any of the three phase currents exceeds the motor
start detection current in 90 ms after CB position changes from open to close.

Figure 198 - Motor status

Stopped

2 4
1 1

Starting Running
3
P533BWA

Criterion for motor in starting state

1. As soon as the motor start is detected, the motor changes from “Stopped”
state to “Starting” state.②

Criterion for motor in stopped state

1. If the motor start criterion is “CB Position”, the motor is in “Stopped” state
when CB is open. ①
2. If the motor start criterion is “Current” or “CB Position and Current”, the motor
is in “Stopped” state when three phase currents are all less than 5% In (phase
CT Primary value). ①

Criterion for motor in running state

1. When the motor is in “Starting” state and three phase currents drop below the
motor start detection current for 100 ms, the motor state changes to
“Running”. ③
2. If the motor start is not detected successfully and the criteria for motor in
“Stopped” state are not satisfied, the relay will consider the motor is in
“Running” state.
For example: if the motor start detection mode is “CB Position and Current”
and all three phase currents do not exceed the motor start detection current
within 90 ms after CB is closed, the motor start is not detected. Motor state
changes from “Stopped” state to “Running” after the 90 ms timing window. ④
Typical diagrams for the detection of successful direct-on-line start and soft start
are shown in the following diagrams, with the use of the “CB Position and Current”
mode.

246 P5/EN M/33C

Protection functions Protection Relay

Figure 199 - Successful DOL start

Istart

90 ms

CB Closed

Motor Running
Status 100 ms

Starting

Stopped
P533BXA

Figure 200 - Successful soft start

Istart

90 ms

CB Closed

Motor
Status
Running

Stopped
P533BYA

If the corresponding condition is satisfied in two consecutive executions, the motor

status is changed.

General settings

Settings Value
(description/label)

Nom motor start current/Imot nom start

Setting range 1.50In - 10.00In

Resolution 0.01In
Motor start detection current/Istart>
Setting range 0.1In - 10.00In

Resolution 0.01In
Reset ratio 95% ± 2%

Minimum hysteresis 5 mA secondary

Motor start detection mode/StrDetMod

Options CB Position; Current; CB Position & Current

P5/EN M/33C 247

Protection Relay Protection functions

Motor speed detection

Description
Motor rotation speed can be measured based on cams mounted on a rotor with a
proximity sensor. The output from the proximity sensor is a train of electrical
pulses, where each pulse corresponds to the detection of an individual cam.
Hence, if a given application has R number of cams mounted 360º/R apart on a
rotor, the number of cams R is equal to the number of pulses per rotation of the
rotor shaft. The time interval T (in seconds) between consecutive pulses can be
used to calculate the revolutions per minutes (rpm), using: Ω = 60/ (R x T).

Figure 201 - Proximity sensor

1 2

P533BZA

1 Rotor with 2 cams

2 Proximity sensor

Table 53 - Characteristics of proximity sensor

Characteristics Values
Pass-band (in Hz) > 2Ωn* R/60

Ωn is the rated speed.

Output 24 to 250 V DC, 3 mA minimum

Leakage current in open status < 0.5 mA

Voltage dip in closed status < 4 V (with 24 V power supply)

Pulse duration 0 status > 120 µs

1 status > 200 µs

The proximity detector output pulses are at a voltage level which is compatible
with the logic inputs (24 – 240 V DC), which means that a logic input must be
mapped to a given proximity detector to perform the speed measurement. The
12I4O module contains a specific digital input (DI1) to detect the motor speed. It
can recognise the high voltage signal as status 1 with > 200 us pulse width and
the low voltage signal as status 0 with > 120 us pulse width.
Easergy P5 protection relay can only use one speed detection input. If several
12I4O modules (such as Slot C, Slot D, Slot E) are fitted in the Easergy P5
protection relay, the user can select the dedicated digital input from any of the
12I4O modules for motor speed detection. If there is no 12I4O module fitted in the
relay, the motor speed detection and motor overspeed / underspeed protection will
be invisible.

NOTICE
IMPROPER EQUIPMENT OPERATION
If the counting input DI1 on 12I4O is selected for motor speed detection, this
input cannot be used by any other protection functions.
Failure to follow this instruction can result in equipment damage.

248 P5/EN M/33C

Protection functions Protection Relay

When the motor speed detection function is Enabled and one specific digital input
is selected as motor speed input, the settings, such as “Delay”, “On Event”, “OFF
Event” and “Debounce” settings in “Control/Digital inputs” are automatically
noneffective for this selected digital input.
This function provides an output signal “Zero Speed”. If the Easergy P5 protection
relay does not detect the pulse from the proximity sensor for motor speed
measurement for a settable duration, the zero speed output signal is ON.

Block diagram
Figure 202 - Block diagram of zero speed detection

New pulse

Tzero 0
Absence Zero Speed
of pulses

& Register
event

Zero speed delay Enable events P533C0A

Characteristics
Table 54 - Settings and characteristics of motor speed detection protection

Settings/characteristics Values
(description/label)

Motor speed input DI/Speed input

Options Selection of DI for motor speed

• Easergy P5U20 12I4O DI1 on Slot C
• Easergy P5M30 12I4O DI1 on Slot C, D, E
This selection is dependent on the hardware
configuration of the device.

Rated motor speed/Ωn

Setting range 100 – 3600 rpm

Resolution 1 rpm

Pulse per rotation/P/R

Setting range 1 – 900 (with limitation Ωn*R/60 ≤1500)

Resolution 1
Zero speed delay

Setting range 1 – 300 s

Resolution 1s
Accuracy ±2% or ±150 ms

Motor speed

Range 0 – 7200 rpm

Resolution 1 rpm

Accuracy ±1 rpm

Refresh interval 1s
Measurement time 100 ms
Setting group

Number 1

P5/EN M/33C 249

Protection Relay Protection functions

Motor start time supervision (ANSI 48)

Description
The motor start time supervision protection function (ANSI code 48) helps to
protect the motor against prolonged direct-on-line (DOL) starts caused by, for
example, a stalled rotor, too high inertia of the load or too low voltage.
During the motor starting, the current exceeds the motor full load current and
motor thermal stress increases quickly. So motor overheating is possible if the
duration of the motor starting exceeds the set period.
This function is sensitive to the fundamental frequency component of the phase
currents.
The motor start time supervision protection Ist> measures the fundamental
frequency component of the phase currents.
The Ist> stage can be configured for definite operate time or dependent operate
time characteristic. For a weak voltage supply, the dependent characteristic is
useful allowing more start time when a voltage drop decreases the start current
and increases the start time. Equation 7.7 defines the dependent operate time.
Example of an dependent operation time of the motor start time supervision
protection function, page 250 shows an example of the dependent characteristic.
If the measured current is less than the specified start current Istart, the operate
time is longer than the specified start time Tstart.

2
I 
T =  motNomSt  Tstart
 I  P533C1A Equation 7.7

Where:
T = Dependent operate time
ImotNomSt = Nominal motor start current
I = Maximum of IL1, IL2, IL3
Tstart = Motor start time

Figure 203 - Example of an dependent operation time of the motor start time
supervision protection function

250

200
Istart = 6xIn, rated start current
Tstart = 15 s, maximum allowed start time
Time (s)

150

100

50

Tstart

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Current (xIn) Istart P533C2A

The pick-up current setting Istart> is the start detection level of the start current.
While the motor status is starting and the current exceeds the pick-up setting
Istart>, the motor start-up supervision stage starts to count the operate time.

250 P5/EN M/33C

Protection functions Protection Relay

When current drops below the setting Istart>, the motor start-up supervision stage
releases. Motor start-up supervision is active only during the starting of the motor.

Block diagram
Figure 204 - Block diagram of the motor start time supervision function
(ANSI 48)

IL1
IL2 MAX >
& & Start
IL3

& Register
event
Motor status
= starting
Block ≥1 Trip

& Register
event

Istart> DelayType DT Inverse Enable

setting time events P533C3A

Characteristics
Table 55 - Settings and characteristics of the motor start time supervision
protection stage Ist>

Settings/characteristics Value
(description/label)

Delay type

Options DT (definite time);

INV (inverse time)

Motor start time/Start time

Setting range 1 s – 300 s

Resolution 0.1 s
Accuracy ±1% or ±20 ms

Characteristic times
Start time < 70 ms/65 ms 32
Disengaging time < 85 ms/100 ms 32

Setting groups

Number 1

NOTE: For motor start detection current and nominal start current settings,
see Motor status, page 246.

32. The 2nd value is only for high speed high break digital outputs.

P5/EN M/33C 251

Protection Relay Protection functions

Thermal overload protection for machine (ANSI 49M)

Description
The Thermal Overload protection function for machine (ANSI code 49M) can be
applied to prevent damage on the stator and rotor against overloading conditions
due to balanced and unbalanced currents.
• The Easergy P5 protection relays designed for protecting machines
incorporate a current based thermal replica, using phase current to reproduce
the heating and cooling of the equipment to be protected. In this case, the
Easergy P5 protection relay automatically uses the highest phase current as
input information for the thermal model. The current measurement is based
on 3 phase RMS currents, that takes into account harmonic rank up to 15.
The mathematical model used to compute the thermal level of the protected
equipment is based on the thermal model defined in the IEC 60255-149
standard.
• The thermal replica takes into account the overheating generated by the
negative sequence current in the motor, with a weighting defined by a settable
coefficient, depending on the motor characteristics.
• The thermal replica provides the capability to set two heating time constants,
one for starting sequence or the phase current is greater than the motor start
threshold (e.g. locked stator in running state) and one for normal running, in
addition to the cooling time constant applied when the motor is stopped. The
selection of the time constants are decided according to the motor state input
from the motor status function. Besides, the time constant 2 is also decided
by the max phase current which is greater than the motor start value.
Indication of the time constant 1 and time constant 2 active is provided by
means of digital outputs.
• The thermal replica can optionally take account of ambient temperature,
preferably when an ambient temperature sensor is available. However, where
an ambient temperature sensor is not available, the user may enter a default
value for ambient temperature which is different to the value defined in the
protected equipment data sheet (e.g. to take account of summer and winter
ambient temperature values).
The Thermal Overload for Machine protection can be used in two different setting
modes:
• Current based setting mode
• Temperature based setting mode
The following sections explain the two setting modes.

Current based setting mode

This setting mode is active when "Temperature based mode" is set to "Current". In
this setting mode, the thermal level H(t) is computed according to the thermal
model defined in the IEC 60255-151.
According to the user settings, in general, the thermal level is computed by three
different ways according to the three different motor states:
• Running state
• Starting state
• Stopped state
Motor in running state
When the motor is running, the thermal level H(t) is computed according to the
following equation:
leq (t)
( ) x Δτt Δt
2
H(t) = H(t - Δt) + - H(t - Δt) x
k x lb 1 τ1
P533C4A

where:

252 P5/EN M/33C

Protection functions Protection Relay

• H(t) is the thermal level computed at time t.

• H(t - Δt) is the thermal level computed at time t - Δt.
•

Ieq = max (IL1, IL2, IL3)2 + q x I22 P533C5A

where:
◦ IL1, IL2, IL3 are the RMS phase currents.
◦ q is a user setting to define the unbalance factor ("Unbalance factor" or
"Factor q").
For an asynchronous motor, q is determined as follows:
q = 2 x TLR I LR - 1
2

Sn P533C6A

ILR is the motor locked rotor current/ starting current in pu value.

TLR is the motor locked rotor torque in pu value.
Sn is rated slip.
◦ I2 is the negative sequence current.
• Ib is the continuous rated level ("Basic current setting" or "Ib").
• k is the "k" factor applied to the basic current to define the maximum
continuous current ("Factor k").
• 1 is the heating thermal time constant of the motor ("Heating time constant"
or "Time constant 1"), where 1 is assumed to be much greater than Δt.
In the equation above the term "[Ieq(t) / (k x Ib)]2 x Δt / 1" expresses the heat
transfer due to the phase current Ieq(t), and the term "H(t - Δt) x Δt / 1" expresses
the natural cooling of the devices (in the running state).
The digital output Motor TC1 active is asserted in this state.
Motor is starting
When the motor is starting, the user can set a different time constant, to take into
account the heating effect on rotor windings during the starting sequence. In that
state, the thermal level H(t) is computed according to the same equation than
above, where the time constant 1 is replaced by the time constant 2.
leq (t)
( ) x Δτt Δt
2
H(t) = H(t - Δt) + - H(t - Δt) x
k x lb 2 τ2
P533C7A

Where 2 is the heating time constant during starting sequence or the phase
currents is greater than the motor start threshold ("Time constant for motor starting
" or "Time constant 2").
The digital output Motor TC2 active is asserted in this state.
Motor is stopped
When the motor is stopped, the cooling effect is dominant since there is no
heating contribution, so a cooling time constant must be taken into account in the
stopped state. In that state, the thermal level H(t) is computed according to the
following equation:
Δt
H(t) = H(t - Δt) - H(t - Δt) x
τ 3 P533C8A

Where 3 is the cooling thermal time constant of the protected equipment

("Cooling time constant" or "Time constant 3").
The digital outputs Motor TC1 active and Motor TC2 active are reset in this state.
The thermal overload protection operates when the thermal level is greater than
100%. This thermal level of 100% can be reached with a permanent current above
the basic current value ("Basic current setting" or "Ib") multiplied by the k factor
("Factor k" setting).

P5/EN M/33C 253

Protection Relay Protection functions

With a continuous load current "Ieq", the thermal level "H" is equal to:
l eq
(K )
2
H (l eq ) =
x lb
P533C9A

The table below indicates the thermal level with different values of continuous load
current:

Ieq / (k x Ib) ratio Thermal Level (%)

1 100% (operation)

0.9 81%
0.8 64%

0.7 49%

0.6 36%

0.5 25%
0.4 16%

0.3 9%

Generally, the basic current Ib is set to the continuous thermal withstand current of
the protected equipment, and k factor could be set to take into account the
accuracy of the global current measuring chain (phase CTs and the protection
relay). The k factor is set to 1.0 by default.
An thermal alarm ("AlmThm" output) is provided which operates when the thermal
level is greater than or equal to the "Thermal alarm value" setting (expressed in %)
and is usually set to be lower than 100%, the operate level. This signal can be
used to lock the CB reclosing until thermal state is back under the alarm level.
The thermal level in % is accessible as an output measurement.
When thermal overload is managed in the several setting groups, the thermal level
is kept after the setting group change (no thermal level reset), and the thermal
level is computed according to the new settings.

Temperature based setting mode

This setting mode is active when "Temperature based mode" setting is set to
"Ambient". In this setting mode, the protected equipment temperature computation
is based on the previous thermal level H(t) calculation (see previous section
Current based setting mode, page 252) with an additional reference to the
maximum operating temperature of the equipment, the nominal ambient
temperature and the working ambient temperature, defined by setting.
In this mode, the thermal level H(t) is computed with the following formula, derived
from the equation of thermal level H(t) calculation:
l eq (t)
( ) x Δtτ Δt
2
H(t) = H(t - Δt) + Fa x - H(t - Δt) x
k x lb τ P533CAA

Where common values are identical to the thermal level H(t) calculation formula,
and the additional "Fa" ambient temperature factor is defined with the following
equation:
Tmax - T nom
Fa =
Tmax - T a P533CBA

where:
• Tmax is the maximum temperature of the equipment ("Max object temperature"
setting).
• Tnom is the limit of the ambient temperature designed for the protected
equipment to operate at rated loads without causing thermal degradation of
insulation ("Nominal ambient temperature" setting, typically equal to 40 ℃).

254 P5/EN M/33C

Protection functions Protection Relay

• Ta is the current ambient temperature of the protected equipment measured

with the RTD number 8.
The ambient temperature of the protected equipment is computed with the
following formula:
Tobject = H(t) x (Tmax - Ta ) +Ta P533CCA

Where H(t), Tmax and Ta are defined according to the previous equations.
The thermal overload protection operates when the computed temperature
"Tobject" is above or equals the maximum temperature Tmax.
An thermal alarm is provided ("AlmThm" output). This output operates when the
temperature level is greater than or equal to the alarm temperature threshold
("Talm" setting, expressed in ℃).
The ambient temperature (Ta) and object temperature (Tobject) are accessible as
output measurements in ℃ (Ta = "Ambient temperature" output and Tobject =
"Object temperature" output).

Additional features
The thermal level computation expressed in % is always available with the motor
thermal level output. The current thermal level is saved in a non volatile memory
when the Easergy P5 protection relay is powered off. If the current thermal level is
above 90%, a value of 90% is memorised to prevent possible nuisance tripping on
supply restoration.
A measurement output about the remaining time to trip ("Estimated time to trip" or
" TimeToTrip") is provided, based on the hypothesis that the load current present
remains constant until thermal overload operation occurs.
A time remaining alarm ("RsvAlm" output) is provided. It operates when the
calculated remaining time is less than or equal to the "Reserve value" time setting.
A remote command can be used to reset the thermal level (e.g. after
commissioning tests). This reset can be also performed from the local panel.
It is possible to block the protection function using the block matrix.
After each motor start sequence, the function is able to compute the thermal level
consumed by the latest start. This measurement is accessible with the
measurement output "Motor start thermal level/MStrThelev". When the thermal
level calculation is above (100% - MStrThmlev), the output signal "Block motor
start" is asserted to inhibit CB Closing from taking place. The output time
measurement output "Time left for motor start" provides the remaining time until
the motor can be started.
There is a digital input (“MThLevRst” signal) to reset the thermal level value, when
the digital input is asserted, the value of Thermal level H(t) shall be set to Zero.

Operating state Conditions Impact on thermal level computation

(defined by settings)

Stopped state Stopped state Ieq(t) = 0

Starting state I > MotStrVal setting or Heating time constant 2 is used

starting state

Running state Running state Heating time constant 1 is used

P5/EN M/33C 255

Protection Relay Protection functions

Time to trip calculation

For a continuous current higher than the current threshold (k x Ib), the operate
time of the thermal overload protection can be computed with the following
equation:
Fa x H(leq ) - H 0
t = τ x Ln (
Fa x H(Ieq ) - 100% ) P533CDA

where:
• is the thermal time constant for the protected equipment.
◦ When the motor is in starting state, the time constant for motor starting is
used;
◦ When the motor is in running state, the heating time constant is used;
◦ When motor is in stopped state, the cooling time constant is used.
• Ln( ) is natural logarithm function.
• Fa is the ongoing temperature compensation. In current based setting mode,
Fa = 1.
• H(Ieq) is the thermal level calculated with the continuous load current and the
basic current setting (see Motor is stopped).
• H0 is the current thermal state corresponding to the last calculation.
In the same way, for a continuous current higher than the current threshold (k x Ib),
the time for the alarm to operate is:
Fa x H(leq ) - H 0
t = τ x Ln ( )
Fa x H(leq ) - H alarm P533CEA

where:
Halarm is "Alarm", the alarm threshold setting in %. In temperature based setting
mode, the threshold alarm threshold is expressed in ℃ with "Talm" setting. The
corresponding thermal level in % (Halarm) is defined by the following equation:
Talm - T a
H alarm = x 100%
Tmax - T a P533CFA

Time left for motor start

The thermal level of last motor start state need firstly be calculated through
following equation:

( KI x I ) x t start
2
H start = Fa x start
τstart
b P533Q1A

where:
• Fa is ambient temperature factor calculated by:
Tmax - Tnom
Fa =
Tmax - Ta P533Q4A

If it is current only mode, then Fa = 1.

• Istart is the start current detected during last motor start.
• Ib is the continuous rated level (setting).
• K is the factor (setting) applied to the basic current to define the maximum
continuous current.
• tstart is the time duration of motor starting state.
• start is the thermal time constant for motor starting.
When the thermal level H(t) is above (100% - Hstart), time left for motor start is
defined with the following equation:

t = τcooling x Ln ( H (t)
100% - H start ) P533Q2A

256 P5/EN M/33C

Protection functions Protection Relay

where:
• H(t) is the thermal level calculated at the moment.
• cooling is the cooling time constant when motor is stopped.

Block diagram

Figure 205 - Block diagram of thermal overload protection function (ANSI 49M)

Block Blocked

Register
& event
> 100% &
Current based mode Trip
Calculation ≥1
I2
%
Therm Register
level & event
add > 100%
IL1 RMS
& Blk Motor start
IL2 RMS %
MAX Motor str
IL3 RMS level
>
Heating H(t)
init
& AlmThm
Mot. Start H(t)
init ≥1
MThLevRst > & Register
event

Temperature based ºC
mode calculation
>

& RsvAlm
< & Register
RTD #8 event

Motor TC1 active

& Register
event

Motor TC2 active

& Register
event

< TmpAlm
& Register
event

> TmpAlm
& Register
event

T° mode Ib τ1 τ2 τ3 T° nominal Alarm% T° max T° alm Reserve

value
T° min Enable
events P533CGA

P5/EN M/33C 257

Protection Relay Protection functions

Characteristics
Table 56 - Settings and characteristics of the thermal overload protection
stage 49M>

Settings/characteristics Values
(description/label)

Basic current setting/Ib

Setting range 0.1In - 4.0In

Resolution 0.01In
Factor k
Setting range 0.1 - 1.5

Resolution 0.01
Heating time constant/Time constant τ 1

Setting range 1.0 min - 1000.0 min

Resolution 0.1 min

Time constant for motor starting /Time constant τ 2

Setting range 1.0 min - 1000.0 min

Resolution 0.1 min

Cooling time constant/Time constant τ 3

Setting range 1.0 min - 1000.0 min

Resolution 0.1 min

Unbalance factor/Factor q

Setting range 0 - 10

Resolution 0.1
Thermal alarm value/Alarm
Setting range 50% - 100%

Resolution 1%

Reserve time thermal alarm/Reserve value

Setting range 1.0 min - 1000.0 min

Resolution 0.1 min

Temperature based mode/T°mode

Options Current; Ambient

Nominal ambient temp/T° nominal

Setting range -40 ℃ - +300 ℃ (-40 ℉ - +572 ℉)

Resolution 1 ℃ (1.8 ℉)

Max object temperature/T°max

Setting range -40 ℃ - +300 ℃ (-40 ℉- +572 ℉)

Resolution 1 ℃ (1.8 ℉)

Alarm temperature/T° alm

Setting range 0 - +300 ℃ (32 ℉ - +572 ℉)

Resolution 1 ℃ (1.8 ℉)

258 P5/EN M/33C

Protection functions Protection Relay

Table 56 - Settings and characteristics of the thermal overload protection

stage 49M> (Continued)

Settings/characteristics Values
(description/label)

Min ambient temperature/T° min

Setting range -40 ℃ - 300 ℃ (-40 ℉- +572 ℉)

Resolution 1 ℃ (1.8 ℉)

Default ambient temperature/T° ambient by default

Setting range -40 ℃ - 300 ℃ (-40 ℉ - +572 ℉)

Resolution 1 ℃ (1.8 ℉)

Characteristics
Tripping time accuracy ±5% or ±500 ms (with the applicable factor
according to IEC 60255-149)

Setting group

Number 4

NOTE: To test the thermal overload protection more easily and faster, it is
possible to set a Thermal level init. value and a motor start level init. value
from 0% to 90%. After test, it is possible to reset the values to 0%.

P5/EN M/33C 259

Protection Relay Protection functions

Locked rotor (ANSI 51LR)

Description
For some applications where the stall withstand time is less than the motor start
time, the start time supervision protection function (ANSI code 48) can not provide
a quick protection against motor over-heating when the rotor is locked during the
motor start. The locked rotor protection function (ANSI code 51LR) stage Ilr>
measures the fundamental frequency component of the phase currents and
calculates the maximum of the measured three phase currents.
The locked rotor stage protects the motor when too heavy load or a mechanical
failure of the motor causes rotor jam during the motor running condition.
The stage's start setting is relative to the motor's nominal starting current. The
nominal starting current can be configured in the Motor status view of the
Protection menu in eSetup Easergy Pro.
The locked rotor stage can be configured for definite time or inverse time
operation characteristic. Equation 7.8 defines the dependent operate time.

2
I 
T =  motNomSt  Tstart
 I  P533FNA Equation 7.8

T = Dependent operate time

ImotNomSt = Nominal motor start current
I = Maximum of measured phase currents during fault
Tstart = Operation delay
When the calculated maximum phase current IL exceeds the defined start setting,
the locked rotor protection stage starts operation delay calculation. When the
calculated delay exceeds the operation delay in DT or INV delay mode, the
protection operates.
The stage releases when the maximum phase current IL drops below the start
setting.
The stage operation is automatically blocked when the motor status is “starting”.

Block diagram
Figure 206 - Block diagram of the locked rotor protection stage Ilr>

IL1

IL2 MAX > & & Start

IL3
& Register
event
Motor status t
= Running
Block Trip
≥1

& Register
event

ImotNomst Ilr Motor t> Definite/ Inv Enable

starting inverse events
time P533FOA

260 P5/EN M/33C

Protection functions Protection Relay

Characteristics
Table 57 - Settings and characteristics of the locked rotor protection stage
Ilr>

Settings/characteristics Values
(description/label)

Pick-up value/Ilr>

Setting range 10 – 100% ImotNomSt

Resolution 0.1%

Accuracy ±3%

Reset ratio 97% ± 2%

Delay type/DelayType

Options DT (definite time); INV (inverse time)

Operation delay/t>

Setting range 1 s – 300 s

Resolution 0.1 s
Accuracy ±1% or ±20 ms (DT)
±5% or ±20 ms (INV)

Characteristic times
Start time < 60 ms/55 ms at 2xIlr 33
< 70 ms/65 ms maximum 33
Disengaging time < 85 ms/100 ms 33

Setting group

Number 1

33. The 2nd value is only for high speed high break digital outputs.

P5/EN M/33C 261

Protection Relay Protection functions

Motor restart inhibition (ANSI 66)

Description
Any motor has a restriction on the number of starts within a defined period to avoid
the over temperature of the motor, mainly inside the rotor. A settable time interval
between two consecutive starts is also necessary to allow the motor to cool down
following the previous start. The motor restart inhibition function (ANSI code 66)
includes two elements “number of starts limitation” and “minimum time between
starts”.
To enable the motor restart inhibition function (ANSI code 66), as well as other
protection functions (ANSI 48, ANSI 49M, ANSI 51LR), which are all related with
motor, the “Motor status” detection function shall be enabled. Since the motor
restart inhibition function uses the “Thermal Level” input to differentiate between
motor cold start and hot start, the motor thermal overload protection (ANSI 49M)
must also be enabled.

Number of starts limitation

Depending on the initial motor thermal level, there are two types of motor start.
• Cold start
The initial thermal state is not greater than setting “Hot status limit”.
• Hot start
The initial thermal state is greater than setting “Hot status limit”.
Once the motor start is detected (refer to Motor status section for details), the
Easergy P5 protection relay initiates a monitor timer defined by the setting
“Reference period”, and the cold start counter or hot start counter is incremented
by one. Each motor start has one corresponding monitor timer. When the monitor
timer expires, the motor start related with that monitor timer will be removed from
the cold or hot start counter (decremented by one). When the motor is stopped,
the Easergy P5 protection relay will compare the cold and hot start counters with
the settings “Max NB motor cold starts” and “Max NB motor hot starts”,
respectively. If either of these two counters reaches the related setting, the motor
restart is inhibited (“N> motor start inhibition” = True) until the concerned monitor
timer expires and the cold or hot start counter is below the setting.
Example:
The maximum number of motor cold starts is 2 and maximum number of motor hot
starts is 1. Two cold starts are detected. When the 2nd motor stop is detected, the
cold start counter reaches the setting. So, motor restart is inhibited until the first
monitor timer expires.

262 P5/EN M/33C

Protection functions Protection Relay

Figure 207 - Motor restart inhibition example 1

Motor start

ON

OFF
Time
Start Inhibition Reference period = 60 min

Reference period = 60 min

ON

OFF

tn = 8 min Time

Reference period - tn = 60 - 8 = 52 min

P533F9A

Minimum time between starts

Once the motor start is detected (refer to Motor status section for details), the
Easergy P5 protection relay initiates another monitor timer defined by setting “Min
time between motor starts”. When the motor is stopped (CB is open or current is
less than 5%In depending on the motor start detection mode), and the monitor
timer of the last motor start has not expired, the Easergy P5 will also inhibit the
restart until the monitor timer expires.

Figure 208 - Motor restart inhibition example 2

Motor start

ON

OFF

Time
Start Inhibition
Min time between motor starts

ON

OFF

Time
P533FAA

So, the motor restart inhibition function is active if any one of the following
conditions is satisfied:
• Blocking due to number of starts limitation
• Blocking due to minimum time between 2 starts

P5/EN M/33C 263

Protection Relay Protection functions

Motor connection example

Motor restart inhibition application example, page 264 shows an application for
preventing too frequent motor starts using the N> stage. The close coil wire has
been connected through the normally closed (NC) contact of the signal relay ,
which is controlled with the N> start inhibit signal. Whenever the N> motor start
inhibit signal becomes active, it prevents the circuit breaker from closing.

Figure 209 - Motor restart inhibition application example

+ +
− −
STOP Open Close START
Coil Coil

M
+

Output matrix

DO1 DOx

I> start
I> trip

N> alarm
N> motor start inhibit

P533FBA

Block diagram
Figure 210 - Block diagram of the motor restart inhibition function (ANSI 66)

Min. time between

motor starts

Motor
starting & Count num. during
reference period ≥

≥1 N> motor
start inhibition

& Count num. during ≥ & Register

Motor > reference period event
thermal level
Hot motor status

≥ Hot starts/t -1

≥1 Alarm

≥ Cold starts/t -1 & Register

event

Hot limit Interval T reference Max motor Max motor Enable

hot starts cold starts events P533FCA

264 P5/EN M/33C

Protection functions Protection Relay

Characteristics
Table 58 - Settings and characteristics of the motor restart inhibition
function (ANSI 66)

Settings/characteristics Values
(description/label)

Reference period/T reference

Setting range 10.0 - 120.0 min

Resolution 0.1 min

Hot status limit/Hot limit
Setting range 0 - 100.0%

Resolution 0.1%
Max motor hot starts
Setting range 1 - 20

Resolution 1
Max motor cold starts
Setting range 1 – 20

Resolution 1
Min time between motor starts/Interval
Setting range 0.0 min - 100.0 min

Resolution 0.1 min

Def. elap. time from motor start/Time by default

Options 0 min; 120 min

Setting groups

Number 1

P5/EN M/33C 265

Protection Relay Protection functions

Motor overspeed (ANSI 12)

Description
Based on the direct measurement of motor speed, the motor overspeed protection
function (ANSI code 12) detects racing when the motor is driven by the load, or a
loss of synchronization for synchronous motors, or for process monitoring.
Motor overspeed protection is only available when motor speed detection function
is Enabled.
The Easergy P5 protection relay provides two stages of motor overspeed
protection. Whenever the motor speed reaches the pick-up value of a particular
stage, this stage starts and a start signal is issued. If the fault remains active
longer than the operating delay setting, a trip signal is issued.
If there is no 12I4O module fitted in the relay, the motor overspeed protection will
be invisible.

Block diagram
Figure 211 - Block diagram of the motor overspeed stages Motor speed> and
Motor speed>>

Motor speed
& Start
Block
Register
& event

Trip

& Register
event

Motor speed> t> Enable

events P533FDA

266 P5/EN M/33C

Protection functions Protection Relay

Characteristics
Table 59 - Settings and characteristics of the motor overspeed protection
function (ANSI 12)

Settings/characteristics Values Values

(description/label) (stage Motor speed>) (stage Motor speed>>)

Pick-up value/Motor speed>, Motor speed>>

Setting range 100%Ωn - 160%Ωn

Resolution 1%Ωn

Accuracy ±2%*Pick-up value

Reset ratio 95% ± 2%

Time delay/t>, t>>

Setting range 1 s - 300 s

Resolution 1s
Accuracy ±1% or ±25 ms

Characteristic times
Start time < 250 ms + 2*(60000 ms/(Ω*R))

Disengaging time < 250 ms + 2*(60000 ms/(Ω*R))

Setting group

Number 1

P5/EN M/33C 267

Protection Relay Protection functions

Motor underspeed (ANSI 14)

Description
Based on the direct measurement of motor speed, the motor underspeed
protection function (ANSI code 14) detects the slow-downs of motor speed after
motor starting, possibly resulting from the mechanical overloads or locked rotor.
Motor speed protection is only available when motor speed detection function is
Enabled.
The motor underspeed protection is active after the motor speed has successful
achieved the speed pick-up value. As shown in figure below, the underspeed
protection function picks up if the speed measured drops below the speed pick-up
value after having first exceeded the set point by 5%. The underspeed protection
is blocked when the motor speed drops below 5% of Ωn rated motor speed to
avoid unwanted tripping when the motor is switched off. If the underspeed
protection starts longer than the operating delay setting, a trip signal is issued.
If there is no 12I4O module fitted in the relay, the motor underspeed protection will
be invisible.

Figure 212 - Motor underspeed start and trip conditions

1.05 Pick-up value

Pick-up value

0.05Ωn

Start

t
Trip

P533FEA

The Easergy P5 protection relay provides two stages of motor underspeed

protection.

Block diagram
Figure 213 - Block diagram of the motor underspeed stages Motor speed<
and Motor speed<<

Motor speed >1.05Pick-up value s

Q
R & Start

Register
& event
<

Trip

<0.05Ωn
≥1
Block
& Register
event

Motor speed< t Enable

events P533FFA

268 P5/EN M/33C

Protection functions Protection Relay

Characteristics
Table 60 - Settings and characteristics of the motor underspeed protection
function (ANSI 14)

Settings/characteristics Values Values

(description/label) (stage Motor speed<) (stage Motor speed<<)

Pick-up value/Motor speed<, Motor speed<<

Setting range 10%Ωn - 100%Ωn

Resolution 1%Ωn

Accuracy ±2%*Pick-up value

Reset ratio 105% ± 2%

Low motor speed self-blocking

Value 5%Ωn, fixed

Accuracy ±2%*(5%Ωn)

Time delay/t<, t<<

Setting range 1 s - 300 s

Resolution 1s
Accuracy ±1% or ±25 ms

Characteristic times
Start time < 250 ms + 2*(60000 ms/(Ω*R))

Disengaging time < 250 ms + 2*(60000 ms/(Ω*R))

Setting group

Number 1

P5/EN M/33C 269

Protection Relay Protection functions

Motor Anti-backspin (ABS) protection

Description
For a motor with high inertia, once the CB/Contactor supplying power to the motor
is switched off, the rotor may continue to turn for a considerable length of time. In
that case, the motor terminal voltage is out of phase and the motor re-starting
operation may result in serious damage. In some other applications for example
when a motor is on a down-hole pump, after the motor stops, the liquid may fall
back down the pipe and spin the rotor backwards. It would be very undesirable to
start the motor at this time. In these circumstances the motor anti-backspin
function is used to detect when the rotor has completely stopped, to allow
restarting of the motor.
Three criteria can be used to detect whether rotor has completely stopped.
• Speed measured mode
“Zero Speed” signal from motor speed detection function is ON. If there is no
12I4O module fitted in the relay, the speed measured mode will be invisible.
• External zero speed mode
“Zero Speed DI” digital input is ON when a rotation detection sensor is
available.
• Motor status
Motor “Stopped” input from motor status function is ON and the delay timer
expired.
When the “Zero Speed” input and the “Zero Speed DI” digital input are not
available or disabled, this protection function simply provide a “Restart Delay”
feature after the motor is stopped.
Only when “Motor Status” function is Enabled, “Motor Anti-backspin” protection
can be activated. The output signal “AntiBkSpin Alarm” is ON when the motor
status turns to be “Stopped” and the internal signal “ABSAllowRestart” is not
satisfied. The “ABSAllowRestart” signal indicates if the rotor has completely
stopped. The timer “Time to restart” is based on the setting “ABS Time” to indicate
the left time before the motor restart is allowed. If the zero speed is detected, the
timer “Time to restart” will be reset and the motor restart is allowed immediately.

Block diagram
Figure 214 - Block diagram of Motor Anti-backspin (ABS)

Zero Speed
ABSAllowRestart
&
Speed
measured mode

Zero Speed DI
AntiBkSpin
& ≥1 & Alarm
Ex. zero
speed mode
& Register
event
Motor Status
Stopped

Time to restart

ABS time Enable

events P533FGA

270 P5/EN M/33C

Protection functions Protection Relay

Characteristics
Table 61 - Settings and characteristics of Motor Anti-backspin (ABS)
protection

Settings/characteristics Values
(description/label)

Measured zero speed mode/Speed measured mode

Options Enable; disable

Zero speed external mode/Ex. zero speed mode

Options Enable; disable

Zero speed input DI/Zero speed DI

Options Selection of one digital input (DIx)

Anti-backspin time/ABS time

Setting range 1 s - 7200 s

Resolution 1s
Accuracy ±1% or ±25 ms

Setting group

Number 1

P5/EN M/33C 271

Protection Relay Protection functions

Inrush blocking
Description
Second harmonic inrush blocking detects high inrush current flows that occur
when transformers or machines are connected and helps to prevent tripping for
this normal occurrence.
In the Easergy P5 protection relay, the inrush detection function can block the
following protection functions.
• Phase overcurrent (with or without directional element)
• Standard earth/ground fault overcurrent (without directional element)
• Very sensitive earth/ground fault overcurrent (without directional element)
When the corresponding inrush blocking is enabled in the setting group and the
inrush blocking signal is detected.
During transformer inrush conditions, the second harmonic level may not be the
same for all phases. So Easergy P5 protection relay calculates the ratio between
the second harmonic component and the fundamental frequency component for
each phase. When the ratio of the second harmonic component of any phase is
higher than the ratio setting, the inrush blocking signal is detected.
To avoid mis-operation, the inrush detection is only active when the phase current
is greater than 10%In. Otherwise, the output of the inrush detection is reset. For
additional protection a maximum threshold current is settable. Currents above this
threshold will bypass any inrush blocking. The threshold is set based on the
transformer reactance. This reactance will limit any inrush current , therefore
currents greater than this are treated as short circuits.
The inrush blocking signal requires the presence of second harmonic current for 1
period (20 ms at 50 Hz). Similarly the reset of this condition requires the absence
of second harmonic component for 30 ms.
This difference in time provides hysteresis to the inrush blocking and avoids the
signal oscillating during low harmonic conditions such as occur towards the end of
an inrush condition.
The other protection functions which need the inrush blocking function can be
configured in the block matrix via eSetup Easergy Pro.

Block diagram
Figure 215 - Block diagram of inrush blocking

IL1 H2 20ms 30ms

>IL1 H2 / IL1 &
IL1
>0.1In
&

<

Inrush
IL2H2 20ms 30ms
detection
>IL2H2 / IL2 &
IL2
& Register
>0.1In
& ≥1 event
<

IL3H2 20ms 30ms

>IL3H2 / IL3 &
IL3
>0.1In
&
<

Pick-up value Max inrush I Enable

events P533FHA

272 P5/EN M/33C

Protection functions Protection Relay

Characteristics
Table 62 - Settings and characteristics of the inrush blocking function

Settings/characteristics Values
(description/label)

Pick-up value/Pickup H2

Setting range 10% - 35%

Resolution 1%

Accuracy ±1%

Hysteresis 1%

Max inrush current/CurBlkVal

Setting range 1.00In - 20.00In

Resolution 0.01In
Accuracy ±3% or ±0.005In

Characteristic times
Start time < 40 ms
Setting group

Number 1

P5/EN M/33C 273

Protection Relay Protection functions

Switch On To Fault (ANSI 50HS)

Description
The switch-on-to-fault (SOTF) protection function (ANSI code 50HS) offers
protection when the circuit breaker (CB) is closed against a faulty line. In this case
a fast trip is required when a fault is present. Overcurrent-based protection does
not clear the fault until the intended time delay has elapsed. SOTF gives a trip
signal without additional time delay if the CB is closed and a fault is detected after
closing the CB.
Some faults may be caused by conditions not removed from the feeder after a
reclosing cycle or a manual close, or due to earthing/grounding clamps left on
after maintenance work.
The manual closing order from the circuit breaker may be initiated from one of
several sources:
• Local close switch via digital inputs
• CB close command from local panel or eSetup Easergy Pro
• Remote communication

Operation
Switch-on-to-fault function operates within the SOTF active operation time, page
274 and Switch-on-to-fault function does not operate after the SOTF active
operation time elapses, page 275 illustrate the operation of the SOTF function:
1. Switch-onto-fault does not activate if the CB has not been in open position
before the fault. Open CB detection is noticed from the highest phase current
value which has to be under a fixed low-limit threshold (0.02 x In). Opening of
the CB can be detected also with digital inputs (Dead line detection input =
DI1 – DIx, Fx, VI1 – VIx). The default detection input is based on the current
threshold, so the dead line detection input parameter has value “–“.
2. Dead line detection delay defines how long the CB has to be open so that the
SOTF function is active. If the set operation time is not fulfilled and the highest
phase current value (maximum of IL1, IL2, IL3) rises over the start setting, the
SOTF does not operate.
3. If the highest phase current value of IL1, IL2, IL3 goes successfully under the
low limit and rises to a value between the low limit and the start value, then if
the highest phase current value rises over the start setting value before the
SOTF active operation time expires, the SOTF trips. If this SOTF active
operation time is exceeded, the SOTF does not trip even if the start setting
value is exceeded.

Figure 216 - Switch-on-to-fault function operates within the SOTF active

operation time
1

Start setting

Max. of IL1, IL2, IL3 3

Low limit 0.02 x IN

2

Dead
delay
SOTF active timer

SOTF trip
P533FIA

274 P5/EN M/33C

Protection functions Protection Relay

Figure 217 - Switch-on-to-fault function does not operate after the SOTF
active operation time elapses
1

Start setting

Max. of IL1, IL2, IL3 3

Low limit 0.02 x IN

2

Dead
delay
SOTF active timer

SOTF trip
P533FJA

Block diagram
Figure 218 - Block diagram of the Switch On To Fault protection function
(ANSI 50HS)

0 T

IL1 & Operate

0 T
IL2 MAX 0.02In< OR
IL3

> & Register

event

Dead line
input

SOTF Act time Dead delay Enable events

P533FKA

P5/EN M/33C 275

Protection Relay Protection functions

Characteristics
Table 63 - Settings and characteristics of the switch-on-to-fault protection
function (ANSI 50HS)

Settings/characteristics Values
(description/label)

Pick-up value/SOTF

Setting range 1.00In - 40.00In

Resolution 0.01In
Accuracy ±3%

Reset ratio 97% ±1%

Dead line detection delay/Dead delay

Setting range 0.00 s - 60.00 s

Resolution 0.01 s
SOTF active after CB closure/Act time
Setting range 0.10 s - 60.00 s

Resolution 0.01 s
Dead line detection input

Options Selection of one digital input (DI), one virtual

input (VI), or one function key

Characteristic times
Start time < 30 ms/25 ms when I/Iset < 1.5 34
< 40 ms/35 ms maximum 34
Disengaging time < 60 ms/75 ms 34

Setting group

Number 1

34. The 2nd value is only for high speed high break digital outputs.

276 P5/EN M/33C

Protection functions Protection Relay

Phase overcurrent (ANSI 50/51)

Description
The phase overcurrent protection function (ANSI code 50/51) is used against
short circuit faults and heavy overloads.
The overcurrent function measures the fundamental frequency component of the
phase currents. The protection is sensitive to the highest of the three phase
currents. Whenever this value exceeds the user's start setting of a particular
stage, this stage starts and a start signal is issued. If the fault situation remains on
longer than the operation delay setting, a trip signal is issued.

SOL, CLP and Inrush impact on overcurrent protections

Cold Load Pickup (CLP), Selective Overcurrent Logic (SOL) and inrush detection
can improve the behaviour of the protection function in terms of stability or
sensitivity.

Three independent stages

There are three separately adjustable overcurrent stages: I>, I>> and I>>>. The
stages I> and I>> can be configured for definite time (DT) or dependent operate
time (IDMT) characteristic (refer to Standard dependent operation delay, page
183). The stage I>>> has definite time operation characteristic. By using the
definite delay type and setting the delay to its minimum, an instantaneous (ANSI
50) operation is obtained.
Block diagram of the three-phase overcurrent stages I> and I>>, page 277 shows
a functional block diagram of the overcurrent stages I> and I>> with definite time
and dependent time operate time. Block diagram of the three-phase overcurrent
stage I>>>, page 278 shows a functional block diagram of the overcurrent stage
I>>> with definite time operation delay.

Block diagram
Figure 219 - Block diagram of the three-phase overcurrent stages I> and I>>

IL1
IL2 MAX
& Start
IL3

Register
& event
Block

Trip

& Register
InrushStat event
&

SOLStat & Select Select

setting setting

& Select
CLPStat & setting

Enable Inrush I> Enable events

Enable SOL CLPI> SOLk> / SOLk>>
Enable CLP t> / t>> CLPk> CLPk>>
CLPt> / CLPt>> k> / k>>
SOLt> / SOLt>> IDMT characteristics
DT / IDMT
( * ) Reset time P533FLA

NOTE:
The Reset time setting in the above figure only applies to the protection stage
I>.

P5/EN M/33C 277

Protection Relay Protection functions

Figure 220 - Block diagram of the three-phase overcurrent stage I>>>

IL1
IL2 MAX
& Start
IL3

Register
& event
Block
InrushStat Trip
&

& Register
SOLStat event
& Select setting

Select setting
CLPStat &
&

Enable Inrush I>>> SOLt>>> Enable events

Enable SOL CLPI>>> CLPt>>>
Enable CLP t>>> P533FMA

Characteristics
Table 64 - Setting and characteristics of the phase overcurrent protection
(ANSI 50/51)

Setting/ Values Values Values

characteristics (stage I>) (stage I>>) (stage I>>>)
(description/label)

Pick-up value

Setting range 0.05In - 20In (DT) 0.1In - 20In (DT) 0.1In - 40In
0.05In - 5In (IDMT) 0.1In - 5In (IDMT)

Resolution 0.01In
Accuracy ±3% or ± 0.005In

Reset ratio 95% ± 2%

Transient overreach < 10% with X/R up to 120

Operation delay/t> (DT)

Setting range 0.03 s - 300.00 s

Resolution 0.01 s
Accuracy ±1% or ± 20 ms

Operation delay/t> (IDMT) -

Delay curve family/ DT, IEC, IEEE, IEEE2, Others, Programmable -

Curve (Prg)

Delay type/Type IEC: NI, VI, EI, LTI, STI -

IEEE: VI, EI, LTI, LTEI, LTVI, MI, STI, STEI,
CO8
IEEE2: NI, VI, EI, MI
Others: RI, RXIDG

Inv. time coefficient/k> 0.05 to 20.0 for DT, IEC and RI -

0.50 to 20.0 for RXIDG, IEEE and IEEE2

Accuracy ±5% or ± 20 ms -

Reset type

Options DT; IDMT -

Reset time/Reset time -

Setting range 0.03 s - 100 s -

Resolution 0.01 s -

278 P5/EN M/33C

Protection functions Protection Relay

Table 64 - Setting and characteristics of the phase overcurrent protection

(ANSI 50/51) (Continued)

Setting/ Values Values Values

characteristics (stage I>) (stage I>>) (stage I>>>)
(description/label)

Accuracy ±1% or ± 20 ms -

Inrush status for I>.../Inrush

Options Enable; Disable

SOL use by I>.../SOL

Options Enable; Disable

SOL operation delay/SOLt>

Setting range 0.03 s - 300 s

Resolution 0.01 s
SOL Inv. time 0.05 to 20.0 for DT, IEC and RI -
coefficient 0.50 to 20.0 for RXIDG, IEEE and IEEE2
K/SOLK>
Accuracy ±1% or ±20 ms, definite time ±1% or ±20 ms
±5% or ±20 ms, IDMT time

CLP status for I>.../CLP

Options Enable; Disable

CLP Pick-up value/CLPI>

Setting range 0.05In - 20In (DT) 0.1In - 20In (DT) 0.1In - 20In
0.05In - 5In (IDMT) 0.1In - 5In (IDMT)

Resolution 0.01In
Accuracy ±3% or ± 0.005In

CLP operation delay/CLPt>

Setting range 0.03 s - 300 s

Resolution 0.01 s
CLP Inv. time 0.05 - 20.0 for DT, IEC and RI; -
coefficient 0.50 - 20.0 for RXIDG, IEEE and IEEE2
K/CLPK>
Accuracy ±1% or ±20 ms, definite time ±1% or ±20 ms
±5% or ±20 ms, IDMT time

Include harmonics/IncHarm35
Options Enable (for the use of rms current values);
Disable (for the use of fundamental current values);

Characteristic times
Start time < 35 ms/30 ms < 30 ms/25 ms < 25 ms/20 ms
at 2 x I> 36 at 2 x I>> 36 at 2 x I>>> 36
< 40 ms < 40 ms < 35 ms/30 ms
at 1.2 x I> at 1.2 x I>> at 1.2 x I>>> 36
Disengaging time < 55 ms/70 ms 36

Overshoot time < 40 ms

Setting group

Number 4

35. common settings for setting group 1, 2, 3, 4

36. The 2nd value is only for high speed high break digital outputs.

P5/EN M/33C 279

Protection Relay Protection functions

Arc-flash (ANSI 50ARC)

DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION, OR ARC FLASH
Information on this product is offered as a tool for conducting arc flash hazard
analysis. It is intended for use only by qualified persons who are knowledgeable
about power system studies, power distribution equipment, and equipment
installation practices. It is not intended as a substitute for the engineering
judgement and adequate review necessary for such activities.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

Description
The arc-flash protection function (ANSI code 50ARC) is a high speed protection
function able to detect arcing events on busbar in a few millisecond, to minimise
equipment damages.
The arc-flash protection contains 8 arc stages that can be used to trip for example
the circuit breakers. Arc stages are activated with overcurrent and light signals (or
light signals alone). The allocation of light and/or different current signals to arc
stages is defined in arc-flash protection matrices: current, light and output matrix.
The matrices are programmed via the dedicated arc-flash matrix menus. Available
matrix signals depend on the order code (see Order information, page 486).
Available signal inputs for arc-flash protection depend on the Easergy P5
protection relay's configuration with 3 or 6 light inputs.
With 3 to 6 arc-flash input options, the Easergy P5 x30 protection relay allows to
build a multi-zone arc-flash protection system.
Information like arc detection or current detection can be exchanged across the
system using two communication ways:
• GOOSE messages using the IEC 61850 protocol (preferred solution)
• Virtual outputs and outputs

280 P5/EN M/33C

Protection functions Protection Relay

Figure 221 - Application example of the arc-flash protection function

ZONE 1

=Arc sensor

Device 3
ZONE 2

ZONE 3

ZONE 4.1 ZONE 4.2

T T

Device 1 Device 2

P533E0A

In this application example, the arc-flash sensor for zone 4.1 is connected to
Device 1. If the arc-flash sensor detects the fault and simultaneously Device 3
sends a current signal, the zone 4.1 is isolated by the outgoing feeder breaker.
The arc-flash sensor for zone 4.2 is connected to the Device 2 and operates the
same way.
The arc-flash sensors for zone 3 are connected to Device 1, 2 or 3. If a sensor
detects the fault in zone 3, the light-only signal is transferred to Device 3 which
also detects overcurrent and then trips the main circuit breaker.
An eventual arc-flash fault in zone 1 or 2 does not necessarily activate the current
element in Device 2. However, arc detection can be achieved by using the light-
only principle. If an arc-flash occurs in cable termination, zone 1 or zone 2, the
fault is cleared by the upstream circuit breaker.
Each arc-flash protection stage provides:
• One arc detection function, which can be connected either to one of the
available arc sensors (for local detection) or to a digital input or GOOSE
information (for remote detection).
• One current detection function, which can be connected either to phase or
earth/ground fault high-speed overcurrent (for local detection) or to a virtual
input or GOOSE information (for remote detection).
• One trip input to other relays
The trip signal of arc-flash protection is not a part of the global trip. In this
case it is convenient to use Goose which provides a fast signal to the other
relay.
Earth/ground fault current can be only measured and detected, according to the
Easergy P5 protection relay, from:
• 1/5A residual CT input
• CSH residual current input
Each stage of the arc-flash protection can be blocked individually by a control
inputs such as digital input, virtual inputs and function keys.

P5/EN M/33C 281

Protection Relay Protection functions

Block diagram
Figure 222 - Block diagram of the arc-flash protection function

IL1/IL2/IL3 > ≥1

I0 > & Light +

Current

pulse Trip
t
Light

Light & Register

Block & event

I0> int I> int Mode t> Enable Hold time

events P533E1A

Operation
Before configuring the arc flash protection, the arc sensors need to be installed
through eSetup Easergy Pro.
The installation process is as follows:
1. In eSetup Easergy Pro, select ARC protection in the Protection menu.
2. Under Settings, click the Install arc sensors drop-down list and select Install.

3. Wait until the Installation state shows Ready.

The installation of the sensors is now done.
The installed sensors and the sensor status can be viewed at the bottom of the
ARC protection view.
This is an online process only. The installation process is only applicable when
eSetup Easergy Pro is connected to an Easergy P5 protection relay. The offline
configuration does not have this menu visible.
The arc-flash protection is implemented by configuration in the following three
matrices (see Matrix menu in eSetup Easergy Pro):
• Arc matrix - current
• Arc matrix - light
• Arc matrix - output
The event configuration for the protection is done in the Event enabling - ARC
view of the Log menu in eSetup Easergy Pro.
NOTE: When an arc-flash sensor is disconnected, an alarm message is
automatically generated and displayed on the local panel.

282 P5/EN M/33C

Protection functions Protection Relay

Arc matrix – current

In the Arc matrix – current setting view, the available current signals (left column)
are linked to the appropriate arc stages (1–8).

Figure 223 - View of Arc matrix – current

Table 65 - Arc matrix – current parameter group

Item Range Description

I>int. On, Off Phase L1, L2, L3 internal overcurrent signal

I0>int. On, Off Earth/ground fault overcurrent signal

GOOSE NI On, Off Goose network input (IEC 61850)

Virtual output 1 - 20 On, Off Virtual output

Arc stage 1 - 8 On, Off Arc protection stage 1 to 8

Arc matrix – light

In the Arc matrix – light setting view, the available arc light signals (left column)
are linked to the appropriate arc stages (1–8).

P5/EN M/33C 283

Protection Relay Protection functions

Figure 224 - View of Arc matrix – light

Table 66 - Arc matrix – light parameter group

Item Range Description

Arc sensor 1 - 6 On, Off Internal arc-flash sensor 1 to 3 or 1 to 6, according

to the configuration

GOOSE NI On, Off Goose network input

Virtual output 1 - 20 Virtual output

Arc stage 1 - 8 On, Off Arc protection stage 1 to 8

Arc matrix – output

In the Arc matrix – output setting view, the used Arc stages (1 – 8) are connected
to the required outputs. Possible latched function per output is also determined in
this view. The available outputs depend on the order code.

Figure 225 - View of Arc matrix – output

284 P5/EN M/33C

Protection functions Protection Relay

Table 67 - Arc matrix – output parameter group Setting Range

Setting Range Description

Latched On, Off Output latch

Arc stage 1 - 8 On, Off Arc protection stage 1 to 8

Digital ouptut On, Off D01 to D03 (slot B) or D01 to D04 (slots C, D, E)
according to the Easergy P5 configuration

Event enabling matrix

This matrix is used to generate events when the current elements, light signals
from the arc sensors, and the arc stages are activated or drop off.

Characteristics
Table 68 - Setting and characteristics of the arc-flash protection function
(ANSI 50ARC)

Setting/characteristics Values
(description/label)

Stage Mode/Mode

Options Light; Light and I

I>int. pick-up value/I>int

Setting range 0.50In - 8.00In

Resolution 0.01In
Accuracy ±2.5%

I0>int. pick-up value/I0>int.

Setting range 0.10In - 5.00In

Resolution 0.01In
Accuracy ±2.5%

DI to block stage

Options Selection of one digital input (DI), one virtual input (VI), or one
function key (Fx).

Operation delay/Delay

Setting range 0 ms - 255 ms

Accuracy ±1% or 20 ms

Min. hold time (1~8)/Hold time

Setting range 20 ms - 2500 ms

Resolution 1 ms
Accuracy ±1% or 20 ms

Characteristic time
Start time 37
Light only 2 ms minimum 4 ms maximum

Light + I> (L-N fault) at 2xI> 5 ms minimum 11 ms maximum

Light + I> (3L fault) at 2xI> 4 ms minimum 7 ms maximum

Light by Goose + I> (L-N fault) 5 ms minimum 11 ms maximum

Light by Goose + I> (3L fault) 4 ms minimum 10 ms maximum

37. With high speed high break contact relay (Easergy P5x30) only.

P5/EN M/33C 285

Protection Relay Protection functions

Table 68 - Setting and characteristics of the arc-flash protection function

(ANSI 50ARC) (Continued)

Setting/characteristics Values
(description/label)

Light + I> by Goose (L-N fault) 7 ms minimum 16 ms maximum

Light + I> by Goose (3L fault) 5 ms minimum 12 ms maximum

The arc operation delay is intended, with the separate arc stage, for the circuit
breaker failure scheme only.

DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH
Do not use the arc operation delay for primary trip.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

286 P5/EN M/33C

Protection functions Protection Relay

Circuit breaker failure (ANSI 50BF)

Description
If a circuit breaker fails to open, following a tripping order (mainly detected by the
non-extinction of the fault current), the circuit breaker failure protection function
(ANSI code 50BF) sends a tripping order to the upstream or adjacent breakers.
The circuit breaker failure protection has three types of inputs to operate:
• Current protection
• Non-current protection like frequency protections or voltage protections
• External trip
The circuit breaker failure protection incorporates two timers, CB Fail 1 Timer and
CB Fail 2 Timer, allowing configuration for these scenarios:
• Simple CB failure protection, where only CB Fail 1 Timer is enabled. For any
protection trip, the CB Fail 1 Timer is started, and normally reset when the
circuit breaker opens to isolate the fault. If breaker opening is not detected,
CB Fail 1 Timer times out and closes an output contact assigned to breaker
fail (using the output matrix). This contact is used to backtrip upstream
switchgear, generally tripping all infeeds connected to the same busbar
section.
• A re-tripping scheme, plus delayed back-tripping. Here, CB Fail 1 Timer is
used to route a trip to a second trip circuit of the same circuit breaker. This
requires duplicated circuit breaker trip coils, and is known as re-tripping.
Should re-tripping fail to open the circuit breaker, a back-trip may be issued
following an additional time delay. The back-trip uses CB Fail 2 Timer, which
is also started at the instant of the initial protection element trip.
• CB failure protection elements CB Fail 1 Timer and CB Fail 2 Timer can be
configured to operate for trips triggered by protection elements within the
protection relay or via an external protection trip. The latter is achieved by
allocating one of the digital inputs to External Trip selected with the "DI for
external trip signal" parameter.
Resetting of the CB failure protection is possible from a breaker open
indication (from the pole dead logic) or from a protection reset. In these
cases, resetting is only allowed provided the undercurrent elements have also
reset. The resetting options are summarised in this table:

Table 69 - CB fail timer reset mechanisms

Initiation CB fail timer reset

(menu selectable)

Current based protection [IL1<] & [IL2<] & [IL3<] & [I0<] or [I0'<] according to Easergy
P5 model
Non-current based protection Three options are available:
• Current protection reset
• Pole dead
• Reset of the non-current protection

External protection Three options are available.

• Current protection reset only
• Pole dead
• Reset when external trip signal disappears

Pole dead logic

The pole dead logic can be used to give an indication if one or more phases of the
line are dead. A pole dead condition is determined by either monitoring the status
of the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts or by measuring the line currents and
voltages. If a "CB Open" signal is given the protection relay will automatically
initiate a pole dead condition regardless of the current and voltage measurement.

P5/EN M/33C 287

Protection Relay Protection functions

Similarly, if both the line current and voltage fall below a pre-set threshold the
protection relay will also initiate a pole dead condition.
This is necessary so that a pole dead indication is still given even when an
upstream circuit breaker is opened. The under-voltage (U<) and under-current (I<)
thresholds have the following, fixed, pickup and drop-off levels as shown in Pole
dead logic, page 288.
If the VT fails a signal is taken from the VTS logic to block the pole dead
indications that would be generated by the under-voltage and under-current
thresholds. However, the VTS logic will not block the pole dead indications if they
are initiated by a "CB Open" signal. The object for used CB is directly set in the
Objects view of the Control menu in eSetup Easergy Pro.

Figure 226 - Pole dead logic

< 0.05In
IL1 Dropff: 0.055In
&
UL1 < 0.1Un ≥1
Dropff: 0.3Un

< 0.05In
IL2 Dropff: 0.055In All Pole Dead
&
< 0.1Un ≥1 &
UL2 Dropff: 0.3Un

< 0.05In
IL3 Dropff: 0.055In
&
< 0.1Un ≥1
UL3 Dropff: 0.3Un

VTSBlk

CB Pos
(Open) P533E2A

NOTE: For Easergy P5U20, under voltage detection logic is ignored. For
Easergy P5V20, only CB position is used to check pole dead, under current
and under voltage logic are disabled.

Matrix use
To activate the circuit breaker failure function with current protection trip or with
non-current protection trip, it is recommended to connect the relevant signals.
These are the CBF-ITrp signal or CBF-nITrp signal respectively.
The digital input used for the external trip signal is directly set in the breaker failure
function.

288 P5/EN M/33C

Protection functions Protection Relay

Block diagram

Figure 227 - Block diagram of the circuit breaker failure protection function

CBF 2 Trip

Register
IL1, IL2, IL3 < & event
I0 <

Current protection
trip (CB-I-trip) S t 0 S
&
Digital input for ≥1 R R
external reset signal
I0’ trip S
&
I0’ < ≥1 R

≥1 CBF 1 Trip
VL1, VL2, VL3 Pole Dead
≥1
t 0
Detection
CB open & & Register
position event
Non-current S
protection trip &
(CB-N-trip) & R

& ≥1

&
Digital input for
external trip signal S
& &
R
& ≥1

I<
I0< Enable CBF T1> Enable Enable CBF T2> Enable
I0’< timer 1 events timer 2 events
NonCurRstMod = PoleDead ExtRstMod = I<
NonCurRstMod = ProRst ExtRstMod = ProRst
NonCurRstMod = I< ExtRstMod = PoleDead P533E3A

P5/EN M/33C 289

Protection Relay Protection functions

Characteristics
Table 70 - Settings and characteristics of the breaker failure protection
function (ANSI 50BF)

Settings/characteristics Values
(description/label)

I< Currrent Set/I<

Setting range 0.02In - 4.00In

Resolution 0.01In
I0< Current Set/I0<
Setting range 0.05In0 - 4In0 for I0 measured by CSH;
0.02In0 to 4In0 for I0 measured by standard earth/ground fault CT

Resolution 0.001
I0'< Current Set/I0'<
Setting range 0.002In0 to 0.8In0 for very sensitive earth/ground fault

Resolution 0.001
Time1 Operation Delay/T1>

Setting range 0.02 s - 50 s

Resolution 0.01 s
Accuracy ±1% or ±20 ms

Time2 Operation Delay/T2>

Setting range 0.02 s - 50 s

Resolution 0.01 s
Accuracy ±1% or ±20 ms

Noncurrent CBF reset mode

Options I<only; PoleDead; ProtRst

Ext. CBF reset mode

Options I<only; PoleDead; ProtRst

DI for external trip signal

Options Selection of one digital input DI, one virtual input VI, or one
function key

DI for external reset signal

Options Selection of one digital input DI, one virtual input VI, or one
function key

Characteristic times
Reset time 38 < 35 ms for any trip initiate, reset by I<;
< 35 ms for any trip initiate, reset by I0<;
< 50 ms for non-current protection initiate, reset by Pole Dead 39

Setting group

Number 1

38. Does not take into account any contact relay

39. Considering by default, 10 ms of debounce time filter on digital inputs.

290 P5/EN M/33C

Protection functions Protection Relay

Capacitor bank unbalance (ANSI 51C)

Description
The capacitor bank unbalance protection function (ANSI code 51C) detects
unbalance current flowing between the neutral points of a double-star connected
capacitor, filter and reactor bank. The typical connection for capacitor bank
unbalance protection is shown in Typical capacitor bank protection application
with the Easergy P5 protection relay, page 291. The unbalance current is
measured with a dedicated current transformer (Standard earth/ground fault CT,
or CSH core balance CT) between two star-points of the bank.
Under healthy conditions any standing unbalance current caused by small
differences in each side of the banks is limited and it can be compensated as
described in the following section. When there are failures within one capacitor
unit, the unbalance current will increase, depending on the number of failed
capacitor elements.

Figure 228 - Typical capacitor bank protection application with the Easergy
P5 protection relay

Easergy P5

A9
IL1
A10
A11
IL2
A12
A13
IL3
A14

A15
I0 Std
A16

A17
I0 VS
A18

P533E4A

Two stages are available. Stage 1 is based on the earth/ground fault overcurrent
stage I0>>> and stage 2 is based on the earth/ground fault overcurrent stage
I0>>>>. Normally, stage 1 is applied as the trip stage and stage 2 is applied as the
alarm stage. As well as current input I0, the phase current IL1 is used to polarise
the capacitor bank unbalance current for the standing unbalance current
compensation and the faulty phase location.

P5/EN M/33C 291

Protection Relay Protection functions

Compensation method
The unbalance current under normal conditions can be compensated to get better
protection sensitivity. There are two compensation modes, Normal mode and
Location mode. Stage 1 can only select Normal mode. Stage 2 can select Normal
mode or Location mode.

Normal mode
The compensation is performed manually during commissioning. Using eSetup
Easergy Pro (as shown in Get the standing unbalance current via eSetup Easergy
Pro, page 292) or relay HMI, the relay can get the standing unbalance current
vector (here, IL1 is the angle reference) and record the magnitude and angle. For
flexible compensation purpose, the magnitude of the standing unbalance current
to be compensated is user settable under Normal Mode (setting SetBal), while the
angle of the standing unbalance current is not settable, fixed as the recorded
angle during commissioning.

Figure 229 - Get the standing unbalance current via eSetup Easergy Pro

Figure 230 - Capacitor unbalance protection with Normal compensation method

Mag(I 0compensated)
IL1 Compensation value: > Start
&
I0 I0compensate = I0 - I0cmp Angle(I 0 ) - Angle(IL1 ) Register
Recorded & event
I0 angle
I0csh

Trip

> & Register

event
Block

SetBal 1% * In I0>>>> t>>>> Enable

(fixed) events P533E5A

292 P5/EN M/33C

Protection functions Protection Relay

Location mode
As in the Normal mode, the initial standing unbalance current vector (magnitude,
angle referred to IL1) can be recorded during commissioning. The magnitude of the
standing unbalance current to be compensated is not user settable, but the
automatic compensation feature is provided. In Location Mode the branch of each
faulty element can be estimated and thus improve the fault finding and
maintainability of the capacitor bank.
Sensitive Setting
The stage I0>>>> Pick up value should be set based on the calculated unbalance
current change of one faulty element. The calculation can use the following
formula:
UL-N UL-N
-1 -1
(2· π·f·C1) (2·π·f·C2)
3I0 = 3 P533E6A

C1 = Capacitor unit capacitance (μF)

C2 = Capacitor unit capacitance, after one element fails (μF)
The entered setting should be smaller than the calculated value. As a rule of
thumb 90% of the calculated unbalance current under one capacitor element
faulty is recommend as the current setting.
Counter Calculation
If there is an element failure in the bank, the relay checks the phase angle of the
unbalance current (referred to IL1). Based on this angle, the protection relay can
detect the location of the faulty element and increase the corresponding counter
with the calculated faulty elements number. For a double-star connected capacitor
bank, there are a total of six counters to indicate six options for the location of the
faulty element, as shown in How a failure in different branches of the bank affects
the I0 measurement, page 293.
The current setting is based on the unbalance current with one faulty capacitor
element, and setting Max Allowed Faults is provided to specify how many faulty
capacitor elements are allowed without the relay operation. The faulty element
number can be calculated as follows:
N = compensated I0 magnitude / I0 setting

Figure 231 - How a failure in different branches of the bank affects the I0
measurement

Easergy P5 H I

A B G C

F D
E
P533E7A

A Branch 1 F Phase 2 fault in branch 1

B Branch 2 G Phase 1 fault in branch 2

C IL1 as reference H Phase 3 fault in branch 1

D Phase 1 fault in branch 1 I Phase 2 fault in branch 2
E Phase 3 fault in branch 2

P5/EN M/33C 293

Protection Relay Protection functions

Automatic Compensation
The operation time setting for stage I0>>>> specifies how long the relay must wait
until it is certain that there is a faulty element in the bank. After this time has
elapsed, the corresponding counter will contain the number of faults. If none of the
six counters reach the setting Max Allowed Faults, the stage I0>>>> makes a new
compensation automatically, and the compensated unbalance current for this
stage is now zero. The I0>>>> stage will reset and be sensitive to a new faulty
element. Note the counters are not reset by this action and will continue to
accumulate any further faulty elements. As shown in Automatic compensation
under location mode, page 294, the current vector A is the initial recorded
standing unbalance current and the current vector B is the unbalance current with
the faulty capacitor elements. The new compensation current is “vector B – vector
A”. If one of the six counters reach the setting Max Allowed Faults, stage I0>>>>
will operate and the compensation current vector is recovered to the initial
recorded standing unbalance current vector A.
Note, the automatic compensation does not affect the measured unbalance
current of stage I0>>>.

Figure 232 - Automatic compensation under location mode

90
I0

A
180 0

B
270 P533E8A

Figure 233 - Capacitor unbalance protection with Location compensation mode

Mag(I0compensated)
IL1 > Start
I0 - “I0cmp” &
I0 Recorded I0 Register
& event
I0csh
Counter > Trip
calculation

Block Register
& event

I0>>>> t>>>> Faults Enable

events P533E9A

294 P5/EN M/33C

Protection functions Protection Relay

Characteristics
Table 71 - Settings and characteristics of the capacitor bank unbalance
protection stage (ANSI 51C)

Settings/characteristics Values
(description/label)

I0 input/Input

Options I0 , I0Calc

Pick-up setting/I0>>>>

Setting range 0.02In0 to 20In0 for I0 measured with standard EF CT;

0.05In0 to 20In0 for I0 measured with CSH;

Resolution 0.01In
Accuracy ±3% or ±0.002In for I0 measured with standard EF CT;
±3% or ±0.005In for I0 measured with CSH;

Reset ratio 95% ± 3%

Transient overreach < 10% with X/R up to 120

Operation delay/t>>>>

Setting range 0.03 s - 300 s

Resolution 0.01 s
Accuracy ±1% or ±20 ms

Compensation Mode

Options Off; Normal; Location

Compensation Current (only available under Normal Compensation Mode)

Setting range 0.01In0 - 3.0In0

Resolution 0.01In
Max Allowed Faults (only available under Location Compensation Mode)

Setting range 1 - 10

Characteristic times
Start time < 40 ms/35 ms 40
Overshoot time < 40 ms
Disengaging time < 95 ms/110 ms 40

Setting group

Number 4

40. The 2nd value is only for high speed high break digital outputs.

P5/EN M/33C 295

Protection Relay Protection functions

Earth/ground fault overcurrent (ANSI 50N/51N, 50G/51G)

Description
The purpose of the earth/ground fault overcurrent protection function (ANSI code
50N/51N) is to detect earth/ground faults in low-impedance earthed/grounded
networks. In high-impedance earthed/grounded networks, compensated networks
and isolated networks, earth/ground fault overcurrent can be used as backup
protection.
In some applications where the earth/ground fault current may be limited to levels
which can not be detected by standard earth/ground fault protections (ANSI code
50N/51N), the use of the very sensitive earth/ground fault overcurrent protection
(ANSI code 50G/51G) is recommended.
The very sensitive overcurrent protection function can also be used to measure:
• The earth/ground fault current at the neutral point of a transformer
• An additional unbalance current for capacitor bank
The earth/ground fault overcurrent function is sensitive to the fundamental
frequency component of the earth/ground fault overcurrent but not sensitive to the
3rd harmonics. Whenever this fundamental value exceeds the start setting of a
particular stage, this stage starts and a start signal is issued. If the fault situation
remains on longer than the operate time setting, a trip signal is issued.

Operations

Input signal selection

Each stage can be connected to supervise any of the following inputs and signals:
• I0 Input for all networks other than solidly earthed/grounded. According to the
model of the Easergy P5 protection relay, the I0 Input can be 1A/5A standard
earth/ground fault input or CSH input.
• I0Calc calculated signal for solidly and low impedance earthed/grounded
networks.

I0calc = IL1 + IL2+ I L3

P533EAA

Intermittent earth/ground fault detection

Short earth/ground faults make the protection to start but do not cause a trip. A
short fault means one cycle or more. For shorter than 1 ms transient-type of
intermittent earth/ground faults in compensated networks, there is a dedicated
protection function (ANSI 67NI). When starting happens often enough, such
intermittent faults can be cleared using the intermittent time setting.
When a new start happens within the set intermittent time, the operation delay
counter is not cleared between adjacent faults, and finally the stage trips.

SOL, CLP and Inrush impact on earth/ground fault overcurrent

protections
Cold Load Pickup (CLP), Selective Overcurrent Logic (SOL) and inrush detection
can improve the behaviour of the protection function in terms of stability or
sensitivity.

Five or eight independent earth/ground fault overcurrent stages

There are five separately adjustable earth/ground fault overcurrent stages: I0>,
I0>>, I0>>>, I0>>>> and I0>>>>>. The stages I0> and I0>> can be configured for
definite time (DT) or dependent time operation characteristic (IDMT) (refer to

296 P5/EN M/33C

Protection functions Protection Relay

Standard dependent operation delay, page 183). The other stages have definite
time operation characteristic. By using the definite delay type and setting the delay
to its minimum, an instantaneous (ANSI 50N) operation is obtained.
Using the directional earth/ground fault overcurrent stages in undirectional mode,
three more stages with dependent operate time are available for undirectional
earth/ground fault overcurrent protection.
For the very sensitive earth/ground fault overcurrent protection function (ANSI
50G/51G), there are three protection stages: I0’>, I0’>>, I0’>>>.

Setting for faulty phase

Figure 234 - Set faulty phase in eSetup Easergy Pro

Block diagram
Figure 235 - Block diagram of the earth/ground fault overcurrent protection
stages I0>, I0>> and I0’>, I0’>>

I0 / I0’ >
I0calc & Start

Register
& event
Block

Trip

& Register
InrushStat & event

SOLStat & Select Select

setting setting
& Select
CLPStat & setting

Enable Inrush Enable events

Enable SOL k
Enable CLP
CLPk
I0>/I0>>/I0’>/I0’>> SOLk
CLPI0>/CLPI0>>/CLPI0’>/CLPI0’>> IDMT characteristics
t>/t>> DT / IDMT
CLPt>/CLPt>> Reset time *
SOLt>/CLPt>> P533EBA

NOTE:
The Reset time setting in the above figure (with * mark) is only used in the
protection stage I0> or I0’>.

P5/EN M/33C 297

Protection Relay Protection functions

Figure 236 - Block diagram of the earth/ground fault overcurrent protection

stages I0>>>, I0>>>> and I0’>>>

I0 / I0’ >
& Start
I0calc
Register
& event
Block
InrushStat Trip
&

SOLStat & Register

& Select setting event
Select setting
CLPStat &
&

Enable Inrush Enable events

Enable SOL t>>>/t>>>>
Enable CLP SOLt>>>/SOLt>>>>
I0>>>/I0>>>>/I0’>>> CLPt>>>/CLPt>>>>
CLPI0>>>/CLPI0>>>>/CLPI0’>>>
P533ECA

Figure 237 - Block diagram of the earth/ground fault overcurrent protection

stage I0>>>>>

I0 >
& Start

& Register
event
Block

Trip
t

& Register
event

I0>>>>> t>>>>> Enable events

P533EDA

298 P5/EN M/33C

Protection functions Protection Relay

Characteristics
Table 72 - Settings and characteristics of the earth/ground fault overcurrent protection functions (ANSI
50N/51N and ANSI 50G/51G)

Settings/ Values Values Values Values

characteristics (stage I0> and I0’>) (stage I0>> and I0’>>) (stage I0>>>, I0>>>> and (stage I0>>>>>)
(description/label) I0’>>>)

I0 input/Input

Options 41 I0 and Iocalc for ANSI 50N/51N I0 (fixed)

I0' for ANSI 50G/51G
Pick-up value/I0> ... or I0'> ...

Setting range (I0> ...) For delay type DT: 0.02In0 - 10.00In0 for I0 0.05In0 - 10.00In0
0.02In0 - 10.00In0 for I0 measured with standard EF measured with standard
CT; EF CT;
0.05In0 - 10.00In0 for I0 measured with CSH; 0.05In0 - 10.00In0 for I0
0.05In - 20.00In for I0 calculated measured with CSH;
0.05In - 20.00In for I0
For delay type IDMT: calculated
0.02In0 - 5.00In0 for I0 measured with standard EF CT;
0.05In0 - 5.00In0 for I0 measured with CSH;
0.05In - 5.00In for I0 calculated
Setting range (I0'> ...) 0.002In0 - 1.000In0 for I0' measured with very sensitive EF CT -

Resolution 0.001In 0.01In for I0>> to I0>>>>>;

0.001In for I0’>> and I0’>>>
Accuracy ± 2% or ± 0.002In0 for I0 measured with standard EF CT;
± 2% or ± 0.005In0 for I0 measured with CSH;
± 3% or ± 0.005In for I0 calculated;
± 2% or ± 0.0005In0 for I0' measured with very sensitive EF CT.

Reset ratio 95% ± 2%

Transient overreach < 10% with X/R up to 120

Operation delay/t> (DT)

Setting range 0.03 s - 300 s

Resolution 0.01 s
Accuracy ± 1% or ± 20 ms

Operation delay/t> (IDMT) -

Delay curve family/Curve IEC, IEEE, IEEE2, Others, programmable (Prg) -

Delay type/Type IEC: NI, VI, EI, LTI, STI; -

IEEE: VI, EI, LTI, LTEI, LTVI, MI, STI, STEI, CO8;
IEEE2: NI, VI, EI, MI;
Others: RI, RXIDG;

Inv. time coefficient k/k> 0.05 - 20.0 for DT, IEC, RI; -
0.50 - 20.0 for RXIDG, IEEE and IEEE2;

Accuracy ± 5% or ± 20 ms -

Reset type -

Options DT; IDMT -

Reset time -

Setting range 0.03 s - 100 s -

Resolution 0.01 s -

Accuracy ±1% or ±20 ms -

41. I0 (fixed) for P5U20 with LPCT/LPVT for stage I0>>>

P5/EN M/33C 299

Protection Relay Protection functions

Table 72 - Settings and characteristics of the earth/ground fault overcurrent protection functions (ANSI
50N/51N and ANSI 50G/51G) (Continued)

Settings/ Values Values Values Values

characteristics (stage I0> and I0’>) (stage I0>> and I0’>>) (stage I0>>>, I0>>>> and (stage I0>>>>>)
(description/label) I0’>>>)

Inrush status for I0>.../Inrush -

Options Enable; disable -

SOL use for I0>.../SOL -

Options Enable; disable -

SOL operation delay/SOLt> -

Setting range 0.03 s - 300 s -

Resolution 0.01 s -

SOL Inv. time coefficient 0.05 - 20.0 for DT, IEC, RI; -
K/SOLK> 0.50 - 20.0 for RXIDG, IEEE and IEEE2.

Accuracy ±1% or ±20 ms, definite time; -

±5% or ±20 ms, IDMT time

CLPStat for I0>.../CLP -

Options Enable; disable -

CLP Pick-up value/CLPI0> ... -

Setting range For delay type DT: 0.02In0 - 20In0 -

0.02In0 - 10.00In0 for I0 measured with standard EF
CT;
0.05In0 - 10.00In0 for I0 measured with CSH;
0.05In - 20.00In for I0 calculated

For delay type IDMT:

0.02In0 - 5.00In0 for I0 measured with standard EF CT;
0.05In0 - 5.00In0 for I0 measured with CSH;
0.05In - 5.00In for I0 calculated
0.002In0 - 1.000In0 for I0’>, I0’>> and I0’>>> -

Resolution 0.01In0 for I0> to I0>>>> -

0.001In0 for I0’> to I0’>>> -

Accuracy ±2% or ±0.002In0 for I0 measured with standard EF CT;

±2% or ±0.005In0 for I0 measured with CSH;
±3% or ±0.005In for I0 calculated;
±2% or ±0.0005In0 for I0' measured with very sensitive EF CT.

CLP operation delay/CLPt> -

Setting range 0.03 s - 300 s -

Resolution 0.01 s -

CLP Inv. time coefficient 0.05 - 20.0 for IEC and RI; -
K/CLPk> 0.50 - 20.0 for RXIDG, IEEE and IEEE2.

Accuracy ±1% or ±20 ms, definite time; ±1% or ±20 ms -

±5% or ±20 ms, IDMT time.

Network grounding -

Options Res; Cap -

Enable faulty phase detection 42 -

Options Enable; disable -

Phase current change limit 42 -

Setting range 1% - 30% -

Resolution 1% -

42. Common settings for setting group 1, 2, 3, 4 (see “Faulty phase detection during earth/ground fault”).

300 P5/EN M/33C

Protection functions Protection Relay

Table 72 - Settings and characteristics of the earth/ground fault overcurrent protection functions (ANSI
50N/51N and ANSI 50G/51G) (Continued)

Settings/ Values Values Values Values

characteristics (stage I0> and I0’>) (stage I0>> and I0’>>) (stage I0>>>, I0>>>> and (stage I0>>>>>)
(description/label) I0’>>>)

Characteristic times
Start time < 30 ms/25 ms at 2 x I0 pick-up value 43

< 35 ms/30 ms at 1.2 x I0 pick-up value 43

Disengaging time < 65 ms/80 ms 43

Overshoot time < 40 ms

Setting group

Number 4

NOTE: For the earth/ground fault overcurrent stage I0>>>>>, the Selective
Overcurrent Logic (SOL), Cold Load Pickup (CLP), and Inrush detection
features are not provided.

Faulty phase detection during earth/ground fault

Phase recognition
A neutral voltage displacement has been detected.
A faulted phase or phases are detected in the two-stage system.
1. Use delta principle to detect the faulty phase/phases.
2. Configuration of the faulty phase with neutral current angle comparison to the
suspected faulted phase.
For an ideal, grounded network, when there is a forward earth/ground fault in
phase L1, its current increases, creating a calculated or measured zero sequence
current with a phase angle of 0 degrees. If there is a reverse earth/ground fault in
phase L1, its current decreases creating a calculated or measured zero sequence
current with a phase angle of 180 degrees.
When there is a forward earth/ground fault in phase L2, its current increases
creating a calculated or measured zero sequence current with a phase angle of
-120 degrees. If there is a reverse earth/ground fault in phase L2, its current
decreases creating a calculated or measured zero sequence current with a phase
angle of 60 degrees. When there is a forward earth/ground fault in phase L3, its
current increases creating a calculated or measured zero sequence current with a
phase angle of 120 degrees. If there is a reverse earth/ground fault in phase L3 its
current degreases creating a calculated or measured zero sequence current with
a phase angle of -60 degrees.
For a compensated network, the stability of the protection depends on the network
compensation degree. So for compensated networks, this feature can be turned
off to avoid confusion.
For high-impedance earthed/grounded networks, there is a drop-down menu in all
setting groups to choose between RES/CAP. RES is the default and it is for
earthed/grounded networks. When CAP is chosen, the I0 angle is corrected to an
inductive direction of 90 degrees.

Possible outcomes and conditions for those detections

• FWD IL1
Phase L1 increases above the set limit and two other phases remain inside
the set (delta) limit. I0 current angle is +/- 60 degrees from phase L1’s phase
angle.

43. The 2nd value is only for high speed high break digital outputs.

P5/EN M/33C 301

Protection Relay Protection functions

• FDW IL2
Phase L2 increases above the set limit and two other phases remain inside
the set (delta) limit. I0 current angle is +/- 60 degrees from phase L2’s phase
angle.
• FDW IL3
Phase L3 increases above the set limit and two other phases remain inside
the set (delta) limit. I0 current angle is +/- 60 degrees from phase L3’s phase
angle.
• FWD IL1 - IL2
Phase L1 and L2 increase above the set limit and phase L3 remains inside
the set (delta) limit. I0 current angle is between phase L1’s and phase L2’s
phase angles.
• FWD IL2 - IL3
Phase L2 and L3 increase above the set limit and phase L1 remains inside
the set (delta) limit. I0 current angle is between phase L2’s and phase L3’s
phase angles.
• FWD IL3 - IL1
Phase L3 and L1 increase above the set limit and phase L2 remains inside
the set (delta) limit. I0 current angle is between phase L3’s and phase L1’s
phase angles.
• FWD IL1 - IL2 - IL3
All three phase currents increase above the set delta limit.
• REV 1 (any one phase)
One phase decreases below the set delta limit and other two phases remain
inside the delta limit.
• REV 2 (any two phase)
Two phases decrease below the set delta limit and third phase remains inside
the delta limit.
• REV 3 (all three phases)
All three phase currents decrease below the set delta limit.

Different simulated fault scenarios

Figure 238 - Phase L1 forward

Pre-fault Pre-fault Fault Fault

I L3 I L3
I L1
0° 0° 0° 0°
I0
I L2 I L2
I L1 I0
P533EEA

Healthy conditions Healthy conditions Phase L1 e/f Phase L1 e/f

L1, L2, L3, 100A I0, 0A IL1, 384A<-75° I0, 187A<-87°

302 P5/EN M/33C

Protection functions Protection Relay

Figure 239 - Phase L2 forward

Pre-fault Pre-fault Fault Fault

I L3 I L3 I0
IL 2
IL 1
0° 0° 0° 0°
IL 1
I0
IL 2

P533EFA

Healthy conditions Healthy conditions Phase L2 e/f Phase L2 e/f

L1, L2, L3, 100A I0, 0A IL2, 384A<-165° I0, 187A<-153°

Figure 240 - Phase L3 forward

Pre-fault Pre-fault Fault Fault

I L3
I L3 I0
I L1
0° 0° 0° 0°
I L1
I0
I L2 I L2

P533EGA

Healthy conditions Healthy conditions Phase L3 e/f Phase L3 e/f

L1, L2, L3, 100A I0, 0A IL3, 384A<-46° I0, 187A<-33°

Fault recording
When a faulty phase is recognised, it is recorded in the earth/ground fault current
protection fault log (also in the event list and alarm screen). This faulted phase
and direction recording function have a tick box in eSetup Easergy Pro for
enabling/disabling in the protection stage settings.

P5/EN M/33C 303

Protection Relay Protection functions

Overvoltage (ANSI 59)

Description
The overvoltage protection function (ANSI code 59) is used to detect system
voltages that are too high or to check that there is sufficient voltage to authorise a
source transfer.
The overvoltage function measures the fundamental frequency component of the
line-to-line voltages regardless of the voltage measurement mode. By using line-
to-line voltages any phase-to-ground over-voltages during earth/ground faults
have no effect. (The earth/ground fault protection functions take care of earth/
ground faults.) Whenever any of these three line-to-line voltages exceeds the start
setting of a particular stage, this stage starts and a start signal is issued. If the fault
situation remains on longer than the operate time setting, a trip signal is issued.
In solidly earthed/grounded, four-wire networks with loads between phase and
neutral voltages, overvoltage protection may be needed for phase-to-ground
voltages as well. In such applications, the programmable stages can be used.

Reset delay
The U> stage has a settable reset delay that enables the detection of intermittent
faults. This means that the time counter of the protection function does not reset
immediately after the fault is cleared, but resets after the release delay has
elapsed. If the fault appears again before the release delay time has elapsed, the
delay counter continues from the previous value. This means that the function
eventually trips if faults are occurring often enough.

Configurable hysteresis
The dead band is 3% by default. This means that an overvoltage fault is regarded
as a fault until the voltage drops below 97% of the start setting. In a sensitive
alarm application, a smaller hysteresis is needed. For example, if the start setting
is about only 2% above the normal voltage level, the hysteresis must be less than
2%. Otherwise, the stage does not release after fault.

Three independent stages

There are three separately adjustable stages: U>, U>> and U>>>. All the stages
can be configured for the definite time (DT) operation characteristic.

Block diagram
Figure 241 - Block diagram of the three-phase overvoltage stages U>, U>>
and U>>>

U12
U23 MAX
U31
& Start

& Register
event
Blocking

Trip
t

& Register
event

U> Hyster t> Reset Enable

time events P533EHA

304 P5/EN M/33C

Protection functions Protection Relay

Characteristics
Table 73 - Settings and characteristics of the overvoltage protection
function (ANSI 59)

Settings/ Values Values Values

characteristics (stage U>) (stage U>>) (stage U>>>)
(description/label)

Pick-up value/U>, U>>, U>>>

Setting range 50%Un - 150%Un 50%Un - 160%Un

Resolution 1%Un

Accuracy ±3%

Operation delay/t>, t>>, t>>>

Setting range 0.04 s - 300 s 0.03 s - 300 s

Resolution 0.01 s
Accuracy ±1% or ±30 ms ±1% or ±20 ms

Reset time/Reset time 44 -

Setting range 0.03 - 100 s -

Resolution 0.01 s -

Accuracy ±1% or ±20 ms -

Hysteresis/Hyster 44

Setting range 0.1% – 20%

Resolution 0.1%

Accuracy ± 2%

Characteristic times
Start time < 50 ms/45 ms 45 < 40 ms/35 ms 45
Disengaging time < 60 ms/75 ms 45

Overshoot time <40 ms

Setting group

Number 4

44. Common settings for setting group 1, 2, 3, 4.

45. The 2nd value is only for high speed high break digital outputs.

P5/EN M/33C 305

Protection Relay Protection functions

Neutral voltage displacement (ANSI 59N)

Description
The neutral voltage displacement protection function (ANSI code 59N) is used as
non-selective backup for earth/ground faults and also for selective earth/ground
fault protection for motors having a unit transformer between the motor and the
busbar.
This function is sensitive to the fundamental frequency component of the neutral
displacement voltage. The attenuation of the third harmonic is more than 60 dB
because the third harmonics is present between the neutral point and earth/
ground even when there is no earth/ground fault.
Whenever the measured value exceeds the start setting of a particular stage, this
stage starts and issues a start signal. If the fault situation is present longer than
the operate time setting, a trip signal is issued.

Measuring the neutral displacement voltage

The neutral displacement voltage is either measured with a single voltage
transformer between the motor's neutral point and earth/ground or calculated from
the measured line-to-neutral voltages according to the selected voltage
measurement mode (see Voltages, page 354):
• When the voltage measurement mode is 3LN: The neutral displacement
voltage is calculated from the phase voltages and therefore no separate
neutral displacement voltage transformer is needed. The setting values are
relative to the configured √3VT rated voltage.

U0 (%)= Mag(VL1 + VL2 + VL3) / 3 Uns * 100%

where:
Uns is the rated secondary phase voltage.
• When the voltage measurement mode contains "+U0": The neutral
displacement voltage is measured only with voltage transformer(s), for
example using a broken delta connection. The setting values are relative to
the configured VT0 secondary voltage (line-to-line voltage).

U0 (%)= V4 / Unos * 100%

where:
Unos is the rated secondary residual voltage.
V4 is the fourth voltage input channel of Easergy P5 protection relay.
NOTE: When the voltage measuring mode is LL/LLy, U0 is zero and therefore
the neutral voltage displacement protection function of all stages will not
operate.

Three independent stages

There are three separately adjustable stages: U0>, U0>> and U0>>>. All stages
operate with definite time (DT) operation characteristics.

306 P5/EN M/33C

Protection functions Protection Relay

Block diagram
Figure 242 - Block diagram of the neutral voltage displacement protection
function

Start
U0

Register
event
Blocking

Trip

Register
event

U0> t> Enable

events P533EIA

Characteristics
Table 74 - Settings and characteristics of the neutral voltage displacement
protection function

Settings/ Values Values Values

characteristics (stage U0>) (stage U0>>) (stage U0>>>)
(description/label)

Pick-up value/U0>

Setting range 2% - 120% xUn0

Resolution 1%

Accuracy ±2% or ±0.5 V secondary

Reset ratio 97% ± 2%

Operation delay/t>

Setting range 0.04 s - 300 s 0.03 s - 300 s

Resolution 0.01 s
Accuracy ±1% or ±20 ms

Characteristic times
Start time < 50 ms/45 ms 46 < 40 ms/35 ms 46
Overshoot time < 45 ms
Disengaging time < 50 ms/65 ms 46 < 55 ms/40 ms 46

Setting groups

Number 4

46. The 2nd value is only for high speed high break digital outputs.

P5/EN M/33C 307

Protection Relay Protection functions

Capacitor overvoltage (ANSI 59C)

Description
This capacitor overvoltage protection function (ANSI code 59C) calculates the
voltages of a three-phase Y-connected capacitor bank using the measured
currents of the capacitors. No voltage measurements are needed. Especially in
filter applications, there are harmonics and depending on the phase angles the
harmonics can increase the peak voltage. This protection function calculates the
worst-case overvoltage in per-unit values according to IEC 60871-1 standard.
Harmonics up to 15th are taken into account.

15
Uc = X c
UcLN ∑ In
n =1
h
Xc = 1
2π f C set
P533EJA where P533EKA

Uc = Amplitude of a pure fundamental frequency sine wave voltage, whose peak value is
equal to the maximum possible peak value of the actual voltage (including harmonics)
over a
Y-coupled capacitor.

Xc = Reactance of the capacitor at the measured frequency

UcLN = Nominal voltage of the capacitance C.

n= Order number of harmonic. n = 1 for the fundamental frequency component. n = 2 for 2nd
harmonic etc.
Ih = nth harmonic of the measured phase current. h = 1 - 15.

f= Measured system frequency.

Cset = Single phase capacitance between phase and starpoint.

Above equation gives the maximum possible voltage, while the actual voltage
depends on the phase angles of the involved harmonics. The protection is
sensitive to the highest voltage of the three line-to-neutral voltages. Whenever this
value exceeds the start setting of a particular stage, this stage starts and issues a
start signal. If the fault situation is present longer than the definite operation delay
setting, a trip signal is issued.

Reactive power of the capacitor bank

The rated reactive power per phase-earth/ground capacitor is calculated as
follows:

2
Q n = 2π fn UcLN Cset
P533ELA

Qn = Rated reactive power of the three-phase capacitor bank

fn = Rated frequency. 50 Hz or 60 Hz.

UcLN = Nominal voltage of the capacitance C.

Cset = Single phase capacitance between phase and starpoint.

308 P5/EN M/33C

Protection functions Protection Relay

Three separate capacitors connected in wye (III Y)

In this configuration, the capacitor bank is built of three single-phase sections
without internal interconnections between the sections. The three sections are
externally connected to a wye (Y). The single-phase-to-starpoint capacitance is
used as the setting value.

Figure 243 - Example of wye (III Y) connected capacitor bank

L1
n
L2
f
L3

n n n

set set set

set

Mvar P533EMA

Three phase capacitor connected internally in wye (Y)

In this configuration, the capacitor bank consists of a three-phase capacitor
connected internally to a wye (Y).
The single-phase-to-starpoint capacitance is used as the setting value, which can
be calculated from the capacitance C12 between phases 1 and 2 (as given on the
nameplate): Cset = 2C12

Figure 244 - Three-phase capacitor bank connected internally in wye (Y)

L1
n
L2
f
L3

12

12

P533ENA

Capacitance between phases 1 and 2 is 50 μF and the equivalent line-to-neutral

capacitance is 100 μF whose value is also used as the setting value.

P5/EN M/33C 309

Protection Relay Protection functions

Overvoltage and reactive power calculation example

The capacitor bank is built of three separate 100 μF capacitors connected in wye
(Y). The rated voltage of the capacitors is 8 kV; the measured frequency is 50.04
Hz and the rated frequency is 50 Hz.
The measured fundamental frequency current of phase L1 is: IL1 = 181 A; the
measured relative 2nd harmonic is: 2% = 3.62 A; the measured relative 3rd
harmonic is: 7% = 12.67 A; the measured relative 5th harmonic is: 5% = 9.05 A.
According to equation Cset = Cnameplate the line-to-starpoint capacitance is:
Cset = 100 μF (Example of wye (III Y) connected capacitor bank, page 309)
The rated power is: Qn = 2011 kvar
2
Q n = 2π fn UcLN Cset
P533ELA

The reactance is: Xc = 1/(2π x 50.04 x 100*10-6) = 31.806 Ω

Xc = 1
2π f C set P533EKA

The pure fundamental voltage Uc having a peak value equal to the highest
possible voltage with similar harmonic content as the measured reactive capacitor
currents is: Ucp1 = 31.806*(181/1 + 3.62/2 + 12.67/3 + 9.05/5) = 6006 V
and in per-unit values: Ucp1 = 6006/8000 = 0.75Un
15
Uc = X c
UcLN ∑ In
n =1
h

P533EJA

The same calculation is executed for phases L2 and L3. The highest of the three
values is compared to the start setting.

Block diagram
Figure 245 - Block diagram of the capacitor overvoltage protection function
(ANSI 59C)

IL1
Uc

IL2
Uc
MAX > & Start
IL3
Uc
f
& Register
event

Blocking

Trip
t

& Register
event

UcLN Uc> t> Enable

events P533EOA

310 P5/EN M/33C

Protection functions Protection Relay

Characteristics
Table 75 - Settings and characteristics of the capacitor overvoltage
protection Uc>

Settings/characteristics Values
(description/label)

Pick-up value/Uc>

Setting range 0.10 - 2.50xUcLN

Resolution 0.01
Accuracy ±3%

Reset ratio 97% ± 2%

L-N capacitance of one phase/C

Setting range 1.00 - 650.00 μF

Resolution 0.01 μF

Rated L-N voltage UcLN/UcLN

Setting range 100 - 260000 V

Resolution 1V
Operation delay/t> (DT)

Setting range 1.0 - 30.0 s

Resolution 0.5 s
Accuracy < 1.5 s

Characteristic times
Start time < 1.5 s
Disengaging time < 1.5 s

Setting group

Number 4

P5/EN M/33C 311

Protection Relay Protection functions

Directional phase overcurrent (ANSI 67)

Description
The directional phase overcurrent protection function (ANSI code 67) can be used
for directional short circuit protection. Typical applications are:
• Short-circuit protection of two parallel cables or overhead lines in a radial
network.
• Short-circuit protection of a looped network with a single feeding point.
• Short-circuit protection of a two-way feeder, which usually supplies loads but
is used in special cases as an incoming feeder.
The stages are sensitive to the amplitude of the highest fundamental frequency
current of the three measured phase currents.
In line-to-line and in three-phase faults, the fault angle is determined by using
angles between positive sequence current and voltage. In phase-to-ground faults,
the fault angle is determined by using fault-phase current and the healthy line-to-
line voltage.
A typical characteristic is shown in Example of the directional overcurrent function
characteristic, page 314. The base angle setting is -30°. The stage starts if the
faulty current phasor gets into the grey area.
NOTE: If the maximum possible earth/ground fault current is greater than the
most sensitive directional overcurrent setting used, connect the relay to the
line-to-neutral voltages instead of line-to-line voltages to get the right direction
for earth/ground faults. For networks with a maximum possible earth/ground
fault current lower than the overcurrent setting, use the directional earth/
ground fault protection function (67N) instead.

SOL, CLP and Inrush impact on directional phase overcurrent

protection
Cold Load Pickup (CLP), Selective Overcurrent Logic (SOL) and inrush detection
can improve the behaviour of the protection function in terms of stability or
sensitivity.

312 P5/EN M/33C

Protection functions Protection Relay

Block diagram

Figure 246 - Block diagram of the directional phase overcurrent protection function (stage Iφ> and
Iφ>>)

DirMode

IL1, IL2, IL3 Single phase fault (PhA as example):

U12, U23, U31 AngleDiff = Angle(IL1) - Angle(U23) - 90° + AngleOffset
|AngleDiff| < 88°
I1 Line-to-line fault or three phase fault:
AngleDiff = Angle(I1) - Angle(U1) + AngleOffset & Start
U1
Note: if no voltage is available,
use memory voltage for 3.2 s Register
> & event
MAX

Block Trip

& Register
event
InrushStat &

SOLStat & Select Select

setting setting

& Select
CLPStat setting
&

Mode Enable Enable Enable Iφ> CLPIφ> t> CLPt> SOLt> DT/IDMT Reset IDMT k> CLPk> SOLk> Enable
Inrush SOL CLP time characteristics events
P533OOA

Figure 247 - Block diagram of the directional phase overcurrent protection function (stage Iφ>>> and
Iφ>>>>)

DirMode

IL1, IL2, IL3

Single phase fault (PhA as example):
U12, U23, U31 AngleDiff = Angle(IL1) - Angle(U23) -90° - AngleOffset
|AngleDiff| < 88°
I1 Line-to-line fault or three phase fault: & Start
U1 AngleDiff = Angle(I1) - Angle(U1) - AngleOffset
Note: if no voltage is available,
use memory voltage for 3.2 s Register
> & event
MAX

Block Trip

& Register
event
InrushStat &

SOLStat & Select

setting

& Select
CLPStat
& setting

Mode Enable Enable Enable Iφ>>> t > CLPt> SOLt> Enable

Inrush SOL CLP CLPIφ>>> events
P533EQA

P5/EN M/33C 313

Protection Relay Protection functions

Operation

Four independent stages

There are four separately adjustable stages available: Iφ>, Iφ>>, Iφ>>> and
Iφ>>>>.

Operate time
Stages Iφ>and Iφ>> can be configured for definite time or dependent time
characteristic. Stages Iφ>>> and Iφ>>>> have definite time (DT) operation delay.
The device shows a scalable graph of the configured delay on the local panel
display.

Examples
Figure 248 - Example of the directional overcurrent function characteristic

Im +90°
2°
ind. +cap.

SET
VA LUE
0° +res.
res. I LOAD Re

TRIP AREA

BASE ANGLE = °

I FAULT

cap. +ind.

90° P533ERA

Three modes are available: directional, non-directional, and directional + back-up.

In the non-directional mode, the stage is acting just like an ordinary overcurrent
protection function stage.
Directional + back-up mode works the same way as the directional mode, but it
has non-directional backup protection in case a close-up fault forces all voltages
to near zero. After the angle memory hold time expires, the direction would be lost.
Basically the directional + backup mode is required when operate time is set
longer than voltage memory setting and no other non-directional back-up
protection is in use.
An example of bi-directional operation characteristic is shown in Bi-directional
application with two stages Iφ> and Iφ>>, page 315. The right side stage in this
example is the stage Iφ> and the left side is Iφ>>. The angle offset of the Iφ> is 0°
and the angle offset of Iφ>> is set to -180°.

314 P5/EN M/33C

Protection functions Protection Relay

Figure 249 - Bi-directional application with two stages Iφ> and Iφ>>

+90°
ind. +cap.
4°
I φ >> TRIP AREA

SET SET
VA LUE VA LUE 0°
res. +res.
BASE ANGLE = °

BASE ANGLE = 18 °

I φ > TRIP AREA

cap. +ind.

90° ldir_modeBiDir 15%

P533ESA

When any of the three phase currents exceeds the setting value and, in directional
mode, the phase angle including the base angle is within the active ±88° wide
sector, this stage starts and issues a start signal. If the fault situation is present
longer than the operate time setting, a trip signal is issued.
NOTE: When using directional overcurrent protection in low impedance
earthed/grounded networks, the device has to be connected to line-to- neutral
voltages instead of line-to-line voltages, therefore the voltage measurement
mode has to be "3LN".

Characteristics
Table 76 - Setting and characteristics of directional phase overcurrent
protection function (ANSI 67)

Setting/characteristics Values Values

(description/label) (stages Iφ> and Iφ>>) (stages Iφ>>> and Iφ>>>>)

Pick-up value/Iφ>, Iφ>>, Iφ>>>, Iφ>>>>

Setting range 0.1In - 20.00In (DT) 0.1In - 20.00In

0.1In - 5.00In (IDMT)

Resolution 0.01In
Accuracy ±3% or ±0.005In

Reset ratio 95% ± 2%

Transient overreach < 10% with X/R up to 120

Direction mode/Mode
Options Dir; Nodir; Dir + Backup

Angle offset/Offset

Setting range -180° - +179°

Resolution 1°
Accuracy ±2° (U > 5 V) or ±10° (U = 0.1 - 5.0 V)

Reset ratio (angle) 2°

Operation delay/t> (DT)

Setting range 0.04 s - 300 s

Resolution 0.01 s

P5/EN M/33C 315

Protection Relay Protection functions

Table 76 - Setting and characteristics of directional phase overcurrent

protection function (ANSI 67) (Continued)

Setting/characteristics Values Values

(description/label) (stages Iφ> and Iφ>>) (stages Iφ>>> and Iφ>>>>)

Accracy ±1% or ±20 ms

Operation delay/t> (IDMT) -

Delay curve family/Curve DT, IEC, IEEE, IEEE2, Others, -

programmable (Prg)

Delay type/Type IEC: NI, VI, EI, LTI, STI; -

IEEE: VI, EI, LTI, LTEI, LTVI,
MI, STI, STEI, CO8;
IEEE2: NI, VI, EI, MI;
Others: RI, RXIDG;

Inv. time coefficient/K> 0.05 - 20.0 for DT, IEC, RI; -

0.50 - 20.0 for RXIDG, IEEE
and IEEE2.
Accuracy ±5% or ±30 ms -

Reset type -

Options DT; IDMT -

Reset time/Reset time -

Setting range 0.03 s - 100 s -

Resolution 0.01 s -

Accuracy ±1% or ±20 ms -

Inrushstat for Iφ>.../Inrush

Options Enable; Disable

SOLstat for Iφ>.../SOL

Options Enable; Disable

SOL Operation delay/SOLt>

Setting range 0.04 s - 300 s 0.03 s - 300 s

Resolution 0.01s
SOL Inv. time coefficient/ 0.05 - 20.0 for DT, IEC, RI; -
SOLk> 0.50 - 20.0 for RXIDG, IEEE
and IEEE2.
Accuracy ±1% or ±20 ms, definite time; ±1% or ±20 ms
±5% or ±30 ms, IDMT time

CLPstat for Iφ>.../CLP

Options Enable; Disable

CLP Pick-up value/CLPIφ>

Setting range 0.1In - 20.00In (DT) 0.1In - 20.00In

0.1In - 5.00In (IDMT)

Resolution 0.01In
Accuracy ±3% or ± 0.005In

CLP Operation delay/CLPt>

Setting range 0.04 s - 300 s

Resolution 0.01 s
CLP Inv. time coefficient/ 0.05 - 20.0 for DT, IEC, RI; -
CLPk> 0.50 - 20.0 for RXIDG, IEEE
and IEEE2.
Accuracy ±1% or ±20 ms, definite time; ±1% or ±20 ms
±5% or ±30 ms, IDMT time.

Voltage memory time

316 P5/EN M/33C

Protection functions Protection Relay

Table 76 - Setting and characteristics of directional phase overcurrent

protection function (ANSI 67) (Continued)

Setting/characteristics Values Values

(description/label) (stages Iφ> and Iφ>>) (stages Iφ>>> and Iφ>>>>)

Value 3.2 s fixed

Angle memory

Value 3.2 s fixed

Minimum voltage for the direction determination

Value 2 V secondary, fixed

Characteristic times
Start time < 45 ms/40 ms at 2 x Iφ pick-up value 47
< 60 ms/55 ms at 1.2 x Iφ pick-up value 47

Disengaging time < 65 ms/80 ms 47

Overshoot time < 50 ms

Setting group

Number 4

47. The 2nd value is only for high speed high break digital outputs.

P5/EN M/33C 317

Protection Relay Protection functions

Directional earth/ground fault overcurrent (ANSI 67N)

Description
The directional earth/ground fault overcurrent protection function (ANSI code 67N)
is used in networks or motors where a selective and sensitive earth/ground fault
protection is needed and in applications with varying network structure and length.
The directional earth/ground fault protection is adapted for various network earth/
ground systems.
According to the model of the Easergy P5 protection relay, the residual current
can be:
• Measured with standard earth/ground fault CT;
• Measured with very sensitive earth/ground fault CT;
• Measured with a CSH core balance CT;
• Calculated with the sum of the three phase currents.
The function is sensitive to the fundamental frequency component of the earth/
ground fault overcurrent and the residual voltage and the phase angle between
them. It is not sensitive to the third harmonic. Whenever the magnitude of residual
current I0 and residual voltage U0 and the phase angle between I0 and U0 fulfils
the start criteria, the stage starts and issues a start signal. If the fault situation is
present longer than the operation time setting, a trip signal is issued.

Polarisation
The neutral displacement voltage used for polarisation is either directly measured
by VT input U0 of the Easergy P5 protection relay or, alternatively, internally
calculated from the three phase voltages depending on the selected voltage
measurement mode.
• 3LN, 3LN/LLy and 3LN/LNy:
The residual voltage is calculated from the phase voltages and therefore no
separate residual voltage transformers are needed. The setting values are
relative to the configured voltage transformer (VT).
• 3LN+U0, 2LL+U0, and 2LL+Uₒ+LLy:
The residual voltage is measured with dedicated voltage transformer for
example using a broken delta connection. The setting values are relative to
the VT0 secondary voltage defined in the configuration.

318 P5/EN M/33C

Protection functions Protection Relay

Block diagram

Figure 250 - Block diagram of the directional earth/ground fault overcurrent protection function
operating in ResCap mode (ANSI 67N)

I0
I0calc
I0 ’ I0 cos(AngleDiff)
*
I0csh DirMode
& ≥1
OR
> Start
&
Res
Cap & ≥1 I0 sin(AngleDiff)
*

DI
& Register
event
&
DI

≥ Trip
U0
>
U0calc

Block
& Register
event

Mode = ResCap offset Enable events

ResCapCtl U0 > k>
I0φ > IDMT characteristics
t>
DT / IDMT P533ETA

Figure 251 - Block diagram of the directional earth/ground fault overcurrent protection function
operating in Sector mode (ANSI 67N)

DirMode
&
I0
& Start
I0calc
I0’
I0csh -AngSec < AngleDiff < AngSector
U0 & Register
event
U0calc

≥ Trip
>

>
& Register
event
Block

Mode = Sector I0φ> Enable events

AngleOffset U0> k>
Pickup sector IDMT characteristics
(AngSector) t>
DT / IDMT P533EUA

NOTE: The AngleDiff in the two figures above is calculated using this formula:
AngleDiff = (Angle(I0) - Angle(U0)) - AngleOffset

P5/EN M/33C 319

Protection Relay Protection functions

Figure 252 - Block diagram of the directional earth/ground fault overcurrent protection function
operating in Undir mode (ANSI 67N)

DirMode
& Start
I0
I0calc
I 0’ >
& Register
I0csh event

Block
≥ Trip

& Register
event

k>
I0φ> Mode = Undir DT / IDMT t> IDMT Enable events
characteristics P533EVA

Modes for different network types

The available modes are:
• ResCap
This mode consists of two sub modes, Res and Cap. A digital signal can be
used to dynamically switch between these two submodes. When the digital
input is active (DI = 1), Cap mode is in use and when the digital input is
inactive (DI = 0), Res mode is in use. This feature can be used with
compensated networks when the Petersen coil is temporarily switched off.
◦ Res
The stage is sensitive to the resistive component of the selected I0 signal.
This mode is used with compensated networks (resonant earthing/
grounding) and networks earthed/grounded with a high resistance
(resistive earthing/grounding). Compensation is usually done with a
Petersen coil between the neutral point of the main transformer and earth/
ground. In this context, high resistance means that the maximum earth/
ground fault current is limited to a certain value, e.g. to the rated phase
current. The trip area is a half plane as drawn in Operation characteristic
of the directional earth/ground fault protection in Res or Cap mode, page
321. The base angle is usually set to zero degrees.
◦ Cap
The stage is sensitive to the capacitive component of the selected I0
signal. This mode is used with unearthed/ungrounded (isolated) networks.
The trip area is a half plane as drawn in Operation characteristic of the
directional earth/ground fault protection in Res or Cap mode, page 321.
The base angle is usually set to zero degrees.
• Sector
This mode is used with networks earthed/grounded with a small resistance. In
this context, "small" means that a fault current may be more than the rated
phase currents. The trip area has a shape of a sector as drawn in Two
examples of operation characteristic of the directional earth/ground fault
stages in Sector mode, page 321. The angle offset is usually set to zero
degrees or slightly on the lagging inductive side (negative angle).
• NoDir
This mode makes the stage equal to the non-directional stage I0>. The phase
angle and U0 amplitude setting are discarded. Only the amplitude of the
selected I0 input matters.

320 P5/EN M/33C

Protection functions Protection Relay

Figure 253 - Operation characteristic of the directional earth/ground fault

protection in Res or Cap mode

+90°

I0sin ᵠ >
CAP

I0 ᵠ >
I0
RES
ᵠ
0°
I0cos ᵠ >
-U0

I0 ᵠ >
P533EWA

Figure 254 - Two examples of operation characteristic of the directional

earth/ground fault stages in Sector mode
+90° +90°
Angle offset = +32°
Angle offset = -15° +55° Sector = ±120°
Sector = ±70°

TRIP AREA
I0
+152° +32°

70°
I0ᵠ > 120°
0° 0°
70° -U0 120° I0ᵠ > -U0

-15°

I0 TRIP AREA

-85° -88°

P533EXA

The drawn I0 phasor in both figures is inside the trip area. The angle offset and
half sector size are user’s parameters.

Input signal selection

Each stage can be connected to supervise any of the following inputs and signals:
• Input I0 for all networks other than solidly earthed/grounded.
• Calculated residual current I0Calc for solidly and low-impedance earthed/
grounded networks.

Intermittent earth/ground fault detection

Short earth/ground faults make the protection start but do not cause a trip. A short
fault means one cycle or more. For transient intermittent earth/ground faults
shorter than 1 ms in compensated networks, there is a dedicated protection stage
I0INT>. When starting happens frequently, such intermittent faults can be cleared
using the intermittent time setting.
When a new start happens within the set intermittent time, the operation delay
counter is not cleared between adjacent faults and finally the stage trips.

P5/EN M/33C 321

Protection Relay Protection functions

Three independent stages

There are three separately adjustable stages: I0φ>, I0φ>> and I0φ>>>.
All the stages can be configured for definite operation time (DT) or dependent
operation time.
NOTE: The Easergy P5 protection relay shows a scalable graph of the
configured delay on the local panel display.

Characteristics
Table 77 - Setting and characteristics of the directional earth/ground fault
overcurrent protection function (ANSI 67N)

Setting/ Values Values

characteristics (stages I0φ> and I0φ>>) (stage I0φ>>>)
(description/
label)

I0 input/Input

Options I0, I0Calc，I0'

Direction mode/Mode
Options ResCap, Sector, NoDir

Char ctrl. in ResCap mode/ChCtrl

Options Selecting Res, Cap, one digital input (DI), or one virtual input (VI).

Pick-up value/I0φ> ...

Setting range For delay type DT:

0.02In0 - 10.00In0 for I0φ measured with standard EF CT;
0.05In0 - 10.00In0 for I0φ measured with CSH;
0.05In - 20.00In for I0φ calculated;
0.002In0 - 1.000In0 for I0φ measured with very sensitive EF CT.

For delay type IDMT:

0.02In0 - 5.00In0 for I0φ measured with standard EF CT;
0.05In0 - 5.00In0 for I0φ measured with CSH;
0.05In - 5.00In for I0φ calculated;
0.002In0 - 1.000In0 for I0φ measured with very sensitive EF CT.

Resolution 0.001 In0

Accuracy ±3% or ±0.002In0 for I0 measured with standard EF CT;
±3% or ±0.005In0 for I0 measured with CSH;
±3% or ±0.005In for I0 calculated;
±3% or ±0.0005In0 for I0' measured with very sensitive EF CT.

Reset ratio 95% ± 2%

Transient < 10% with X/R up to 120

overreach
Residual voltage/U0

Setting range 1% - 50%Un0

Resolution 1%Un0

Angle offset/Offset

Setting range -180° - +179°

Sector size 10° - 170°

Resolution 1°
Accuracy ±2° when U0 > 1 V and I0 > 0.05In0 or > 50 mA;
±20° for other cases
Reset ratio 2°
(angle)

322 P5/EN M/33C

Protection functions Protection Relay

Table 77 - Setting and characteristics of the directional earth/ground fault

overcurrent protection function (ANSI 67N) (Continued)

Setting/ Values Values

characteristics (stages I0φ> and I0φ>>) (stage I0φ>>>)
(description/
label)

Operation delay/t> (DT)

Setting range 0.04 s - 300 s

Resolution 0.02
Accuracy ±1% or ±50 ms

Operation delay/t> (IDMT)

Delay curve DT, IEC, IEEE, IEEE2, Others, programmable (Prg)

family/Curve

Delay type/ IEC: NI, VI, EI, LTI, STI;

Type IEEE: VI, EI, LTI, LTEI, LTVI, MI, STI, STEI, CO8;
IEEE2: NI, VI, EI, MI;
Others: RI, RXIDG

Inv. time 0.05 - 20.0 for DT, IEC, RI;

coefficient/k> 0.50 - 20.0 for RXIDG, IEEE and IEEE2.

Accuracy ±5% or ±20 ms

Reset type

Options DT; IDMT

Reset time/Reset time 48, 49

Setting range 0.04 s - 300.00 s

Resolution 0.02 s
Characteristic times
Start time < 65 ms/60 ms < 55 ms/50 ms
at 2 x I0φ pick-up value 50 at 2 x I0φ pick-up value 50

< 70 ms/65 ms < 60 ms/55 ms

at 1.2 x I0φ pick-up value 50 at 1.2 x I0φ pick-up value 50

Disengaging < 75 ms/90 ms 50 < 65 ms/80 ms 50

time
Setting group

Number 4

48. Applicable to stage I0φ> only.

49. Common setting for setting group 1, 2, 3, 4.
50. The 2nd value is only for high speed high break digital outputs.

P5/EN M/33C 323

Protection Relay Protection functions

Transient intermittent earth/ground fault (ANSI 67NI)

Description
The directional transient intermittent earth/ground fault protection function (ANSI
code 67NI) is used to detect short transient intermittent faults in compensated
cable networks. The transient faults are self-extinguished at the zero crossing of
the transient part of the fault current IFault and the fault duration is typically just 0.1
ms - 1 ms. Such short intermittent faults can not be correctly recognised by
conventional directional earth/ground fault function using the fundamental
frequency components of I0 and U0 only.
Although a single transient fault usually self extinguishes within less than one
millisecond, in most cases a new fault happens when the line-to-neutral voltage of
the faulty phase has recovered.
NOTE: For a sensitive fault detection, this stage requires direct U0
measurement, so the voltage measurement mode is set to 3LN+U0, 2LL+U0 or
2LL+U0+LLy.

Figure 255 - Typical line-to-neutral voltages, earth/ground fault current of the

faulty feeder and the neutral displacement voltage during two transient
earth/ground faults in phase L1 (the network is compensated)

t (ms)
P533EYA

Block diagram

Figure 256 - Block diagram of the directional transient intermittent earth/ground fault stage I0INT>

I0 samples
I0 Start
I0 peak
TRANSIENT
P ALGORITHM & Register
event
I0 fundamental DIV
freq. amplitude R
U0 U0 samples COUNTER
U0 n Trip
CLEAR

U0
& Trig & Register
event
Block TOF

U 0> t> Intmt Enable

MinPeaks time events
P533EZA

324 P5/EN M/33C

Protection functions Protection Relay

Operation

Direction calculation
The function is sensitive to the instantaneous sampled values of the earth/ground
fault overcurrent and neutral voltage displacement voltage. The selected voltage
measurement mode has to include a direct U0 measurement with a voltage
transformer.
NOTE: Connect the U0 signal according to the connection diagram to achieve
correct polarisation.

Co-ordination with the conventional directional earth/ground

fault protection based on fundamental frequency signals
The transient intermittent earth/ground fault current stage I0INT> should always be
used together with the conventional directional earth/ground fault overcurrent
protection stages I0φ>, I0φ>>. The transient stage I0INT> may in worst case detect
the start of a steady earth/ground fault in wrong direction but does not trip because
the peak value of a steady state sine wave I0 signal must also exceed the
corresponding base frequency component's peak value to make the I0INT> to trip.
The operate time of the transient stage I0INT> should be lower than the settings of
any directional earth/ground fault overcurrent stage to avoid any unnecessary trip
from the I0φ> and I0φ>> stages .The start signal of the I0INT> stage can be also
used to block I0φ>, I0φ>> stages of all parallel feeders.

Auto reclosing
The start signal of any I0φ> stage initiating auto reclosing (AR) can be used to
block the I0INT> stage to avoid the I0INT> stage with a long intermittent setting to
interfere with the AR cycle in the middle of discrimination time.
Usually the I0INT> stage itself is not used to initiate any AR. For transient faults, the
AR does not help because the fault phenomena itself already includes a repetitive
unsuccessful self-extinguishing.

Operate time, peak amount counter and intermittent time

coordination
The protection function has three independently settable parameters: operation
delay, required number of peaks and intermittent time. All characteristics need to
be satisfied before the stage issues a trip signal. There is also a settable reset
delay so that the stage does not release before the circuit breaker has operated.
If, for example, the number of peaks is set to 2, the operation delay is set to 160
ms and the intermittent time to 200 ms, then the function starts the operation delay
from the first peak. If the second peak occurs after 80 ms, the peak amount criteria
is satisfied. After 160 ms the delay time elapses, all operate criteria are satisfied
and the stage trips.
If the second peak does not occur before the operational delay elapses, the stage
is released after the intermittent time has elapsed. But if the second peak occurs
after the operate time has elapsed but still within the intermittent time, then a trip is
issued instantly.
If the intermittent time elapses before the operation delay elapses, the stage is
reset.
There are a couple of limitations to avoid completely incorrect settings. Peaks
cannot occur more often than twice per period, so there are about 10 ms in
between (at 50 Hz nominal frequency). Therefore if the peak amount is set to 10,
then the operation delay setting does not accept a value smaller than 100 ms.
Vice versa, if the operation delay is set to 40 ms, then it is not possible to set a
peak amount greater than 4. This prohibits settings that can be never satisfied.

P5/EN M/33C 325

Protection Relay Protection functions

Figure 257 - Set peak amount condition is satisfied and operate time elapses
within intermittent time setting. Stage issues a trip.

U0

I0

Intermittent time = 0.2 s

Operation time = 0.16 s

Reset delay = 0.1 s

TRIP
Setting for minimum number of peaks = 2

Time (s)
P533F0A

Figure 258 - Peak amount condition is not satisfied when operation delay
elapses but last required peak occurs during intermittent time. Stage then
issues instant trip.

U0

I0

Intermittent time = 0.2 s

Intermittent time

Operation time = 0.16 s Reset delay = 0.1 s

TRIP, setting for minimum number of peaks = 3

Time (s)
P533F2A

Figure 259 - Peak amount condition is satisfied but intermittent time elapses
before operate time. Stage is reset.

U0

I0

Intermittent time = 0.2 s

Intermittent time

Operation time = 0.3 s

Setting for minimum number of peaks = 2 No trip!

TRIP

Time (s)
P533F1A

326 P5/EN M/33C

Protection functions Protection Relay

Characteristics
Table 78 - Settings and characteristics of the transient intermittent earth/
ground fault protection stage I0INT>

Settings/characteristics Values
(description/label)

I0 input/Input

Options I0; I0'

Direction mode/Mode
Options Forward; Reverse

I0 peak value/I0Peak

Value 0.1In0 (fixed)

U0 Pick-up/U0>

Setting range 1%Un0 – 60%Un0

Resolution 1%Un0

Accuracy ±3%

Reset ratio 97% ± 2%

Min number of peaks/MinPeaks

Setting range 1 – 20

Resolution 1
Operation delay/t>

Setting range 0.02 s – 300.00 s

Resolution 0.02 s
Accuracy ±1% or ±20 ms

Reset delay/Rst delay

Setting range 0.06 s - 300.00 s

Resolution 0.01 s
Intermittent time/Intmt time 51

Setting range 0.01 s - 300.00 s

Resolution 0.01 s
Characteristic times
Start time < 50 ms/45 ms maximum 52
Disengaging time < 65 ms

Setting group

Number 4

51. Common setting for setting group 1, 2, 3, 4.

52. The 2nd value is only for high speed high break digital outputs.

P5/EN M/33C 327

Protection Relay Protection functions

5th harmonic (H5) detection (ANSI 68H5)

Description
Overexciting a transformer creates odd harmonics. The fifth harmonic component
can be used to detect overexcitation. This stage can also be used to block some
other function stages.
The ratio between the fifth harmonic component and the fundamental frequency
component is measured on all the phase currents. When the ratio in any phase
exceeds the setting value, the stage activates a start signal. After a settable delay,
the stage operates and activates a trip signal.
It is recommended to set the trip delay to longer than 60 ms, to block properly the
protection stages.

Block diagram
Figure 260 - Block diagram of the magnetising inrush detection stage Ih5>

I L1 H5
I L2
I L3
H5 MAX > & Start
H5

Block
& Register
event

Trip
t

& Register
event

Ih5 t> Enable

events P533F3A

NOTE: The amplitude of fifth harmonic content has to be at least 2% of the

nominal of CT. For example, if the nominal current is 5 A, the fifth harmonic
component needs to exceed 100 mA.

328 P5/EN M/33C

Protection functions Protection Relay

Characteristics
Table 79 - Setting and characteristics of the over excitation detection
function (ANSI 68H5)

Setting/characteristics Values
(description/label)

Pick-up value/Ih5>

Setting range 10 – 100%

Resolution 1%

Accuracy ±1% or ±0.005In

Reset ratio 97% ± 1%

Operation delay/t>

Setting range 0.03 s - 300 s

Resolution 0.01 s
Accuracy ±1% or 30 ms

Characteristic times
Start time < 55 ms/50 ms 53
Disengaging time < 85 ms/70 ms 53

Setting group

Number 1

53. The 2nd value is only for high speed high break digital outputs.

P5/EN M/33C 329

Protection Relay Protection functions

Auto-recloser function (ANSI 79)

Description
The auto-recloser (AR) function (ANSI code 79) can be used in feeder protection
relays to help protect an overhead line.
The function uses the object control function to control the CB open/close
sequence. All other object control methods are in simultaneous use, including
object failure monitoring. If the circuit breaker (CB) control fails or another function
controls the CB, the AR sequence stops.

Purpose
Typically protection functions detect the fault and trigger the AR function. After
tripping the circuit breaker, the AR function can reclose the CB. Normally, the first
reclose (or shot) is so short in time that users cannot notice anything. However,
the fault is cleared and the feeder will continue in normal service.

Auto-recloser principle
Even though the basic principle of AR is very simple, there are a lot of different
timers and parameters that have to be set.
The Easergy P5 protection relays provide auto-reclosing with up to five shots. A
shot consists of open time (so called “dead” time) and closed time (so called
“burning” time or discrimination time). A high-speed shot means that the dead time
is less than one second. The time-delayed shot means longer dead times up to
two to three minutes.
There are four AR lines. A line means an initialisation signal for AR. Normally, start
or trip signals of protection functions are used to initiate an AR sequence. Each
AR line has a priority. AR1 has the highest and AR4 has the lowest priority. This
means that if two lines are initiated at the same time, AR follows only the highest
priority line. A very typical configuration of the lines is that the instantaneous
overcurrent stage initiates the AR1 line, time-delayed overcurrent stage the AR2
line and earth/ground fault protection will use lines AR3 and AR4.

Figure 261 - Auto-reclose matrix

AR-matrix Ready Start delay Dead time Discrimination Reclaim time

(Wait for Open Close time
.
.

I>t AR-request) CB CB
I>>s I>s
DirectTrip 0...300 s Reclaim time
0...300 s
Shot 1 AR1 In use succeeded
0...300 s 0...300 s 0...300 s 0...300 s
AR2 In use Move back
to shot 1

Not in use 0...300 s 0...300 s

Shot 2 In use
If the direct trip If new AR
signal is request is
activated activated
during during reclaim
discrimination time, continue
time, the final on next shot
trip is issued

Shot
3...5
P533F4A

330 P5/EN M/33C

Protection functions Protection Relay

The AR matrix above defines which signals (the start and trip signals from
protection stages or digital input) are forwarded to the AR function. In the AR
function, the AR signals can be configured to initiate the reclose sequence. Each
shot from 1 to 5 has its own enabled/disabled flag. If more than one AR signal
activates at the same time, AR1 has highest priority and AR2 the lowest. Each AR
signal has an independent start delay for the shot 1. If a higher priority AR signal
activates during the start delay, the start delay setting will be changed to that of
the highest priority AR signal.
After the start delay, the CB is opened if it is still closed (i.e. if no trip has been
issued from another protection function in the mean time). When the CB opens, a
dead time timer is started. Each shot from 1 to 5 has its own dead time setting. If
the reclaim time elapses with no further starting or tripping, the AR sequence is
successfully executed and the AR function moves to ready state and waits for a
new AR request in shot 1.
It is recommended to configure the protection stage’s start signal to initiate the AR
function. A trip signal from the protection stage can be used as a backup. If AR
does not issue the open command, the protection trip signal still operates the CB.
The delay setting of the protection stage should be longer than the AR start delay,
CB operation time and protection reset time.

Operation

Manual closing
When CB is closed manually with the local panel, by remote, or with digital inputs,
the reclaim state is activated. Within the reclaim time, all AR requests are rejected.
The protection stages take care of tripping when they are connected to a trip relay
in the output matrix.

Manual opening
Manual CB open command during AR sequence stops the sequence and leaves
the CB open.

Reclaim time setting

• Use shot-specific reclaim time: No
This reclaim time setting defines reclaim time between different shots during
a sequence and also the reclaim time after manual closing.
• Use shot-specific reclaim time: Yes
This Reclaim time setting defines the reclaim time only for manual control.
The reclaim time between different shots is defined by shot-specific reclaim
time settings.

Support for two circuit breakers

The AR function can be configured to handle two controllable objects. Object 1 – 6
can be configured to CB1 and any other controllable object can be used as CB2.
The object selection for CB2 is made with the Breaker 2 object setting.
Switching between the two objects is done with a digital input, virtual input, virtual
output or by choosing Auto CB selection. AR controls CB2 when the input
defined by the Input for selecting CB2 setting is active (except when using auto
CB selection when operated CB 1 or 2 is that which was last in closed state).
Control is changed to another object only if the current object is not closed.

AR shots blocking
Each AR shot can be blocked with a digital input, virtual input or virtual output. The
blocking input is selected with the Block setting. When the selected input is active,
the shot is blocked. A blocked shot is treated like it does not exist and AR

P5/EN M/33C 331

Protection Relay Protection functions

sequence skips it. If the last shot in use is blocked, any AR request during
reclaiming of the previous shot causes the final tripping.

Starting AR sequence
Each AR request line has its own start delay timer. That AR line that is selected
depends on which starting delay elapses first. If more than one delay elapses at
the same time, the AR request of the highest priority is selected. AR1 has the
highest priority and AR4 has the lowest priority. First shot is selected according to
the AR request. Next AR opens the CB and starts counting dead time.

AR shot 2-5 starting or skipping

Each AR request line can be enabled to any combination of the five shots. For
example, making a sequence of Shot 2 and Shot 4 for AR request 1 is done by
enabling AR1 only for those two shots.
NOTE: If AR sequence is started at shot 2 - 5, the starting delay is taken from
the discrimination time setting of the previous shot. For example, if Shot 3 is
the first shot for AR2, the starting delay for this sequence is defined by
discrimination time of Shot 2 for AR2.

Direct trip AR request

A direct trip AR request stops the AR sequence and causes final tripping. The
direct trip request is ignored when the AR sequence is not running. The direct trip
request is accepted during dead time and discrimination time.

Shot active matrix signals

When a start delay has elapsed, an active signal is set for the first shot. If
successful reclosing is executed at the end of the shot, the active signal is reset
after the reclaim time. If the reclosing was not successful or a new fault appears
during the reclaim time, the active signal is reset for the current shot and an active
signal is set for the next shot (if there are any shots left before the final trip).

AR running matrix signal

This signal indicates dead time. The signal is set after CB is opened. When dead
time ends, the signal is reset and CB is closed.

Final trip matrix signals

There are five final trip signals in the matrix, one for each AR request (1 to 4 and 1
direct trip). When a final trip is generated, one of these signals is set according to
the AR request which caused the final tripping. The final trip signal stays active for
0.5 seconds and then resets automatically.

DI to block AR setting
This setting is useful with an external synchro-check device. This setting only
affects re-closing the CB. Re-closing can be blocked with a digital input, virtual
input or virtual output. When the blocking input is active, CB is not closed until the
blocking input becomes inactive again. When blocking becomes inactive, the CB
is immediately closed providing the close command is still active.

332 P5/EN M/33C

Protection functions Protection Relay

Figure 262 - Example sequence of two shots (after shot 2 the fault is cleared)

I> setting
Current

Open command
CB

Close command
CB

CBclose
state

CBopen
state

P533F5A

1. The current exceeds the I> setting; the start delay from shot 1 starts.
2. After the start delay, an OpenCB relay output is operated.
3. The CB opens. The dead time from shot 1 starts, and the OpenCB relay
output resets.
4. The dead time from shot 1 elapses; a CloseCB output is operated.
5. The CB closes. The CloseCB output resets, and the discrimination time
from shot 1 starts. The current is again above the I> setting.
6. The discrimination time from the shot 1 elapses; the OpenCB relay output
is operated.
7. The CB opens. The dead time from shot 2 starts, and the OpenCB relay
output resets.
8. The dead time from shot 2 runs out; the CloseCB output is operated.
9. The CB closes. The CloseCB output resets, and the discrimination time
from shot 2 starts. The current is now below I> setting.
10. Reclaim time starts. After the reclaim time elapsed the AR sequence is
successfully executed. The AR function moves to wait for a new AR
request in shot 1.

P5/EN M/33C 333

Protection Relay Protection functions

Characteristics
Table 80 - Setting and characteristics of the auto-recloser protection
function (ANSI 79)

Setting/characteristics Values
(description/label)

Enable Auto-Recloser/AR
Options On; Off

DI for ARon/ARoff/AR DI
Options Selection of one digital input (DI), one virtual input (VI), one virtual
output (VO), or one function key.

Breaker 1 object/CB1

Options Obj1; Obj2; Obj3; Obj4; Obj5; Obj6

Breaker 2 object/CB2

Options Obj1; Obj2; Obj3; Obj4; Obj5; Obj6

Auto CB selection/AutoCBSel
Options Disable; Enable

Input for selecting CB2/CB2Sel

Options Selection of one digital input (DI), one virtual input (VI), one virtual
output (VO), or one function key.

Dead time
Setting range 0.01 s – 1,200 s

Resolution 0.01 s
Discrimination time
Setting range 0.02 s – 300 s

Resolution 0.01 s
Reclaim time/ReclT
Setting range 0.02 s - 3000 s

Resolution 0.01
Block by external synchro-check/ExtSync

Options Selection of one digital input (DI), one virtual input (VI), one virtual
output (VO), or one function key.

Use shot specific reclaim time/ShotRecl

Options On; Off

AR info for mimic display/ShowInfo

Options On; Off

334 P5/EN M/33C

Protection functions Protection Relay

Overfrequency and underfrequency (ANSI 81)

Description
Frequency deviations result from an imbalance between power generation and
power loads. An under frequency condition happens when the power load
exceeds the available power generation. This happens when an interconnected
system splits, and the load left connected to one of the subsystems is in excess of
the capacity of the generators. Sustained under frequency has implications on the
stability of the power system, whereby any subsequent disturbance may damage
equipment and even lead to blackouts. It is therefore usual to provide protection
for under frequency conditions and the related load-shedding scheme shall be
deployed to restore the normal frequency.
An over frequency condition happens when the power generation exceeds the
power loads, which maybe is due to a sudden removal of load due to tripping of an
outgoing feeder. The sustained over frequency condition may damage the power
generators. Normally the governor system would respond quickly and restore
normal frequency. Over frequency protection is required as a back-up for
generator overspeed. Also, over frequency protection is also applied in load
restoration schemes to detect that the power system frequency has recovered
sufficiently to allow load which had previously been shed to be reconnected.
So, the over/under frequency protection function (ANSI code 81) is used for load
shedding, loss of power system detection, load restoration, and as a backup
protection for overspeeding.
Whenever the frequency reaches the pick-up value of a particular stage, this stage
starts, and a start signal is issued. If the fault remains on longer than the operating
delay setting, a trip signal is issued.

Protection mode for f>< and f><>< stages

These two stages can be configured either for overfrequency or underfrequency
with the setting "Comparator mode". By setting the "Comparator mode" to "<", the
f></f><>< stage of the ANSI 81 function will behave exactly the same as the f</f<<
stage of the ANSI 81U function.

Self blocking at low voltage

The protection is blocked when the biggest of the three line-to-line voltages is
below the low-voltage block limit setting (LVBlk). This setting is common to all the
groups and stages of ANSI 81, ANSI 81U and ANSI 81R functions.

Two and more independent frequency stages

There are two separately adjustable frequency stages:f>< and f><><. The two
stages can be configured for either overfrequency or underfrequency usage. All
the stages have definite operate time (DT).

P5/EN M/33C 335

Protection Relay Protection functions

Block diagram
Figure 263 - Block diagram of the over and under frequency protection
(ANSI 81)

f >
& Start
& Register
event
>
< Trip
< t
Block &
& Register
event

U12
U23 MAX <
U31

f>< LV block Mode t>< Enable

events P533P6A

Characteristics
Table 81 - Setting and characteristics of the over and under frequency
protection stages f>< and f><><

Setting/characteristics Values
(description/label)

Pick-up value/f><

Frequency measuring area 10 - 72 Hz

Setting range 40.0 - 70.0 Hz

Reset ratio 20 mHz ± 5 mHz

Resolution 0.01 Hz
Accuracy ±0.01 Hz

Operation delay/t><

Setting range 0.10 - 300.0 s

Resolution 0.02 s
Accuracy ±1% or ±20 ms

Low voltage blocking/LV block 54

Setting range 30%Un- 100%Un

Reset ratio 100%

Resolution 1%

Accuracy ±2%

Characteristic times
Start time < 100 ms / 95 ms 55, typically 80 ms

Disengaging time < 120 ms / 135 ms 55

Overshoot time < 70 ms

Setting group

Number 4

54. Common setting for setting group 1, 2, 3, 4.

55. The 2nd value is only for high speed high break digital outputs.

336 P5/EN M/33C

Protection functions Protection Relay

Underfrequency (ANSI 81U)

Description
The underfrequency protection function (ANSI code 81U) is used for detection of
an abnormally low frequency compared to the rated frequency to monitor power
supply quality. The protection may be used for overall tripping or load shedding.

Self blocking at low voltage

The protection is blocked when the biggest of the three line-to-line voltages is
below the low-voltage block limit setting (LVBlk). This setting is common to all the
groups and stages of ANSI 81, ANSI 81U and ANSI 81R functions.

Two and more independent underfrequency stages

There are two separately adjustable stages. By using the two thresholds of the
underfrequency protection function, f>< and f><>< (with the Comparator mode
parameter set to "<"), two other underfrequency protection stages can be used.

Block diagram
Figure 264 - Block diagram of the underfrequency protection function (ANSI
81U)

f <
& Start
& Register
event
Block
t Trip
U12
U23 MAX < Register
&
U31 event

f< LV block t< Enable

events P533P5A

P5/EN M/33C 337

Protection Relay Protection functions

Characteristics
Table 82 - Setting and characteristics of the underfrequency protection
stages f<, f<<

Setting/characteristics Values
(description/label)

Pick-up value/f<

Frequency measuring area 10 - 72 Hz

Setting range 40.0 - 64.0 Hz

Hysteresis 20 mHz ± 5 mHz

Resolution 0.01 Hz
Accuracy ±0.01 Hz

Operation delay/t<

Setting range 0.10 - 300.0 s

Resolution 0.01 s
Accuracy ±1% or ±20 ms

Low voltage blocking/LV block 56

Setting range 30%Un- 100%Un

Reset ratio 100%

Resolution 1%

Accuracy ±2%

Characteristic times
Start time < 100ms / 95 ms 57, typically 80 ms

Disengaging time < 100 ms / 115 ms 57

Overshoot time < 70 ms

Setting group

Number 4

56. Common setting for setting group 1, 2, 3, 4.

57. The 2nd value is only for high speed high break digital outputs.

338 P5/EN M/33C

Protection functions Protection Relay

Rate of change of frequency (ANSI 81R)

Description
Frequency deviations result from the imbalance between the power generation
and power loads. The Rate of Change of Frequency (ROCOF) (ANSI code 81R) is
decided by the system inertia constant, severity of electric power unbalance,
system damping constant and various other parameters. Sometimes the
significant electric power deficiency in the separated subsystem (islanding
condition) could cause a large frequency decay in a short time. If corrective
measures (such as load shedding) are not taken quickly, the frequency may drop
below the minimum system operating level and cause a widespread network
collapse.
Compared with the under frequency protection (ANSI 81/81U), the protection
based on the Rate of Change of Frequency (ROCOF) can forecast a severe
frequency decay and trigger fast corrective measures before the frequency drops
to below the minimum system operating level.
So, the Rate of Change of Frequency (ROCOF) protection function is normally
used along with underfrequency protection in order to trigger load shedding where
the frequency is falling too quickly. It can also be used to detect loss of mains
where local generation is suddenly disconnected from the power system. The
calculation of the rate of change of frequency is based on the positive sequence
voltage.
The protection function operates:
• When the rate of change of frequency df/dt is higher than the start value
according to the mode selected. Decreasing frequency (Negative), increasing
frequency (Positive) or both increasing or decreasing (Either).
• The line to line voltage must be greater than a minimum settable threshold to
ensure the validity of the df/dt signal.

Self blocking at low voltage

The protection is blocked when the biggest of the three line-to-line voltages is
below the low-voltage block limit setting (LVBlk). This setting is common to all the
groups and stages of ANSI 81 and ANSI 81U functions.

Block diagram
Figure 265 - ROCOF function structure overview

df/dt >
≥1

<
Start

& Register
event
U12
U23 MAX < &
t
Operate
U31

& Register
Block event

df/dt df/dt LV block Mode t> Enable events P533F8A

P5/EN M/33C 339

Protection Relay Protection functions

Characteristics
Table 83 - Setting and characteristics of the rate of change of frequency
protection stages df/dt> and df/dt>>

Settings/characteristics Values
(description/label)

Direction of change/Mode

Options Negative; Positive; Either

Pick-up value/df/dt>

Setting range 0.1 - 10.0 Hz/s

Resolution 0.1 Hz/s

Accuracy < 0.05 Hz/s if df/dt < 5 Hz/s;
±2% for the upper range;

Reset ratio < 0.05 Hz/s or < 5% of the pick-up setting

Low voltage blocking/LV block 58

Setting range 30%Un - 100%Un

Reset ratio 100%

Resolution 1%

Accuracy ±2%

Operation delay/t>

Setting range 0.05 s - 10 s

Resolution 0.01 s
Accuracy ±2% ± 30 ms

Characteristic times
Start time < 135 ms / 130 ms 59 for df/dt > 0.1 Hz/s
< 170 ms / 165 ms 59 for df/dt = 0.1 Hz/s
Disengaging time < 210 ms / 225 ms 59

Overshoot time < 70 ms

Setting group

Number 4

58. Common setting for setting group 1, 2, 3, 4.

59. The 2nd value is only for high speed high break digital outputs.

340 P5/EN M/33C

Protection functions Protection Relay

Lockout relay (ANSI 86)

Description
The ANSI 86 function traditionally performed by lockout relays may be ensured by
Easergy P5 protection relay using programmable logic, with latching of Global trip
signal, which is used to inhibit of closing order, until the cause of tripping
disappears and is acknowledged by the user.
By default, Slot B DO2 is configured for lockout feature.

Figure 266 - Default programmable logic of lockout relay (ANSI 86)

Latch function
This feature can also be programmed for outputs in the Output Matrix setting view.
Any protection stage start or trip, digital input, logic output, alarm and GOOSE
signal connected to the following outputs can be latched when required:
• Output contacts DOs
• LEDs on the local panel
• Virtual outputs VO1- VO20

Figure 267 - I> trip and I>> trip signals locked out with DO (B) and DO (C),
respectively

NOTE: The latched signal is identified with a dot and circle in the matrix signal
line crossing.

The lockout can be released through the local panel with the key, or via the
eSetup Easergy Pro. See Releasing latches, page 381.

P5/EN M/33C 341

Protection Relay Protection functions

Programmable stages (ANSI 99)

Description
For special applications the user can built their own detection stages by selecting
the signal to be supervised and the comparison mode. This is not to be confused
with programmable IDMT curves and allows the user to trigger an event from a
selection of signals and select the type, level and timing to suit the application.
The following parameters are available:
• Priority
If operate times less than 80 milliseconds are needed, select 10 ms. For
operate times under one second, 20 ms is recommended. For longer
operation times and THD signals, 100 ms is recommended.
• Coupling A
The selected supervised signal in “>” and “<” mode. The available signals are
shown in Available signals to be supervised by the programmable stages,
page 343.
• Coupling B
The selected supervised signal in "Diff" and "AbsDiff" mode. This selection
becomes available once "Diff" or "AbsDiff" is chosen for Coupling A.
• Timebase for input value A (B)
The timebase of the selected supervised signal can be set to "Instant",
"200ms", "1min", or "demand". When the timebase "demand" is selected, the
demand window is set in the Demand values view of the Measurements
menu.
• Compare condition
Compare mode. ‘>’ for over or ‘<’ for under comparison, “Diff” and “AbsDiff”
for comparing Coupling A and Coupling B.
• AbsDiff
Coupling A – coupling B. The stage activates if the difference is greater than
the start setting.
• Diff
Coupling A – coupling B. The stage activates if the sign is positive and the
difference greater than the start setting.
• Pick-up value
Limit of the stage. The available setting range and the unit depend on the
selected signal.
• Operation delay
Definite time operation delay
• Hysteresis
Dead band (hysteresis).
• No Compare limit for mode <
Only used with compare mode under (‘<’). This is the limit to start the
comparison. Signal values under NoCmp are not regarded as fault. This
allows users to disregard low values that could be caused by noise or dead
busbars.
The No Compare limit for mode < value can only be set successfully when it is
lower than all the start values of 4 setting groups, which means when it is greater
than any start value in any setting group, it can not be set successfully, even if the
setting group is not activated.

342 P5/EN M/33C

Protection functions Protection Relay

Available signals
Table 84 - Available signals to be supervised by the programmable stages

Signals Description

IL1, IL2, IL3 Phase currents

I0 Earth/ground fault current

I0’ Very sensitive earth/ground fault current

I0 CSH CSH earth/ground fault current

U12, U23, U31 Line-to-line voltages

VL1, VL2, VL3 Line-to-neutral voltages

U12y Line-to-line reference voltage taken from other side of the CB for
synchro-check scheme

U0 Neutral displacement voltage

I0Calc Calculated value of earth/ground fault current

I1 Positive sequence current

I2 Negative sequence current

I2/I1 Relative negative sequence current

U1 Positive sequence overvoltage

U2 Negative sequence overvoltage

U2/U1 Relative negative sequence voltage

Avg Uphase Average phase voltage

Avg Uline Average line voltage

THDIL1 Total harmonic distortion of IL1

THDIL2 Total harmonic distortion of IL2
THDIL3 Total harmonic distortion of IL3
THDVL1 Total harmonic distortion of input VL1

THDVL2 Total harmonic distortion of input VL2

THDVL3 Total harmonic distortion of input VL3

IL1rms RMS value of current phase 1

IL2rms RMS value of current phase 2

IL3rms RMS value of current phase 3

I0rms RMS value of earth/ground current

I0’rms RMS value of very sensitive earth/ground current

I0 CSHrms RMS value of CSH earth/ground current

Eight independent stages

The Easergy P5 protection relay has eight independent programmable stages.
Each programmable stage can be enabled or disabled according to the
application.

P5/EN M/33C 343

Protection Relay Measurement functions

Measurement functions
Primary, secondary and per unit scaling
All measurement values are shown as primary values although the Easergy P5
protection relay is connected with its analogue voltage and current inputs to
secondary signals. Some measurement values are shown as relative values in per
unit or percent. Almost all pick-up setting values are using relative scaling.
The scaling is done using the rated values of VTs and CTs, or LPVTs and LPCTs
depending on the selected model order option.

Scaling settings
The scaling settings define the characteristics of measurement transformers
connected to the Easergy P5 protection relay and determine the correct
adaptation and performance of the metering and protection functions.
They are accessed via:
• eSetup Easergy Pro or web HMI Scaling view in General menu
• on local panel in the CT- VT view of the General menu
The scaling parameters are listed in List of scaling parameters, page 344.

Table 85 - List of scaling parameters

Scaling parameters Description Selection 60 Value

Inp/CT primary Rated primary phase current of CT CT 10 A to 20 kA

Nominal current LPCT K x Ipr

(automatically calculated)

Ins/CT secondary Rated secondary phase current CT 1 A or 5 A

of CT
Ipr LPCT rated current corresponding LPCT 10 A to 5 kA
to 22.5 mV at the secondary

K Current factor LPCT 0.25 - 0.50 - 1.00 - 1.25 - 1.33 -

2.00 - 2.50 - 3.20 - 4.00 - 5.00 -
6.30 - 6.66 - 10 - 16 - 20 - 25 -
31.5
Number of Number of CT CT IL1/IL2/IL3, or IL1/IL3
connected phase CT

In0p Rated primary residual current of CT Calculated 10 A to 20 kA (see Inp)

CSH core balance CT 2 A or 20 A

according to the input selected

Standard earth/ground fault CT 1 A or 20 kA

In0s Rated secondary residual current of Calculated 1 A or 5 A (seeIns)

CT
CSH core balance CT -

Standard earth/ground fault CT 1 A, 2 A, 5A

In0p' Rated primary residual current of CT Very sensitive earth/ground CT 1 A or 20 kA

primary

In0s' Rated secondary residual current of Very sensitive earth/ground CT 1 A fixed

CT secondary

VT type 61 VT type LPVT (fixed)

Unp Rated primary voltage of transformer VT 75 V to 500 kV

Nominal voltage LPVT 75 V to 500 kV

60. Depending on the model number option.

61. Only available for LPVT board

344 P5/EN M/33C

Measurement functions Protection Relay

Table 85 - List of scaling parameters (Continued)

Scaling parameters Description Selection 62 Value

Uns Rated secondary voltage of VT 75 V to 200 V

transformer
Upr LPVT rated voltage corresponding LPVT 50 to 500,000 V
to 3,25/√3 mV at the secondary

K Voltage factor LPVT 0.25 to 1.5

VL1MagCor 63 VL1 magnitude correction LPVT 0.9000 to 1.1000

VL1AngCor 63 VL1 Angle correction LPVT -5.0000 to 5.0000

VL2MagCor 63 VL2 magnitude correction LPVT 0.9000 to 1.1000

VL2AngCor 63 VL2 Angle correction LPVT -5.0000 to 5.0000

VL3MagCor 63 VL3 magnitude correction LPVT 0.9000 to 1.1000

VL3AngCor 63 VL3 Angle correction LPVT -5.0000 to 5.0000

VL1yMagCor 63 VL1y magnitude correction LPVT 0.9000 to 1.1000

VL1yAngCor 63 VL1y Angle correction LPVT -5.0000 to 5.0000

VL2yMagCor 63 VL2y magnitude correction LPVT 0.9000 to 1.1000

VL2yAngCor 63 VL2y Angle correction LPVT -5.0000 to 5.0000

Un0p Rated primary residual voltage of VT Same setting as the rated primary
transformer voltage of transformer

LPVT Same setting as the rated primary

voltage of transformer

Un0s Rated secondary residual voltage VT 75 V to 200 V

of transformer
Phase rotation Phase sequence selection 1 - 2 - 3 or 1 - 3 - 2

Voltage Usage of voltage inputs for phase VT 3LN + U0, 3LN, 2LL + U0, 3LN /
measurement mode voltage, residual voltage or other LNy, 3LN / LLy, 2LL + U0 + LLy,
additional voltage LL / LLy

LPVT 3LN, 3LN + U0, 3LN / LLy, 3LN /

LNy

fn Nominal frequency of power system 50 Hz or 60 Hz

Power direction Direction of the power flow Outgoing or Incoming

62. Depending on the model number option.

63. When LPVT is installed in the system, a magnitude correction factor and a angle correction factor will be used to compensate the
accuracy. If the LPVT is a resistor divided type, it is recommended to set magnitude to 1 and angle correction factors to 0, but if it is a
capacitor divided type, then these correction factor settings should be configured according to the nameplate of the LPVT sensor.

P5/EN M/33C 345

Protection Relay Measurement functions

Current values

Primary and secondary values

Table 86 - Primary and secondary scaling

Current (CT) Residual current (CT) Current (LPCT)

Residual current Residual current
calculated calculated (LPCT)

Secondary
-> Primary I np I nop Vsec
I pri = Isec ⋅ I0pri = I0sec ⋅ I pri = x Ipr
I ns I nos k x 22.5 mV
Primary
I ns I0sec = I0pri ⋅ I nos
-> Secondary
I pri
Isec = I pri ⋅ Vsec = I × k × 22.5 mV
I np Inop pr

For residual current measured by CSH core balance CTs, only primary values are
considered. CTpri is equal at 2A or 20A according to the connection on the
protection relay.
Examples
1. Secondary to primary (CT)
CT = 500 A / 5 A
If the current on Easergy P5 input is 4 A, then the corresponding primary
current is Ipri = 4 x 500 / 5 = 400 A.
2. Secondary to primary (LPCT)
LPCT = 100 A / 22.5 mV
If the voltage on the LPCT input is 30 mV, then the corresponding primary
current is Ipri = 30 / 22.5 x 100 = 136 A, whatever is K.
With K = 0.25, Vsec corresponds to 136 / (100 x 0.25) = 5.44 In.
3. Primary to secondary (CT)
CT = 500 A / 5 A
If Easergy P5 displays Ipri = 100 A, then the injected current is
Isec = 100 x 5 / 500 = 1 A.
4. Primary to secondary (LPCT)
LPCT = 100 A / 22.5 mV
If Easergy P5 displays Ipri = 640 A, then the injected current is
Vsec = 640 / 100 x 22.5 = 144 mV, whatever is K.
With K = 3.2, Vsec corresponds to 640 / (100 x 3.2) = 2 In.

346 P5/EN M/33C

Measurement functions Protection Relay

Per unit [pu] values

Table 87 - Per unit [pu] scaling

Phase current Phase current Residual current Residual current

(CT) scaling (LPCT) scaling (I0, I0', I0Calc 3CT) (CSH) scaling
scaling

I sec I sec
I pu = Ipu = Vsec / ( k x 22.5) I pu = -
Ins Ins
Amp -> Per unit

Ipri I pri Ipri Ipri

Ipu = Ipu = Ipu = Ipu =
Inp I pr k
X
Inp Inp

Isec = Ipu . Ins Isec= Ipu x k x 22.5 Isec = Ipu . Ins

-

Per unit -> Amps

Ipri = Ipu . Inp Ipri = Ipu x k x Ipr Ipri = Ipu . Inp Ipri = Ipu . Inp

Examples
1. Secondary to per unit for phase current (CT)
CT = 750 A / 5 A
If the current injected is 7 A, then the per unit current is
Ipu = 7 / 5 = 1.4 In = 140%.
2. Per unit to secondary for phase current (CT)
CT = 750 A / 5 A
If the protection setting is 2In = 200%, then the corresponding secondary
current is Isec = 2 x 5 = 10 A.
3. Secondary to per unit for phase current (LPCT)
LPCT = 100 A / 22.5 mV with K = 3.2
If the Easergy P5 protection relay displays Ipri = 640 A, then the injected
voltage is
Vsec corresponds to 640 / (100 x 3.2) = 2 In.
4. Primary to per unit for phase current (LPCT)
LPCT rated current = 100 A with LPCT Current factor k = 2 (45 mV at the
secondary)
If the primary current is 150 A (33.75 mV at the secondary), then the per unit
current (voltage) is Ipu = 150/200 = 33.75/45 = 0.75 In.
5. Per unit to primary and secondary value (LPCT)
LPCT rated current = 100 A with LPCT Current factor = 10
If protection setting is 1.5 In, the corresponding secondary voltage is
Vsec = 1.5 x 10 x 22.5 = 337.5 mV,
and the corresponding primary current is
Ipri = 1.5 x 100 x 10 = 1.5 kA.
6. Secondary to per unit for earth/ground fault current (CT)
CT0 = 750 A / 1 A
If for standard and very sensitive earth/ground fault inputs or phase current
input (3 CT calculation) the current is 30 mA, then the per unit current is
Ipu = 0.03 / 1 = 0.03In0.
7. Per unit to secondary for earth/ground fault current (CT)
CT0 = 50 A / 1 A

P5/EN M/33C 347

Protection Relay Measurement functions

If for standard and very sensitive earth/ground fault inputs or phase current
input (3 CT calculation) the protection setting is 10%In0, then the
corresponding Isec = 0.1 x 1 = 100 mA.

Voltage values

Rated phase and residual voltage inputs

Voltage transformer scaling is always based on the line-to-line voltages in all
voltage measurements modes.
The rated phase and residual voltage inputs are defined as below:

Table 88 - Voltage rating (VT)

VT VT ratio Value for 1 pu or 100%

connection
primary secondary LL LN U1 U2 U0

3 LN Unp/√3 Uns/√3 Unp Unp/√3 Unp/√3 Unp/√3 Unp/√3

1 LL Unp Uns Unp - - - -

2 LL Unp Uns Unp Unp/√3 Unp/√3 Unp/√3 -

Broken delta Unp/√3 Un0s/√3 - - - - Unp/√3

LNy Unp/√3 Uny/√3 - Unp/√3 - - -

LLy Unp Uny Unp - - - -

NOTE: U1 and U2 are respectively the positive and the negative sequence
voltages. U0 is the residual voltage (zero-sequence voltage x3).

Table 89 - Voltage rating (LPVT)

Connection LPVT LPVT LPVT Value for 1 pu or 100%

primary secon- nominal
dary voltage

LL LN U1 U2 U0
3LN Upr/√3 3.25V/√3 Unp/√3 Unp Unp/√3 Unp/√3 Unp/√3 Unp/√3

Broken Un0p/√3 Un0s/√3 - - - - - Un0p/√3

delta 64
LLY Upr 3.25V/√3 Unpy/√3 Unpy - - - -

64. possible only with VT + LPVT adapter

348 P5/EN M/33C

Measurement functions Protection Relay

Primary and secondary scaling of line-to-line voltages

Table 90 - Primary and secondary scaling of line-to-line voltages

line-to-line voltage Line-to-neutral Line-to-neutral

measurement (LL) voltage voltage
with VT measurement (LN) measurement with
with VT LPVT
Secondary –> Primary
VT pri VTpri VT
Upri = Usec ⋅ Upri = 3 ⋅ Usec ⋅ Upri = 3.25 pri
VTsec VTsec VTsec
Primary –> Secondary
VTsec U pri VTsec
Usec =
U pri 3.25
⋅
Usec = Upri ⋅ Usec = ⋅
VTpri 3 VT pri VTpri 3

Examples
1. Secondary to primary
Line-to-line voltage measurement mode (VT)
VT = 12000 V / 110 V
If voltage connected to the Easergy P5 input V1, V2 or V3 = 100 V, then
primary voltage is Upri = 100 x 12000 / 110 = 10909 V.
Line-to-neutral voltage measurement mode (VT)
VT = 12000 V / 110 V
If the three phase symmetric voltage magnitude is 60 V, then the primary
voltage is Upri = √3 x 60 x 12000 / 110 = 11336 V.
2. Primary to secondary
Line-to-line voltage measurement mode (VT)
VT = 12000 V / 110 V
If the Easergy P5 protection relay displays Upri = 10910 V, then the secondary
voltage is Usec = 10910 x 110 / 12000 = 100 V.
Line-to-neutral voltage measurement mode (VT)
VT = 12000 V / 110 V
If the Easergy P5 protection relay displays
U12 = U23 = U31 = 10910 V for a symmetric voltage system, then the
secondary voltages at V1, V2 and V3 are
Usec = 10910 / √3 x 110 / 12000 = 57.7 V.
3. Line-to-neutral voltage measurement mode (LPVT)
LPVT = 20 kV/3.25 V with k = 0.5
If the Easergy P5 protection relay displays
U12 = U23 = U31 = 11 kV for a symmetric voltage system, then the secondary
voltages V1, V2, and V3 are
Vsec = 11000 / 20000 x 3.25 / √3 = 1.032 V.

P5/EN M/33C 349

Protection Relay Measurement functions

Per unit [pu] scaling of line-to-line voltages

One per unit = 1 pu = 1 x Un = 100%, where Un = rated voltage of the VT.

Table 91 - Per unit [pu] scaling of line-to-line voltages

Line-to-line voltage Line-to-neutral Line-to-neutral

measurement (LL) voltage voltage
with VT measurement (LN) measurement with
with VT LPVT

Upri
Upu =
k x Upr
Usec U U sec U
Voltage –> Per unit
Upu = = pri Upu = 3 ⋅ = 3 ⋅ pri
VTsec VTpri VTsec VTpri
Usec
Upu = x 3
k 3.25
x

VTsec Upu x k x 3.25

Usec = Upu ⋅ VTsec Usec = Upu ⋅ Usec =
3 3
Per unit –> Voltage

VTpri
Upri = Upu ⋅ VTpri Upri = Upu ⋅ Upri = Upu x k x Upr
3

Examples
1. Secondary to per unit
Line-to-line voltage measurement mode
VT = 12000 V / 110 V
If the voltage input of V1 or V2 is 100 V, then the per unit voltage is
Upu = 100 / 110 = 1.00 pu = 91%.
Line-to-neutral voltage measurement mode
VT = 12000 V / 110 V
If the three symmetric line-to-neutral injected to the voltage inputs are 63.5 V,
then the per unit voltage is Upu = √3 x 63.5 / 110 = 1.00 pu = 100%.
2. Per unit to secondary
Line-to-line voltage measurement mode
VT = 12000 V /110 V
If the Easergy P5 protection relay displays 1.00 pu = 100%, then the
secondary voltage is Usec = 1.00 x 110 = 110 V.
Line-to-neutral voltage measurement mode
VT = 12000 V / 110 V
If the Easergy P5 protection relay displays 1.00 pu = 80%, then the three
symmetric line-to-neutral voltages injected to the inputs are
Usec = 0.8 x 110 / √3 = 50.8 V.
3. Per unit to secondary for voltage measurement with LPVT
LPVT = 20 kV / 3.25 V with k = 0.8
If the line-to-neutral voltage displayed is 0.5xUn, the secondary value injected
to the Easergy P5 protection relay is 0.5 x 0.8 x 3.25 / √3 = 0.75 V.

350 P5/EN M/33C

Measurement functions Protection Relay

Per unit [pu] scaling of residual voltage

Table 92 - Per unit [pu] scaling of residual voltage

Residual Residual voltage calculated Residual voltage calculated

voltage with VT with LPVT
measured
Voltage ->
per unit Usec 1 1
Upu = Upu = V 1 + V2 + V3 Upu = V1 + V2 + V3
Unos Uns sec k x 3.25 sec

Upri 1
Upu = Upu = V1 + V2 + V3
Unop k Upr sec

Per unit
-> voltage
Usec = Upu ⋅ Unos V1 + V2 + V3 sec = Upu ⋅ Uns V1 + V2 + V3 sec
= Upr x k x 3.25

Upri = Upu ⋅ Unop V1 + V2 + V3 pri = Upu ⋅ Unp V1 + V 2 + V3 pri = Upu x k x Upr

Examples
1. Secondary to per unit
Residual voltage measurement (VT)
U0sec = 110 V (this is a configuration value corresponding to U0 at full ground
fault.)
If the voltage connected to the device's input V3 is 22 V, then the per unit
voltage is Upu = 22 / 110 = 0.20 pu = 20%.
Residual voltage calculated (VT)
VT = 12000 V / 110 V
If the voltage connected to the relay's input V1 is 38.1 V, while V2 = V3 = 0,
then the per unit voltage is
Upu= (38.1 + 0 + 0) / ( √3 x 110) = 0.20 pu = 20%.
2. Per unit to secondary
Voltage measurement mode is "2LL + U0" (VT)
U0sec = 110 V (this is a configuration value corresponding to U0 at full earth/
ground fault.)
If the relay displays U0 = 20%, then the secondary voltage at input V3 is
Usec = 0.20 x 110 = 22 V.
3. Per unit to secondary
Residual voltage calculated (VT)
VT = 20 kV /110 V
If the Easergy P5 protection relay displays U0 = 20% and if V2 = V3 = 0, then
the secondary voltage at V1 is Usec = √3 x 0.2 x 110 = 38.1 V.
Residual voltage calculated (LPVT)
LPVT = 20 kV / √3 / 3.25 V / √3 with k = 1.5
If Easergy P5 protection relay displays 30% and V1 = V3 = 0, then the
secondary voltage of V2 is Usec = 0.3 x 1.5 x 3.25 / 1.732 = 0.844 V.

P5/EN M/33C 351

Protection Relay Measurement functions

Reading of measurements
All measurement values can be read out via:
• Local panel: Measurements menu ( ) and on the Mimic screen if they were
configured with eSetup Easergy Pro
• eSetup Easergy Pro: Measurements menu
• Communication interface (if the used protocol provide this)
• EcoStruxure Power Device application
The refresh interval, on automatic cyclic updates, is less than 1 second typically.

Phase currents
Easergy P5 measures the fundamental and RMS values of phase current inputs
using 1A CTs, 5A CTs, or LPCTs:

Table 93 - Measurements of fundamental and RMS values of phase current

Value Description

Fundamental value
IL1 Fundamental value of phase 1 current IL1

IL2 Fundamental value of phase 2 current IL2

IL3 Fundamental value of phase 3 current IL3

RMS value
IL1rms RMS value of phase 1 current IL1

IL2rms RMS value of phase 2 current IL2

IL3rms RMS value of phase 3 current IL3

The RMS current measurement takes into account harmonics up to the 15th. The
calculation is done as follows:
2 2 2
IRMS = If 1 + If 2 + ... +If 15 P533Z1A

Table 94 - Characteristics for measuring phase current

Value Description

Magnitude

Measurement CT: 0.005In - 60In

range LPCT: 0.05In - 45In

Units A
Resolution 1A
Accuracy ± 0.5% for measurement value of 1.0In;
± 1% for range 0.3In to 1.5In;
± 2% for range 0.1In to 0.3In

Phase angle 65

Range -180° - +180°

Resolution 0.1°
Accuracy 0.5° with IL > 0.1In

65. Phase angle can only be detected when current is over 100 mA.

352 P5/EN M/33C

Measurement functions Protection Relay

Residual current
Easergy P5 protection relay measures the fundamental value of the residual
current connected to the standard earth/ground fault input (I0) or alternatively to
the very sensitive earth/ground fault input (I0').
The residual current is calculated by the vector sum of the 3 phase currents or
directly measured with a conventional CT or CSH core balance CT.

Table 95 - Characteristics for measuring residual current

Characteristics Range

Measurement range I0 calculated: 0.005In to 60In

I0 measured by CSH core balance CT: 0.005In0 to 42In0
I0 measured by 1A/5A CT: 0.005In0 to 30In0
I0' measured by 1A CT: 0.005In0 to 20In0

Units A
Resolution CSH: 0.01 A
1 A CT: 0.001 A
1A/5A CT: 0.01 A
Accuracy, I0 < 0.02In0: ± 2%
0.02In0 to 0.05In0: ± 1%
> 0.05In0: ± 0.5%
Accuracy, I0' < 0.002In0: ± 2%
0.002In0 to 0.005In0: ± 1%
> 0.005In0: ± 0.5%

Frequency
Easergy P5 protection relay determines the frequency based on the samples of an
available voltage or current signal. The frequency determination will be
automatically adapted to the availability and quality of the related signal inputs:
• Based on positive sequence voltage U1 or
• Based on any single line-to-line voltage or line-to-neutral voltage
• Based on currents when the voltage is not measured or under 15%Un.
The frequency is not measured if:
• The max of three line-to-line or line-to neutral voltage or positive sequence
voltage U1 is less than 15% of Un.
• The max of three currents or positive sequence current (I1) is less than
10%In
The following table provides an overview of the characteristics for frequency
measurement:
Table 96 - Characteristics for frequency measurement

Characteristics Range

Measurement range 10 Hz - 72 Hz

Units Hz
Resolution 0.001 Hz
Accuracy ± 0.01 Hz

P5/EN M/33C 353

Protection Relay Measurement functions

Voltages
The Easergy P5 measures the fundamental and RMS values of line-to-line
voltages and line-to-neutral voltages.

Table 97 - Measurements of line-to-line and line-to-neutral voltages

Value Description

VL1 Fundamental value of the line-to-neutral voltage on phase 1

VL2 Fundamental value of the line-to-neutral voltage on phase 2

VL3 Fundamental value of the line-to-neutral voltage on phase 3

U12 Fundamental value of the line-to-line voltage between phase 1 and phase 2

U23 Fundamental value of the line-to-line voltage between phase 2 and phase 3

U31 Fundamental value of the line-to-line voltage between phase 3 and phase 1

VL1rms RMS value of the line-to-neutral voltage on phase 1

VL2rms RMS value of the line-to-neutral voltage on phase 2

VL3rms RMS value of the line-to-neutral voltage on phase 3

U12rms RMS value of the line-to-line voltage between phase 1 and phase 2

U23rms RMS value of the line-to-line voltage between phase 2 and phase 3

U31rms RMS value of the line-to-line voltage between phase 3 and phase 1

These voltages are measured with the three analogue voltage inputs VL1, VL2 and
VL3.
A 4th analogue voltage input V4 is used to measure an additional line-to-line
voltage or line-to-neutral voltage, which is usually used as a reference voltage for
the synchronisation checking function.
Uy : fundamental value of the additional line-to-line voltage
Uyrms : RMS value of the additional line-to-line voltage calculated as follows:
2 2 2
VRMS = Vf 1 + Vf 2 + ... +Vf 15 P533Z2A

For LL connections, the three line-to-line voltages are directly measured and the
line-to-neutral voltages are calculated taking into account the residual voltage
measurement when it is measured. Otherwise, the calculation considers a
balanced power system.
For LN connections, the three line-to-neutral voltages are directly measured and
the three line-to-line voltages are calculated.

Table 98 - The voltage modes and the corresponding measurements and

calculated values

Voltage mode Sensors Voltages Voltages Additional

measured calculated voltages

3LN VT, LPVT VL1, VL2, VL3 U12, U23, U31

3LN+U0 VT VL1, VL2, VL3 U12, U23, U31

3LN/LNy VT, LPVT VL1, VL2, VL3, U12, U23, U31, VL1'
VL1y 66 U12y

3LN/LLy VT, LPVT VL1, VL2, VL3, U12, U23, U31 U12'
U12y 66

2LL+U0 VT U12, U23 U31, VL1, VL2, VL3

66. Used for synchro-check function.

354 P5/EN M/33C

Measurement functions Protection Relay

Table 98 - The voltage modes and the corresponding measurements and

calculated values (Continued)

Voltage mode Sensors Voltages Voltages Additional

measured calculated voltages

2LL+U0+LLy VT U12, U23, U12y 67 VL1, VL2, VL3 U12'

LL/LLy VT U12, U12y 67 VL1, VL2, VL3, U23, U12'

U31 68

Depending on the phase rotation, the line-to-line values are defined according to
1-2-3 network: line-to-neutral and line-to-line voltages, page 355 and 1-3-2
network: line-to-neutral and line-to-line voltages, page 355:
• For voltage between phases 1 and 2:

U12 = VL1 - VL2 P533Z3A

• For voltage between phases 2 and 3:

U23 = VL2 - VL3 P533Z4A

• For voltage between phases 3 and 1:

U31 = VL3 - VL1 P533Z5A

Figure 268 - 1-2-3 network: line-to- Figure 269 - 1-3-2 network: line-to-
neutral and line-to-line voltages neutral and line-to-line voltages

VL3 VL2

U31 U12

VL1 VL1

U23 U23

U12 U31

VL3
VL2 P533MLA
P533MMA

Table 99 - Characteristics for measuring voltage

Characteristics Range

Magnitude

Measurement range 0.01Un to 1.5Un, or

0 to 300V secondary

Units V
Resolution 1V
Accuracy ± 5% from 1%Un to 10%Un
± 2% from 10%Un to 20%Un
± 1% from 20%Un to 50%Un
± 0.5% at 50%Un and above
Phase angle

Range -180° - +180°

Resolution 0.1°
Accuracy 0.5° with VL > 0.1Un and IL > 0.1In

67. Used for synchro-check function.

68. Considering a balanced power system.

P5/EN M/33C 355

Protection Relay Measurement functions

Residual voltage
The Easergy P5 protection relay measures the fundamental value of a residual
voltage U0 by an open star/delta voltage transformer. If such a VT is not available,
the protection relay is able to calculate U0 by taking the internal sum of the three
line-to-neutral voltages:

U0 = VL1 + VL2 + VL3

If the calculation method is used, the measurement can only be considered as
valid if the power system is balanced.
The following table provides an overview of the measuring options:

Table 100 - Residual voltage measuring options

Voltage mode Sensors Measured/Calculated

3LN VT, LPVT U0 calculated 69

3LN+U0 VT U0 measured
3LN/LLy VT, LPVT U0 calculated 69

3LN/LNy VT, LPVT U0 calculated

2LL+U0 VT U0 measured
2LL+U0+LLy VT U0 measured

LL/LLy VT U0 not available

The following table lists the characteristics for measuring residual voltage:

Characteristics Range

Measurement range 1 V to 300 V secondary

Units V; kV

Resolution 1V
Accuracy 1 V to 10 V secondary: ± 5%;
10 V to 20 V secondary: ± 2%;
20 V to 50 V secondary: ± 1%;
> 50 V secondary: ± 0.5%

69. Considering a balanced power system

356 P5/EN M/33C

Measurement functions Protection Relay

Power and power factor

Active, reactive, apparent power
The Easergy P5 protection relay calculates the active, reactive and apparent
power values of the power system based on the fundamental or RMS values of
the primary three phase currents and voltages.
All power values are determined separately for each phase based on the
fundamental or RMS values of related phase current and voltage signal
depending on the availability.
The power values are generally calculated as follows:
• Active power = 3⋅V⋅I⋅cosφ
• Reactive power = 3⋅V⋅I⋅sinφ
• Apparent power = 3⋅V⋅I
According to the transformers used, power calculations may be based on the 2 or
3 wattmeter method.
The 2 wattmeter method is only accurate when there is no residual current, but it
is not applicable if the neutral is distributed.
The 3 wattmeter method gives an accurate calculation of 3-phase and phase by
phase powers in all cases, regardless of whether or not the neutral is distributed.

Voltage Voltage Voltage Phase P, Q, S Power

measurement transformer connection current calculation per phase
mode connection method P1, P2, P3
Q1, Q2, Q3
S1, S2, S3

3LN VT, LPVT VL1, VL2, VL3 IL1, IL2, IL3 3 wattmeter Available
3LN + U0 with U0/V4
3LN/LLy (optional) IL1, IL3 2 wattmeter Not available
3LN/LNy 70

2LL + U0 VT U32, U12 IL1, IL2, IL3 3 wattmeter Available

2LL + U0 + LLy with U0/V4
IL1, IL3 2 wattmeter Not available
70

LL/LLy VT U12/V4 IL1, IL2, IL3 3 wattmeter Available

IL1, IL3 2 wattmeter Not available

70

Power calculation
The power values are calculated in detail as follows:
• By 3 wattmeter method:
P = VL1 IL1 cos (VL1 IL1) + VL2 IL2 cos (VL2 IL2) + VL3 IL3 cos (VL3 IL3)
P533Z6A

Q = VL1 IL1 sin (VL1 IL1) + VL2 IL2 sin (VL2 IL2) + VL3 IL3 sin (VL3 IL3)
P533Z7A

• By 2 wattmeter method:

P = U12 IL1 cos (U12 IL1) + U32 IL3 cos (U32 IL3)
P533Z8A

Q = U12 IL1 sin (U12 IL1) + U32 IL3 sin (U32 IL3)
P533Z9A

•
2 2
S= P +Q P533ZAA

70. Considering a balanced power system

P5/EN M/33C 357

Protection Relay Measurement functions

According to standard practice, it is considered that: 71

• For the outgoing circuit:
◦ Power supplied by the busbars is positive
◦ Power supplied to the busbars is negative
+direction
of flow

P533MNA

• For the incoming circuit:

◦ Power supplied to the busbars is positive
◦ Power supplied by the busbars is negative

+direction
of flow

P533MOA

Cosφ and power factor

Easergy P5 protection relay calculates:
• cosφ, tanφ, the angle φ and power factor values of the power system.
• cosφ and power factor values of the phase, depending on their availability of
phase current and voltages.
cosφ, tanφ and the angle φ express the phase displacement between the phase
currents and line-to-neutral voltages.
The power factor is defined by:
2 2
Cosφ = P P +Q P533ZBA

The + and - signs of cosφ give the direction of power flow.

The IND (inductive) and CAP (capacitive) indications of the power factor give type
of load.

Power and current direction

This figure shows the concept of three-phase current direction and sign of cosφ
and power factor PF (the absolute value is equal to cosφ, and the indication 'IND'
means inductive i.e. lagging current and 'CAP' means capacitive i.e. leading
current).

71. Choice to be set in the Scaling view of the General menu.

358 P5/EN M/33C

Measurement functions Protection Relay

Figure 270 - Quadrants of voltage/current phasor plane

+90°
II I

cos = cos = +
PF = ind PF= cap
VREF 0°
III I IV

cos = cos = +
PF= cap PF = ind P533MPA

I: Forward capacitive power current is leading

II: Reverse inductive power current is leading

III: Reverse capacitive power current is lagging

IV: Forward inductive power current is lagging

This figure below shows the same concepts on a PQ-power plane.

Figure 271 - Quadrants of power plane

Q
+90°
II I

cos = cos = +
PF= cap PF = ind
S

P 0°
III IV

cos = cos = +
PF = ind PF = cap P533MQA

I: Forward inductive power current is lagging

II: Reverse capacitive power current is lagging

III: Reverse inductive power current is leading

IV: Forward capacitive power current is leading

Table 101 - Power quadrants

Power quadrant Current related Power direction Cosφ Power factor PF

to voltage

+ inductive Lagging Forward + IND

+ capacitive Leading Forward + CAP

- inductive Leading Reverse - IND

- capacitive Lagging Reverse - CAP

P5/EN M/33C 359

Protection Relay Measurement functions

Characteristics
The following tables summarise the characteristics for power measuring:

Table 102 - Characteristics for power measuring (part 1)

Characteristics Active power Reactive power Apparent power

Units kW kvar kVA

Resolution 0.1 kW 0.1 kvar 0.1 kVA
Accuracy ±1% Sn typically 72 xxx xxx

Table 103 - Characteristics for power measuring (part 2)

Characteristics Power factor Cosφ Tanφ Angle φ

Measurement 0 to 1 IND/CAP -1 to +1
range

Resolution 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01

Accuracy 0.01 73 0.01 73

72. Sn = 3UnpIn
73. For measurements at In, Un, cosφ > 0.8.

360 P5/EN M/33C

Measurement functions Protection Relay

Active and reactive energy

The Easergy P5 protection relay measures the following active and reactive
energy values, calculated on basis of the first three voltages and phase currents
IL1, IL2 and IL3 measured according to the related current flow for an outgoing
feeder:
• E+: the accumulated active energy exported
• E-: the accumulated active energy imported
• Eq+: the accumulated reactive energy exported
• Eq-: the accumulated reactive energy imported
It is based on fundamental values or RMS values. The choice is done with the
Energy calculation mode parameter.
The resolution of each energy counter can be defined by setting from 1 K unit to 1
M unit, by setting the number of decimal places of the value calculated.
When the apparent energy counter reaches 1 TVAh, the active and reactive
energy counters reset to zero. To monitor the energy consumption on a feeder, a
dedicated energy counter can be set up over a defined time window of between 10
minutes and 24 hours.
All the energy counter settings can be done:
• with eSetup Easergy Pro in the Energy view of the Measurements menu
• on local panel in the Measurement menu
The accumulated energy values are maintained when the Easergy P5 protection
relay is powered off.

Table 104 - Characteristics of active and reactive energy measuring

Characteristics Active power Reactive power

Measurement range 999999.999 MWh 999999.999 MVArh

Units MWh MVArh

Resolution (settable) 0.001 - 1 MWh 0.001 - 1 MVArh

Accuracy ± 1% typical 74

74. At In, Vnp, cosφ > 0.8

P5/EN M/33C 361

Protection Relay Measurement functions

Harmonics and total harmonic distortion (THD)

The total harmonic distortion (THD) is calculated as a percentage of all the
currents and voltages measured in relation to the base value of the fundamental
frequency.
The device calculates the value from the 2nd to the 15th harmonic of each phase
current and voltage signal separately and as total value.

Figure 272 - THD example screen: THD as a percentage of the voltages

The harmonic distortion is calculated as follows:

15
2
∑ h
=2
THD =
h1 P533ZCA

where
h1 = Fundamental value
h2 - h15 = Harmonics

Example
h1 = 100A, h3 = 10 A, h7 = 3 A, h11 = 8 A

102 + 32 + 82
THD = = 13.15%
100 P533ZDA

For reference, the RMS value is

RMS = 1002 + 102 + 32 + 82 = 100.9 A P533ZEA

362 P5/EN M/33C

Measurement functions Protection Relay

Demand values
The Easergy P5 protection relay calculates average demand values of phase
currents IL1, IL2, IL3 and power values S, P and Q. They are calculated over an
adjustable demand time in a range from 10 to 60 minutes.

Figure 273 - The Demand values view in the Measurements menu in eSetup
Easergy Pro

The parameters used to configure or control the demand values in eSetup

Easergy Pro are the following:

Table 105 - Demand value parameters

Parameter Unit Description

Demand time min Demand time (averaging time)

Fundamental frequency values

IL1da A Demand of phase current IL1

IL2da A Demand of phase current IL2

IL3da A Demand of phase current IL3

Pda kW Demand of active power P

PFda - Demand of power factor PF

Qda kvar Demand of reactive power Q

Sda kVA Demand of apparent power S

RMS values
IL1RMSda A Demand of RMS phase current IL1

IL2RMSda A Demand of RMS phase current IL2

IL3RMSda A Demand of RMS phase current IL3

Prmsda kW Demand of RMS active power P

Qrmsda kvar Demand of RMS reactive power Q

Srmsda kVA Demand of RMS apparent power S

Table 106 - Reseting to zero

Characteristics Range

Demand time 10 min - 60 min

Currents see Phase currents, page 352

Powers see Power and power factor, page 357

P5/EN M/33C 363

Protection Relay Measurement functions

Minimum and maximum values

Minimum and maximum values for many measurements are available through the
user interfaces ( HMI, eSetup Easergy Pro, Web HMI or communications
protocols). Each record of minimum or maximum value includes a time stamp.
This time stamp is reset either when a clear command (ClrMax) is applied or by a
product restart.
The available values are listed in the following table:

Table 107 - Available minimum and maximum values

Min & Max measurement Description

IL1, IL2, IL3 Phase current, fundamental frequency value

IL1RMS, IL2RMS, IL3RMS Phase current, RMS value

I0, I0' Earth/ground fault overcurrent, fundamental value

VL1, VL2, VL3 Voltages, fundamental frequency values

VL1RMS, VL2RMS, VL3RMS Line-to-neutral voltages, RMS value

U12, U23, U31 Line-to-line voltage

U12RMS, U23RMS, U31RMS Line-to-line voltage, RMS value

U0 Neutral voltage displacement, fundamental value

f Frequency

P, Q, S Active, reactive, apparent power

PF Power factor

The clearing parameter "ClrMax" is a common reset for all min. and max. values.

Table 108 - Parameters

Parameter Value Description Note

ClrMax -; Clear Reset all minimum and maximum values Settable 75

A ClrMax command can be initiated as below:

• with "Clear min & max" parameter in the Measurements menu in eSetup
Easergy Pro
• with "Clear min & max" parameter in the Measurements menu in the Web
HMI
• from the local panel with the "Clr Max" parameter
• With a suitably configured DI
• with virtual inputs / outputs according to the setting of the "DI to clear min &
max" parameter
In addition any action that results in a restart of the Easergy P5 protection relay
will also clear the min/max values. This includes power cycling and certain
configuration updates.

75. An editable parameter (password needed).

364 P5/EN M/33C

Measurement functions Protection Relay

Voltage sags and swells

The Easergy P5 protection platform provides many power quality functions that
can be used to evaluate, monitor and alarm on the current power system quality.
Two of the most important power quality functions are the voltage sag and swell
monitoring.
The Easergy P5 protection relay provides separate monitoring logs for sags and
swells. The voltage log is triggered if any voltage input either goes under the sag
limit (U<) or exceeds the swell limit (U>). There are four registers for both sags
and swells in the fault log. Each register will have start time, phase information,
duration, minimum, average and maximum voltage values of each sag and swell
event. Furthermore, there are total number of sags and swells counters as well as
total timers for sags and swells.
The voltage sags and swells monitoring function can be read and set:
• on local panel, in the Voltage sag & swell view of the "U" option in the
Measuring sub-menu
• with eSetup Easergy Pro, in the Voltage sag & swell view of the
Measurements menu

P5/EN M/33C 365

Protection Relay Measurement functions

Table 109 - Setting and characteristics of voltage sags and swells

monitoring

Setting/characteristics Values

Measurement mode
Options Default (same as the scaling setting); L-L; L-N

Voltage sag limit

Setting range 10%Un - 120%Un

Resolution 1%Un

Accuracy ±0.5 V or 3% of the set value

Reset ratio 103%

Voltage swell limit

Setting range 10%Un - 150%Un

Resolution 1%Un

Accuracy ±0.5 V or 3% of the set value

Reset ratio 97%

DT delay time

Setting range 0.06 s to 1.00 s

Resolution 0.02 s
Accuracy ±1% or ±30 ms

Low voltage blocking

Setting range 0 – 50%Un

Resolution 1%Un

Accuracy ±5% of the set value

Maximum time
Setting range 10 s to 1000 s

Resolution 1s
Gap time

Setting range 0.00 s to 5.00 s

Resolution 0.01 s
Characteristic time
Disengaging time < 60 ms

366 P5/EN M/33C

Measurement functions Protection Relay

Temperature
Operation
This function gives the temperature value measured by resistance temperature
detectors (RTDs):
• Platinum Pt100 (100 Ω at 0°C or 32°F) in accordance with the IEC 60751 and
DIN 43760 standards
• Nickel 100 Ω or 120 Ω (at 0°C or 32°F).
Each RTD channel gives one measurement: tx = RTD x temperature.
The function also indicates RTD faults:
• RTD disconnected (t > 205°C or t > 401°F)
• RTD shorted (t < -35°C or t < -31°F).
In the event of a fault, the display of the value is inhibited.
The associated monitoring function generates a maintenance alarm.

Readout
The measurements may be accessed via:
• RTD view of the Measurements menu on the local panel of the Easergy P5
protection relay
• Temperature view of the Measurements menu in eSetup Easergy Pro
• the communication link

Characteristics
Table 110 - Characteristics of temperature measuring

Characteristics Values
Range -30°C to +200°C (-22°F to +392°F)

Resolution 1°C (1°F)

Accuracy ±1°C for +20°C to +140°C (±1.8°F for +68°F to +284°F);

±2°C for -30°C to +20°C (±3.6°F for -22°F to +68°F);
±2°C for +140°C to +200°C (±3.6°F for +284°F to +392°F)

Refresh interval 5 seconds (typical)

Accuracy derating according to wiring (connection in 3-wire mode)

The deviation Δt is proportional to the length of the connector and inversely
proportional to the connector cross-section:

L (km)
Δt () = 2 X 2
S (mm ) P533ZFA

• ±2.1°C/km for a cross-section of 0.93 mm2 (AWG 18)

• ±1°C/km for a cross-section of 1.92 mm2 (AWG 14)

P5/EN M/33C 367

Protection Relay Control functions

Control functions
Digital outputs
Description
Digital outputs are available for control and signalling purposes.
The number of available outputs depends on the number and type of board
options ordered.
The following digital output contact relays are available:
• Slot B
The digital output DO1 is normally opened (NO) contact (and high speed high
break contact for P5x30 only) used for control. The digital output DO2
(Change Over contact) is usually used for control.
The digital output DO3 (Normal Open) is usually used for control.
The digital output DO4 (change over contact) is dedicated to the watchdog
(signalling).
Both the tripping DO2 relay and the watchdog relay have normally open (NO)
or normally closed (NC) contacts. Refer to Selecting the trip command and
examples of use, page 398.
• Slot C, D, E (6I4O option)
The digital outputs DO1 to DO4 (Normal Open single pole single throw) are
for signalling only.
Slot C, D, E (5I5O option)
The digital outputs DO1 and DO2 (Change Over contact single pole double
throw) are usually used for control.
The digital outputs DO3 (Normal Open single pole single throw) are for
control.
The digital outputs DO4 and DO5 are normally opened (NO) contact and high
speed high break contact used for control.
Slot C, D, E (12I4O option)
The digital outputs DO1 to DO4 are independently controlled normally open
signalling contacts with DO1 & DO2 and DO3 & DO4 having a common
connection point.
• Slot D, E (Arc-flash option)
The digital output DO1 (Normal Open) is usually used for control.
The digital output DO2 (Change Over contact single pole double throw) is
usually used for control.
The digital output DO3 (Normal Open single pole single throw) is usually used
for signalling.
The contacts are (SPST) normal open (NO) type, except signal relay DO2
and DO4 (watchdog) which has a changeover contact (SPDT).
The digital outputs can be set in Normal Open or Normal Close position with
eSetup Easergy Pro and Web HMI in the Relays polarity view of the Control
menu.
The status of the digital outputs can be read:
• with eSetup Easergy Pro in the Relays view of the Device/Test menu
• by the local panel in the Digital output Slot x view under the menu option
DO of the Device/Test sub-menu
• EcoStruxure Power Device application
• Web HMI
Label and description texts can be edited with eSetup Easergy Pro or the Web
HMI in Names for output relays view according to the demand. Labels are the

368 P5/EN M/33C

Control functions Protection Relay

short parameter names used on the local panel display and descriptions are the
longer names used by eSetup Easergy Pro (the Names of the output relays view
in the Control menu).
Any internal signal can be connected to the output relays using the output matrix.
An output relay can be configured as latched or non-latched. (see Output Matrix
view in the Matrix menu of eSetup Easergy Pro and Web HMI).

Forced control of digital outputs

For tests purposes, first set the IED Mode to Test:
• with eSetup Easergy Pro in the System info setting view of the General
menu
• by local panel in the Device/Test menu under the Test menu option
See Mode of use for testing purposes, page 176 for more information.

Default numbering of digital outputs

Every option card and slot has default numbering. Below is an example of
Easergy P5x30 showing default numbering of DOs.

Figure 274 - Default numbering of digital outputs for Easergy P5x30

D E A B C
1 1 1 1
2 2 1 2 2 2
3 3 3 3
4 4 3 4 4 4
5 5 5 5
6 6 5 6 6 6
7 7 7 7
8 8 7 8 8 8
9 9 9 9
10 10 10 10
11 11 9 10 11 11
12 12 12 12
13 13 11 12 13 13
14 14 14 14
15 15 13 14 15 15
16 16 16 16
17 17 15 16 17 17
18 18 18 18
19 19 17 18 19 19
20 20 20 20

L M N P
P533NCA

Table 111 - Example of digital outputs numbering

Option boards Slot B Slot C Slot D 76 Slot E 76

No option DO1 - DO3

+ WD
1 x 6I/40 DO1 - DO3 DO1 - DO4
+ WD
2 x 6I/40 DO1 - DO3 DO1 - DO4 DO1 - DO4
+ WD
3 x 6I/40 DO1 - DO3 DO1 - DO4 DO1 - DO4 DO1 - DO4
+ WD
1 x 6I/40 +1 x Arc-flash DO1 - DO3 DO1 - DO4 DO1 - DO3
+ WD
2 x 6I/40 +1 x Arc-flash DO1 - DO3 DO1 - DO4 DO1 - DO3 DO1 - DO4
+ WD
1 x 6I/40 +2 x Arc-flash DO1 - DO3 DO1 - DO4 DO1 - DO3 DO1 - DO3
+ WD

76. For Easergy P5x30 only

P5/EN M/33C 369

Protection Relay Control functions

Characteristics
Table 112 - Characteristics of the digital outputs

Parameter Value Description Note

DO1 - DOn 0; 1 Status of the digital outputs: Editable when IED

mode is set to "Test".
• 0 = Digital output not energised
• 1 = Digital output is set active
The available parameter list depends on
the number and type of the I/O cards.

Mode NO Normal open Editable when IED

NC Normal close mode is set to "Test".
IED mode Normal In Test mode, digital output forcing is Editable parameter
Test enabled for test purposes. (password needed)
Test-block
Name of output relays

Label String of max. Short name for digital outputs on the Editable parameter
10 characters local display. (password needed)
Default is "DO1 - DOx". x is the
maximum number of the digital outputs.

Description String of max. Long name for digital outputs. Editable parameter
32 characters Default is "Digital output 1 - Digital (password needed)
output x". x is the maximum number of
the digital outputs.

370 P5/EN M/33C

Control functions Protection Relay

Digital inputs

CAUTION
FIRE HAZARD
Do not connect power greater than 0.5 W to each digital input for ambient
temperature lower than 70℃ (158℉), or 0.8 W for lower than 45℃ (113℉).
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment
damage.

Digital inputs are available for control purposes. For example, the digital inputs
can provide the position of the circuit breaker and make it possible to change
setting group, block/enable/disable functions, program logic, and indicate object
status.
The number of available inputs depends on the number and type of option boards.
The digital inputs require an external control voltage (AC or DC) and are activated
after the voltage exceeds the pick-up threshold. Deactivation follows when the
voltage drops below the drop-off threshold limit.

Configuring the digital inputs

The digital inputs are set with eSetup Easergy Pro and Web HMI in the Digital
Inputs view of the Control menu. They are not settable on the local panel.

Figure 275 - The Digital inputs setting section in the Digital inputs view

The settable items includes:

• Polarity
• Delay
• On event
• Off event
• Counter
Digital input delay determines the activation and de-activation delay for the digital
input. It is used for both On and Off transitions. Digital inputs behaviour when
delay is set to 1 second, page 372 shows how the digital input behaves when the
delay is set to 1 second.

P5/EN M/33C 371

Protection Relay Control functions

Figure 276 - Digital inputs behaviour when delay is set to 1 second

1s 1s

Voltage
0

Digital input
0 P533NDA

Digital inputs on/off events and alarm pop-up message display can be enabled
and disabled in Digital inputs setting view of eSetup Easergy Pro or Web HMI.
Individual operation counters are located in the same view as well. The maximum
value of the counters is settable and is the same for all counters.
The status of the digital inputs can be read:
• with eSetup Easergy Pro and Web HMI in the Digital Inputs view of the
Control menu
• by local panel in the Digital inputs view of the DI menu option in the Control
menu
• EcoStruxure Power Device application
• Communication according to the protocol
The configuration of the digital inputs in eSetup Easergy Pro is common for all
digital inputs on the same board.

Figure 277 - The DI Configuration section in the Digital inputs view

The digital inputs can be set for the following voltage values with pre-defined
setting values or settable values:
• Universal (by default)
• Standard AC or DC voltages (24 V DC, 48 V DC, 110 V DC, 220 V DC and
220 V AC)
• Customisable AC (settable from 24 to 220 V AC), customisable DC (settable
from 24 to 220 V DC)
Timing diagram of a digital input during pick-up, page 372 and Timing diagram of a
digital input during a drop-off, page 373 below illustrate the timing diagrams of a
digital input during pick-up and drop-off:

Figure 278 - Timing diagram of a digital input during pick-up

Nominal voltage
Pick-up ratio (%)

Input seen as high level

Input seen as low level

Inrush time
P533NEA
Debounce time

372 P5/EN M/33C

Control functions Protection Relay

Figure 279 - Timing diagram of a digital input during a drop-off

Nominal voltage

Drop-off ratio (%)

Holding current

DI high

DI low P533NFA

Label and description texts can be edited with eSetup Easergy Pro according to
the demand. Labels are the short parameter names used on the local panel and
descriptions are the longer names used by eSetup Easergy Pro.
The digital input signals can be connected to the different outputs of the Output
Matrix, Block Matrix, Auto-reclosing Matrix, Object block Matrix views in the Matrix
menu of eSetup Easergy Pro and Web HMI or used in the custom logic function.

Default numbering of digital inputs

Every option card and slot has default numbering. After making any changes to
the numbering, read the settings from the relay after the relay has rebooted.
Below is an example of Easergy P5x30 showing default numbering of digital
inputs.
User can change the numbering of the following option cards - slot B, C, D, E.

Figure 280 - Default numbering of digital inputs for Easergy P5x30

D E A B C
1 1 1 1
2 2 1 2 2 2
3 3 3 3
4 4 3 4 4 4
5 5 5 5
6 6 5 6 6 6
7 7 7 7
8 8 7 8 8 8
9 9 9 9
10 10 10 10
11 11 9 10 11 11
12 12 12 12
13 13 11 12 13 13
14 14 14 14
15 15 13 14 15 15
16 16 16 16
17 17 15 16 17 17
18 18 18 18
19 19 17 18 19 19
20 20 20 20

L M N P
P533NGA

Table 113 - Example of digital inputs numbering

Option boards Slot B Slot C Slot D 77 Slot E 77

No option DI1 – DI4

1 x 6I40 DI1 – DI4 DI1 – DI6

2 x 6I40 DI1 – DI4 DI1 – DI6 DI1 – DI6
3 x 6I40 DI1 – DI4 DI1 – DI6 DI1 – DI6 DI1 – DI6

77. For Easergy P5x30 only

P5/EN M/33C 373

Protection Relay Control functions

Table 113 - Example of digital inputs numbering (Continued)

Option boards Slot B Slot C Slot D 78 Slot E 78

1 x 6I40 +1 x Arc-flash DI1 – DI4 DI1 – DI6 DI1 – DI3

2 x 6I40 +1 x Arc-flash DI1 – DI4 DI1 – DI6 DI1 – DI3 DI1 – DI6
1 x 6I40 +2 x Arc-flash DI1 – DI4 DI1 – DI6 DI1 – DI3 DI1 – DI3

Characteristics
Table 114 - Characteristics of the digital inputs

Parameter Value
Universal Standard voltage Customisable voltage

Mode Universal 24 V DC; 48 V DC; Custom V DC;

(value by default) 110 V DC; 220 V DC; Custom V AC
220 V AC
Pick-up ratio > 19 V 70% 40% to 80%,
154 V max.
Drop-off ratio < 12 V 60% 20% to 60%,
12 V min.
Holding current 1.3 mA 2.3 mA (V ≤ 110 V) 1 mA to 27 mA
1.3 mA (V > 110 V)

Debounce time 0 ms to 100 ms

State 0; 1

Polarity position NO; NC

Power maximum 0.5 W for ambient temperature less than 70℃ (158 ℉);
0.8 W for ambient temperature less than 45℃ (113 ℉);

Delay 0.00 s – 60.00 s

On event No; Yes

Off event No; Yes

Counters 0 to 255 - 511 - 1023 - 2047 - 4095 - 8191 - 16383 - 32767 - 65535
Reset automatically to 0 if the limit is exceeded.

Counter max value Setting range is 8 to 16 bit counter

Name of digital inputs Label: short name for display on the local panel.
String of max. 10 characters. Default is "DI1 – DIx".

Description: long name for display in eSetup Easergy Pro or HMI

String of max. 32 characters. Default is "Digital input 1 – Digital input x".

NOTE: Digital inputs can be assigned to a signal with normal state or inverted
state.

78. For Easergy P5x30 only

374 P5/EN M/33C

Control functions Protection Relay

Virtual inputs and virtual outputs

There are virtual inputs and virtual outputs that can, in many places, be used like
their hardware equivalents except that they are located in the memory of the
Easergy P5 protection relay. The virtual inputs can be used in many operations
and act like normal digital inputs: enable changing setting groups, block/enable/
disable functions, program logics, etc.
Virtual inputs can be selected to be operated with the function buttons on the local
panel, the local mimic, communication or simply by using the Virtual input menu of
eSetup Easergy Pro or Web HMI.
The activation and reset delay of the virtual inputs/outputs is approximately 5 ms.
The status of the virtual inputs and outputs can be read:
• with eSetup Easergy Pro in the Virtual inputs and Virtual outputs views of the
Device/Test menu
• by local panel in the Virtual inputs or Virtual outputs view under respectively
the VI or VO option of the Control menu
• EcoStruxure Power Device application
• web HMI
• communication depending on the protocol
The virtual inputs and virtual outputs can be named through eSetup Easergy Pro
or Web HMI in the Names for virtual inputs and Names for virtual outputs views of
the Control menu.
The virtual input signals can be connected to the different outputs of the Output
Matrix, Block Matrix, Auto-reclosing Matrix, Object Block Matrix views in the Matrix
menu of eSetup Easergy Pro and Web HMI or used in the custom logic function.
The virtual outputs can be controlled through the output matrix (see Output Matrix
view in the Matrix menu of eSetup Easergy Pro and Web HMI).

Table 115 - Characteristics of the virtual inputs and outputs

Parameter Value Description Note

Number of 20
Virtual Inputs

Number of 20
Virtual Outputs

VI1-VI50 0 Virtual input status is set to inactive. Editable when IED

1 Virtual input status is set to active. mode is set to "Test".

VO1-VO20 0 Virtual output status is set to inactive. Editable when IED

1 Virtual output status is set to active. mode is set to "Test".

Refresh period 5 ms The activation and reset delay of the

virtual inputs / outputs

Event enabling No Active edge event disabled.

Yes Active edge event enabled.

Check L/R No disabled

selection Yes enabled

Name of virtual inputs and virtual outputs

Label String of Short name for virtual inputs and virtual Editable parameter
max. 10 outputs on the local display. (password needed)
characters Default is "VI1 - VIn" and "VO1 - VOn".
n is the maximum number of the digital
inputs or outputs.

Description String of Long name for virtual inputs and virtual Editable parameter
max. 32 outputs. Default is "Virtual input 1 (or (password needed)
characters Virtual output 1) -Virtual input n (or
Virtual output n)".
n is the maximum number of the virtual
inputs or virtual outputs.

P5/EN M/33C 375

Protection Relay Control functions

Matrix
General information
The Easergy P5 protection relay has several matrices that are used for linking the
hardware and software elements together to create a protection chain:
• Output matrix
Used to link various inputs, outputs, statuses and signals to send a command
to the contact relays and virtual outputs, to activate disturbance recording,
and to provide SOL status.
• Block matrix
Used to block protection stages
• LED matrix
Used to control LEDs on the local panel
• Object block matrix
Used to inhibit object control
• Auto-recloser matrix
Used to control auto-recloser
• Arc-flash matrix
Used for Arc-flash detection functions
• Event matrix
See Logging and recording functions, page 402.
• Goose matrix
Used in association with IEC61850 (see the Goose matrix view in the
communication menu).
It allows to associate up to 128 Goose messages (NIx) to a virtual input or a
Goose message (NI).

Figure 281 - Blocking matrix and output matrix

Protection stages

Directly
measured Block matrix Output matrix User’s logic
I n
n values START I
TRIP N
V START
n Calculate TRIP P
START U
S, P, Q, n BLOCK TRIP T
cosφ, tanφ, INPUT
symmetric BLOCK S
components INPUT
etc. BLOCK
INPUT OUTPUTS

... ... ...

Virtual
inputs

... n
Digital
inputs
n Output relays Virtual
DI and indicators outputs
n Optional
delay
and
inversion n

Output contacts P533NHA

376 P5/EN M/33C

Control functions Protection Relay

Output matrix
The output matrix is used for connecting signals issued by different functions to
the output relays (DO), virtual outputs (VO) and disturbance record trigger (DR).
The connecting signals to the outputs are the following:
• Protection signals from the different stages including setting changes
• Auto-recloser information
• Digital inputs
• Virtual inputs and outputs
• Object control command
• Function keys
• Goose
• Voltage sag/swell and interrupt
• Timers
The Output matrix setting view of eSetup Easergy Pro and Web HMI represents
the state (de-energised/energised) of the digital output's coil. For example, an
orange vertical line in the Output matrix and a logical "1" in the Relays view
represent the energised state of the coil. The same principle applies for both NO
and NC type digital outputs. The actual position (open/closed) of the digital
outputs' contacts in coil's de-energised and energised state depends on the type
(NO/NC) of the digital outputs. De-energised state of the coil corresponds to the
normal state of the contacts.
A digital output can be configured as latched or non-latched. The releasing latches
procedure is described in Releasing latches, page 381.

Programming matrix

Matrix connection without latch

The connection is shown as a single bullet.
• When the input signal is activated, the output is activated
• When the input signal is released, the output is released
Latched matrix connection
The latched connection is shown as a single bullet surrounded by a circle.
• When the input signal is activated, the output is activated
• When the input signal is released, the output will remain active until cleared
manually (refer to Releasing latches, page 381).
No connection
The line crossing is empty.

Figure 282 - Output contacts can be assigned directly to the outputs of

logical operators

P5/EN M/33C 377

Protection Relay Control functions

NOTE: Logic outputs (see Logic functions, page 391) are also assigned
automatically in the output matrix when defined in any user programmable
logic scheme.

Blocking matrix
The operation of any protection stage can be blocked using the blocking matrix.
The blocking signal can originate from the digital inputs or it can be a start or trip
signal from a protection stage or an output signal from the user's programmable
logic. In All protection stages can be blocked in block matrix, page 378, an active
blocking is indicated with a black dot (●) at the crossing point of a blocking signal
and the signal to be blocked.

Figure 283 - All protection stages can be blocked in block matrix

The Blocked status becomes visible only when the stage is about to activate.

Figure 284 - A view from the setting tool showing a DI input blocking
connection (left picture) and the result for the I> stage when the DI is active
and the stage exceeds its current start value

NOTICE
UNINTENDED AND NUISANCE TRIPPING
• In the online mode, the blocking matrix is dynamically controlled by selecting
and deselecting protection stages.
• Activate the protection stages first, then store the settings in the protection
relay. After that, refresh the blocking matrix before configuring it.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in unwanted shutdown of
the electrical installation.

378 P5/EN M/33C

Control functions Protection Relay

LED matrix

The LED matrix defines the use of the Alarm LED , the trip LED , and the
configurable LEDs on the local panel of Easergy P5 protection relay. A lot of
functions can be assigned to eachLED.

Table 116 - Inputs for LEDs

Input LED Latch Description Note79

mapping

Protection, arc and green or red Normal/ Different type of protection Set
programmable stages Latched/ stages can be assigned to
BlinkLatch LEDs
Digital/virtual inputs and green or red Normal/ All different type of inputs Set
function buttons Latched/ can be assigned to LEDs
BlinkLatch
Object open/close, object green or red Normal/ Information related to Set
final trip and object failure Latched/ objects and object control
information BlinkLatch
Local control enabled green or red Normal/ While remote/local state is Set
Latched/ selected as local the "local
BlinkLatch control enabled" is active
Logic output 1-20 green or red Normal/ All logic outputs can be Set
Latched/ assigned to LEDs at the
BlinkLatch LED matrix
Manual control indication green or red Normal/ When the user has Set
Latched/ controlled the objectives
BlinkLatch
Setting error, self green or red Normal/ Self diagnostic signal Set
diagnostic alarm, pwd open Latched/
and setting change BlinkLatch

GOOSE NI 1-128 green or red Normal/ IEC 61850 goose Set

Latched/ communication signal
BlinkLatch
GOOSE error green or red Normal/ IEC 61850 goose Set
Latched/ communication signal
BlinkLatch

All the LEDs (6 for Easergy P5x20; 10 for Easergy P5x30) can be assigned as
green or red. The selection of green and red at the same time will result in yellow.
The connection can be normal, latched or blink-latched (flashing).

Figure 285 - LEDs are assigned in the LED matrix view of the Matrix menu in
eSetup Easergy Pro

NOTE: It is not possible to control LEDs direcly from logics.

79. Set = an editable parameter (password needed)

P5/EN M/33C 379

Protection Relay Control functions

Normal connection
When the connection is normal, the assigned LED is active when the control
signal is active. After deactivation, the LED turns off. LED activation and
deactivation delay when controlled is approximately 10 ms.

Latched connection
A latched LED activates when the control signal activates but remains lit even
when the control signal deactivates. Latched LEDs can be released by pressing
the key on the local panel.

Blink-latched connection
When the connection is "BlinkLatch", the assigned LED is active and blinking as
long as the control signal is active. After deactivation, the LED remains latched
and blinking. The latch can be released by pressing the key on the local panel.

Object block matrix

The object block matrix is used to link digital inputs, virtual inputs, function
buttons, protection stage outputs, object statuses, logic outputs, alarm signals and
GOOSE signals to inhibit the control of objects, that is, circuit breakers, isolators
and earthing/grounding switches.
Typical signals to inhibit controlling of the objects like circuit breaker are protection
stage activation, statuses of the other objects, interlocking made in logic or
GOOSE signals. These and other signals are linked to objects through the object
block matrix.

Auto-recloser matrix
The auto-recloser matrix is used to link digital inputs, virtual inputs, protection
stage outputs, object statuses, logic outputs, alarm signals and GOOSE signals to
control the auto-recloser. For more information, see Auto-recloser function (ANSI
79), page 330.

Arc-flash matrix
The arc-flash detection matrix uses three types of matrix:
• Arc-flash light matrix
The arc-flash light matrix is used for connecting light signals detected by
sensors or Goose or any virtual inputs to the different stages of the Arc-flash
detection function.
• Arc-flash current matrix
The arc-flash current matrix is used for connecting current signals and any
virtual inputs to the different stages of the Arc-flash detection function.
• Arc-flash output matrix
The arc-flash output matrix is used for connecting the different arc stage
signals to the digital outputs.
See Arc-flash (ANSI 50ARC), page 280 for more information on the arc-flash
protection function of the Easergy P5 protection relay.

380 P5/EN M/33C

Control functions Protection Relay

Releasing latches
According to the matrix configurations different outputs and indicators can be
latched or non-latched. A non-latched output or indicator follows the controlling
signal. A latched output or indicator remains active after the controlling signal
releases.
There is a common "release all latches" signal to release all the latched relays.
This release signal resets all the latched digital outputs and indicators.
Each digital output can be latched or not independently through the output matrix.
The release of the latches can be done:
• Directly with the key on the local panel
• With a digital input/output or virtual input/output set in the Release latches
view of the Control menu of eSetup Easergy Pro or Web HMI

Figure 286 - Select a digital input (DI3) to release latches

• With eSetup Easergy Pro clicking Device button in the menu bar and
selecting Release all latches

Figure 287 - Release latches using the Device button in the menu bar of
eSetup Easergy Pro

• With Web HMI

• Through communication

P5/EN M/33C 381

Protection Relay Control functions

Mimic display
The Easergy P5 protection relay can display a mimic screen on the local panel.
The mimic screen can be entered from the main menu.
A single-line diagram, to be shown on the Mimic screen, can be created in eSetup
Easergy Pro through the Mimic view of the General menu.

Figure 288 - Set up the Mimic view

A Cursor: used to move an object. H Different choice of configurable objects.

To move an existing object, select the The object's number corresponds to the
tool, point the cursor to the object until the number in the Object menu.
object turns green and then drag and drop
the object to the new position.

B Draw line: used to draw lines in the view. I Some predefined drawings for use in the
To draw a line, select the tool, click the left view.
mouse button at the start point and then
move the cursor to the second point and
click again.

C Delete object: used to delete an existing J Provides the Easergy P5 protection

object from the view. relay's location. The text comes from the
To delete an object, select the tool, point System info view of the General menu.
the cursor to the object until the object
turns red and click.
D Text: used to insert text in the view. K Remote / Local state
To insert text, select the tool, click at the Depending on the state, some settings
position to place the text and then, in the and actions are not allowed.
pop-up dialog box, type in the text and The remote / Local state can be changed
click the OK button. in the Objects view of the Control menu.
Use the Cursor tool to move the text if
necessary.

E Zoom in: used to increase the size of the L Auto reclosing check box
view. To show or hide the Auto-reclosing state
To zoom in, click the tool until the view in the view.
reaches the desired size.
F Zoom out: used to decrease the size of M Virtual input x check boxes
the view. To show or hide the specified virtual
To zoom out, click the tool until the view inputs states in the view.
reaches the desired size.
G Clear view: used to remove all objects N Up to 8 freely selectable measurements
from the view. To select the measurements to be shown
To clear the view, click the tool and select in the view.
OK to confirm.

382 P5/EN M/33C

Control functions Protection Relay

Table 117 - Mimic functionality

Parameter Value Description

Sublocation Text field Up to 20 characters. Fixed location.

Object 1–8 1–8 Double-click on top of the object to change the

control number between 1 and 8. Number 1
corresponds to object 1 in Control > Objects.

Auto-reclosing 0 Possible to enable/disable auto-reclosing locally in

1 local mode (L) or remotely in remote mode (R).
Position can be changed.

Measurement Select the Up to 8 freely selectable measurements.

display 1–8 measurements from
the drop down list

Virtual input 1–4 0 Change the status of virtual inputs while the
1 password is enabled. Position can be changed.

Local panel configuration

The display and behaviour of the Easergy P5 protection relay's local panel can be
configured through eSetup Easergy Pro in the Local panel conf view of the
General menu.

Figure 289 - The Local panel conf view in eSetup Easergy Pro

Table 118 - Local panel configuration

Parameter Value Note

Contrast of LCD screen 0–15 For Easergy P5x20 only.

Display backlight control Selection of digital inputs (DI),

one virtual inputs (VI), one
virtual outputs (VO), or one
function key (Fx).

Backlight off timeout 0.0–2000.0 min Configurable delay for

backlight to turns off when the
protection relay is not used.
Default value is 60 minutes.
When value is zero (0.0)
backlight stays on all the time.

P5/EN M/33C 383

Protection Relay Control functions

Table 118 - Local panel configuration (Continued)

Parameter Value Note

Display evt time not sync Checked Event time shown normally if
unchecked relay is synchronised, or
otherwise in brackets.
Object for control buttons Object 1 - Object 6

Mode for control buttons Selective Two different ways of

Direct controlling the object using the
control buttons (I/O) (see
Controlling objects, page 157)

Fault value scaling PU PU: analogue values displayed

Primary in % or x rated value;
Primary: analogue values
displayed directly in primary
units.
Date style yy-mm-dd
dd.mm.yy
mm/dd/yy

Clear events -
Clear
Default screen Used to set the default home
screen of the local panel.

Controllable objects
The Easergy P5 protection relay allows the control of six objects, that is, circuit-
breakers, disconnectors and earthing/grounding switches by the "select before
operate" or "direct control" principle.
The object block matrix and logic functions can be used to configure interlocking
to help ensure the control before the output pulse is issued. The objects 1 - 6 are
controllable whilst the additional objects 7 - 8 are only able to show the status.
Controlling of objects 1–6 is possible in the following ways:
• through the object control buttons (I/O)
• through the local panel and display using single line diagram
• through the function key
• through a digital input
• through a remote communication
• through eSetup Easergy Pro setting tool
• through Web HMI
• through the EcoStruxure Power Device application
The connection of an object to specific controlling outputs is done via an output
matrix (object 1 – 6 open output, object 1 – 6 close output). There is also an output
signal "Object failed" that is activated if the control of an object is not completed.
Object states
Each object has the following states:

Setting Value Description

Object state Undefined (00) Actual state of the object

Open

Close
Undefined (11)

Basic settings for controllable objects

384 P5/EN M/33C

Control functions Protection Relay

Each controllable object has the following settings:

Setting Value Description

DI for "obj open" None, any digital input, virtual input Open information
or virtual output
DI for "obj close" Close information

DI for "obj ready" Ready information

Max ctrl pulse 0.02 – 600 s Pulse length for open and close
length commands. Control pulse stops
once object changes its state

Completion timeout 0.02 – 600 s Timeout of ready indication

Object control Open/Close Direct object control

If changing the states takes longer than the time defined by the "Max ctrl pulse
length" setting, the object is inoperative and the "Object failure" matrix signal is
set. Also, an undefined event is generated. "Completion timeout" is only used for
the ready indication. If the "DI for 'obj ready'" is not set, the completion timeout has
no meaning.
NOTE: The Object can only be controlled when its position is in a known state.
Output signals of controllable objects
Each controllable object has two control signals in the matrix:

Output signal Description

Object x Open Open control signal for the object

Object x Close Close control signal for the object

Settings for read-only objects

Each read-only object has the following settings:

Setting Value Description

DI for "obj open" None, any digital input, virtual input Open information
or virtual output
DI for "obj close" Close information

Object timeout 0.02 - 600 s Timeout for state changes

If changing states takes longer than the time defined by "Object timeout" setting,
an "Object failure" matrix signal is set, and an undefined-event is generated.

Local or remote control

In Local mode, the digital outputs can be controlled via the local panel, but they
cannot be controlled via a remote communication interface.
In Remote mode, the digital outputs cannot be controlled via the local panel, but
only via a remote communication interface.
The Local or Remote mode is selected by one selectable digital input or using the
local/remote button on local panel. When digital input is configured to switch
between Local and Remote mode, the local/remote button will not take effect and
so when it is pressed an alarm message appears, to remind the user that a digital
input is applied to switch the Local or Remote mode. It is in Local mode when the
digital input is OFF, and it is in Remote mode when the digital input is ON.
The selection of the L/R digital input is done in the Objects view of the Control
menu in eSetup Easergy Pro or Web HMI.

P5/EN M/33C 385

Protection Relay Control functions

Figure 290 - Selecting the Local/Remote mode

Object control with digital inputs

Objects can be controlled with digital inputs, virtual inputs or virtual outputs. There
are four settings for each controllable object:

Setting Active

DI for remote open / close control In remote state

DI for local open / close control In local state

If the protection relay is in a local control state, the remote control inputs are
ignored and vice versa. An object is controlled when a rising edge is detected from
the selected input. The length of digital input pulse should be at least 60 ms.

Object control with function keys

Each function key toggles an internal signal. This internal signal is available as an
input of the output matrix, the block matrix, the auto-reclose matrix, the LED matrix
and the object block matrix.
The function keys can also be used:
• To clear the minimum and maximum of current, voltage and power
• To clear the minimum and maximum of demand values and RMS demand
values
• To select a setting group
• To select the IED modes (Normal / Test / Test-blocked)
• To enable / disable the auto-recloser
• To bypass the synchro-check
• As an input in the programmable logic
NOTE: If the backlight for the LCD display is switched off, pressing a function
key for the first time will only light up the LCD display. The function assigned to
the function key will only be triggered when this function key is pressed a
second time. This configuration is also valid for the other local panel keys.
Depending on the model of the Easergy P5 protection relay there is 1 or 7 function
keys available on the local panel:
• F1 for Easergy P5 x20
• F1 to F7 for Easergy P5 x30
The selection of the function Keys for the objects is made with the eSetup Easergy
Pro or Web HMI in the Objects view of the Control menu.

386 P5/EN M/33C

Control functions Protection Relay

Figure 291 - Selecting function keys for object local control

The function keys are configured to control objects in the Function buttons view
of the Control menu.
This view shows the selected objects and controls for all the function keys of the
Easergy P5 protection relay.

Figure 292 - Configuring the function keys

Table 119 - Parameters for the function keys

Parameter Value Description

Status 0 Disabled
1 Enabled
Selected control V1 - V20 Virtual input

P5/EN M/33C 387

Protection Relay Control functions

Table 119 - Parameters for the function keys (Continued)

Parameter Value Description

ObjCtrl Object control

Fn Function key n

ChgTstMod Change the IED mode

Selected objects - No object selected

xLocOpen; Shown when ObjCtrl is selected in the Selected

xLocClose control field.
Fn pulse length (0 = 0.00 to 600 s Time delay common to all programmable function
infinite) keys

Object control with I and O buttons

The Easergy P5 protection relay also has dedicated control buttons for objects. (I)
stands for object closing and (O) controls object open command internally. Object
for control buttons and Mode for control buttons are configured with eSetup
Easergy Pro or Web HMI in the Objects view of the Control menu.

Figure 293 - Configuring the control buttons for object control

Table 120 - Parameters of control buttons

Parameter Value Unit Description Set

Object for control - Disabled: the control buttons do not control Set
buttons any object.

Obj1 - Obj6 Button

closes selected object if password is

enabled.
Button

opens selected object if password is

enabled.
Mode for control Selective Control operation needs confirmation (select
buttons before operate)

Direct Pressing the control button directly leads to

action of the controled object.

388 P5/EN M/33C

Control functions Protection Relay

Timers
Description
The Easergy P5 protection platform includes four settable timers that can be used
together with the user's programmable logic or to control setting groups and other
applications that require actions based on calendar time. Each timer has its own
settings. After setting the selected on-time and off-time you can then select
whether the timer is activated every day or just selected days of the week (See the
setting parameters for details). The timer outputs are available for logic functions
and for the block and output matrices.

Figure 294 - Timer output sequence in different modes

P533NIA

You can force any timer, which is in use to on or off. The forcing is done by writing
a new status value. Unlike the digital inputs no forcing flag is needed.
The forced timer status remains as forced until the next forced change or the next
time the timer automatically changes status.
The status of each timer is stored in the non-volatile memory when the auxiliary
power is switched off. At startup, the status of each timer is recovered.

P5/EN M/33C 389

Protection Relay Control functions

Setting parameters
Table 121 - Setting parameters of timers

Parameter Value Description

Status - Not in use

0 Output is inactive
1 Output is active

On hh:mm:ss Activation time of the timer

Off hh:mm:ss De-activation time of the timer
Mode For each four timers there are 12 different modes available:
- The timer is off and not running. The output is off, i.e. 0 all the
time.
Daily The timer switches on and off once every day.

Monday The timer switches on and off every Monday.

Tuesday The timer switches on and off every Tuesday.

Wednesday The timer switches on and off every Wednesday.

Thursday The timer switches on and off every Thursday.

Friday The timer switches on and off every Friday.

Saturday The timer switches on and off every Saturday.

Sunday The timer switches on and off every Sunday.

MTWTF The timer switches on and off every day except Saturdays and
Sundays

MTWTFS The timer switches on and off every day except Sundays.

SatSun The timer switches on and off every Saturday and Sunday.

390 P5/EN M/33C

Control functions Protection Relay

Logic functions
Easergy P5 protection relay supports user-defined programmable logic for
boolean signals. User-configurable logic can be used to create functionality that is
not provided by the protection relay as a default. You can see and modify the logic
in the Programmable Logic setting view of the Control menu in the eSetup
Easergy Pro or Web HMI.

Table 122 - Available logic functions and their memory use

Number of gates Max. number of input Max. number of

reserved gates logic outputs

AND 1
OR 1
XOR 1
AND+OR 2
CT 2
(count + reset)
128
INVAND 2 (An input gate can include 20
any number of signals.)
INVOR 2
OR + AND 80 2
RS 2
(set + reset)

RS_D 4
(set + D + load +
reset)

The consumed memory is dynamically shown on the configuration view in

percentage. The first value indicates the memory consumption of inputs, the
second value the memory consumption of gates and the third value the memory
consumption of outputs. The logic is operational as long as the memory
consumption of the inputs, gates or outputs remains individually below or equal to
100%.

Figure 295 - Logic and memory consumption

LOGIC [3% 3% 5%]

&
Virtual input 1
Logic output 1 Virtual output 1
Virtual input 3

≥1
Digital input 1
Logic output 1 Digital output 1
Digital input 2
P533P7A

Logic timer
Easergy P5 protection relay logic function can be used to manage accurate
breaker control and alarms with flexibility thanks to the logic timers included. Logic
timers offer the possibility of assigning a freely configurable time characteristic to
the output signal of each Boolean equation.

80. by selecting “AND+OR” and ticking “Reverse”

P5/EN M/33C 391

Protection Relay Control functions

Table 123 - Settings and characteristics of the logic timer

Settings/characteristics Value

Timer mode
Setting range Oper./rel. delay; Oper.del./pulse; Op/rel.del,
retrg; Minimum time; Op.d/pulse, retrg

t1
Setting range 0 - 60,000.00 s

Resolution 0.01 s
Accuracy ±1% or ±20 ms

t2
Setting range 0 - 60,000.00 s

Resolution 0.01 s
Accuracy ±1% or ±20 ms

The following figures show the time characteristics for the various timer stage
operating modes.

Figure 296 - Timer mode: Pickup/reset delay (Oper./rel. delay), non-

triggerable
t2 = 0 s

Logic output n

Logic output n (t)

t1 t1

t1 = 0 s

Logic output n

Logic output n (t)

t2 t2

t1, t2 > 0 s

Logic output n

Logic output n (t)

t1 t2 t1 t2
P533NKA

t1 operation delay t2 release delay

Figure 297 - Timer mode: Pulse, delayed pickup (Oper.del./pulse), non-

triggerable
t2 = 0 s

Logic output n

Logic output n (t)

t1 t1

t1 = 0 s

Logic output n

Logic output n (t)

t2 t2

t1, t2 > 0 s

Logic output n

Logic output n (t)

t1 t2 t1 t2
P533NLA

t1 operation delay t2 pulse delay

392 P5/EN M/33C

Control functions Protection Relay

Figure 298 - Timer mode: Pickup/reset delay, retriggerable (Op/rel.del,retrg)

t2 = 0 s

Logic output n

Logic output n (t)

t1 t1

Retrigger pulse
t1 = 0 s

Logic output n

Logic output n (t)

t2 t2

t2

Retrigger pulse
t1, t2 > 0 s

Logic output n

Logic output n (t)

t1 t2 t1 t2
t2
t2 P533NMA

t1 operation delay t2 release delay

Figure 299 - Timer mode: Minimum time (Minimum time)

Logic output n

Logic output n (t)

t1 t1

P533NOA

t1 minimum time t2 minimum time

Figure 300 - Timer mode: Pulse, delayed pickup, retriggerable (Op.d/pulse,

retrg)
t2 = 0 s

Logic output n

Logic output n (t)

t1 t1

t1 = 0 s

Logic output n

Logic output n (t)

t2 t2

Retrigger pulse
t1, t2 > 0 s

Logic output n

Logic output n (t)

t1 t2 t1 t2
t1 t1
P533NNA

t1 operation delay t2 pulse delay

Table 124 - Logic gates

Logic gate Symbol Truth table

AND
In Out
A Y
0 0
1 1

P5/EN M/33C 393

Protection Relay Control functions

Table 124 - Logic gates (Continued)

Logic gate Symbol Truth table

In Out
A Y
0 1
1 0

In Out
A B Y
0 0 0
1 1 1
1 0 0
0 1 0

In Out
A B Y
0 0 1
1 1 0
1 0 1
0 1 1

AND+OR
In Out
A B Y
0 0 0
1 1 1
1 0 1
0 1 1

CT
(count+reset)
In Out
A B Y Y
Cont Reset Setting New

1 3 0
1 3 0
1 3 1
1 3 0

OR
In Out
A B Y
0 0 0
1 1 1
1 0 1
0 1 1

394 P5/EN M/33C

Control functions Protection Relay

Table 124 - Logic gates (Continued)

Logic gate Symbol Truth table

In Out
A B Y
0 0 1
1 1 0
1 0 0
0 1 0

In Out
A B C Y
0 0 0 0
1 0 0 1
1 1 0 1
0 1 0 1
1 1 1 1

In Out
A B C Y
0 0 0 1
1 0 0 0
1 1 0 0
0 1 0 0
1 1 1 0

INVAND
In Out
A B Y
0 0 0
1 0 1
1 1 0
0 1 0

INVOR
In Out
A B Y
0 0 1
1 1 1
1 0 1
0 1 0

OR+AND
(AND+OR
reversed) In Out
A B Y
0 0 0
1 1 1
1 0 0
0 1 0

P5/EN M/33C 395

Protection Relay Control functions

Table 124 - Logic gates (Continued)

Logic gate Symbol Truth table

RS
(set+reset)
A B Y
Set Reset Y
1 0 1
1 1 0
0 0 0
0 1 0

RS_D
(set+D+load+reset)
A B C D Y
Set D-input Load Reset Y

0 0 0 0 0
1 x x 0 1
0 1 0 0 0
0 1 1 0 1
x x x 1 0

XOR
In Out
A B C Y
0 0 0 0
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 1
0 1 1 0
1 0 0 1
1 0 1 0
1 1 0 0
1 1 1 0

396 P5/EN M/33C

Control functions Protection Relay

Switchgear control and monitoring

Switchgear control and fail-safe position
For the Easergy P5 protection relay, operational reliability helps ensure the safety
and availability of the installation.
This means avoiding the following 2 situations:
• Nuisance tripping of the protection
Continuity of the electrical power supply is as vital for a manufacturer as it is
for an electricity distribution company. Nuisance tripping caused by the
protection can result in considerable financial losses. This situation affects the
availability of the protection.
• Failure of the protection to trip
The protection relay must detect faults in the electrical power system as
quickly as possible.
Power network systems consist of a set of components (cables, switchgear,
protection relays, measurement transformers, MV/LV transformers, etc.)
whose correct operation may be affected by failures. The consequences of
failure of one of the power system components are varied and depend on
factors specific to each power system.
These include:
◦ Power system topology
◦ Type of connected users
◦ Load types
◦ Position of each component in the power system
◦ Failure mode for each component, etc.
In case a power system fails, it is the responsibility of the user to prioritise
either continuity of the electricity supply, or shutdown of part of the power
system. While designing the power system and its protection plan, knowledge
of the failure modes for each element can be used to steer the failure into a
particular state. This requires the failure mode for the power system elements
to be as deterministic as possible.
To comply with this approach, the Easergy P5 protection relay is equipped
with self-tests that continuously check all its electronics and embedded
software are operating correctly. The purpose of the self-tests is to put the
Easergy P5 protection relay into a deterministic position, called the fail-safe
position, in the event of failure or malfunction of one of its internal
components. In the fail-safe position the Easergy P5 protection relay is no
longer operational. All its output relays are forced into the off-position and the
power system is no longer protected. If the auxiliary power supply disappears,
the Easergy P5 protection relay's contact relays are also in the off-position.
The table below indicates the possible types of behaviour in the event of
Easergy P5 protection relay failure. Use in standard mode or in custom mode
is described in the sections below.

Circuit Breaker with Shunt Trip Coil Circuit Breaker with Undervoltage Trip
Coil
The circuit breaker stays closed if Easergy The circuit breaker opens automatically if
P5 protection relay goes into the fail-safe Easergy P5 protection relay goes into the fail-
position. safe position.

Monitoring is required to detect whether the The circuit breaker opens if the substation
protection is no longer operational. auxiliary voltage disappears.

P5/EN M/33C 397

Protection Relay Control functions

Selecting the trip command and examples of use

NOTICE
RISK OF UNPROTECTED ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
Always connect the watchdog output to a monitoring device to mitigate and take
appropriate action when the selected trip command does not result in the
installation tripping or when the Easergy P5 protection relay fails.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in unprotected electrical
installation.

An analysis of the operational reliability of the whole installation should determine

whether availability or safety of this installation should be prioritised if Easergy P5
protection relay is in the fail-safe position. This information is used to determine
the choice of trip command as outlined in Selecting the trip command, page 398.

Table 125 - Selecting the trip command

Dia- Control Event Trip Advantage Disadvantage

gram

1 Shunt trip breaker Internal failure or No Availability of the Installation not

or mechanical loss of the installation protected until
latching contactor auxiliary power remedial
supply intervention

2 Breaker with Internal failure or Yes Safety of the Installation not

undervoltage trip loss of the installation available until
coil (fail-safe) auxiliary power remedial
supply intervention

3 Breaker with Internal failure No Availability of the Installation not

undervoltage trip installation available until
coil (not fail-safe) remedial
intervention
Loss of auxiliary Yes Safety of the Installation not
power supply installation available until
remedial
intervention
4 Contactor without Internal failure or Yes Safety of the Installation not
coil latching loss of the installation available until
(permanent order) auxiliary power remedial
supply intervention

Figure 301 - Example of use with shunt trip coil (diagram 1)

Trip
Breaker closed Breaker open
B B
11 9 5 B 7 B
Inhibit closing DO1 DI3 DI4
DO2 12 10 6 8

13
Closing DO3 15

Setting of contact output parameters:

N/O Shunt
closing trip DO1: N/O =0
coil coil DO2: N/C =1
DO3: N/O =0
P533NPA

398 P5/EN M/33C

Control functions Protection Relay

Figure 302 - Example of use with undervoltage trip coil with fail-safe
condition (diagram 2)

Trip
Breaker closed Breaker open
B B
11 9 5 B 7 B
Inhibit closing DO1 DI3 DI4
DO2 12 10 6 8

13
Closing DO3 15

Setting of contact output parameters:

U=0
N/O Undervoltage DO1: N/C =1
closing trip DO2: N/C =1
coil coil DO3: N/O =0

P533NQA

Figure 303 - Example of use with undervoltage trip coil without fail-safe
condition (diagram 3)

Trip
Breaker closed Breaker open
B B
11 9 5 B 7 B
Inhibit closing DO1 DI3 DI4
DO2 12 10 6 8

13
Closing DO3 15

Setting of contact output parameters:

U=0
N/O DO1: N/O =0
closing Undervoltage DO2: N/C =1
coil trip DO3: N/O =0
coil
P533NRA

NOTE: When using an undervoltage trip coil, it is recommended to install a

free wheel diode in parallel to the opening coil in order to slow down its
operation in the event of a microbreak on its power supply.

Figure 304 - Example of use with contactor under permanent order

command (diagram 4)

Breaker closed Breaker open

B
14 5 B 7 B
DO1 15 6 DI3 8 DI4

Closing Trip

Contactor

1 C 3 C
2 4
(1) (1)
DI5 DI6
Shunt
trip coil (1) Standard assignments;
can be modified.

Setting output parameters

DO1: N/O =0
P533NSA

P5/EN M/33C 399

Protection Relay Control functions

Programmable switchgear interlocking

Switchgear interlocking can be easily done using the object matrix.
For example, if object 1 is the circuit breaker, object 2 the isolating switch,
and object 4 the ground switchgear, the blocking scheme could be configured as
below:
1. When CB is closed, the isolating switch open operation is blocked.
2. When ground switchgear is closed, the CB close operation is blocked.

Figure 305 - Example of programmable switchgear interlocking

400 P5/EN M/33C

Control functions Protection Relay

Local control on single-line diagram

The objects can be controlled directly on the local panel in the mimic screen that
includes the single-line diagram.
1. Press the key.
2. With the and arrow keys, select the object, or one of the four virtual
inputs, or the auto-reclosing (if they are displayed in the mimic).

Figure 306 - The selected item is highlighted and blinks

P5F30_6N
00001
IL1 300 A
IL2 300 A
IL3 300 A
lovs 0.000 A
U12 11559 V
U23 11542 V
U31 11579 V
P 4594 kW

3. Press the key to bring up the menu list.

Figure 307 - The menu list appears on the right side

P5F30_6N
00001
Open
Close

4. Select Open or Close and then press the key.

P5/EN M/33C 401

Protection Relay Logging and recording functions

Logging and recording functions

Time tagging
For operations and fault analysis all data are logged with an accurate date and
time.
The items that are time tagged and logged are:
• Events
• Disturbance recording
• Fault data logging
• Voltage interruptions
• Maximum and minimum values of the last 31 days or last 12 months
The Easergy P5 protection relay time stamp resolution is 1 ms.

Event buffer
The Easergy P5 protection relay provides a logging and recording of all important
events that happen during operations. All “operationally relevant” signals, each
fully tagged with date and time at signal start and signal end, are registered and
stored in chronological order. For example, an event can be, start-on, start-off,
trip-on or trip-off of any protection stage, alarm-on or alarm-off, a digital input
change, etc. Each event is associated with a unique code. The selection of signals
to be considered in the event logging and recording can be configured by the user.
As an example, a typical trip event is shown in Example of I> trip on event and its
visibility in local panel and communication protocols, page 402.

Table 126 - Example of I> trip on event and its visibility in local panel and
communication protocols

Event Description Local panel Communication

protocols

Code CHENN: 01E02 CH = event channel, No Yes

channel 1
NN = event code, event 2

Type: 1-2-3 Fault type Yes No

Event desc: I> trip on 2In Event text and fault value Yes No

yyyy-mm-dd: 2018-01-31 Date Yes Yes

hh:mm:ss:nnn: Time
08:35:13.413

The logged events can also be read using:

• Local panel (see the Events list view under the Event option of the Logs
menu)
• eSetup Easergy Pro or Web HMI (see the Event Buffer view in the Logs
menu)
• Communication: In this case, only the latest event can be read.
On the local panel, the code is replaced by a ranking number.
With eSetup Easergy Pro, the events can be stored to a file, which is very helpful if
the Easergy P5 protection relay is not connected to a SCADA system.
SCADA systems are reading events using any of the available communication
protocols.

402 P5/EN M/33C

Logging and recording functions Protection Relay

Event configuration
To configure which events are recorded the event enabling matrices are used (see
the Event enabling views in the Logs menu of eSetup Easergy Pro). This allows
the optimisation of reporting by selecting the most useful events and deselecting
the ones of no interest. This prevents them from being written to the event buffer.
• Event enabling - stages 1
This matrix is used to activate an event when there is a change to the Start
and Trip status of a protection feature. Select On, Off or both.
• Event enabling - stages 2
This matrix is similar to the Event enabling -stages 1 matrix but more
dedicated to functions which provide more information than start and trip
signals (e.g. thermal image protection).
• Event enabling - objects
This matrix is dedicated to generate events associated to the defined objects
such as circuit breaker status and controls.
• Event enabling - AR
This matrix is dedicated to the auto recloser function and is used to generate
an event associated with auto reclose states and status.
• Event enabling - logic
This matrix is used to generate an event when one of the logic equations (up
to 20) is true or false.
• Event enabling - other
This matrix is dedicated to system monitoring including setting group change.
The maximum size of the buffer is 2000 events and can be exported a a PDF file
via eSetup Easergy Pro Print menu. 300 events can be displayed by eSetup
Easergy Pro. Only the latest 300 events, or the oldest 300 events, can be read on
the local panel according to the scroll order parameter.
All events are stored in non-volatile memory inside the Easergy P5 protection
relay and can be saved every 150 ms in the backup memory if available
(Extension board option).
When the buffer is filled the oldest event will be overwritten when a new event
occurs. The shown resolution of a time stamp for an event is one millisecond, but
the actual resolution depends on the particular function creating the event. For
example, most protection stages create events with a 5 ms, 10 ms or 20 ms
resolution. The absolute accuracy of all time stamps also depends on the
protection relay's time synchronisation.

Event buffer overflow

The normal procedure is to poll events from the Easergy P5 protection relay all the
time. If this is not done, the event buffer could reach its limits. In that case, the
oldest event is deleted and the newest is displayed with an OVF (overflow) code
on the local panel.
The Event setting parameters can be configured in the Local panel conf view in
the General menu.

P5/EN M/33C 403

Protection Relay Logging and recording functions

Characteristics
Table 127 - Setting parameters for events

Parameter Value Description

(description/label)

Clear events/ClrEv -

Clear Clear the buffer of events

Fault value scaling/ Scaling of event fault value
FVScal
PU Per unit scaling

Primary Primary scaling

Display event time not in On (check mark) Event time shown normally if relay is
sync/Sync synchronised

Off Event time is shown in brackets if relay is

not synchronised

Table 128 - Measured and monitored parameters for events

Parameter Value Description

(description/label)

Event buffer size/Count 2000 Event buffer size

Scroll order/Order New-Old; Old-New Order of the event buffer for local display

404 P5/EN M/33C

Logging and recording functions Protection Relay

Disturbance recording
Description
The Easergy P5 protection relay provides for fault events a disturbance recording
with the sampled analogue values of pre-selected analogue currents and voltages
before, during and after a fault event. Additionally, the calculated frequency, the
states of digital inputs (DI) and output (DO) signals are provided for detailed fault
analysis. The complete list of provided signals is shown in Disturbance recording
parameters (measurements and monitored values), page 406.
Triggering the recording
The recording can be triggered by any start or trip signal from any protection
stage, by a digital input, logic output or GOOSE signals. The triggering signal is
selected in the output matrix (vertical signal DR). The recording can also be
triggered manually. All recordings are time-stamped.
Reading recordings
The recordings can be uploaded with eSetup Easergy Pro (see Disturbance
recorder view of the GENERAL menu). The recording is in COMTRADE format.
This also means that other programs can be used to view and analyse the
recordings made by the Easergy P5 protection relay.
Number of channels
A maximum of 30 records can be stored with a mix of analogue and digital signals:
• 14 Analogue signals
• 124 Digital Signals (40 Digital inputs; 20 Digital outputs; 32 Start signals; 32
Trip signals)
A pre-selection of the channels and their order in the fault recording is made per
default and can be changed by the user with the parameters shown in Disturbance
recording parameters (measurements and monitored values), page 406.

Table 129 - Examples of disturbance recording durations

Selected signals Maximum time setting

4 analogue input signals, up to 40 digital input signals , up to 20 digital 5.46 s

output signals , start and trips signals 81, 82

4 analogue inputs and trip signals 10.92 s

4 analogue inputs, start and trip signals 9.10 s

8 analogue signals, up to 20 digital input signals, up to 20 digital output 4.96 s

signals and trip signals

8 analogue signals, up to 20 digital input signals, up to 20 digital output 3.55 s

signals, start and trip signals

9 analogue input signals, frequency, up to 40 digital input signals, up to 3.41s

40 digital output signals, all start and trip signals

NOTE: eSetup Easergy Pro provides directly the max record duration when
the signals to record are selected (see the bottom section of the Disturbance
recording view in the General menu).

81. Digital input signal means digital inputs (DI), virtual inputs (VI), etc.
82. Digital output signal means digital outputs (DO), virtual output (VO), etc.

P5/EN M/33C 405

Protection Relay Logging and recording functions

Parameters
Table 130 - Disturbance recording parameters (measurements and
monitored values)

Parameter
Value Description
(description/label)

Sample rate per cycle

Sample rate/SR
(fixed according to Frequency)

Maximum time setting (in second)

This value depends on the number and type of
Maximum time setting/MaxLen
the selected channels and the configured
recording length.

Status of recording

- Not active
Status/Status
Run Waiting a triggering

Trig Recording

Add one channel. The maximum number of

channels used simultaneously is 16.

IL1, IL2, IL3 Phase current

Measured residual earth/ground fault current

I0 by CSH or CTs according to the model
of Easergy P5

Line-to-line voltage (only three voltage

U12, U23, U31 measurement modes are available:
2LL+U0, 2LL+U0+LLy, LL/LLy)

Line-to-neutral voltage (only four voltage

VL1, VL2, VL3 measurement modes are available:
3LN, 3LN/LNy, 3LN/LLy, 3LN+U0)

U0 Neutral displacement voltage

F Frequency (reference side)

Add recorder channel/AddCh
I0’ Very sensitive current

Line-to-line reference voltage taken from other

UL12y
side of the CB for synchro-check scheme

Line-to-neutral voltage taken from other side of

VL1y
the CB for synchro-check scheme

fy Frequency (comparison side)

DI Digital inputs 1-20 and virtual inputs 1-4 status

The remaining digital inputs available and the

Other DI function keys status

DO All digital outputs and virtual outputs 1-6 status

Starts Start signals of all enabled protection functions

Trips Trip signals of all enabled protection functions

Remove all channels/ClrCh -; Clear Remove all channels

406 P5/EN M/33C

Logging and recording functions Protection Relay

Table 131 - Disturbance recording parameters (settings)

Parameter
Value Description
(description/label)

Recording length/Time 0 - 30 s Recording length (in second)

Pre trig time/PreTrig 0% - 100% Amount of recording data before the trig
moment
Disturbance recording event On The event log is created or not when
(checkmark); Disturbance recording is triggered.
Off
Recording memory events On The event log is created or not when
(checkmark); Disturbance recording is reset
Off (clear the recording, reset the time and so on).

Manual triggering/ManTrig -; Trig Command to launch manually a new

disturbance recording

Clear oldest buffer/Clear -; Clear Clear the oldest disturbance recording

Clear all buffers/ClrAll -; Clear Clear all the disturbance recordings

The selection of signals depends on the model of Easergy P5 protection relay and
also on the voltage measurement mode.

Characteristics
Table 132 - Disturbance recording characteristics

Characteristics Values Note

Sample rate 48 samples/cycle Fixed value

Recording time (one record) 0.1 - 30 s

Pre-trigger rate 0 - 100%

Number of selected channels 0 - 16

File format IEC 60255 - 24: 1999 ASCII format

The recording time and the number of records depend on the time setting and the
number of selected channels.

P5/EN M/33C 407

Protection Relay Logging and recording functions

Fault data logging

Fault log provides fault signals including the measured fault data captured during
a fault sequence. The fault logs are logged in chronological order with reference to
the specific fault.
A new fault log is triggered by a starting signal of a protection function.
As an example, a typical fault log is shown in Example of I> LOG [50/51] and its
visibility in local panel and communication protocols, page 408.
There is detailed information available of the eight latest faults: Time stamp, fault
type, fault current, load current before the fault, elapsed delay and setting group
active.
The information can be different according to the protection functions.

Table 133 - Example of I> LOG [50/51] and its visibility in local panel and
communication protocols

Parameters Value Description

(description/label)

Date/Date 2018-02-12 Time stamp of the fault log, date

hh:mm:ss:ms 09:35:12.3- Time stamp, time of day

21
Fault type/Type 1-2-3 Fault type

Fault current I>/Flt 2.00In Maximum fault current

Pre-fault current/Load 0.50In 1 s average phase currents before the fault

Elapsed delay/EDly 100% Elapsed time of the operating time setting. 100% = trip

Group/SetGrp 1 Active setting group during fault

Table 134 - Example of VT supervisor and its visibility in local panel and
communication protocols

Parameter Value Description

(description/label)

Date/Date 2018-02-12 Time stamp of the fault log, date

hh:mm:ss:ms 09:45:15.2- Time stamp, time of day

45
U2 value/U2 xA Negative sequence voltage

I2 value/I2 xA Negative sequence current

The fault logs can be read via:

• Local panel
In the Log view of each protection function in the Protection sub-menu
• eSetup Easergy Pro or Web HMI
In each protection function view in the Protection menu
• Communication
In this case, only the latest fault logs can be read.

408 P5/EN M/33C

Logging and recording functions Protection Relay

Running hour counter

Description
The running hour counter is typically used to monitor the service time of the motor
or appropriate feeder. This function calculates the total active time of the selected
digital input, virtual I/O and function key. The resolution is 10 seconds.

Settings / characteristics
Table 135 - Running hour counter settings/characteristics

Settings / Characteristics Value

(description/label)

Engine running hours/Runh

Setting range 0 - 876000 h

Engine running/Runs (in seconds)

Setting range 0 - 3599 s

Resolution 10 s
Start counter/Starts
Setting range 0 - 65535

Running hour status/Status

Options Stop; Run

Run hour DI link

Options Selection of one digital input (DI), one virtual input (VI),
one virtual output (VO), or one function key (Fx).

Started at Date and time of the last activation

Stopped at Date and time of the last inactivation

P5/EN M/33C 409

Protection Relay Logging and recording functions

Voltage interruptions
Description
The Easergy P5 protection relay includes a simple function to detect voltage
interruptions. The function calculates the number of voltage interruptions and the
total time of the voltage-off time within a given calendar period. The period is
based on the relay's real-time clock. The available periods are:
• 8 hours, 00:00 - 08:00, 08:00 - 16:00, 16:00 - 24:00
• one day, 00:00 - 24:00
• one week, Monday 00:00 - Sunday 24:00
• one month, the first day 00:00 - the last day 24:00
• one year, 1st January 00:00 - 31st December 24:00
After each period, the number of interruptions and the total interruption time are
stored as previous values. The interruption counter and the total time are cleared
for a new period. Previous values are overwritten.
Voltage interruption is based on the value of the positive sequence voltage U1 and
a limit value you can define. Whenever the measured U1 goes below the limit, the
values of the interruption counter and the total time counter starts are
incremented.
The shortest recognised interruption time is 40 ms. If the voltage-off time is
shorter, it may be recognised depending on the relative depth of the voltage dip.
If the voltage has been significantly over the limit U1< and then there is a small
and short under-swing, it is not recognised .

Figure 308 - A short voltage interruption which is probably not recognised

t
P533K1A

On the other hand, if the limit U1< is high and the voltage has been near this limit,
and then there is a short but very deep dip, it is recognised.

Figure 309 - A short voltage interrupt that will be recognised

t
P533K2A

410 P5/EN M/33C

Logging and recording functions Protection Relay

Settings and measurements

The following Setting parameters of the voltage interruption function, page 411
describes the setting parameter used for the voltage interruption and Measured
and recorded values of the voltage interruption function, page 411 shows the
related measured values available.
Table 136 - Setting parameters of the voltage interruption function

Parameter Value
Voltage low limit/U1<

Setting range 10%Un - 120%Un

Resolution 1%

Reset ratio > 103%

Accuracy 3% of the set value

Int. Calc. period/Period

Options 8h; Day; Week; Month; Year

Characteristic time
Start time < 60 ms
Disengaging time < 60 ms

Table 137 - Measured and recorded values of the voltage interruption

function

Parameter Value Description

Measured value Voltage LOW; Current voltage status

OK
U1 Measured positive sequence
voltage

Recorded values Interruption counter/ Number of voltage interruption

Count during the current observation
period

Prev. # of interrupts/ Number of voltage interruption

Prev during the previous observation
period

Total interrupt time/ Total (summed) time of voltage

Total interruption during the current
observation period
NOTE: Total interrupt time "5
20" means 5 days and 20
hours.
Previous total int. time/ Total (summed) time of voltage
Prev interruption during the previous
observation period

P5/EN M/33C 411

Protection Relay Logging and recording functions

Maximum and minimum values of the last 31 days and 12 months

Maximum and minimum values of the phase currents and active/reactive/apparent
power measurements from the last 31 days and the last 12 months are stored in
the relay's non-volatile memory. Corresponding time stamps are stored for the last
31 days.

Figure 310 - Past 31 days maximums/minimums can be viewed in "Month

max" menu

Figure 311 - Past 12 months maximums/minimums can be viewed in "Month

max" menu

412 P5/EN M/33C

Logging and recording functions Protection Relay

The registered values are listed in the following table:

Table 138 - Registered values

Measurement Max Min Description 31 days 12

months
IL1, IL2, IL3 ■ Phase current (fundamental
frequency value)

I0, I0' ■ Residual current

S ■ Apparent power ■ ■

P ■ ■ Active power ■ ■

Q ■ ■ Reactive power ■ ■

The timebase can be a value from one cycle to one minute. Also a demand value
can be used as the timebase and its value can be set between 10 and 60 minutes.
Table 139 - Parameters of the day and month registers

Parameter 83 Value Description

Timebase Parameter to select the type of the registered values

20 ms Collect min and max of one cycle values 84

200 ms Collect min and max of 200 ms average values

1s Collect min and max of 1 s average values

1 min Collect min and max of 1 minute average values

demand Collect min and max of demand values

ResetDays Reset the 31 day registers

ResetMon Reset the 12 month registers

83. Editable parameters (password needed).

84. This is the fundamental frequency RMS value of one cycle updated every 20 ms.

P5/EN M/33C 413

Protection Relay Logging and recording functions

System clock and synchronisation

The Easergy P5 protection relay's internal clock is used to time-stamp events and
disturbance recordings.
The system clock should be externally synchronised to get comparable event time
stamps for all the protection relays in the system.
The synchronising is based on the difference of the internal time and the
synchronising message or pulse. This deviation is filtered and the internal time is
corrected softly towards a zero deviation.

Time zone offsets

Time zone offset (or bias) can be provided to adjust the protection relay's local
time. The offset can be set as a Positive (+) or Negative (-) value within a range of
-15.00 to +15.00 hours and a resolution of 0.01 h. Basically, resolution by a
quarter of an hour is enough.

Daylight saving time (DST)

The protection relay provides automatic daylight saving adjustments when
configured. A daylight saving time (summer time) adjustment can be configured
separately and in addition to a time zone offset.

Figure 312 - Enable/disable DST in eSetup Easergy Pro

Daylight time standards vary widely throughout the world. Traditional daylight/
summer time is configured as one (1) hour positive bias. The new US/Canada
DST standard, adopted in the spring of 2007 is one (1) hour positive bias, starting
at 2:00am on the second Sunday in March, and ending at 2:00am on the first
Sunday in November. In the European Union, daylight change times are defined
relative to the UTC time of day instead of local time of day (as in U.S.), so
European customers need to carefully check the local country rules for DST.
The daylight saving rules are by default UTC +2:00 (24-hour clock):
• Daylight saving time start: Last Sunday of March at 03.00
• Daylight saving time end: Last Sunday of October at 04.00
To ensure proper hands-free year-around operation, automatic daylight time
adjustments must be configured using the “Enable DST” setting and not with the
time zone offset option.

414 P5/EN M/33C

Logging and recording functions Protection Relay

Figure 313 - Settings for automatic daylight time adjustments

Adapting the auto-adjust function

During tens of hours of synchronising, the protection relay learns its average
deviation and starts to make small corrections by itself. The target is that when the
next synchronising message is received, the deviation is already near zero.
Parameters "AAIntv" and "AvDrft" show the adapted correction time interval of this
±1 ms auto-adjust function.

Time drift correction without external sync

If any external synchronising source is not available and the system clock has a
known steady drift, it is possible to roughly correct the clock deviation by editing
the parameters "AAIntv" and "AvDrft". The following equation can be used if the
previous "AAIntv" value has been zero.

604.8
AAIntv =
DriftInOneWeek
P533K3A

If the auto-adjust interval "AAIntv" has not been zero, but further trimming is still
needed, the following equation can be used to calculate a new auto-adjust
interval.

1
AAIntvNEW =
1 DriftInOneWeek
+
AAIntvPREVIOUS 604.8 P533K4A

The term DriftInOneWeek/604.8 may be replaced with the relative drift multiplied
by 1000 if some other period than one week has been used. For example, if the
drift has been 37 seconds in 14 days, the relative drift is 37*1000/(14*24*3600) =
0.0306 ms/s.

P5/EN M/33C 415

Protection Relay Logging and recording functions

Example 1
If there has been no external sync and the protection relay's clock is leading sixty-
one seconds a week and the parameter AAIntv has been zero, the parameters are
set as:

AvDrft = Lead
604.8
AAIntv = = 9.9s
61 P533K5A

With these parameter values, the system clock corrects itself with –1 ms every 9.9
seconds which equals –61.091 s/week.
Example 2
If there is no external sync and the protection relay's clock has been lagging five
seconds in nine days and the AAIntv has been 9.9 s, leading, then the parameters
are set as:

1
AAIntv NEW = = 10.6
1 5000
−
9.9 9 ⋅ 24 ⋅ 3600

AvDrft = Lead P533K6A

When the internal time is roughly correct – the deviation is less than four seconds
– no synchronising or auto-adjust turns the clock backwards. Instead, if the clock
is leading, it is softly slowed down to maintain causality.

synchronisation with DI
The clock can be recognised by reading minute pulses from digital inputs, virtual
inputs or virtual outputs. The sync source is selected with the SyncDI setting.
When a rising edge is detected from the selected input, the system clock is
adjusted to the nearest minute. The length of the digital input pulse should be at
least 50 ms. The delay of the selected digital input should be set to zero.

synchronisation correction
If the sync source has a known offset delay, it can be compensated with the SyOS
setting. This is useful for compensating hardware delays or transfer delays of
communication protocols. A positive value compensates a lagging external sync
and communication delays. A negative value compensates any leading offset of
the external synch source.

Sync source
When the protection relay receives new sync message, the sync source display is
updated. If no new sync messages are received within the next 1.5 minutes, the
protection relay switches over to internal sync mode.

Sync source: IRIG-B

IRIG-B synchronisation is supported by the IRIG-B module connected to the
optional extension module of the protection relay.

Deviation
The time deviation means how much the system clock time differs from the sync
source time. The time deviation is calculated after receiving a new sync message.

416 P5/EN M/33C

Logging and recording functions Protection Relay

The filtered deviation means how much the system clock was really adjusted.
Filtering takes care of small deviation in sync messages.

Auto-lag/lead
The protection relay synchronises to the sync source, meaning that it starts
automatically leading or lagging to stay in sync with the master. The learning
process takes a few days.

Table 140 - Clock synchronisation parameters

Parameter Value Description

(description/label)

synchronising source/ Clock synchronisation source

SySrc
Internal No sync synchronised since 200s

DI Digital input

SNTP Protocol sync

ModBus Protocol sync

ModBus TCP Protocol sync

IEC101 Protocol sync

IEC103 Protocol sync

DNP3 Protocol sync

Minute sync pulse DI/ The digital input used for clock synchronisation.
SyncDI 85 Possible value depends on the type of I/O card
installed.
- DI not used for synchronising.

Select one digital

input, one virtual
input, or one
function key.

Synch correction/ -10000.000 - synchronisation correction for any constant deviation

SyOS +10000.000 s in the synchronising source

Auto adjust interval/ 0.0 - 1000.0 s Adapted auto-adjust interval for 1 ms correction
AAIntv 86
Average drift/AvDrft lead; lag Adapted average clock drift sign

Sync message 0 - 65535 The number of received synchronisation messages

counter/MsgCnt or pulses

Latest time deviation/ ± 32767 ms Latest time deviation between the system clock and
Dev the received synchronisation

Filtered sync ± 125 ms Filtered synchronisation deviation

deviation/FilDev

85. Set the DI delay to its minimum and the polarity so that the leading edge is the synchronising edge.
86. If external synchronisation is used, this parameter is set automatically.

P5/EN M/33C 417

Protection Relay Logging and recording functions

Table 141 - System clock parameters

Parameter Value Description

(description/label)

Date/Date Current date

Time of day/Time Current time

Date style/Style yyyy-mm-dd Date format

dd-mm-yyyy

mm-dd-yyyy

Time zone/Time zone -15.00 - +15.00 87 UTC time zone for SNTP synchronisation. 88

Status of DST/DST enabled; disabled Daylight saving time for SNTP

Enable event enabled; disabled

87. A range of -11 h - +12 h would cover the whole Earth but because the International Date Line does not follow the 180° meridian, a wider
range is needed.
88. Decimal numbers are used, e.g. the time zone of 5:45 is expressed as 5.75.

418 P5/EN M/33C

Monitoring functions Protection Relay

Monitoring functions
Trip circuit supervision (ANSI 74)
Description
Trip circuit supervision monitors the wiring from the protective device to the circuit
breaker trip coil. This function monitors the availability of the circuit when it is
requested to trip and reports an issue if needed.
By default, this user-configurable supervision function uses the Easergy P5
programmable logic to monitor the circuit continuity, loss of auxiliary supply
voltage or mismatching of the CB position indication contacts. Depending on user
settings, the function inhibits closing of the circuit breaker.

Trip circuit supervision scheme

The trip circuit supervision scheme using two digital inputs 52a and 52b can be
implemented as illustrated in the following wiring diagram. No external resistors
are needed for this scheme to function.

Figure 314 - Trip circuit supervision scheme

wire 1

Trip
relay(s) CB open DI1 CB closed DI2 Easergy P5

wire 2a
wire 2b

Circuit breaker
Trip
coil

wire 3
P533JAA

In the normal condition, when the trip circuit is OK, the status of inputs is opposite
(0,1) or (1,0). When the trip circuit is not OK (coil, wires, auxiliary contact state or
auxiliary voltage failure), both logic inputs are in the same state and an alarm is
issued after a delay. This delay is needed to prevent false signaling during breaker
opening events. The timing is set based on breaker operating time and trip pulse
length.
The following table summarizes the TCS alarm output depending on the CB and
its auxiliary contact positions as well as possible wiring failure conditions.

CB position Conditions CB open DI1 CB closed DI2 TCS alarm

Closed Trip circuit OK Closed Open False

Wire 1 failure 89 Open Open True

Wire 2a failure 89 Open Open True

Wire 3 or trip coil failure 89 Open Open True

Open Trip circuit OK Open Closed False

Wire 1 failure 89 Open Open True

89. "failure" indicates that one or more of the components are permanently open circuit or short circuit.

P5/EN M/33C 419

Protection Relay Monitoring functions

CB position Conditions CB open DI1 CB closed DI2 TCS alarm

Wire 2b failure 90 Open Open True

Wire 3 or trip coil failure 90 Open Open True

Figure 315 - Block diagram of trip circuit supervision (ANSI 74)

CB open DI1
T 0
=1 TCS alarm
CB closed DI2
T=2s

P533JDA

Figure 316 - TCS with two digital inputs when the CB is in closed position

TCS alarm
=1
2s

52b 52a

P533JBA

90. "failure" indicates that one or more of the components are permanently open circuit or short circuit.

420 P5/EN M/33C

Monitoring functions Protection Relay

Figure 317 - TCS two digital inputs when the CB is in open position

TCS alarm
=1
2s

52b 52a

P533JCA

The figure below shows the default logic configuration of TCS in Easergy P5. In
this example the TCS is latched when an error condition is encountered and reset
using a virtual input.

Figure 318 - An example of logic configuration for TCS

Figure 319 - An example of output matrix configuration for TCS

P5/EN M/33C 421

Protection Relay Monitoring functions

Circuit breaker monitoring

Description
Periodic maintenance of circuit breakers is necessary to ensure that the trip circuit
and mechanism operate correctly and that the interrupting capability has not been
compromised due to previous fault interruptions. The Easergy P5 protection relay
records various statistics related to each circuit breaker operation, allowing an
accurate assessment of the circuit breaker condition. Statistics are recorded to
allow evaluation of both the electrical wear of the breaker contacts and the
mechanical wear of the breaker mechanism.

Electrical wear
Breaker curve
The permitted CB operation number is defined by a CB permissible operation
curve. This curve is usually available in the documentation of the CB
manufacturer. The curve specifies the permissible number of operations for every
level of broken current.

Figure 320 - An example of circuit breaker permissible operation curve

100000
Number of permitted operations

10000

1000

100
50

20
10
100 200 500 1000 10000 100000
Breaken current (A) P533JEA

As shown in the figure below, in the Easergy P5 protection relay, this curve is
parameterised in the CB monitoring function with a maximum of eight points in the
form of [CurveIx, CurvNx]. If fewer than eight points are needed, the unused
points are set to [IBIG, 1], where IBIG is more than the maximum breaking capacity.

Table 142 - Values of the above circuit breaker wear characteristic graph

Point Interrupted current (kA) Number of permitted operations

1 0 (mechanical age) 10,000

2 1.25 (rated current) 10,000

3 31.0 (maximum breaking current) 80

4-8 100 1

The values are taken from the figure above. The table (circuit breaker curve) is
edited with eSetup Easergy Pro or Web HMI in the CB Monitoring view of the
protection menu.
Two alarms on “Operations left” limit
The CB monitoring function is designed with two alarms, each with two
parameters:
• Current

422 P5/EN M/33C

Monitoring functions Protection Relay

This parameter can be set to the CB's nominal current or any typical
application current for the first alarm, and to a typical fault current for the
second alarm.
• Operations left
This parameter determines when an alarm is activated. When the “operations
left” at the given current level drops below this limit, the alarm is started.
The permitted operations at these two alarm levels can be calculated
automatically according to the breaker curve and logarithmic interpolation (see
next section). Any actual interrupted current is logarithmically weighted for the two
given alarm current levels and the number of operations left at the alarm points is
decreased accordingly. As shown in the figure below, the Easergy P5 protection
relay shows the allowed “operations left” based on the breaker curve, logarithmic
interpolation and actual interrupted current.

Figure 321 - Permitted “Operations left” settings for the alarms

Logarithmic interpolation
The permitted number of operations for the currents between the defined points is
logarithmically interpolated using this equation:

a
C=
In P533JFA

where
C = permitted operations
I = broken current
a, n = constant according to the following two equations, where ln represents the
natural logarithm function, Ck/Ck+1 is the permitted number of operations defined
by CurveN, Curve(N+1) in the breaker curve table, and Ik/Ik+1 is the corresponding
broken current defined by CurveIk, CurveI(k+1) in the breaker curve table.
n
a = Ck I k P533JJA

Ck
ln
C k +1
n=
I
ln k +1
Ik P533JGA

Each time a trip signal is detected, the corresponding permitted operations shall
be calculated based on the broken current Ibrk:
a
Cbrk = n
Ibrk P533JHA

The corresponding decreased number of operations of the alarm level is

calculated as:
Calarm
Δ=
Cbrk P533JIA

P5/EN M/33C 423

Protection Relay Monitoring functions

Example of logarithmic interpolation

According to the equations above and the breaker operation curve points
definition taken from Range of CB monitoring recording data, page 425:
• 10000 operations at 1.25 KA
• 80 operations at 31 KA
if the alarm 2 current setting is 6 kA, then the permitted number of operations can
be calculated as follows:

ln 10000
80
n= = 1.5038
ln 31000
1250 P533JKA

a =10000 ⋅ 1250 1.5038= 454 ⋅ 10 6 P533JLA

6
a 454 x 10
Calarm2 = n = 1.5038
= 945
Ibrk 6000 P533JMA

Thus, the maximum number of current-breaking operations at 6 kA is 945. A

useful alarm level for “Operations left” could be in this case for example 50, which
is about five percent of the maximum.
If the interrupted three phase currents are L1 = 12.5 kA, L2 = 12.5 kA and L3 = 1.5
kA, the corresponding decreased number of operations of phase L1, L2 for alarm
2 are calculated as:
6
a 454 x 10
Cbrk1,2 = n = 1.5038
=313
Ibrk 12500 P533JNA

Calarm 945
∆1,2 = = =3
Cbrk 313 P533JOA

In phase L3, the current is less than the alarm limit current 6 kA. For such
currents, the decrement is one.
Five ranges of cumulative current
Each time the CB opens, the broken current is added to the corresponding total
cumulative broken current, phase by phase. The cumulative broken current is
given in (kA)2.
In addition to the total cumulative broken current, there are five cumulative broken
current ranges to assess the breaking device pole condition. Each range’s high
limit value is configurable and the low limit value equals to the high limit of its
previous range. Each range has three different counters, one for each phase, to
record how many times the broken current falls into the range. see figure below.

424 P5/EN M/33C

Monitoring functions Protection Relay

Figure 322 - Cumulative broken current record

The cumulative broken current is also computed by phase. When the Easergy P5
protection relay is in test mode or the CB has been withdrawn, the cumulative
broken current is not updated.
An alarm signal will be generated when the cumulative broken current of any
phase exceeds the "broken I alarm setting".

Mechanical wear
CB Open counter, Protection Trip counter and Rack out counter
The “CB Open” counter is to record the number of CB close to open operation. It is
incremented even if the Easergy P5 protection relay is in test mode.
The “Protection Trip” counter is to record CB open times issued from Global trip.
This counter can also be set to a custom value but it does not increment during
test mode.
If, for whatever reason the circuit breaker does not open successfully after the
pulse setting time out ( configured in object), the trip counters are not
incremented.
The “Rack out” counter is to record the number of racking in/out operations of the
CB truck. It is incremented in test mode.
Open time, close time and charging time
If two different digital signals are used to indicate the 52a and 52b status of the CB
position, the open time is measured from the moment when the “52b” status
becomes false to the moment when the “52a” status becomes true; the close time
is measured from the moment when the “52a” status becomes false to the
moment when the “52b” status becomes true.
However, if the CB position is only configured as 52a or 52b, the open time and
close time will be recorded as 0 each time when its related status changes.
The charging time is computed from the moment when the CB position changes to
close to the moment when the spring status changes to ready. The spring status is
configured through "DI for object ready" setting in Objects.
Open/close times and charging times are recorded for 8 latest operations in the
Easergy P5, each with a timestamp. If the time recorded exceeds the range, the
time will be tagged as a "dummy" value (65535) which allows the customer to
easily detect something is wrong with the CB.

Table 143 - Range of CB monitoring recording data

Recording data Range

Opening or closing time 0 - 300 ms

Charging time 0 - 1 min

P5/EN M/33C 425

Protection Relay Monitoring functions

Table 143 - Range of CB monitoring recording data (Continued)

Recording data Range

Number of mechanical operations 0 - 65535

Rack-in rack-out operations 0 - 65535

These CB open times, close times and charging times are also recorded when the
Easergy P5 is in test mode.

Figure 323 - Open and close time calculation

52b

Open time Close time

52a
P533JPA

Parameters of the CB monitoring function

Table 144 - Parameters of the CB monitoring function

Parameter Value Unit Description Note

CB monitoring status

Operation number left for

Al1L1 - Alarm 1, phase L1
Al1L2 - Alarm 1, phase L2
Al1L3 - Alarm 1, phase L3
Al2L1 - Alarm 2, phase L1
Al2L2 - Alarm 2, phase L2
Al2L3 - Alarm 2, phase L3

Latest broken current

hh:mm:ss:ms / Date Time stamp of the latest trip
operation

Phase current IL1 / IL1 A Broken current of phase L1

Phase current IL2 / IL2 A Broken current of phase L2
Phase current IL3 / IL3 A Broken current of phase L3

Cumul. broken current (kA)2

IL1/CmltvIL1
Cumul. broken current (kA)2
IL2/CmltvIL2
Cumul. broken current (kA)2
IL3/CmltvIL3
Alarm
Alarm 1
Current 0.00 - 100.00 kA Alarm1 current level Editable
Cycles 100,000 - 1 Alarm1 limit for operations left Editable

Alarm 2
Current 0.00 - 100.00 kA Alarm2 current level Editable
Cycles 100,000 - 1 Alarm2 limit for operations left Editable

Circuit breaker curve setting

Current points (CurveIx, 0.00 - 100.00 kA 8 current points of the CB wear Editable
x = 1, 2, … 8) characteristic

426 P5/EN M/33C

Monitoring functions Protection Relay

Table 144 - Parameters of the CB monitoring function (Continued)

Parameter Value Unit Description Note

Limit for operation left 0 - 100,000 8 permitted operation numbers Editable

(CurveNx, x = 1, 2, … 8) accordingly to CurveIx

Cumulative broken current setting

High limit / Iprim 0.0 - 100.0 kA High limit setting for each bin Editable

Broken I alarm setting 0 - 65,535 Cumulative broken current alarm Editable

threshold
Event setting

'Op. number alarm 1 On ; Off Enable/disable the 'Alarm1 on' Editable

On' event / Al1On event
'Op. number alarm 1 On ; Off Enable/disable the 'Alarm1 off' Editable
Off' event / Al1Off event
'Op. number alarm 2 On ; Off Enable/disable the 'Alarm2 on' Editable
On' event / Al2On event
'Op. number alarm 2 On ; Off Enable/disable the 'Alarm2 off' Editable
Off' event / Al2Off event
‘Broken Curr. Alarm on’ On ; Off Enable/disable the ‘Broken Curr. Editable
event/ Alarm on’ event
‘Broken Curr. Alarm off’ On ; Off Enable/disable the ‘Broken Curr. Editable
event/ Alarm off’ event

Parameter Accuracy

Characteristic of recording data

Opening or closing time ±5 ms

Charging time ±1 s

Number of mechanical operations 1

Cumulative squared broken current ±10%

Rack-in rack-out operations 1

P5/EN M/33C 427

Protection Relay Monitoring functions

Current transformer supervision (ANSI 60)

Description
The Current Transformer Supervision (CTS) feature is used to detect failure of
one or more of the phase current inputs to the protection relay. Failure of a phase
CT or an open circuit of the interconnecting wiring can result in:
• Incorrect operation of current protection functions
• Risks of unexpected CT secondary voltages generated
Three operation modes can be selected:
• 3I only
If the magnitude of one phase current is below 1% In, while the magnitude of
the other two phases current is 5% In - 1.2 In and the angle between them is
110° - 130°, the function issues a fast alarm after 20 ms and a delayed alarm
after the operation delay has elapsed.
When the minimum value of magnitude of three phase exceeds 0.1In or CTS
output reset is activated, the alarm will be reset.
• I0 & U0
If residual current exceeds the residual current pickup value and the residual
voltage is less than the residual voltage pickup value, the function issues a
fast alarm immediately and a delayed alarm after the operation delay has
elapsed.
The alarm will be reset when I0 drops down under 95% of the residual current
pickup value or U0 is higher than 103% of the residual voltage pickup value or
CTS output reset is activated.
• Both
CT failure is detected if one of the above modes is fulfilled.
The function is inactive if only 2 phase current sensors are connected (2 CT
mode). It is recommended for the user to decrease the maintenance interval for
the current sensors in this mode.
In addition to supervising the phase current inputs, the CT supervision function
(CTS) also provides supervision of the physical connection of LPCT. If the physical
connection of any LPCT is lost, an “LPCT connection loss” alarm will be issued.
Please note in this case all the three phase current measurements are lost.

428 P5/EN M/33C

Monitoring functions Protection Relay

Block diagram

Figure 324 - Block diagram of the current transformer supervision function

LPCTlost
T 0 Alarm
IL1 < 1%In
& Register
IL2 > 5%In event
Loss of phase
< 1.2In 20ms 0
L1 OR Fast Alarm
&
IL3 > 5%In Register
&
Loss of phase L2
event
< 1.2In ≥1 S
Angle R
IL2 Loss of phase L3
110° - 130° ≥1
IL3

Min > 0.1In

I0 > & ≥1

U0 <

Reset
DI input

I 0> U0< OpMod Enable events P533JQA

Characteristics
Table 145 - Settings and characteristics of the current transformer
supervision function (ANSI 60)

Settings/characteristics Values
(description/label)

Residual current > / I0>

Setting range 0.08In - 4In

Resolution 0.01In
Accuracy ±3%

Reset ratio 95% ± 2%

Residual voltage < / U0<

Setting range 1%Un - 30%Un

Resolution 1%

Accuracy ±3%

Reset ratio 103% ± 2%

Operation delay / t>

Setting range 0.04 - 10.00 s

Resolution 0.01 s
Accuracy ±1% or ±30 ms at 3I0 and 3U0

Characteristic times
Disengaging time < 60 ms

CTS Operate mode / OpMode

Options Both; 3I only; I0 & U0

CTS output reset / CTSReset

Options Selection of one digital input (DIx)

P5/EN M/33C 429

Protection Relay Monitoring functions

Table 145 - Settings and characteristics of the current transformer

supervision function (ANSI 60) (Continued)

Settings/characteristics Values
(description/label)

Delay CT supervision event on / DlyEvtOn

Options Enable; Disable

Delay CT supervision event off / DlyEvtOff

Options Enable; Disable

Fast CT supervisor event on / FastEvtOn

Options Enable; Disable

Fast CT supervisor event off / FastEvtOff

Options Enable; Disable

Table 146 - Measured values of CT

Parameter Unit Description

Max. of IL1 IL2 IL3 / ILmax A Maximum value of phase currents

Min. of IL1 IL2 IL3 / ILmin A Minimum value of phase currents

I0Calc A I0 calculated value

Residual voltage / U0 % Residual voltage in percentage of rated voltage

430 P5/EN M/33C

Monitoring functions Protection Relay

Voltage transformer supervision (ANSI 60)

Description
The Easergy P5 protection relay supervises the voltage transformers (VTs) wiring
between the connector A terminals and the sensors. If there is a fuse in the
voltage transformer circuitry, the blown fuse prevents or distorts the voltage
measurement. Therefore, an alarm should be issued. Furthermore, in some
applications, protection functions using voltage signals should be blocked to avoid
false tripping such as:
• Earth/ground fault overvoltage and directional earth/ground fault overcurrent
using calculated residual voltage
• Phase undervoltage or negative sequence overvoltage
• Directional overcurrent
• Power
The Voltage Transformer Supervision (VTS) function detects the loss of one or
several phase voltage inputs using various well known methods:
• The detection of the presence of negative sequence voltage and the absence
of negative sequence current. The negative sequence voltage U2 and the
negative sequence current I2 are calculated. If U2 exceeds the U2> setting
and at the same time, I2 is less than the I2< setting, the function issues an
alarm after the operation delay has elapsed. This criterion is meaningful only
when a reasonable minimum current is flowing, i.e. if the maximum phase
current is greater than the minimum current setting I>(min).
• The detection of the loss of all three voltages under load conditions or upon
line energisation, if current inputs are available. The high current setting shall
be above the maximum load current, but below the close-up three phases
short-circuit currents, which are accompanied with a drop of the three phase
voltages to values below 30% Un.
• Digital input (DI) for indicating miniature circuit breaker (MCB) position
• The VT supervision function (VTS) also provides supervision of the physical
connections of the three phase LPVTs. If the physical connection of any
phase LPVT is lost, an internal “LPVT loss” signal will be accepted to
immediately trigger the VTS function.
If according to above conditions a loss of voltage is detected, immediately a
"VTS fast block" signal is issued, intended for instantaneous blocking of
voltage dependent functions to prevent maloperation. A further "VTS alarm"
signal will be issued after a settable time delay to prevent unnecessary
alarming upon spurious VTS operation.
VT supervision will reset when all the following conditions are satisfied:
• Negative sequence voltage U2 is less than U2> setting, or negative sequence
current I2 is greater than I2< setting, or maximum phase current is less than I>
(min) setting.
• Maximum phase-to-phase voltage is greater than 30%Un while the maximum
phase current is within the set range of minimum (I>(min)) and maximum (I<
(max)) currents.
• MCB input resets.
• LPVT loss input resets.
When the VT failure condition is not satisfied for 10 s, the “VTS alarm” will be
reset.
In addition, the VTS function can be blocked by inhibit control function.
NOTE: For Easergy P5V20's VTS function, only MCB input is avaliable.

P5/EN M/33C 431

Protection Relay Monitoring functions

Block diagram

Figure 325 - Block diagram of the voltage transformer supervision function

U2 > & VTS fast block

& ≥1

I2 <

& Register
IL1 event
IL2 max(I) >
IL3 &
<
VTS alarm
U12 t
U23 max(V) < 0.3Un
U31
& Register
event
MCB open
≥1
LPVT loss

Inhibit Ctrl

P533JRB

U2> I2< I< (max) I> (min) t> Reset time Enable events

432 P5/EN M/33C

Monitoring functions Protection Relay

Characteristics
Table 147 - Settings and characteristics of the voltage transformer
supervision function (ANSI 60)

Settings/characteristics Values
(description/label)

U2> setting/U2>

Setting range 2.0 - 100.0 %Vn

Resolution 0.1
Accuracy ±2% or ± 0.2 V (secondary), whichever is bigger

I2< setting/I2<

Setting range 0.02 - 1.00 xIn

Resolution 0.01
Accuracy ±2% or 0.02 In, whichever is bigger

Operation delay/t>

Setting range 0.04 - 600.00 s

Resolution 0.02 s
Accuracy ±1% or ±30 ms, whichever is bigger

DI for MCB position/MCB

Options Selection of one digital input (DI)

Inhibit ctrl/InhCtrl
Options Selection of one input (DI; VI)

I>(min) setting/I>(min)

Setting range 0.02 - 1.00 xIn

Resolution 0.01 In
Accuracy ±1% or 0.02 In

I<(max) setting/I<(max)

Setting range 0.10 - 20.00 xIn

Resolution 0.01 In
Accuracy ±1% or 0.02 In, whichever is bigger

V<
Value 30% Vn, fixed

Accuracy ±1% or ± 0.1 V (secondary), whichever is bigger

Reset time (fixed)

Value 10 s
Accuracy 30 ms

Characteristic times
Reset time < 30 ms
Setting group/SetGrp

Number 1

P5/EN M/33C 433

Protection Relay Maintenance

Maintenance
The Easergy P5 protection relays together with their extension units,
communication accessories, arc-flash detection sensors and cabling, require
maintenance in work according to their specification. Keep a record of the
maintenance actions. The maintenance can include, but is not limited to, the
following actions.

Safety instructions
This page contains important safety instructions that must be followed precisely
before attempting to install, repair, service or maintain electrical equipment.
Carefully read and follow the safety instructions described below.

DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH
• NEVER work alone.
• Turn off all power supplying this equipment before working on or inside it.
Consider all sources of power, including the possibility of backfeeding.
• Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device to confirm that all power
is off.
• Do not power a withdrawn mobile part of the Easergy P5 protection relay
with voltage > 24 V. Put back the withdrawable part in the fixed part before
powering it on.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

DANGER
FIRE HAZARD
Apply proper tightening torque to all wire connections.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

DANGER
FIRE HAZARD
If you are authorised to withdraw the relay:
• Disconnect the power supply before removing or replacing a module or the
withdrawable part of the protection relay.
• Never touch electronics parts (risk of damage due to electrostatic
discharge).
• Before replacing the withdrawable part, clean all debris and contaminants
from the case, the withdrawable part, and the connectors.
• In case of module or withdrawable part replacement, perform the
commissioning operations before using the protection relay.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

CAUTION
RISK OF SETTING CHANGES ERASED
Never plug in or draw out the communication modules while the Easergy P5
protection relay is in service.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment
damage.

434 P5/EN M/33C

Maintenance Protection Relay

Self-monitoring
Watchdog relay
The Easergy P5 protection relays are equipped as standard with a watchdog relay
(digital output 4 in slot B). This is a changeover relay which is kept permanently in
the on-position by the Easergy P5 protection relay. In the event of protection relay
failure, or if the auxiliary power supply fails, the watchdog relay reverts to the off-
position.

Maintenance/Test LED
The Easergy P5 protection relay has gone into the fall-back position following
detection by the embedded self-tests of the failure of one of its internal
components. In this case, the Easergy P5 protection relay is no longer

operational. This LED may light up when the protection relay is energised
during all the start phase of the Easergy P5 protection relay (for about 60
seconds). This is normal and does not indicate any internal failure. When the start
phase of the protection relay is completed, the LED is off if no internal failure is
detected.

Purpose of the self-tests

The Easergy P5 protection relay runs a series of self-diagnostic tests for hardware
and software in boot sequence and also performs runtime check. These self-tests
detect any failure and can avoid random Easergy P5 protection relay behaviour.
The main aim is to avoid an unwanted tripping or failure to trip in the event that it
occurs on the power system or on the equipment to protect.
The Easergy P5 protection relay can detect two types of internal failure:
• A major failure when the protection functions cannot be processed properly or
can initiate an unwanted trip. In this case, The Easergy P5 protection relay
goes into the fall-back position:
◦ The output relays are in the off-position
◦ Watchdog relay (DO4 contact output on slot B) goes into the off-position
◦ The LED, LED, and the configurable LEDs are off
◦ The LED, on the local panel, is on

◦ The LED on the local panel is on

◦ A message is displayed on the local panel: it allows Schneider Electric to
make a diagnosis.
◦ The communication is inoperative
◦ The communication with eSetup Easergy Pro is inactive depending on the
type of internal failure
• A minor defect, is a malfunction of components (hardware or firmware) which
is not used directly by protection functions (i.e. memory, used for logging
emergency events, communication channels, etc.). It shall not result in loss of
Easergy P5 protection relay operability.
◦ The output relays stay in their current status
◦ Watchdog relay relay (DO4 contact output on slot B) stays energised
◦ The LED, LED, and configurable LEDs stay in their current position
◦ The LED, on the local panel, is on

◦ The LED on the local panel is off

◦ An alarm message is displayed on the local panel to highlight the origin of
the issue.

P5/EN M/33C 435

Protection Relay Maintenance

Press the key to remove the message (the alarm message is logged in
the Alarm message list).
◦ The communication is still operational depending on the type of the
internal failure
◦ The communication with eSetup Easergy Pro, on the local panel is active
depending on the type of internal failure

List of self-tests
The self-tests are described in the table below.
Table 148 - List of self-tests

Name Execution Period

Hardware configuration versus the product model number

Power supply

Internal drivers (FPGA)

EEPROM boards
NOR Flash memory

NAND flash memory

DDRAM memory
On energisation and during
Back up memory
operation
Internal bus
Display and graphic libraries

RTD presence (MET148-2)

Micro processor

Firmware (system and application) and setting consistency

Digital inputs

Digital outputs

436 P5/EN M/33C

Maintenance Protection Relay

Backup memory
The Easergy P5 protection relay has an optional feature of a removable back up
memory. This feature provides a mechanism for storing the product settings and
other related information separately to the removable part of Easergy P5.
The memory allows quick, restoration of settings should there be a need to
exchange the withdrawable part. As a result, the mobile part can be replaced and
back in service in a matter of minutes.
The optional back up memory is included in the extension module that can be
installed in Slot P. This extension module also includes connectivity to support
IRIG-B and thermal sensors.

Figure 326 - The optional extension module (slot P) that includes the back-
up memory

The backup memory stores the following information:

• Settings
• Event and alarm history
• Disturbance recordings
• Product serial number
• Product Cortec
• Persistent data included Thermal value, Running Hours, Accumulated energy
etc.
• Language file
NOTE: The Easergy P5 access information such as passwords and users are
not stored in the backup.
Two versions of the information are held in the backup memory together with a
verification CRC.
This allows one of the copies to be written and verified before erasing the second
thus keeping the integrity of the data stored even if there are any power
interruptions during the write process.
NOTE: There is always one valid backup version with CRC check in the
backup memory even when new backup is in progress.

Automatic storage
The Easergy P5 automatically stores all settings, events and disturbance
recordings at 2AM local time every day.
As indicated above the secured process means that the memory can not be
corrupted as the save is verified before previous data is overwritten.
NOTE: Due to this unique feature the important data and settings are always
secured locally and not based on any remote storage on a control system.

Manual storage of settings

In addition to the daily automatic storage, the settings can be stored to the
memory at any time by choosing the command from the local panel HMI.
To save the settings manually:

P5/EN M/33C 437

Protection Relay Maintenance

1. Press the key to enter the main menu and then select the Device/Test icon
using the arrow keys.
2. Press the key to enter the Device/Test sub menu.
3. Select the Back-up option using the key and press .
4. Press , select Man. Trig and then press .
Backup Memory 1/2
Trigger backup memory
Status Idle
Man. Trig -

5. Press the key to select On.

6. The status shows Busy; when the storage is complete the status goes back to
Idle.

Replacement of the withdrawable part

Should there be a need to replace the withdrawable part, the back-up memory
provides a simple and quick mechanism to bring the protection relay back into
service.
Power the unit down and extract the moving part using the green handle. If the
removable part is secured with screws please follow the installation instructions
(Unscrewing the front face locking screws, page 43) to remove the screws. Press
the lock on the handle upwards and pull the handle. Insert the new unit with a
matching order code and push the handle back to its original position and install
back the screws.
After re-powering the module, the following “New backup content found”
notification appears.

New backup content found.

2020-07-17 14:22:36
VOL.300.103
P5F30-EACB-IBBEH-AABC
Compatible

Ignore Restore

Choose what happens with the back up memory.

Press the key to keep the information in the back up memory or the button
to discard and prevent the pop up occurring again.
NOTE: This action does not restore the settings. Follow the ‘Restore from
Backup memory’ process described below.

Restore from backup memory

The settings can be restored from the backup memory at any time by choosing the
command from the front HMI.
To restore the settings manually:

1. Press the key to access the main menu and then select Device/Test by
using the arrow keys.
2. Press the key to enter the Device/Test sub menu.
3. Press the key to select the Back-up option and then press .
4. Press the key to enter the second setting page “Restore Memory” and
then press .

438 P5/EN M/33C

Maintenance Protection Relay

5. Press the key to select the “Trig restore memory” parameter and then
press .
6. Press the key to select On.
The Easergy P5 shows the following notification window:
CAUTION
All the settings, events,
records will be replaced
by backup. Don’t apply an
unverified backup against
unpredictable risks.
Recheck relay after restore.
Restore Cancel

7. Press the key to accept restore.

• If the stored file is incompatible with the hardware, “No valid restore
point” notification is displayed.

Restore memory 2/2

No valid restore point

Press Home to cancel

• If the file is compatible and Easergy P5 is connected to eSetup Easergy

Pro, the device requires a manual restart when the screen indicates
“RESTART”.
BAY
RESTART

• If the file is compatible and there is no connection, Easergy P5 reboots

automatically.
8. Following the reboot, the file in the back up memory is verified before
restoring the settings. Press to accept restore.
9. In the next step the files are copied and verified.
10. When the files are restored successfully, press .
11. The Easergy P5 protection relay reboots and the restore is completed.
12. After reboot the “New backup content found” notification might pop-up again,
press the key to prevent repetition of restore.

Restore process confirmation

The restore process can be confirmed from the local panel HMI.
1. Select the second screen in the Back-up sub menu by pressing the key.
The screen does not display any information while restoring is in progress.
2. When restoring is completed, the device information appears on the screen.
The “Compliance check” parameter shows status “Checking” for a short while
and changes to “True” after a successful restoring process.

P5/EN M/33C 439

Protection Relay Maintenance

Restore memory 2/2

Update -
Firmware -
Ref. -
Compliance check -
Manual restore -

Restory memory 2/2

Update 2020-06-02 15:07:24
Firmware V01.300.101
Ref. P5U20-AABB-CABAH-AABB
Compliance check True
Manual restore -

440 P5/EN M/33C

Maintenance Protection Relay

Preventive maintenance
The Easergy P5 protection relay requires maintenance in order for it to work
according to the specification.

WARNING
HAZARD OF UNEXPECTED SYSTEM OPERATION
Carry out periodic system testing as per the testing recommendation in this
manual or if the protection system scheme has been changed.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or
equipment damage.

Introduction
To obtain the maximum availability of the installation, it is essential to ensure that
the Easergy P5 protection relay is operational at any times.
The Easergy P5 protection relay's internal self-tests, the watchdog relay, and the
LED alert the user in the event of internal protection relay failure.
Nevertheless, elements outside the Easergy P5 protection relay are not subject to
these self-tests and it is therefore necessary to carry out regular preventive
maintenance.
Check the Easergy P5 protection relay visually and pay attention to dirty
components, loose wire connections, damaged wiring, user interface screen and
LEDs, and other mechanical connections.
Then, to perform maintenance, carry out all the recommended commissioning
tests.
First test all the digital inputs and outputs involved in tripping the circuit breaker. A
test of the complete chain including the circuit breaker is also recommended.
The software setting tool, eSetup Easergy Pro, is especially useful during
maintenance tests and procedures.

P5/EN M/33C 441

Protection Relay Maintenance

DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION, OR ARC FLASH
• Apply appropriate personal protective equipment (PPE) and follow safe
electrical work practices. See NFPA 70E, NOM-029-STPS-2011, or
CSAZ462.
• The arc fault detection system is not a substitute for proper PPE when
working on or near equipment being monitored by the system.
• Information on this product is offered as a tool for conducting arc-flash
hazard analysis. It is intended for use only by qualified persons who are
knowledgeable about power system studies, power distribution equipment,
and equipment installation practices. It is not intended as a substitute for the
engineering judgement and adequate review necessary for such activities.
• Only qualified personnel should install and service this equipment. Read this
entire set of instructions and check the technical characteristics of the device
before performing such work.
• Perform wiring according to national standards (NEC) and any requirements
specified by the customer.
• Observe any separately marked notes and warnings.
• NEVER work alone.
• Before performing visual inspections, tests, or maintenance on this
equipment, disconnect all sources of electric power. Assume all circuits are
live until they are completely de-energized, tested, and tagged. Pay
particular attention to the design of the power system. Consider all sources
of power, including the possibility of back feeding.
• Always use a properly rated voltage sensing relay to ensure that all power is
off.
• The equipment must be properly grounded.
• Connect the device's protective ground to functional earth according to the
connection diagrams presented in this document.
• Do not open the device. It contains no user-serviceable parts.
• Install all devices, doors and covers before turning on the power to this
device.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

Intervention frequency
Test the Easergy P5 protection relay periodically according to the end user's
safety instructions and national safety instructions or law.
The necessary time between visual inspections and functional checks depends on
the installation operating conditions. Generally, we recommend to carry out
periodic checks or tests every four (4) years. In corrosive or harsh offshore
environments, functional testing should be carried out more often; we recommend
every three (3) years.
For the testing procedures, see Commissioning, page 114.
The table below summarises the recommended frequency of interventions.

Test Periodicity

User interface check 1 year

Relay health check 4 years

Date and time synchronisation check 4 years

Wiring and connections check 4 years

Analogue inputs operation check 4 years

442 P5/EN M/33C

Maintenance Protection Relay

Test Periodicity

Digital inputs wiring and operation check 4 years

Digital outputs wiring and operation check 4 years

Arc-flash detection system check 3 years

Preventive maintenance tasks

User interface test

The LED and display unit test is used to check that each LED on the local panel
and in each segment of the display is working correctly.
To perform the test, press and hold down the menu selection key. After 2 seconds,
all LEDs on the local panel and all segments of the display light up.

Protection relay health check

CAUTION
RISK OF DEVICE MIS-OPERATION AND PROTECTION INTERRUPTION
To avoid irregularity during service of the Easergy P5 protection relay, the health
condition must be checked on a timely basis according to the site maintenance
plan.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment
damage.

The health check includes the following tasks:

• Check that the different currents and voltages measured by the Easergy P5
protection relay are appropriate for the load being powered.

• Check that the Easergy P5 protection relay LED is off and no

maintenance message displayed on the local panel.
• Check the health of boards and modules with eSetup Easergy Pro (Device
info view of the Device/Test menu)

Date and time synchronisation check

Check date and time synchronisation (modify date and time setting and wait for
date and time synchronisation).

Inspection of the rear panel

Check that the connections, including the earth/ground terminal and the CT
connections, are tight and free from corrosion.
If the CT connections are not tightened properly, this generates excessive heat
rise which can lead to the destruction of connector A and the CTs.

P5/EN M/33C 443

Protection Relay Maintenance

Wiring and connection check

DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH
• Turn off all power supply to the equipment before working.
• Protect the rear connector A with the two protective caps.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

Check the wiring connections in the rear panel: for the type of screws, screwdriver
to be used, and torque (see Installation, page 32).
In addition to the periodic wiring and connections check, a thermal measurement
with thermal camera is recommended to make visible any warm points of the
installation so that loose connections could be detected and corrected before a
real issue occurs.
Check the earth/ground connections (two ends).
Place back the two protective caps (connector A) before powering on the Easergy
P5 protection relay.

Analogue input operation check

Check current transformers (CTs/LPCTs), voltage transformers (VTs/LPVTs),
earth/ground fault current CTs, and, if used, core balanced CTs connection:
• Cable(s) (and group of cables) in the middle of the CT.
• Voltage cable shielding.
• Check that measured analogue values and angles are compliant on the local
panel.

Digital input wiring and operation check

Check digital inputs statuses (in Control menu on the local panel and in the Digital
Inputs view of the Control menu in eSetup Easergy Pro). Check that physical
inputs states are correct, according to normal input configuration and wirings.

Digital output wiring and operation check

Check the digital outputs operation:
• If accessible, check physical digital outputs position (continuity tester).
• Check digital outputs statuses (in the Control menu on the local panel display
and in the Relays view of the Device/Test menu in eSetup Easergy Pro).

Checking the trip chain

Check regularly that the complete trip chain, from the CTs to the Easergy P5
protection relay and through to the trip coil, is always operational.
The complete protection chain is validated during the simulation of a fault that
causes tripping of the switchgear by the Easergy P5 protection relay.
Simply testing one function can demonstrate that the whole system is working
correctly, provided it has been installed correctly.
To validate the complete protection chain, proceed as follows:
1. Select one of the protection functions that trips the switchgear.
2. Depending on the function(s) selected, inject a current or a voltage
corresponding to a fault and note whether the switchgear trips.

444 P5/EN M/33C

Maintenance Protection Relay

Arc-flash detection system maintenance

DANGER
HAZARD OF UNEXPECTED SYSTEM OPERATION
• If the arc-flash detection unit is no longer supplied with power or is in
permanent non-operational state, the protection functions are no longer
active and all the output contacts are dropped out.
• To detect a power-off or a permanent fault state, connect the watchdog (SF)
output contact to a monitoring device such as SCADA or DCS.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

Keep record of the maintenance actions performed for the system.

The maintenance can include but is not limited to:
• visual inspection
• periodic testing
• hardware cleaning
• sensor condition and positioning check
• checking the obstruction of sensors

Hardware cleaning
Pay special attention to ensure that the device, its extension units and sensors do
not become dirty.

DANGER
HAZARD OF UNEXPECTED SYSTEM OPERATION
• Do not use any type of solvents or gasoline to clean the device, sensors or
cables.
• When cleaning the sensor, make sure that the cleaning solution does not
contact anything other than the sensor.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

• If cleaning is required, wipe out dirt from the device.

• Use a dry cleaning cloth or equivalent together with mild soapy water to clean
any residues from the light sensor.

Sensor condition and positioning check

Always check that the sensor positioning remains as it was originally designed
after:
• commissioning
• sensor replacement
• modification procedure
• cleaning
• arc-flash fault
• periodic testing
Check for obstruction of the sensors.

P5/EN M/33C 445

Protection Relay Maintenance

Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting assistance
The Easergy P5 is a withdrawable protection relay. The faulty protection relay can
be removed from its outer case without disconnecting the wires from the terminals.
This allows to quickly replace a protection relay, provided that the spare part is
available.
The replacement of a protection relay is done with the following steps:
1. Perform a diagnostic check on the protection relay:
• The status of the watchdog relay (DO4 contact relay on slot B)
• The status of the " " and " " LEDs as well as the configurable LEDs

• The LED and the " " LED on the local panel
• The messages displayed on the local panel
• The alarm list and maintenance file downloaded with eSetup Easergy
Pro
2. Check the compatibility of the spare part: the labels on the fixed and the
withdrawable parts are the same.
3. Recover the configuration from the backup memory (optional) and restart of
the new protection relay, following the instructions displayed on the local
panel.
The Easergy P5 is a modular protection relay. The modules that can be replaced
individually are:
• The communication modules
• The extension modules with back-up memory
Identification of the modules can be accessed:
• From the local panel of the Easergy P5 protection relay ( in the Device/Test
menu)
• From eSetup Easergy Pro (Boards view of the Device/test menu)
• From the web server and the EcoStruxure Power Device application

Troubleshooting the Easergy P5

If nothing happens when the Easergy P5 protection relay is switched on,
troubleshoot the device according to Troubleshooting a protection relay that
shows no signs of energising, page 446 below:

Table 149 - Troubleshooting a protection relay that shows no signs of

energising

LED Indication Possible Causes Actions

All LEDs are off. Connector B not plugged in. Plug in the connector B.
Nothing displayed on the
screen. Connector B inverted with Put connectors in the correct
another connector: position.
Check the connector is
• Connector C for Easergy
identified according to the slot.
P5 x20
• Connector C, D, E for
Easergy P5 x30

Auxiliary power absent Check the auxiliary power level

(see label on the side of the
device)

Polarity reversed on terminals Check that the + polarity is on

terminal 19 and the - polarity is
on terminal 20 for DC power.

Internal failure Change the active part.

446 P5/EN M/33C

Maintenance Protection Relay

If a maintenance message is displayed, troubleshoot the device according to

Troubleshooting a protection relay according to maintenance messages, page 447
below:
Table 150 - Troubleshooting a protection relay according to maintenance
messages

Message information Possible Causes Actions

Maintenance message with: Mismatch between hardware Check the model number on
Module ID = 3 configuration and product fixed part with model number
Error type = -7 model number. on the withdrawable.
1st five characters after the
application reference should
be the same:
P5xx0-AAAA-Axxxx-xxxx
Maintenance message with: Hardware failure detected on Change the fix part of the
Module ID = 3 the fixed part (slot A) when the Easergy P5 protection relay
Error type = -5 Easergy P5 protection relay is with the equivalent one.
Completed by one of these powered on.
references: The message specifies the
• 3CT-CSH board impacted by the defect.

• 3CT-4VT-CSH
• 5CT
• 5CT-4VT
• 4VT
• LPCT-LPVT
Maintenance message with: Hardware failure detected on Change the withdrawable part
Module ID = 3 the withdrawable part when the of the Easergy P5 protection
Error type = -5 Easergy P5 protection relay is relay with the same model
Completed by one of these powered on. number.
references: The message specifies the
• 6DI-4DO board impacted by the defect.

• ARC-FLASH
• CPU P5x20
• CPU P5x30
• PSU30H-DI-DO
• PSU30L-DI-DO
• PSU20-DI-DO
Alarm message completed by Hardware failure detected on Check that the hardware
one of these references: the optional boards when the resources are equivalent or
• EXTENSION-BKUP Easergy P5 protection relay is exceeds those used in the
• COM SRL RS485 powered on. configuration file.

• COM SRL FO
• COM ETH 2TP-M (on
slot M)
• COM ETH 2FO-M (on
slot M)
• COM ETH 2TP-L (on slot
L)
• COM ETH HSR/PRP
Message appears during a Major issue on the CPU board Change the withdrawable part
reboot of the Easergy P5 of the Easergy P5 protection of the Easergy P5 protection
protection relay. The boot is not relay. relay with the same model
complete and the following number.
message is displayed:
- Firmware not complete (in
English only)

Alarm message completed by MET148-2 loose connection Check the MET148-2 module
the reference: is well connected to the
MET148-2 Extension and backup memory
board.
See Troubleshooting the
MET148-2 module, page 450
for more information.
CT supervision Alarm message Connection issue from CT/ Check the connection from MV
LPCT transformer to the transformer to the analogue
Easergy P5 protection relay input of the Easergy P5
protection relay.

P5/EN M/33C 447

Protection Relay Maintenance

Table 150 - Troubleshooting a protection relay according to maintenance

messages (Continued)

Message information Possible Causes Actions

Switch off/switch on the

protection relay.
If the failure is persistent,
change the rack of the Easergy
P5 protection relay
.
VT supervision Alarm message Connection issue from MV Check the connection from MV
transformer to the Easergy P5 transformer to the analogue
protection relay input of the Easergy P5
protection relay.
For LPVT, check if the three
LPVTs are connected on the
LPVT Hub.
Switch off/switch on the
protection relay.
If the failure is persistent,
change the rack of the Easergy
P5 protection relay.

Alarm message completed by The RTD number x on the As the message is common to
“RTD x Open Circuit Fault On” MET148-2 module is the RTD channels of the
or by: “RTD x Short Circuit disconnected or short- MET148-2 module, go to the
Fault On”, circuited. temperature measurement
display screen to determine
where x is the number of the which RTD is affected by the
RTD defect.
Measurement displayed:
• Tx.x = -**** = RTD
disconnected (T > 205 °C
(401 °F))
• Tx.x = **** = RTD short-
circuited (T < -35 °C (-31
°F))
Then check the connection of
RTDs.
The user did not log in using Use the InstallerLevel to log
the InstallerLevel user type and into the device.
was not allowed to proceed
with the firmware upgrade
operation.

The memory is not enough for Delete some DR files to get

firmware upgrade. more memory.

Alarm message “Incompatible Incompatible firmware or Check the firmware or

hardware or firmware version, hardware versions hardware version.
operation stopped”

Maintenance message with: CS certificate expired or CS Please contact Schneider

Module ID = 17 configuration potentially Electric Customer Care Center.
Error type = -1 inconsistent

448 P5/EN M/33C

Maintenance Protection Relay

Troubleshooting the communication modules

Possible Causes Actions

Loose of communication Change of parameters For Ethernet board, check the
during operation (Easergy P5 protection relay, traffic with the leds embedded
Scada), connection issue, on the RJ45 connectors.
hardware issue Check all the information and
parameters at scada level.
Check all the parameters at the
Easergy P5 protection relay
level.
Check all intermediate devices
(switches, etc.) installed
between Scada and the
Easergy P5 protection relay.
Check the connections.
Replace the communication
board.
Alarm message completed by The communication board on Complete the configuration
“Slot x board is missing” slot X is missing. with the right communication
option.

Alarm message completed by There is a communication Configure the model number

“Slot x is not configured” board on Slot x, but the model with the right option.
number is not configured.

Alarm message completed by There is a communication In order to match the

“Slot x mismatch” board on Slot x, but its model communication board and the
number does not match the model number, take one of the
existing one in the system following corrective measures:
configuration.
• Change the
communication board
• Configure the right model
number

Troubleshooting arc-flash system

This table describes some common problems in the arc-flash system and how
they can be solved.

Messages Possible Causes Actions

The trip signal does Faulty trip circuit wiring. Check that the wiring of the trip circuit is
not reach the circuit not faulty.
breaker.
The protection does The protection needs both Check the dip switch configuration. The
not trip even when a light and current information protection may be configured to require
sufficient light signal to trip. both the light and current condition to trip.
is provided.

Faulty sensor wiring Loose sensor wire. Check the sensor wiring. The sensor wire
detected by the self- may have loosened in the terminal blocks.
supervision.

Error message Light pulse to the arc-flash Check that the light pulse to the arc-flash
indicating blocked sensor is too long. sensor is not too long.
sensor channel.
If light is supplied to the arc-flash sensor for
more than three seconds, the self-
supervision function activates and switches
the light sensor channel to daylight
blocking mode, and the sensor channel is
blocked.

Remove the light source to reset the

blocked channel.

P5/EN M/33C 449

Protection Relay Maintenance

Troubleshooting the MET148-2 module

LED Indication Possible Causes Actions

MET148-2 green and red LEDs Fault wiring RJ45 plugs of CCA77x cords
off clipped correctly into sockets.

MET148-2 green LED on. No response from the Check the position of the
MET148-2 red LED off. MET148-2 module. module number selection
jumper:
• MET1 for first MET148-2
module (temperatures T1
to T8)
• MET2 for second
MET148- 2 module
(temperatures T9 to T16).
• If the jumper position
needs to be changed,
reboot the MET148-2
module (by disconnecting
and reconnecting the
interconnection cord).
• Change the extension
module.
MET148-2 red LED flashing. Faulty wiring, MET148-2 Check module connections:
powered but loss of dialogue • RJ45 plugs of CCA77x
with base unit. cords clipped correctly
into sockets.
• If the MET148-2 module
is the last in the chain,
check that the line
terminating jumper is in
the Rc position. In all
other cases, check that
the jumper is in the
position marked

.
MET148-2 red LED on. More than 3 remote modules Remove a remote module.
connected.
MET148-2 module internal Change MET148-2 module.
failure.

450 P5/EN M/33C

Maintenance Protection Relay

Firmware upgrade
NOTE: This section applies to firmware upgrade operation only. For firmware
downgrade, please contact Schneider Electric Customer Care Center.
From time to time it may be necessary to upgrade the firmware of your Easergy
P5. There could be a number of reasons for this, new functionality, security
patches or correction of product behaviour.
The firmware upgrade feature of the Easergy P5 protection relay provides the
possibility for the user to upgrade the application firmware themselves through
eSetup Easergy Pro.
Upgrading the firmware requires the eSetup Easergy Pro software to be
connected to the device to be upgraded. This can be done either through the mini-
USB port on the local panel or one of the rear Ethernet ports.
You must also have access to the zip file containing the firmware version you wish
to upgrade to. This file typically has the format Easergy-P5-firmware-Vxx.xxx.xxx.
zip. Please contact Schneider Electric Customer Care Center to get the package.
Please be aware that the contents of this file must come from Schneider Electric
and the firmware signature will be checked to ensure that it has come from a
genuine source before the product is updated.

NOTICE
RISK OF DATA LOSS
• Please save your configuration files, disturbance records and events before
starting the firmware upgrade.
• After the firmware upgrade is done, the operator needs to first connect to the
device and retrieve all configurations through eSetup Easergy Pro, open the
saved file, and then select the “Copy all to DEVICE” option from the “File”
menu.
• The operator needs to rebuild the logics and matrix.
• The operator needs to reload the second language package.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in loss of all configurations,
disturbance records and events.

The process for upgrading the firmware on the Easergy P5 protection relay is as
follows:
1. Connect the laptop that runs eSetup Easergy Pro to the Easergy P5
protection relay and log in with “InstallerLevel”.

P5/EN M/33C 451

Protection Relay Maintenance

2. Open the main menu from the top-left corner of the application, select the
"Update firmware..." option, and then select the new firmware package from
the folder where you saved the package.

3. The application performs the following operations before starting the upgrade:
a. Check the user's rights
b. Check the available memory size
c. Copy the firmware to the device
d. Check firmware/hardware version compliance

4. If every check is passed, the application gets ready to upgrade the firmware
and prompts the user to confirm. Click OK to confirm and the application will
reboot the device, and after that the new firmware will take effect.

452 P5/EN M/33C

Maintenance Protection Relay

Replacing the Easergy P5 protection relay

The Easergy P5 is a withdrawable protection relay. It is made up of the following
two parts (The fixed and withdrawable parts of the Easergy P5 protection relay,
page 453):
• A rack ① including the CT/VT and LPCT/LPVT modules (fixed part). The CT/
VT and LPCT/LPVT inputs are isolated and fixed. When the device is
withdrawn, CTs remain connected.
• A withdrawable part ② which contains all the electronics (including the I/O
board, CPU board and power supply).
The withdrawability is realised by unlocking and pulling out the green handle
on the local panel.

Figure 327 - The fixed and withdrawable parts of the Easergy P5 protection
relay

2
P533JUA

① Fixed rack
② Withdrawable part

To limit the time of interventions for maintenance reasons, the faulty protection
relay can be removed without disconnecting the wires or the connections. This
allows to quickly replace a Easergy P5 protection relay, provided that the spare
part is available.
The spare withdrawable part must be compatible with the one which is replaced.
The compatibility rules are as follows:
• The spare part must have the same hardware resources
• The spare part must have the same product model number
• The spare part must have the same major software version
To avoid any unintended withdrawing, and for security reasons, the removable
part is fixed to the rack by 3 screws for Easergy P5 x20 and 4 screws for Easergy
P5 x30 protection relays.
The procedure for replacing the Easergy P5 protection relay is as follows:

Diagnosis for replacement

For the diagnostic of the protection relay, check the following:
• The status of the watchdog relay (DO4 contact relay on slot B)
• The status of the LED and LED, and the configurable LEDs

• The and LEDs on the local panel

• The Alarm list and Maintenance file to checked and downloaded with eSetup
Easergy Pro

P5/EN M/33C 453

Protection Relay Maintenance

Preliminary operations
NOTE: If the Easergy P5 protection relay is still working, do not hesitate to
save configuration, settings and parameters to the back-up memory of the
extension module (optional) if it is available in the protection relay. For saving
(backup), go to the backup view of the Device/Test menu on the local panel.
1. Power off the Easergy P5 protection relay.
2. Unscrew the 3 screws on Easergy P5 x20 (or 4 for Easergy P5 x30) that fix
the local panel to the relay outer case. Refer to Unscrewing the front face
locking screws, page 43.

Screws 3 screws mounted on Easergy P5x20;

4 screws mounted on Easergy P5x30

Tools (-) 6.5 mm (1/4 in.) or (+) PZ2 screwdriver (Digital torque
screwdriver for installing)

3. Push upward the handle lock that locks the device handle.
4. Close the shutter of the local panel if it is open.

Removal
1. Using the device handle, pull the withdrawable part of the protection relay to
detach it from the outer case (pull the device handle from the top and bottom
when side access is difficult).

Figure 328 - Pulling the withdrawable part by its handle

P533JSA

2. Extract the withdrawable part of the protection relay, using your both hands to
ensure a secure grip.
3. Check the model numbers on both the withdrawable part and the outer case.

Installation
1. Before replacing the module:
• For compatibility of the spare part, check that the identification on the
labels on the fixed and the withdrawable parts are the same.
• Visually check the cleanliness and state of the rear connectors (rear part
and lower part).
2. With the device handle fully open, insert the withdrawable (spare) part gently
into the fixed part.
3. Push down the handle to lock the withdrawable part. The lock tab on the
handle locks the handle to the local panel automatically.

454 P5/EN M/33C

Maintenance Protection Relay

Figure 329 - Locking the withdrawable part by the handle

P533JTA

4. For highly vibrating environment, put in place the screws (3 for Easergy P5
x20 and 4 for Easergy P5 x30) for locking the local panel to the relay case.

Tools • Screws removed in the preliminary operation

• (-) 6.5 mm (1/4 in.) or (+) PZ2 screwdriver

Tighting torque 1 N · m (8.85 lb-in)

NOTE: The screws are not mandatory for the installation of the spare part, but
recommended for security reasons.

Subsequent operations
After installing the Easergy P5 protection relay, perform the following operations if
necessary:
1. Switch on the Easergy P5 protection relay and check the relay operation.
Check the model number (from the Device/Test menu on the local panel) and
compare it with the associated model number displayed in eSetup Easergy
Pro.
2. If an extension module with backup memory is available on the Easergy P5
protection relay, update the device configuration.
3. For recovery of the configuration from the backup memory (optional) and
restart of the new protection relay, follow the instructions displayed on the
local panel.

P5/EN M/33C 455

Protection Relay Maintenance

Change a communication module

CAUTION
RISK OF SETTING CHANGES ERASED
• Never plug in or draw out the communication modules while the Easergy P5
protection relay is in service.
• Check and make sure that the communication module is locked.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment
damage.

The Easergy P5 is a modular protection relay; The modules which can be

replaced individually are:
• The communication modules
• The external modules
Identification of the module can be accessed:
• From the local panel of the Easergy P5 protection relay (Device Info menu)
• From eSetup Easergy Pro (Device Info view of the Device/Test menu)
• From the web server and the EcoStruxure Power Device application

Preliminary operation
Before changing a communication module:
1. Power off the Easergy P5 protection relay.
2. Check if it there is enough space (> 15 cm or 6 in.) in the rear and lower part
of the case to extract the modules. If not possible, remove the case from its
support.

Removal
The module can be easily removed from the Easergy P5 protection relay:
1. Push down the locking tab ①.
2. Gently pull the communication module forward ②.

Figure 330 - Removing the communication module

2
1

P533JVA

456 P5/EN M/33C

Maintenance Protection Relay

Installation
Install the module according to the following steps:
1. Before replacing the module, check visually the front plate ① and the
connector ②.

Figure 331 - Front plate and connector of the communication module

1 2

P533JWA

2. Insert the module into its location.

3. Gently push the module to the front plate until it locks (a click is heard when
the locking tab is locked).

Subsequent operation
After installing the module:
1. Check that the module is locked (visual check).
2. Switch on the Easergy P5 protection relay and verify that the module has
been detected:
• On the local panel, enter the Device/Test sub-menu from the main menu
and check this in the Board view.
• With eSetup Easergy Pro see the Device Info view in the Device/Test
menu.

Figure 332 - The Device info view in eSetup Easergy Pro

P5/EN M/33C 457

Protection Relay Maintenance

Return for expert assessment

To return the Easergy P5 protection relay for expert assessment, use the original
packaging if possible.
If the full product is returned, the active part must be installed in the fix part and
properly fixed with screws.
The Easergy P5 protection relay must be returned accompanied by its settings
sheet and the following information:
• Name and address of the initiator
• Easergy P5 protection relay type and serial number
• Date of the incident
• Detailed description of the incident
• LED status and message displayed at the time of the incident
• List of stored events

End of life
At end of life, Easergy P5 protection relays must be dismantled to facilitate the
recovery of the various constituent materials.
The proportion of recyclable material is higher than 65%. This percentage
includes the metallic materials and marked thermoplastics conforming to the
current legislation, as well as the subassemblies that must be sent to specialised
treatment systems: 3 to 5 electronic cards, and an LCD screen that can easily be
disassembled.
It is calculated according to "ECO’DEEE recyclability and recoverability calculation
method" (version V1.20, September 2008, presented to ADEME, the French
Agency for Environment and Energy Management).

458 P5/EN M/33C

Cybersecurity Protection Relay

Cybersecurity
Cybersecurity overview
This chapter contains up-to-date information about your product’s cybersecurity.
Network administrators, system integrators and personnel that commission,
maintain or dispose of a device should:
• Apply and maintain the device’s security capabilities. See Device security
capabilities, page 462 for details.
• Review assumptions about protected environments. See Protected
environment assumptions, page 463 for details.
• Address potential risks and mitigation strategies. See Potential risks and
compensating controls, page 464 for details.
• Follow recommendations to optimise cybersecurity.
To communicate a security topic affecting a Schneider Electric product or solution,
go to https://www.se.com/ww/en/work/support/cybersecurity/vulnerability-policy.
jsp.
The Easergy P5 device is delivered with auto-login feature. It will be disabled
when the passwords for all three levels are changed from the default ones.

WARNING
POTENTIAL COMPROMISE OF SYSTEM AVAILABILITY, INTEGRITY, AND
CONFIDENTIALITY
• Change default passwords to help prevent unauthorised access to device
settings and information.
• Disable unused ports/services and default accounts, where possible, to
minimize pathways for malicious attacks.
• Place networked devices behind multiple layers of cyber defenses (such as
firewalls, network segmentation, and network intrusion detection and
protection).
• Use cybersecurity best practices (for example: least rights, separation of
duties) to help prevent unauthorised exposure, loss, modification of data and
logs, interruption of services, or unintended operation.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or
equipment damage.

P5/EN M/33C 459

Protection Relay Cybersecurity

Security policy

NOTICE
HAZARD OF ACCESSIBILITY LOSS
• Setup a security policy and procedure to back up the security administrator
user account.
• Do not share a single user account with multiple users. Set one user account
associated to roles and rights per user.
• Do not excessively decrease "user parameters" values.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in loss of access to the
protection relay.

Cybersecurity helps provide:

• Confidentiality (to help prevent unauthorised access)
• Integrity (to help prevent unauthorised modification)
• Availability/authentication (preventing the denial of service and assuring
authorised access)
• Non-repudiation (preventing the denial of an action that took place)
• Traceability/detection (logging and monitoring)
For an efficient security, the instructions and procedures should structure the roles
and responsibilities in terms of security within the organisation; in other words,
who is authorised to perform what and when. These should be known by the
users.
The anti-intrusion and anti-physical access to any sensitive installation should be
set up.
All the security rules implemented in the Easergy P5 protection relays are in
complement of the points above.
In the Easergy P5 protection relays, the control of accessibility to the settings,
parameters, configuration and logs is done with a user authentication after "Log
in", with a name and password.
The Easergy P5 protection relay controls the access:
• through the local panel
• through eSetup Easergy Pro (front and rear connection)
• through the web HMI server
• through the EcoStruxure Power Device application
The Ethernet communication with the EcoStruxure Power Device application and
eSetup Easergy Pro are encrypted.
The access through the communication protocols is not controlled by the Easergy
P5 protection relay but by the SCADA system. The protocols does not include any
specific secured commands.

460 P5/EN M/33C

Cybersecurity Protection Relay

NOTICE
CYBER SECURITY HAZARD
• Except for private GetSet protocol via secured communication (SSH), the
device does not have the capability to transmit data encrypted using the
following protocols: IEC 61850, DNP3 over Ethernet, Modbus slave over
Ethernet, EtherNet/IP, IEC 60870-5-103 serial, IEC 60870-5-101 serial,
DNP3 serial, Modbus slave serial, Modbus master serial, IEEE 1588 and
SNTP.
• If other users gained access to your network, transmitted information can be
disclosed or subject to tampering.
• For transmitting data over an internal network, physically or logically
segment the network. The access to the internal network needs to be
restricted by using standard controls, such as firewalls, and other relevant
features supported by your device, such as IPTable whitelisting.
• For transmitting data over an external network, encrypt protocol
transmissions over all external connections using an encrypted tunnel, TLS
wrapper or a similar solution.
Failure to follow these instructions can increase the risk of unauthorised
access.

The access through the digital inputs is not controlled.

Any SCADA system, and any computer using eSetup Easergy Pro, CAE software
and a central server as well, should have an updated anti-virus, anti-malware,
anti-ransomware application activated during the use.
If a central server is used, a backup is recommended.
Even if Easergy P5 protection relay has an extension module with backup
memory, it is recommended to archive any setting and files in a secured area.
A password policy should be implemented with:
• Change of the default passwords before the Easergy P5 protection relay is
put into operation (see Password complexity, page 476).
• Periodic change of the passwords
• Revocation of the passwords of users who leave or do not need to use the
device any more

P5/EN M/33C 461

Protection Relay Cybersecurity

Product defense-in-depth
Use a layered network approach with multiple security and defense controls in
your IT and control system to minimize data protection gaps, reduce single-
pointsof- failure and create a strong cybersecurity posture. The more layers of
security in your network, the harder it is to breach defenses, take digital assets or
cause disruption.

Device security capabilities

This section describes the security capabilities available with your device.

Information confidentiality
These security capabilities help protect the confidentiality of information through
secure protocols that employ cryptographic algorithms, key sizes and
mechanisms used to help prevent unauthorised users from reading information in
transit, i.e. SSH, SFTP and HTTPS.

Physical security
In order to prevent unauthorised access, lock the shutter on the local panel of the
Easergy P5 protection relay with a wired lead seal. See Lock the shutter and
handle, page 43 for details.

Cybersecurity configuration
These security capabilities support the analysis of security events, help protect the
device from unauthorised alteration and records configuration changes and user
account events:
• Internal time synchronization.
• Time source integrity protection and the Easergy P5 protection relay
configuration event logging.
• Timestamps, including date and time, match the Easergy P5 protection relay
clock.
• SSH server hosts an internal SFTP site and stores files in the Easergy P5
protection relay’s flash memory, such as: COMTRADE records and firmware
files.
• Embeds user information with changes.
• Offload information to syslog or a protected storage or retention location.

User accounts and rights

These security capabilities help enforce authorisations assigned to users,
segregation of duties and least rights:
• User authentication is used to identify and authenticate software processes
and devices managing accounts.
• User account lockouts configurable with number of unsuccessful login
attempts.
• Password strength feedback using CAE.

Port hardening
The communication port of Easergy P5 protection relay can be disabled. Each
logical port can be independently disabled. Port hardening configuration can be
set from the local panel of Easergy P5 protection relay, from eSetup Easergy Pro,
or from the web HMI, with the ENGINEER access right.

462 P5/EN M/33C

Cybersecurity Protection Relay

Firmware upgrades
This security capability helps protect the authenticity of the firmware running on
the Easergy P5 protection relay and facilitates protected file transfer: digitally
signed firmware is used to help protect the authenticity of the firmware running on
the Easergy P5 protection relay and only allows firmware generated and signed by
Schneider Electric.

Device backup creation and restore

This security capability helps P5 participate in system level backup operations by
creating backups of the device state. In case of need, P5 can recover with help of
those backups to a known good operational state. The protection, control and
communication settings can be saved with eSetup Easergy Pro; the security
configuration can be saved with CAE.
For how to create such backups and to use them to restore P5 please refer to the
corresponding sections in eSetup Easergy Pro and CAE user manuals.

Security event logging

These security capabilities help provide a method to generate security-related
reports and manage event log storage:
• Machine and human-readable reporting options for current device security
settings.
• Audit event logs to identify:
◦ The Easergy P5 protection relay configuration changes.
◦ Energy management system events.
• Audit storage capacity of 1,000 event logs by default and alternate methods
for log management.
• Time source integrity protection and event logged when changed.

Protected environment assumptions

• Cybersecurity governance – available and up-to-date guidance on governing
the use of information and technology assets in your company.
• Perimeter security – installed devices, and devices that are not in service, are
in an access-controlled or monitored location.
• Emergency power – the control system provides the capability to switch to
and from an emergency power supply without affecting the existing security
state or a documented degraded mode.
• Firmware upgrades – the Easergy P5 protection relay upgrades are
implemented consistently to the current version of firmware.
• Controls against malware – detection, prevention and recovery controls to
help protect against malware are implemented and combined with
appropriate user awareness.
• Physical network segmentation – the control system provides the capability
to:
◦ Physically segment control system networks from non-control system
networks.
◦ Physically segment critical control system networks from non-critical
control system networks.
• Logical isolation of critical networks – the control system provides the
capability to logically and physically isolate critical control system networks
from non-critical control system networks. For example, using VLANs.
• Independence from non-control system networks – the control system
provides network services to control system networks, critical or non-critical,
without a connection to non-control system networks.

P5/EN M/33C 463

Protection Relay Cybersecurity

• Encrypt protocol transmissions over all external connections using an

encrypted tunnel, TLS wrapper or a similar solution.
• Zone boundary protection – the control system provides the capability to:
◦ Manage connections through managed interfaces consisting of
appropriate boundary protection devices, such as: proxies, gateways,
routers, firewalls and encrypted tunnels.
◦ Use an effective architecture, for example, firewalls protecting application
gateways residing in a DMZ.
◦ Control system boundary protections at any designated alternate
processing sites should provide the same levels of protection as that of the
primary site, for example, data centers.
• No public internet connectivity – access from the control system to the
internet is not recommended. If a remote site connection is needed, for
example, encrypt protocol transmissions.
• Resource availability and redundancy – ability to break the connections
between different network segments or use duplicate devices in response to
an incident.
• Manage communication loads – the control system provides the capability to
manage communication loads to mitigate the effects of information flooding
types of DoS (Denial of Service) events.
• Control system backup – available and up-to-date backups for recovery from
a control system failure.

Potential risks and compensating controls

Address potential risks using these compensating controls:

Area Issue Risk Compensating controls

User Default account If you do not Change the default password for all
accounts settings are often change the accounts to help reduce unauthorised
the source of default password, access. See Passwords, page 475.
unauthorised unauthorised
access by access can occur.
malicious users.
Secure IEC 61850, DNP3 If a malicious user For transmitting data over an internal
protocols over Ethernet, gained access to network, physically or logically segment
Modbus slave your network, they the network.
over Ethernet, could to intercept
EtherNet/IP, IEC communications. For transmitting data over an external
60870-5-103 network, encrypt protocol transmissions
serial, IEC 60870- over all external connections using an
5-101 serial, encrypted tunnel, TLS wrapper or a similar
DNP3 serial, solution.
Modbus slave
serial, Modbus See Protected environment assumptions,
master serial, page 463.
IEEE 1588 and
SNTP protocols
are unsecure.

The device does

not have the
capability to
transmit data
encrypted using
these protocols.

464 P5/EN M/33C

Cybersecurity Protection Relay

Cybersecurity configuration
Cybersecurity in the scope of energy management is a set of rules, methods, and
technical features improving the quality of services and interrupt the deliveries
resulting from accidental or intentional actions.
The Easergy P5 protection relay has one of the two following cybersecurity levels:
• Basic CS: basic cybersecurity rules as default configuration
• Advanced CS: cybersecurity option, proposed as a firmware option to be
selected at the ordering
To know which cybersecurity level is adopted in the Easergy P5 protection relay,
check the 17th field of the reference number of the Easergy P5 protection relay as
shown in the examples below, where A stands for basic and B for advanced level.

P 5 x 2 0 - _ _ _ _ - _ _ _ _ _ - _ _ A _

P 5 x 3 0 - _ _ _ _ - _ _ _ _ _ - _ _ B _

NOTE: Only the firmware with Advanced CS level configuration fulfills the
requirements of IEC 62443-4 Security Level 1 (SL 1).
The table below lists the differences between the two cybersecurity levels:

Characteristics Basic level Advanced level

Simple password management updated from the local ■ -
panel of Easergy P5 protection relay or with eSetup
Easergy Pro

Full central security policy managed by a Security - ■

Administrator, using a specific software, the
Cybersecurity Admin Expert (CAE)

Communication ports hardening ■ ■

Communication encryption ■ ■

Security logs - ■

Advanced cybersecurity level

The advanced cybersecurity features implemented in Easergy P5 protection relay
allow, among other functions, to centrally manage the access rights and the
security logs. This requires a specific PC software, EcoStruxure Cybersecurity
Admin Expert (CAE), and if automatic mode is required, a central security server.
The CAE allows to:
• Create a cybersecurity and security policy
• Configure the security of devices
• Retrieve security logs of a whole substation

P5/EN M/33C 465

Protection Relay Cybersecurity

Three configuration modes of the cybersecurity system

Manual mode
When the CAE is connected to the Easergy P5 protection relays, the security
administrator can manually push the user database and RBAC (Role Based
Access Control) directly to a group of protection relays that are located inside a
substation and to manually download and concentrate the security logs from
protection relays.
Since the bonus will be on the security administrator to ensure all devices are
synchronised when a change is made, it is not recommended for manual mode to
be used on groups of more than 32 Easergy P5 protection relays or other devices.

Figure 333 - Cybersecurity system in the manual mode

CAE

RBAC
Ethernet

Security logs

P533JXA

Automatic mode
In this mode the security administrator is responsible for the configuration of the
RBAC and user database with the CAE. The CAE communicates with a central
server and the protection relays.
User authentication is done both at a centralised level (user password control) and
at the relay level (user vs. role and role vs. right). The security protocol used is
RADIUS.
The security logs are automatically and permanently concentrated by a central
server. The CAE is used by the security administrator to visualise them.

Figure 334 - Cybersecurity system in the automatic mode

Central server CAE

Authentication Roles
Ethernet - RADIUS protocol

Security logs

P533JYA

466 P5/EN M/33C

Cybersecurity Protection Relay

Centralised authentication mode

In this mode, the security system of the substation is integrated in a corporate
security system, which allows users to have a single login whichever the device.
The CAE is replicating the user names available in the Corporate Active directory
and assign them a role.
User authentication is done the same way as in the automatic mode.

Figure 335 - Cybersecurity system in the centralised authentication mode

Corporate active
directory

Central server or
CAE
3rd party

Authentication Roles
Ethernet - RADIUS protocol

Security logs

P533JZA

Cybersecurity Administration Expert tool (CAE)

The EcoStruxure Cybersecurity Admin Expert (CAE) is an application involved in
the Security Management system inside a robust Information and
Communications Technology (ICT) network for electrical cyber-physical systems.
CAE allows the Security Administrator to manage system security policies and
configuration parameters as well as providing for centralised user management.
CAE provides the ability to grant or deny to users the ability to perform actions by
permissions grouped by device type.
The main functions include:
• Define the security policy, including for example: password complexity or
password strategy
• Define rules for security logs, choose between NERC CIP, BDEW, P1686
2014 or a combination.
• Define the RBAC (Role Base Access Control) parameters of your
environment. RBAC technology is the most efficient way to apply the defined
roles and permissions to an individual, deploying to each device.
• Define users of your system or product and assign one or several roles per
user, based on your organisation.
• Retrieve security logs including several Schneider Electric devices (i.e.,
protection relays, RTUs, Gateways, etc.).
Refer to the security administration tool User Guide for installation and use of the
EcoStruxure Cybersecurity Admin Expert (CAE) application, and to activate the
CAE license.

P5/EN M/33C 467

Protection Relay Cybersecurity

Basic cybersecurity level

With basic security rules, the Easergy P5 protection relay does not need to use
any tools like CAE software in order to change and validate the password.
If CAE is connected to the Easergy P5 protection relay, it has to be blocked in
order to avoid password management and modification. Password shall be
managed through either the local panel or eSetup Easergy Pro (see Changing
password, page 475).
In the basic cybersecurity system, the length of the password is 1 to 8 ASCII
characters [33 to 122] without a failed authorisation limitation and the user
accounts defined are fixed to three and not extended: OperatorLevel,
EngineerLevel, and InstallerLevel.

Special access control

The Easergy P5 protection relay provides the special access functions:
• The F1 key can be configured to lock/unlock the device. If the setting “Via F1
Key” is enabled, F1 key can be used to switch the device between locked/
unlocked states. If disabled, F1 key can still be used as a normal function key.
In the locked state, all settings of the device become read-only, and the front
USB communication port is disabled. In the unlocked state, Easergy P5
settings can be modified. In addition, settings can be modified on the local
panel HMI directly without having to enter the username and password. The
front USB communication port is enabled. Putting Easergy P5 into the
unlocked state provides convenience to users for configuring the device
during commissioning. If “Via F1 Key” is enabled, when the local panel HMI is
not operated for 10 minutes, Easergy P5 will automatically switch to locked
state.
• The setting “Via SCADA” provides the option to forbid any setting changes
and control commands from SCADA communication protocols (Modbus,
IEC61850, IEC103). If the setting is disabled, Easergy P5 rejects all SCADA
protocol setting changes and control commands. However, this setting has no
effect on the local panel HMI, front USB communication port, eSetup Easergy
Pro and Web HMI.
Parameters “Via F1 Key” and “Via SCADA” can be configured from the local panel
HMI. The special access control function only works in the basic cybersecurity
level.

Figure 336 - Via F1 Key and Via SCADA shown on HMI

GENERAL SETTINGS
Cybersecurity reset -
RBAC Reset to factory
Firmware upgrade
Config Access
Via F1 Key Enabled
Via SCADA Enabled

F1 key access control

F1 key can be used to switch the device state between locked and unlocked
states. The aim is to allow users to lock/unlock the P5 relay by pressing F1 key.

NOTICE
IMPROPER EQUIPMENT OPERATION
If F1 key is configured as the quick access of the Easergy P5 lock/unlock
functionality, F1 key cannot be used by any other functions.
Failure to follow this instruction can result in improper operation.

468 P5/EN M/33C

Cybersecurity Protection Relay

Table 151 - Via F1 Key configuration parameters

Via F1 Key

Disabled Enabled
Locked Unlocked
Access via HMI Read/Write Read Read/Write

Access via USB Read/Write Can not login Read/Write

(Easergy Pro)

Access via rear Read/Write Read Read/Write

comms (Easergy Pro)

Access via rear Read/Write Read Read/Write

comms (Web HMI)

In locked state, when there is no alarm pop-up message on the screen, pressing
key will pop up a "Permission denied" message.

Communication SCADA access control

For communication SCADA (Modbus, IEC 61850, IEC 103), when “Via SCADA” is
disabled, users cannot change settings and send control command, no matter
Easergy P5 in locked or unlocked state and with communication board or not.

Table 152 - Via SCADA configuration parameters

Via SCADA
Disabled Enabled
Access via rear comms Read Read/Write
SCADA (IEC 61850)

Access via rear comms Read Read/Write

SCADA (Modbus)

Access via rear comms Read Read/Write

SCADA (IEC 103)

P5/EN M/33C 469

Protection Relay Cybersecurity

User accounts and rights

Recommendations to optimise cybersecurity in a protected environment:
• Assign users only the essential rights needed to perform their role.
• Revoke user rights when no longer needed due to role change, transfer or
termination. User credentials do not expire.
• Follow user account management tasks as described by your organisation or
contact your network administrator.

List of roles
The Easergy P5 menus and screens are accessible according to the Role Based
Access Control concept (RBAC) to help prevent unauthorised operation. RBAC is
essentially a collection of permissions. Users are assigned particular roles, and
through those role assignments acquire the permissions to perform particular
functions. Since users are not assigned permissions directly, but only acquire
them through their role (or roles), management of individual user rights becomes a
matter of simply assigning appropriate roles to the user's account; this simplifies
common operations, such as adding a user, or changing user's account.

Table 153 - List of roles for cybersecurity

Role Default Description

login account

VIEWER DefaultViewer Can view all information except security logs which are present
within the Easergy P5 protection relay and read their value. A
viewer cannot modify settings and files.

OPERATOR DefaultOperator Has the same rights as Viewer and can perform control actions
and change setting groups.

ENGINEER DefaultEngineer Has the same rights as Operator and can configure and set
Easergy P5 protection relay. He can retrieve and analyze
process data and records, perform control actions and change
setting groups.

INSTALLER DefaultInstaller Has the same rights as Engineer plus the right to upgrade
firmware91; to be used during the engineering phase for
external users. Retrieve Easergy P5 protection relay and
process data during commissioning and change the
configuration and / or setting groups during installation.

SECAUD DefaultSecAud Can read security logs. A security auditor can view equipment
logs and access user authentication logs.

SECADM SecurityAdmin Can change the security policy (user, roles and rights) of
Easergy P5 protection relay.

NOTE: In the security policy, the security administrator account of role type
SecAdm is assigned at least to two security administrators.
The Easergy P5 protection relay's RBAC is compliant with IEC 62351 part 8 and,
with CAE, can be extended further depending on the organisation.
All the roles are password protected and granted up to 256 sessions in one time.

List of rights
The list of rights is defined at:
• Operation level
• Engineering level
• Installation level
• Product manufacturer level

91. For this feature, please contact Schneider Electric for more information.

470 P5/EN M/33C

Cybersecurity Protection Relay

For customer use, the Easergy P5 protection relays have been designed in order
to allow and control the following usages:
• Read the information provided by the Easergy P5 protection relay:
measurements, status of the controlled and monitored switchgears, settings,
alarms, tripping context
• Open and close the switchgears
• Upload from the protection relay the log files and disturbance record files
• Configure the Easergy P5 protection relay for integration into the cubicle,
protection and control
• Configure the Easergy P5 protection relay for integration into a SCADA
system
These usages are realised by assigning specific right(s) to the users of the
Easergy P5 protection relay based on their role in the protection relay's RBAC.
The followed table shows roles and their rights granted by default for the Easergy
P5 protection relay.

P5/EN M/33C 471

Protection Relay Cybersecurity

Table 154 - Roles vs. their access rights

VIEWER OPERATOR ENGINEER INSTALLER SECADM SECAUD

Logs ■ ■

Security ■ ■ ■

Configuration change ■ ■

Control ■ ■ ■

Clear statistics data ■ ■ ■

Internal data ■ ■ ■ ■

Configuration read ■ ■ ■ ■

Settings read ■ ■ ■ ■

Control status read ■ ■ ■ ■

Read statistics data ■ ■ ■ ■

Read data ■ ■ ■ ■

Debug system ■

Debug application ■

Secure communication ■ ■ ■ ■

Device cybersecurity data full ■

access
Backup memory copy ■

Device user data file read ■ ■

Device user data file full ■

access
Device system data file full ■
access
Function key control ■ ■

NOTE: The role-to-right assignment can be modified using CAE.

Table 155 - List of rights

Right Short description Description

Configuration change P5_RightConfigMgt Permission to modify the configuration, it means we can change
any settings which need a reboot of the device, for example,
scaling values like CT ratio or voltage connection mode.

Configuration read P5_RightConfigDft Permission to read the configuration which need a reboot of the
device, for example, scaling values like CT ratio or voltage
connection mode.
Setting change P5_RightSettingMgt Permission to modify any setting which does not need a reboot of
the device, for example, protection or communication settings.
Includes also logic and Mimic configuration in eSetup Easergy
Pro, switching device mode (normal use or tests mode) and
allowing test execution.

Setting read P5_RightSettingDft Permission to read any setting which do not need a reboot of the
device, for example, protection threshold or operation time.

Control P5_RightCtrlObjMgt Permission to perform all kind of operations (select, open and
close all switches, reset and clear alarms), except setting group
change.

Control status read P5_RightCtrlObjDft Same as before (read only)

Read data P5_RightDataDft Permission to read all the data (i.e., measurements, fixed
parameters (i.e. model number, ….), logs, …

Debug system P5_RightSystemDebug Permission to execute firmware (low level) debug command
(internal manufacturer user)

Debug application P5_RightApplicationDebug Permission to execute firmware (application level) debug

command (internal manufacturer user)

472 P5/EN M/33C

Cybersecurity Protection Relay

Table 155 - List of rights (Continued)

Right Short description Description

Secure communication P5_RightSecureComm Permission to connect eSetup Easergy Pro to the Easergy P5

Device user data file read P5_RightUserRootDirDefaultAccess Permission to read through SFTP or eSetup Easergy Pro, user
data in /usr/ directory of file system embedded in the device like
disturbance records, …

Device user data file full P5_RightUserRootDirFullAccess Permission to read, write, delete, transfer through SFTP or eSetup
access Easergy Pro, user data in /usr/ directory of file system embedded
in the device like disturbance records, … except security logs.

Device system data file P5_RightSysRootDirFullAccess Permission to read, write, delete, transfer through SFTP, system
full access data in /sys/ directory of file system embedded in the device
(internal manufacturer user); permission to update, through
eSetup Easergy Pro and the device firmware.

Device cybersecurity data P5_RightCybSecRootDirDefaultAccess Permission to read, write, delete, transfer through CAE,
full access cybersecurity data in /cyb_sec/ directory of file system embedded
in the device.
Backup memory copy P5_RightBackupRootDirDefaultAccess Permission to read, write, delete, transfer through SFTP, back up
memory data in /backup/ directory of file system embedded in the
device.
Function key control P5_RightFnkey0x Permission to operate with the function keys.
with 0x = 01 to 07 There is one permission per function key Fx (x = 1 to 7)

Clear statistics data P5_RightStatMgt Permission to read and clear statistics data like counters, demand,
max, min., thermal level, …

Read statistics data P5_RightStatDft Permission to read only statistics data like counters, demand,
max, min., thermal capacity, …

Internal data P5_RightDescMgt Permission to read and write internal data (internal manufacturer
user)

Login
For login by local panel, go to the User Login menu from the main menu, and then
select the name or role and enter the password. Refer to Login, page 150 for more
information.
For login by eSetup Easergy Pro, Refer to Connecting to a single protection relay
using USB cable, page 163 or Connecting to protection relays via Ethernet, page
163 for more information.

Access lockout
The first invalid password entry sets the counter of failed authorisation and
initiates an attempt timer.
If the user reaches the maximum number of retry, a message with the similar
meaning is displayed and the user is blocked. In this case, only the viewer's
access rights are granted and any other access are blocked.
The maximum failed authorisation is set by CAE. The default is defined at 5 and
can be set until 99. If the value is set to 0, it means there is no limitation.
When the maximum number of failed authorisation is reached, a lockout period is
activated. This lockout period is by default 240 seconds with a maximum of 9999
seconds. It is set by CAE.
If the attempt timer expires, or the correct password is entered before the attempts
counter reaches the maximum number, then the attempts counter is reset to zero.
If a user is blocked out, the block is applied to that named user of all the Easergy
P5 protection relay interfaces. The blocking of one user does not result in blocks
to the others.
If the user entry is blocked, recovering the RBAC or pushing a new RBAC will not
reset the blocked user entry, but an Easergy P5 protection relay reboot will reset
the blocking time and attempts counter, so the user entry will be unblocked.

P5/EN M/33C 473

Protection Relay Cybersecurity

NOTE: Set sufficient "Maximum login attempts" and "Password attempts

timer" to allow user connection after errors.

Logout
For security reasons, it is recommended to logout after any operation on the
Easergy P5 protection relay.
In the main menu screen, Login screen and Mimic screen, a padlock icon is
present in the top-right corner of the title bar to signify that there is no user logged
in to the Easergy P5 protection relay. The padlock icon disappears when any user
logs in.
NOTE: It is recommended to set "Minimum inactivity period" to 10 minutes at
minimum in order to download or upload files during installation, operation and
maintenance.

Number of accounts
The maximum number of user accounts which can be memorised in Easergy P5
protection relay is 32.
A central server is required if more user accounts are required.

474 P5/EN M/33C

Cybersecurity Protection Relay

Passwords
Changing password
For basic cybersecurity level, the password can be changed from both the local
panel and eSetup Easergy Pro:
• Local panel
Using the ChPwd (Change Password) option in the General Settings menu
• eSetup Easergy Pro

Using the "Change password" option in the (Tools) drop down list in the
tool bar.
The following is an example procedure of changing the password from the local
panel:
1. Log into the device by entering the password.
2. Enter the General Settings menu and select the ChPwd option.
GENERAL SETTINGS
MdbsS
DNP3
I-101
I-103
PortH
IpFilter
ChPwd
CSRst

3. Select the user.

Change Password 1/1
User1 OperatorLevel
User2 EngineerLevel
User3 InstallerLevel

4. Enter the new password and then enter the password once again for
confirmation.
Change Password
UserName EngineerLevel

Input new password

5. A “Password Change Success” message appears on the screen.

Change Password
UserName EngineerLevel

Password Change SUCCESS

NOTE: In step 3 the user can select another user with a lower access right in
order to change the password for that user. This is useful and convenient for
changing password for other users when they have lost their passwords. This
function can also serve as a complement to the password recovery options
described in Factory reset using a reset code, page 477.
NOTE: In step 3 the user can not select another user with a higher access
right in order to change the password for that user. A “Permission denied”
message will appear on the screen.
For advanced cybersecurity level, the change is done exclusively through the CAE
tool in the User Authentication section of the User Accounts menu.

P5/EN M/33C 475

Protection Relay Cybersecurity

Password complexity
The Easergy P5 protection relay accepts the default user name, "EngineerLevel"
and the default password, "AAAA".
The following password complexity rule is available for both the basic and
advanced security levels.
• Password length must be 1 to 8 characters
• Passwords can contain the following ASCII [33 to 122] characters:
◦ Latin capital letters from A to Z
◦ Latin lowercase characters from a to z
◦ Figures from 0 to 9
◦ Non-alphabetic characters: [ \ ] ^ _ ’ ! “ # $ %` & ‘ ( ) * + , - . / : ; < = > ? @
NOTE: Passwords cannot contain the user account name or parts (no more
than two consecutive characters) of the user's full name. To help to secure
Easergy P5 protection relay, the password should be as longer as possible,
mixing lowercase and uppercase characters, figures and non-alphabetic
characters.
With CAE it is possible to configure the password according to NERC and
IEEE 1686 standard recommendations.

Standard Configuration

NERC 8 characters minimum with ASCII [33 to 122] characters.

The lesser of three or more different types of characters (e.g., uppercase
alphabetic, lowercase alphabetic, numeric from 0 to 9, non-alphabetic
characters)

IEEE 8 characters minimum with ASCII [33 to 122] characters

std1686 1 lowercase letter, 1 uppercase letter, 1 digit from 0 to 9 and 1 non-alphabetic
character

Cybersecurity factory reset

Password recovery options

When a password has been lost, the user has the following options to reset the
password to factory default:
• By the security administrator:
The security administrator can reset the passwords for the other users with
the Cybersecurity Admin Expert (CAE) tool.
• Through the reset-to-factory procedure:
When the security administrator has lost the access to the CAE tool or is not
available for help, a password reset procedure that requires a reset code
needs to be used. See Factory reset using a reset code, page 477.

Reset request code

A reset request code is needed to obtain a reset code from the Schneider Electric
Customer Care Center. The reset request code is a 12 ASCII character string of
upper case characters. It is a read only parameter. The Easergy P5 protection
relay generates its own reset request code randomly.
A new code is generated under the following conditions:
• On power-up
• Whenever settings are set back to default
• On expiry of the validity timer
• When the reset code is entered
As soon as the reset request code is displayed on the local panel, a validity timer
is started. This validity timer is set to 120 hours and is not configurable. This

476 P5/EN M/33C

Cybersecurity Protection Relay

provides enough time for the Customer Care Center to manually generate and
send a reset code. The Service Level Agreement (SLA) for reset code generation
is one working day.
To prevent accidental reading of the Easergy P5 reset request code the cell
displays a warning message.
The reset request code will be displayed on confirmation, whereupon the validity
timer will be started.
Note that the reset request code can only be read from the local panel.
Once a new reset request code is generated on the Easergy P5, the reset code
will become invalid, so please make sure the Easergy P5 protection relay is
always powered on before you get the reset code.

Reset code
The reset code can only be obtained from the Schneider Electric Customer Care
Center.
The reset code is intended for password recovery only. It is not a replacement
password that can be used continually. It can only be used once - for password
recovery.
Entry of the reset code causes the Easergy P5 protection relay to reset all
passwords back to factory default.
The "passwords set to default" message is displayed.
The reset code can be applied through any interface, local or remote. It will
achieve the same result irrespective of which interface it is applied through.
Charge is to the user to enter the new appropriate passwords.

Factory reset using a reset code

NOTICE
RISK OF PASSWORD RECOVERY PROCESS FAILURE
• The reset code is only valid for its corresponding reset request code. Once a
new reset request code is generated on the Easergy P5 protection relay, the
reset code provided by the Customer Care Center becomes invalid.
• Avoid the circumstances that will cause a new reset request code to be
generated by the protection relay before entering the reset code.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in interruption of the
password recovery process.

The passwords can be reset to factory defaults through the following procedure:
1. Get the reset request code from the “RBAC Reset to factory” view of the
General settings menu as illustrated in the following figure.

P5/EN M/33C 477

Protection Relay Cybersecurity

Figure 337 - Get the reset request code

1 Select the “Cybersecurity reset” option

2 Select “Get request code” from the “RBAC Reset to factory” view

3 Select “on”
4 Reset request code generated and displayed on the screen

2. Contact Schneider Electric Customer Care Center (http://www.se.com/CCC)

and provide two pieces of information from the Easergy P5 protection relay:
• Serial number
• Reset request code
3. Get a reset code from the Customer Care Center, which is generated using
the above information.
4. Go to the “RBAC Reset to factory” view of the General settings menu and
select the “ Reset factory” option.
RBAC Reset to factory 1/2
Reset to factory password
Get request code -
Reset factory -

5. Select “On” to confirm.

6. A caution message appears. Press to continue.
Caution
Any changes on RBAC and
security configuration will
be lost then the factory
RBAC and security policies
will be applied.
Reset Cancel

7. Enter the reset code obtained in Step 3 above to start the reset.

RBAC recovery
When the withdrawable part of a Easergy P5 protection relay is replaced, the new
one comes with the security policy previously introduced into the protection relay.
Unless the Easergy P5 protection relay has been previously enrolled into the

478 P5/EN M/33C

Cybersecurity Protection Relay

security system, the factory default RBAC is active. Engineer role is requested in
order to recover the data stored from the back-up memory of the extension
module (option).
Once the new Easergy P5 protection relay is restarted, its security policy is
updated either automatically if a security server is connected or manually with
CAE.

Factory default configuration

NOTICE
UNAUTHORISED EQUIPMENT TAMPERING
At the first use of the Easergy P5 protection relay, it is recommended to change
the different default passwords according to the rules defined in Password
complexity, page 476.
Failure to follow this instruction can result in unauthorised product use
and setting changes, and compromised security of the information
contained in the product.

When delivered from factory, the Easergy P5 protection relay's RBAC has the
following configuration:

Table 156 - Factory cybersecurity configurations

Role User name Levels Password Timeout Access Lockout

lockout period

VIEWER DefaultUser Basic/ No password

Advanced
OPERATOR OperatorLevel Basic/ AAAA
Advanced
ENGINEER EngineerLevel Basic/ AAAA 10 min 3 times 3 min
Advanced
INSTALLER InstallerLevel Basic/ AAAA
Advanced
SECADM SecurityLevel – AAAAAAAA

SECAUD – – – – – –

In factory cybersecurity configuration, there is no security logs. This means no

need to have a dedicated role by default.

P5/EN M/33C 479

Protection Relay Cybersecurity

Port hardening
It is possible to disable a communication port from the local panel of Easergy P5
protection relay, from eSetup Easergy Pro, or from the web HMI, with the
ENGINEER access right.
Physical ports which can be disabled:
• Front mini-USB port (for eSetup Easergy Pro connection)
• Rear serial port
• Rear Ethernet port
Each logical port can be independently disabled on each rear Ethernet port and on
the front USB port, which also supports Ethernet.
These logical ports are listed below with Ethernet port number in brackets:
• Communication protocol with eSetup Easergy Pro (Port 22)
• IEC 61850 (Port 102)
• DNP3 over Ethernet (Default on port 20000, configurable by the user)
• Modbus TCP/IP (Default on port 502, configurable by the user)
• EtherNet/IP (Port 44818)
• FTPs (Port 22)
NOTE: The default status of the ports mentioned above are enabled. It is
strongly recommended to disable the ports when they are no longer needed,
to reduce the attack surface to the Easergy P5.
The figure below shows the Port Hardening Configuration settings in the Protocol
Configuration view of the Communication menu in eSetup Easergy Pro:

Figure 338 - Port hardening configuration settings in eSetup Easergy Pro

The port hardening can also be set from the local panel through the Port
hardening config. view of the General menu.
When the ports or the protocols on Ethernet module are disabled or enabled,
reboot of the Easergy P5 protection relay is needed.
NOTE: In addition to port hardening configuration, and in order to prevent
access to the communication ports on the local panel, it is possible to put a
physical seal (See Lock the shutter and handle, page 43).

480 P5/EN M/33C

Cybersecurity Protection Relay

Security event logging

The following time-stamped events are logged in a dedicated security log file:
• Security parameter changes (such as user creation, password change,
communication port disabling)
• User authentications, attempt to authentication and logout
• Access to the security events
• Device reboot, device minor and major faults
• Device hardware modifications and software updates
• Parameter change (protection or communication)
Only the occurrence of the first change in each session is logged.
• Setting-group change, with the mention of the active setting group
• Date and time change
The Easergy P5 protection relay can store up to 1,000 events. When the
maximum capacity is reached, the oldest events are erased.
The security events can be read from the Easergy P5 protection relay:
• By security server automatically
• By CAE with the security auditor/administrator access rights
For security reasons, security events are not duplicated in the backup memory of
the extension module (option).
Security logs emissions depend on the security standards that are configurable by
the CAE.
The security logs push to a Syslog server if the Syslog server IP address and
Syslog server IP port are configured and connected.
The generalised security logs include security log according to events definition in
IEEE 1686 and IEC 62351 Part 7.
Table 157 - Security logs list

Event Description Remark

Firmware update Update the firmware of the Easergy P5 Log

Trap

Device reboot The device reboot Log

Time sync. Modification of the time of the Easergy P5 Log

Trap

Port hardening Any communication port Log

enabled / disabled
Backup (BM) Memory backup Log

Restore (BM) Memory restore Log

Application failed Software application failure Log

P5/EN M/33C 481

Protection Relay Cybersecurity

Upgrades management
When the Easergy P5 protection relay firmware is upgraded – security
configuration remains the same until changed, including usernames and
passwords. It is recommended security configuration is reviewed after an upgrade
to analyze rights for new or changed device features and revoke or apply them
according to your company’s policies and standards.

482 P5/EN M/33C

Cybersecurity Protection Relay

Security functionality verification

When the Cybersecurity functionalities have been configured, it is recommended
to verify that the following functions are working as intended:
• RBAC function is making sure that user cannot perform actions for which he
does not have privilege.
• Security event logs (CSL1 only) are properly generated in P5 locally and the
remote Syslog server (if configured) keeps record of them.
• Disabled logical and physical ports can no longer be accessed.
It is recommended to repeat the above tests after firmware update or security
policy update.

P5/EN M/33C 483

Protection Relay Revision history

Revision history
Document version Description
P5/EN M/11A First edition for initial product release
2019-05 Firmware version V01
Release / Build 001.029
Configuration tool eSetup Easergy Pro V2.0.0 or later
CET850 V3.1.2 or later
P5/EN M/22A Firmware version V01
2019-11 Release / Build 200.008
Configuration tool eSetup Easergy Pro V2.2.0 or later
CET850 V3.2.0 or later
Hardware LPCT/LPVT available for P5U20
Ethernet communication module with RSTP redundancy
(reference REL51042)
Local panel Local panel layout enhanced
U2>, U2>> Negative sequence overvoltage protection (ANSI 47)
I0/U0>, I0/U0>> Neutral admittance protection (ANSI 21YN)
N> Motor restart inhibition function (ANSI 66) enhanced
CB monitoring CB monitoring function enhanced
Firmware upgrade Firmware upgrade feature
USB data transfer USB data transfer function available
I2> The following features are available:
I>, I>>
• STI and CO8 curves to the IEC and IEEE curve types,
I0>,
respectively
I0’>, I0’>>
Iφ>, Iφ>> • IDMT reset curve
I0φ>, I0φ>>, I0φ>>>
Logic gate Logic gate number increased to 250
P5/EN M/33A Firmware version V01
2020-07 Release / Build 300.103
Configuration tool eSetup Easergy Pro V3.0.0 or later
CET850 V3.3.0 or later
Hardware 12I4O and 5I5O modules available
24 to 48 V DC voltage power supply module available for
P5x30
Motor speed detection Motor speed detection available
Motor speed>, Motor Motor overspeed (ANSI 12) protection available
speed>>
Motor speed<,Motor Motor underspeed (ANSI 14) protection available
speed<<
ABS Motor Anti-backspin (ABS) protection available
Inrush Inrush detection enhaned
68H2 2nd harmonic detection removed

484 P5/EN M/33C

Revision history Protection Relay

Motor status Motor status enhanced

Logic timer Logic timer available
Global trip timer Global trip timer available
P5/EN M/33B Firmware version V01
2021-02 Release / Build 301.103
Configuration tool eSetup Easergy Pro V3.1.0 or later
CET850 V3.4.0 or later
VTS Voltage transformer supervision enhanced
Special access control F1 key access control and communication SCADA access
control available
P5/EN M/33C Firmware version V01
2021-07 Release / Build 303.101
Configuration tool eSetup Easergy Pro V3.2.1 or later
CET850 V3.6.0 or later
Logic functions The information for logic functions updated

P5/EN M/33C 485

Protection Relay Order information

Order information
Protection relay
The order information can be configured using the procedure provided on
Schneider Electric website www.se.com.
When ordering, please state:
• Type designation;
• Quantity;
• Options (see respective ordering code).
Order information Model Withdrawable HW Fixed HW Version
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

Application P5V20 - - -
Universal current protection P5U20
Voltage protection relay P5V20
Feeder protection with directional P5F30
Motor Protection P5M30
Slot D - Additional I/O
Without (fixed selection for P5U20 and P5V20) A
6DI + 4DO B
3 Arc sensors + 3DI + 3DO C
5DI + 5DO D
12DI + 4DO E
Slot E - Additional I/O
Without (fixed selection for P5U20 and P5V20) A
6DI + 4DO B
3 Arc sensors + 3DI + 3DO C
5DI + 5DO D
12DI + 4DO E
Slot B - Power supply
24 - 250 V DC / 100 - 230 V AC + 4DI + 3DO + WD (P5X20) B
48 - 250 V DC / 100 - 230 V AC + 4DI + 3DO + WD (P5X30) C
24 - 48 V DC + 4DI + 3DO + WD (P5X30) D
Slot C - Additional I/O
without A
6DI + 4DO B
5DI + 5DO D
12DI + 4DO E
Slot A - CT/VT
3 phase CT + 2 residual CT (P5U20) B
3 phase CT + 1 residual CSH (P5U20) C
4 VT (P5V20) D
3 phase CT + 2 residual CT + 4 VT (P5X30) G
3 phase CT + 1 residual CSH + 4 VT (P5X30) H
3 LPCT + 1 residual CSH + 4 LPVT (P5X30 and P5U20) I
Slot L - 2nd Ethernet communicaiton port
Without (fixed selection for P5U20 and P5V20) A
Ethernet TP module with RSTP (2*RJ45) (*) B

Slot M - Ethernet comm

Without A
Ethernet TP module with RSTP (2*RJ45) B
Ethernet FO module with RSTP (2*LC) C
Ethernet FO module with HSR/PRP (2*LC) (when option D is selected on Slot N) D
Slot N - Serial communication port
Without A
RS485 serial line module E
RS485 FO serial line module F
Ethernet FO module with HSR/PRP (2*LC) (when option D is selected on Slot M) D
Slot P - Extension port
Without A
Extension module H

Model version
Latest A
Firmware version
Latest A
Cyber Security
Basic A
Advanced B
Languages
English A
English - Chinese B
English - French C
English - Italian E
English - Polish F
English - Portuguese G
English - Russian EAC H
English - Spanish I
English - Trad. Chinese L

NOTE: For the applicable slot occupation rules for your Easergy P5 protection
relay ordered, refer to Slot occupation rules, page 487 to get more details.

486 P5/EN M/33C

Order information Protection Relay

Slot occupation rules

The slot occupation rules for Easergy P5 protection relay based on your ordering
are stated as the table below:

30TE withdrawable HW possible combinations No. of boards No. of digital I/O

slot D slot E slot C 5I5O arc-flash 6I4O 12I4O DI DO

AA*A cover cover cover 0 0 0 0 4 3 + WD

AA*B cover cover 6I4O 0 0 1 0 10 7 + WD
BA*B 6I4O cover 6I4O 0 0 2 0 16 11 + WD
BB*B 6I4O 6I4O 6I4O 0 0 3 0 22 15 + WD
CA*A arc-flash cover cover 0 1 0 0 7 6 + WD
CA*B arc-flash cover 6I4O 0 1 1 0 13 10 + WD
CB*B arc-flash 6I4O 6I4O 0 1 2 0 19 14 + WD
CC*A arc-flash arc-flash cover 0 2 0 0 10 9 + WD
CC*B arc-flash arc-flash 6I4O 0 2 1 0 16 13 + WD
AA*D cover cover 5I5O 1 0 0 0 9 8 + WD
BA*D 6I4O cover 5I5O 1 0 1 0 15 12 + WD
BB*D 6I4O 6I4O 5I5O 1 0 2 0 21 16 + WD
CA*D arc-flash cover 5I5O 1 1 0 0 12 11 + WD
CB*D arc-flash 6I4O 5I5O 1 1 1 0 18 15 + WD
CC*D arc-flash arc-flash 5I5O 1 2 0 0 15 14 + WD
DA*D 5I/5O cover 5I5O 2 0 0 0 14 13 + WD
BD*D 6I4O 5I5O 5I5O 2 0 1 0 20 17 + WD
CD*D arc-flash 5I5O 5I5O 2 1 0 0 17 16 + WD
DD*D 5I5O 5I5O 5I5O 3 0 0 0 19 18 + WD
AA*E cover cover 12I4O 0 0 0 1 16 7 + WD
EA*B 12I4O cover 6I4O 0 0 1 1 22 11 + WD
BE*B 6I4O 12I4O 6I4O 0 0 2 1 28 15 + WD
CA*E arc-flash cover 12I4O 0 1 0 1 19 10 + WD
CE*B arc-flash 12I4O 6I4O 0 1 1 1 25 14 + WD
CC*E arc-flash arc-flash 12I4O 0 2 0 1 22 13 + WD
EA*D 12I4O cover 5I5O 1 0 0 1 21 12 + WD
BE*D 6I4O 12I4O 5I5O 1 0 1 1 27 16 + WD
CE*D arc-flash 12I4O 5I5O 1 1 0 1 24 15 + WD
DE*D 5I5O 12I4O 5I5O 2 0 0 1 26 17 + WD
EA*E 12I4O cover 12I4O 0 0 0 2 28 11 + WD
EE*B 12I4O 12I4O 6I4O 0 0 1 2 34 15 + WD
CE*E arc-flash 12I4O 12I4O 0 1 0 2 31 14 + WD
EE*D 12I4O 12I4O 5I5O 1 0 0 2 33 16 + WD
EE*E 12I4O 12I4O 12I4O 0 0 0 3 40 15 + WD

P5/EN M/33C 487

Protection Relay Order information

Accessories
Order accessories for your Easergy P5 protection relay according to the table
below:
Order code Descrip�on
Communica�on Modules
REL51038  Ethernet TP module - slot M
REL51039  Ethernet FO module - slot M
REL51042  Ethernet TP module - slot L
REL51033  Ethernet HSR/PRP FO module - slots M-N
REL51036  RS485 serial line module - slot N
VW3A8306RC  RS485 line termina�on accessory
REL51040  Fiber op�c serial line module - slot N
REL51034  Extension module - slot P
External modules
59641  8 temperature sensor module (MET148-2)
REL51045  IRIG-B module
59660  0.6m remote module connec�on cord
59661  2m remote module connec�on cord
59662  4m remote module connec�on cord
Sensors
59635  Core balance CT, Ø=120mm (CSH120)
59636  Core balance CT, Ø=200mm (CSH200)
59637  Core balance CT, Ø=300mm (CSH300)
EMS59572  VT adapter
EMS59573  LPVT sensor hub
REL52801  Arc accessory VA1DA-20 Arc sensor 20m
REL52802  Arc accessory VA1DA-20S-HF Arc sensor 20m shielded halogen free
REL52803  Arc accessory VA1DA-20S Arc sensor 20m shielded
REL52804  Arc accessory VA1DA-6 Arc sensor 6m connect cable
REL52805  Arc accessory VA1DA-6S-HF Arc sensor 6m shielded halogen free
REL52806  Arc accessory VA1DA-6S Arc sensor 6m shielded
REL52807  Arc accessory VA1EH-20 Arc sensor 20m pipe sensor
REL52808  Arc accessory VA1EH-20S Arc sensor 20m pipe sensor shielded
REL52809  Arc accessory VA1EH-6 Arc sensor 6m pipe sensor
REL52810  Arc accessory VA1EH-6S Arc sensor 6m pipe sensor shielded
Moun�ng accessories
REL51032  20TE flush moun�ng accessory
REL51052  30TE flush moun�ng accessory
REL51021  19inch rack moun�ng accessory
REL51018  30TE blanking plate for rack moun�ng
REL51019  20TE blanking plate for rack moun�ng
REL51020  10TE blanking plate for rack moun�ng
Wiring accessories
REL51054  2-pin comb-busbar for I/O - 100 pcs
REL51055  3-pin comb-busbar for I/O - 100 pcs
REL51056  4-pin comb-busbar for I/O - 50 pcs
REL51057  5-pin comb-busbar for I/O - 50 pcs
REL51058  6-pin comb-busbar for I/O - 50 pcs
REL51059  90° ring wiring terminal red -250 pcs
REL51060  90° ring wiring terminal blue -250 pcs
REL51061  90° ring wiring terminal yellow -250 pcs
Easergy Pro connec�on cable
59700  PC cord USB

488 P5/EN M/33C

Schneider Electric
35 rue Joseph Monier
92500 Rueil Malmaison
France
+ 33 (0) 1 41 29 70 00
www.se.com

As standards, specifications, and design change from time to time,

please ask for confirmation of the information given in this publication.

© 2021 – Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

P5/EN M/33C